PDS2000 User Manual PDF

User Manual
PDS2000
Version 4.2.4
March 2013
RESON B.V.
Stuttgartstraat 42- 44
3047 AS Rotterdam
The Netherlands
Tel.: +31 (0)10 245 15 00

www.reson.nl
Amendment Record Sheet
Rev. Date Reason for Modifications
4.2.4 14/03/2013 The manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.7.0.64
4.2.2 03/12/2012 Pipe Detection added to PDS2000 Documentation
4.2.0 30/08/2012 The manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.7.0.45; sonar targets are
updated to version 3.7.0.46.
4.0.2 28/10/2011 Tresco Charts added and some small modifications are added.
3.7.6 18/09/2010 Small modifications are added.
3.7.4 15/06/2010 New RESON logo and small updates are added.
3.7.2 04/02/2010 The complete manual is updated to PDS2000 version 3.5.0.1
3.7.1 12/01/2010 Small updates
3.4.1 21/12/2007 The manual is updated for PDS2000 version 3.2.0.4. Parts of the manual
are already updated for the new version 3.3.0.0.
Contents
1 Introduction 1
1.1 PDS2000 ................................................................................................................ 1
2 PDS2000 Documentation 3
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3
2.2.1 Anchor Handling ........................................................................................... 3
2.2.2 Bar Sweep..................................................................................................... 3
2.2.3 Boeilog .......................................................................................................... 4
2.2.3.1 Appendix Boeilog................................................................................. 4
2.2.4 Boraciet ......................................................................................................... 4
2.2.4.1 Addendum Boraciet ............................................................................. 4
2.2.5 Bottom Classification .................................................................................... 4
2.2.6 Bucket Dredging ........................................................................................... 5
2.2.7 Cable Lay ...................................................................................................... 5
2.2.8 Cutter Dredge ............................................................................................... 5
2.2.9 ES3 ............................................................................................................... 5
2.2.10 Excavator .................................................................................................... 5
2.2.11 Frequently Asked Questions ....................................................................... 6
2.2.12 HydroBat ..................................................................................................... 6
2.2.13 Interface Setup ............................................................................................ 6
2.2.14 Multibeam.................................................................................................... 6
2.2.15 Multibeam Calibration ................................................................................. 6
2.2.16 PDS2000 LiteView ...................................................................................... 7
2.2.17 PDS2000 User Manual ............................................................................... 7
2.2.18 Pipe Detection ............................................................................................. 7
2.2.19 Pipe Position Monitor .................................................................................. 7
2.2.20 Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay ........................................................................ 8
2.2.21 Rope Excavator .......................................................................................... 8
2.2.22 Slope Protection .......................................................................................... 8
2.2.23 Sonar Swath ............................................................................................... 8
2.2.24 Tide Application .......................................................................................... 9
2.2.25 Trailing Suction Hopper .............................................................................. 9
2.2.26 Trencher ...................................................................................................... 9
2.2.27 USBL ........................................................................................................... 9
3 Installation 11
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 11
3.1.1 Requirements .............................................................................................. 11
3.1.2 Memory Improvement ................................................................................. 12
3.2 Install PDS2000 .................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Start PDS2000 Installation .......................................................................... 12
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  i

3.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS2000 ...................................................................... 15
3.2.3 File Structure .............................................................................................. 15
3.3 Adapting Hardware .............................................................................................. 17
3.3.1 Network Card .............................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Serial Extender Cards ................................................................................ 17
3.3.2.1 USB to serial converters ................................................................... 17
3.3.2.2 Other cards ....................................................................................... 18
3.3.3 Monitors ...................................................................................................... 19
3.4 PDS2000 Dongle ................................................................................................. 19
3.4.1 Update of PDS2000 Dongle ....................................................................... 20
3.5 Installing a Remote Presentation ......................................................................... 22
3.5.1 Running a Remote Presentation ................................................................ 24
3.6 Installing and Using C-Map .................................................................................. 24
3.6.1 Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map ................................................... 24
3.6.2 Applying for a C-Map License .................................................................... 29
3.6.3 Updating C-Map Database ......................................................................... 34
3.6.4 Using the C-Map Layer in PDS2000 .......................................................... 36
3.7 Installing and Using Tresco .................................................................................. 38
3.7.1 Install Tresco Charts and Dongle Driver .................................................... 38
3.7.2 Run SetupTrescoKernel.exe ...................................................................... 41
3.7.3 Using the Tresco Layer in PDS2000 .......................................................... 44
4 Using PDS2000 47
4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 47
4.2 Docking ................................................................................................................ 48
4.2.1 Dock Areas ................................................................................................. 49
4.3 Context Menus ..................................................................................................... 49
4.4 Navigation in a 3D View ....................................................................................... 50
4.4.1 Rotate the Data .......................................................................................... 50
4.4.2 Shift the Data .............................................................................................. 51
4.4.3 Zoom in/out in the Data .............................................................................. 51
4.4.4 Scale the Data ............................................................................................ 51
4.4.5 Center the Data .......................................................................................... 51
5 Starting PDS2000 53
5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 53
5.1.1 Project......................................................................................................... 53
5.1.2 Application Type ......................................................................................... 53
5.1.3 Configuration .............................................................................................. 53
5.2 Project Structure .................................................................................................. 54
5.3 Projects Common Files ........................................................................................ 54
5.4 New Project Wizard .............................................................................................. 55
5.4.1 Project Configuration .................................................................................. 57
5.4.1.1 Description ........................................................................................ 57
5.4.1.2 Units .................................................................................................. 58
5.4.1.3 Coordinate System ........................................................................... 58
5.4.1.4 Formats ............................................................................................. 59
5.4.1.5 Log Files ............................................................................................ 59
5.4.1.6 File History ........................................................................................ 61
5.4.1.7 Disk Space ........................................................................................ 61
ii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

5.4.1.8 Alert Sounds ...................................................................................... 62
5.4.1.9 Options .............................................................................................. 62
5.4.1.10 GPS Time Parameters .................................................................... 63
5.4.1.11 Sonar Target Parameters ................................................................ 63
5.4.1.12 Icon Images ..................................................................................... 64
5.4.2 Selecting the Application Type ................................................................... 64
5.4.3 Run the Configuration Wizard ..................................................................... 65
5.4.4 Vessel Selection ......................................................................................... 66
5.4.5 Layout ......................................................................................................... 67
5.4.6 Events ......................................................................................................... 68
5.4.7 Alarms ......................................................................................................... 69
5.4.8 Closing the Wizard ...................................................................................... 70
5.5 Create Project from Log Data ............................................................................... 70
6 Coordinate System 71
6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 71
6.2 Project Coordinate System ................................................................................... 72
6.3 Coordinate System Wizard ................................................................................... 73
6.3.1 New Coordinate System ............................................................................. 73
6.3.2 Select Coordinate System .......................................................................... 74
6.3.3 Ellipsoids ..................................................................................................... 75
6.3.4 Datum Transformation ................................................................................ 76
6.3.5 Select Datum Transformation ..................................................................... 77
6.3.6 Datum Transformation Parameters ............................................................ 78
6.3.7 Geoid Model ................................................................................................ 79
6.3.8 Unit .............................................................................................................. 81
6.3.9 Projection .................................................................................................... 82
6.3.10 Select Projection ....................................................................................... 83
6.3.11 Projection Parameters .............................................................................. 84
6.3.12 Post Correction ......................................................................................... 85
6.3.13 Save Coordinate System .......................................................................... 86
6.3.14 Coordinate System Overview ................................................................... 87
6.4 Edit Coordinate System ........................................................................................ 87
7 Vessel Configuration 91
7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 91
7.2 Setup a Vessel Configuration ............................................................................... 91
7.2.1 New Vessel Configuration........................................................................... 92
7.3 Geometry .............................................................................................................. 93
7.3.1 Vessel Contour ........................................................................................... 95
7.3.1.1 Import Vessel Contours ..................................................................... 96
7.4 Equipment............................................................................................................. 96
7.4.1 Sub System ................................................................................................. 98
7.4.2 Navisound Graphical Trace ........................................................................ 99
7.4.3 Outputs...................................................................................................... 100
7.5 Computations ..................................................................................................... 101
7.5.1 Advanced Computations ........................................................................... 101
7.6 Data Sources ...................................................................................................... 103
7.7 Guidance ............................................................................................................ 104
7.8 Tools ................................................................................................................... 105
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  iii

7.8.1 Anchor Definition ...................................................................................... 106
7.8.2 Crane Configuration ................................................................................. 107
7.8.3 Cutter ........................................................................................................ 109
7.8.4 Dredge Logging Settings .......................................................................... 110
7.8.5 Interval Logging ........................................................................................ 111
7.8.6 Magnometer Dialog .................................................................................. 113
7.8.7 Pipe Configuration .................................................................................... 114
7.8.8 Production Parameters ............................................................................. 115
7.8.9 Trip Registration ....................................................................................... 116
7.9 Logging .............................................................................................................. 117
7.9.1 File Formats .............................................................................................. 117
7.9.1.1 PDS2000 Format ............................................................................ 118
7.9.1.2 PDS2000 Grid Model ...................................................................... 119
7.9.1.3 Winfrog Format ............................................................................... 119
7.9.1.4 Simrad EM3000 Format .................................................................. 119
7.9.1.5 Cleaned XYZ Data .......................................................................... 119
7.9.1.6 Production Format .......................................................................... 120
7.9.1.7 Dredge Track Format ...................................................................... 120
7.9.1.8 DXF Format..................................................................................... 120
7.9.1.9 XTF Format ..................................................................................... 120
7.9.1.10 Backscatter Grid Model ................................................................. 121
7.9.1.11 S7K Format ................................................................................... 122
7.9.1.12 SDS Format .................................................................................. 123
7.9.1.13 Interval Logging Format ................................................................ 123
7.9.1.14 FAU Format................................................................................... 123
7.9.1.15 GSF Format .................................................................................. 124
7.9.2 Log Space Management .......................................................................... 125
7.9.3 Condition Check ....................................................................................... 126
7.9.4 Create New Log File ................................................................................. 126
7.10 Simulation ........................................................................................................ 127
7.11 Aliases .............................................................................................................. 128
7.12 Alarms .............................................................................................................. 129
7.12.1 Vessel Alarms ......................................................................................... 129
7.12.2 Device Alarms ........................................................................................ 130
8 Guidance 131
8.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 131
8.2 Route .................................................................................................................. 132
8.2.1 Route Editor .............................................................................................. 133
8.2.2 ASCII Import Wizard ................................................................................. 136
8.3 Runlines ............................................................................................................. 138
8.3.1 Runlines Editor ......................................................................................... 139
8.4 Waypoints .......................................................................................................... 141
8.4.1 Waypoints Editor ...................................................................................... 142
8.5 Design Model ..................................................................................................... 143
8.5.1 3D Design Model Editor............................................................................ 144
8.6 Cutter Dredge ..................................................................................................... 146
8.7 Work Areas ........................................................................................................ 147
8.8 Restricted Areas ................................................................................................. 148
8.8.1 Restricted Areas Editor............................................................................. 148
iv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

8.9 Vessel Placement ............................................................................................... 149
8.9.1 Placement Points Editor............................................................................ 150
8.10 Dredge Instruction ............................................................................................ 151
8.10.1 Dredge Instruction Editor ........................................................................ 151
8.11 Object Distance ................................................................................................ 152
9 Events 155
9.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 155
9.2 Events Mode ....................................................................................................... 155
9.2.1 Mode ......................................................................................................... 156
9.2.2 Conditions ................................................................................................. 156
9.2.3 Push Button .............................................................................................. 156
9.2.4 Event Definition ......................................................................................... 156
9.2.4.1 Separator Delimited ......................................................................... 158
9.2.4.2 Fixed Field ....................................................................................... 158
9.2.4.3 Field Selection ................................................................................. 159
9.3 Events Data Source ............................................................................................ 160
9.4 Events Numbering .............................................................................................. 161
10 Control Center 163

10.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 163
10.2 Help Menu ........................................................................................................ 164
10.3 Display Mode .................................................................................................... 165
10.4 Clock Synchronization ...................................................................................... 165
10.4.1 Clock Synchronization Settings .............................................................. 166
10.4.2 Activate Clock Synchronization .............................................................. 167
10.4.3 PDS2000 SetTime Service ..................................................................... 167
10.5 Interfacing ......................................................................................................... 168
10.5.1 Interfacing Page ...................................................................................... 168
10.5.1.1 XSE ............................................................................................... 169
10.5.1.2 Socket ............................................................................................ 169
10.5.1.3 Serial ............................................................................................. 170
10.5.1.4 RTA ............................................................................................... 171
10.5.1.5 RGL ............................................................................................... 171
10.5.1.6 R7KI ............................................................................................... 171
10.5.1.7 R7K ................................................................................................ 172
10.5.1.8 OPC ............................................................................................... 172
10.5.1.9 NCC ............................................................................................... 173
10.5.1.10 Edgetech ..................................................................................... 173
10.6 Import................................................................................................................ 173
10.6.1 Single Beam XYZ Import ........................................................................ 175
10.6.1.1 ASCII File Options ......................................................................... 176
10.6.1.2 Runline Options ............................................................................. 176
10.6.1.3 File Selection ................................................................................. 177
10.6.1.4 ASCII Parsing Wizards .................................................................. 179
10.6.1.5 Parsing XYZ Data .......................................................................... 180
10.6.1.6 Parsing Date And Time ................................................................. 182
10.6.1.7 Parsing Runline Data .................................................................... 183
10.6.2 XTF Import .............................................................................................. 183
10.6.3 S7K Import .............................................................................................. 184
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  v

10.6.3.1 Offsets ........................................................................................... 184
10.6.4 SZ Import ................................................................................................ 186
10.6.5 Simrad EM3000 Import........................................................................... 187
10.6.6 Save Import Configuration ...................................................................... 187
10.6.7 PDS2000 Log Data File .......................................................................... 188
10.7 Batch Plot ......................................................................................................... 188
10.7.1 Batch Plot Dialog .................................................................................... 188
10.8 Quick Profile Plot .............................................................................................. 190
10.8.1 Quick Profile Plot Setup.......................................................................... 191
10.8.1.1 Filesets .......................................................................................... 191
10.8.1.2 DTM .............................................................................................. 192
10.8.1.3 Design ........................................................................................... 192
10.8.1.4 Text ............................................................................................... 193
10.8.2 Quick Profile Plot Options....................................................................... 193
10.9 Geo Calculator ................................................................................................. 194
10.9.1 Manual Coordinate Conversion .............................................................. 194
10.9.1.1 Convergence ................................................................................. 196
10.9.1.2 Point Scale Factor ......................................................................... 196
10.9.2 Advance Manual Conversion ................................................................. 197
10.9.3 Compute 3 Shift Parameters .................................................................. 198
10.9.4 File Coordinate Conversion .................................................................... 199
10.10 User Accounts ................................................................................................ 200
10.10.1 Manage User Levels............................................................................. 201
10.10.2 New User Account ................................................................................ 203
10.10.3 Changing User Account........................................................................ 203
10.11 Language ....................................................................................................... 203
10.12 Power Management ....................................................................................... 204
10.12.1 Power Management Check .................................................................. 205
10.13 General Settings ............................................................................................ 206
11 Explorer 209
11.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 209
11.2 Context Menus ................................................................................................. 210
11.2.1 General Context Menu ........................................................................... 211
11.2.1.1 Backup Files Outside Project ........................................................ 211
11.2.2 File Group Context Menu ....................................................................... 213
11.2.3 File Context Menu .................................................................................. 213
11.3 Projects Common Database ............................................................................ 214
11.4 PDS2000 Database ......................................................................................... 215
11.4.1 Convert S-57 to C-Map........................................................................... 217
11.4.1.1 Updates ......................................................................................... 219
11.5 Project Database .............................................................................................. 219
11.5.1 Clipping Polygons ................................................................................... 224
11.5.1.1 Clipping Polygon Editor ................................................................. 225
11.5.2 Color Tables ........................................................................................... 226
11.5.2.1 Color Table Generator .................................................................. 226
11.5.2.2 Color Table for Bottom Classification ........................................... 230
11.5.2.3 Dredge Differential Color Table .................................................... 231
11.5.3 Contour Definitions ................................................................................. 231
11.5.3.1 Contour Definition Generator ........................................................ 232
vi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

11.5.4 Design Profile Templates ........................................................................ 233
11.5.4.1 Design Profile Template Editor ...................................................... 233
11.5.5 Excluded Areas ....................................................................................... 234
11.5.5.1 Excluded Areas Editor ................................................................... 234
11.5.6 Profile Design Models ............................................................................. 234
11.5.6.1 Profile Design Model Editor with Runlines .................................... 235
11.5.6.2 Profile Design Model Editor with a Route ...................................... 236
11.5.7 Sound Velocity Profiles ........................................................................... 237
11.5.7.1 Sound Velocity Profile Editor ......................................................... 238
11.5.7.2 Import an ASCII Sound Velocity File ............................................. 238
11.5.7.3 Editing SVP File............................................................................. 239
11.5.8 Tide Stations ........................................................................................... 239
11.5.8.1 Tide Station Editor ......................................................................... 240
11.5.8.2 Tide Station Editor Toolbar and Context Menu ............................. 241
11.6 Log Data Database ........................................................................................... 244
11.7 Multimedia Database ........................................................................................ 246
11.7.1 GeoTIFF Images ..................................................................................... 246
11.7.1.1 Raster Editor .................................................................................. 247
11.8 Report Database .............................................................................................. 248
11.9 Sonar Targets Database .................................................................................. 248
11.10 Icon Images Database.................................................................................... 248
12 Acquisition 251
12.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 251
12.2 Start Acquisition ................................................................................................ 251
12.2.1 Simulation ............................................................................................... 251
12.2.2 Realtime .................................................................................................. 251
12.3 Data Visualization ............................................................................................. 252
12.3.1 Layout ..................................................................................................... 252
12.4 Acquisition Menu Bar and Toolbar ................................................................... 254
12.4.1 Selecting Guidance ................................................................................. 259
12.4.1.1 Making Runlines or Routes Real Time .......................................... 260
12.5 Logging ............................................................................................................. 260
12.5.1 Check the Logging .................................................................................. 261
12.6 Shortcuts........................................................................................................... 262
12.6.1 F-Keys ..................................................................................................... 263
12.6.2 Attribute Actions ...................................................................................... 265
12.6.2.1 Attach to Button ............................................................................. 266
12.6.3 Manual Input Actions .............................................................................. 267
12.6.4 View Attribute Actions ............................................................................. 267
12.6.5 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................... 270
12.7 Presentations .................................................................................................... 270
13 Views 271
13.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 271
13.2 3D View ............................................................................................................ 272
13.2.1 3D View – Online .................................................................................... 273
13.2.2 3D View – Online Dredge ....................................................................... 274
13.2.3 3D View – Toolbar and Context Menu .................................................... 275
13.2.4 3D View – Layers .................................................................................... 277
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  vii

13.2.5 3D View – Properties .............................................................................. 278
13.3 Alerts View ....................................................................................................... 278
13.3.1 Error Messages ...................................................................................... 279
13.4 Compass View ................................................................................................. 280
13.4.1 Compass – Properties ............................................................................ 280
13.5 Device Configuration Views ............................................................................. 280
13.5.1 Device Configuration – RESON-7K View ............................................... 281
13.5.1.1 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Settings ........................................... 281
13.5.1.2 RESON SeaBat 7K – Ocean Menu .............................................. 282
13.5.1.3 RESON SeaBat 7K – Data Recording .......................................... 283
13.5.2 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat View .................................... 284
13.5.2.1 RESON HydroBat – Multibeam Settings ...................................... 284
13.5.2.2 RESON HydroBat – Ocean Menu................................................. 285
13.6 Dredge Views ................................................................................................... 286
13.6.1 Dredge – Bars Horizontal View .............................................................. 286
13.6.2 Dredge – Bars Vertical View .................................................................. 287
13.6.3 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View.............................................. 287
13.6.3.1 Flow/Concentration Meter – Properties ........................................ 288
13.6.4 Dredge – Load and Draught View .......................................................... 289
13.6.5 Dredge – SCADA View........................................................................... 290
13.6.5.1 SCADA – Properties ..................................................................... 290
13.7 Dredge Status View ......................................................................................... 290
13.8 Echosounder Graphical Trace View ................................................................ 291
13.8.1 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Toolbar ............................................... 292
13.8.2 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Settings............................................... 293
13.8.2.1 General Page ................................................................................ 294
13.8.2.2 Advanced Page ............................................................................. 294
13.8.2.3 Color Page .................................................................................... 295
13.8.2.4 Channels Page.............................................................................. 296
13.8.2.5 Paper Page ................................................................................... 297
13.8.2.6 Various Page................................................................................. 298
13.8.2.7 Communication Page .................................................................... 298
13.9 Helmsman View ............................................................................................... 299
13.9.1 Helmsman – Toolbar and Context Menu................................................ 299
13.9.2 Helmsman – Properties .......................................................................... 300
13.10 Icon Image View............................................................................................. 301
13.11 Interval Logging View ..................................................................................... 302
13.12 Laser Scan Control View ............................................................................... 302
13.12.1 Laser Scan – MDL View ....................................................................... 303
13.12.2 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View ........................................................ 303
13.13 Manual Input View.......................................................................................... 304
13.14 Messages Views ............................................................................................ 305
13.14.1 Messages – HydroBat or Messages – SeaBat 7K View ...................... 305
13.14.1.1 Main Page ................................................................................... 305
13.14.1.2 Event Page.................................................................................. 306
13.14.1.3 BITE Page ................................................................................... 306
13.14.2 Messages – I/O Port View .................................................................... 306
13.14.3 Messages – System Messages View ................................................... 307
13.15 Multibeam QC Views...................................................................................... 307
13.15.1 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View ....................................................... 307
viii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

13.15.2 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile View .................. 312
13.15.3 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View ........................................................ 312
13.15.4 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors View ............ 315
13.15.5 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors View ................................... 316
13.15.5.1 Vertical Total Propagation Error .................................................. 316
13.15.5.2 Horizontal Total Propagation Error .............................................. 317
13.15.5.3 List of Standard Deviations of the TPE’s ..................................... 318
13.15.6 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View ............................................... 320
13.15.7 Multibeam QC – Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................ 321
13.15.8 Multibeam QC – Properties................................................................... 323
13.15.9 Multibeam Filters View .......................................................................... 324
13.15.9.1 Depth and Range Filter ............................................................... 327
13.15.9.2 Intersection and Slope Filter ........................................................ 327
13.15.9.3 Flying Object Filter....................................................................... 328
13.15.9.4 Nadir Filter ................................................................................... 328
13.15.9.5 Statistic Filter ............................................................................... 330
13.15.9.6 IHO Error Filter ............................................................................ 330
13.15.9.7 Smart Filter .................................................................................. 331
13.16 Multibeam Video View .................................................................................... 334
13.16.1 Multibeam Video – Toolbar and Context Menu .................................... 335
13.17 Numerics View ................................................................................................ 335
13.17.1 Numerics – Standard View ................................................................... 335
13.17.1.1 Numerics Alarm ........................................................................... 336
13.17.2 Numerics – Sonar Targets View ........................................................... 337
13.18 Obstacle Avoidance ........................................................................................ 338
13.18.1 Obstacle Avoidance – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 338
13.19 Output Control View ....................................................................................... 340
13.20 Pipe Lay Views ............................................................................................... 340
13.20.1 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View .................................................................. 341
13.20.2 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View .............................................................. 342
13.20.3 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View ............................................................... 343
13.21 Plan Views ...................................................................................................... 343
13.21.1 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars ................................................... 344
13.21.2 Plan View – Dredge Instruction ............................................................ 345
13.21.3 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning ......................................................... 346
13.21.4 Plan View – General Dredge Operation ............................................... 347
13.21.5 Plan View – Navigation ......................................................................... 348
13.21.6 Plan View – Production ......................................................................... 349
13.21.7 Plan View – Survey Coverage .............................................................. 350
13.21.8 Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................................... 350
13.21.8.1 Sonar Target Options in Plan Views ........................................... 355
13.21.8.2 User Maps ................................................................................... 355
13.21.9 Plan View – Layer Control .................................................................... 358
13.21.10 Plan View – Properties........................................................................ 359
13.21.11 Coverage Settings .............................................................................. 361
13.22 Positioning System XY – Manual Input View ................................................. 362
13.23 Profile Views ................................................................................................... 363
13.23.1 Profile – Grid Model View ..................................................................... 364
13.23.2 Profile – Multibeam View ...................................................................... 364
13.23.3 Profile – Projected Runline View .......................................................... 365
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  ix

13.23.4 Profile – Realtime Design View ............................................................ 366
13.23.5 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View................................................. 367
13.23.6 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View .......................................... 367
13.23.7 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View ................................................. 368
13.23.8 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View .................................................... 369
13.23.9 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical View ....................................... 369
13.23.10 Profile – Sound Velocity View ............................................................ 370
13.23.11 Profile – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................................... 370
13.23.12 Profile – Properties ............................................................................. 372
13.24 Raw Data View ............................................................................................... 373
13.24.1 Drag & Drop .......................................................................................... 374
13.25 Scatterplot View ............................................................................................. 374
13.26 Sonar Targets View........................................................................................ 376
13.26.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 377
13.27 Sonar Views ................................................................................................... 378
13.27.1 Sonar – Sidescan View ........................................................................ 378
13.27.2 Sonar – Snippets View ......................................................................... 379
13.27.3 Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu ..................................................... 379
13.27.3.1 TVG ............................................................................................. 380
13.27.3.2 Auto Scaling ................................................................................ 380
13.27.3.3 Speed Correction ........................................................................ 380
13.27.3.4 Slant Range Correction ............................................................... 381
13.27.3.5 Lambert’s Law Correction ........................................................... 381
13.27.3.6 Sonar Target Options in Sonar Views ........................................ 381
13.27.4 Sonar – Bathy View .............................................................................. 381
13.27.4.1 Sonar Bathy – Toolbar and Context Menu ................................. 382
13.28 Status Views .................................................................................................. 383
13.28.1 Status – Alarms View ........................................................................... 384
13.28.2 Status – Computations View ................................................................ 384
13.28.3 Status – Equipment View ..................................................................... 385
13.28.4 Status – Logging View .......................................................................... 385
13.28.5 Status – Remote Connections View ..................................................... 386
13.29 Tide Manual Input View ................................................................................. 386
13.30 Time Series View ........................................................................................... 387
13.30.1 Time Series – Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................... 387
14 Replay 389
14.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 389
14.1.1 Controlling the Replayer ......................................................................... 389
14.1.2 External Replay Settings ........................................................................ 390
14.1.3 Saving Layout and Vessel Configuration ............................................... 391
14.1.4 Recomputation and Saving Results ....................................................... 391
15 Processing 393
15.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 393
15.2 Validating and Presenting Survey Results ....................................................... 393
16 Editing 395
16.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 395
16.1.1 Available Editors ..................................................................................... 395
x  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

16.2 Open Editing ..................................................................................................... 396
16.2.1 Selecting a File Set ................................................................................. 397
16.2.2 Select the Editors .................................................................................... 398
16.2.2.1 Active Editor .................................................................................. 399
16.2.3 Selecting Points ...................................................................................... 399
16.2.4 Editing Toolbar ........................................................................................ 399
16.2.4.1 Jumping ......................................................................................... 399
16.2.4.2 Play Options .................................................................................. 400
16.2.4.3 Undo – Redo ................................................................................. 400
16.2.4.4 Edit Mode ...................................................................................... 400
16.2.4.5 Auto Recache ................................................................................ 400
16.2.4.6 Find Exceptional Data ................................................................... 401
16.2.5 Tools Options .......................................................................................... 401
16.2.5.1 Modify Vessel Configuration .......................................................... 402
16.2.5.2 Select Vessel Configuration .......................................................... 402
16.2.5.3 Compare Vessel Configurations .................................................... 403
16.2.5.4 Transponder Position Update ........................................................ 404
16.2.5.5 Print File Status ............................................................................. 404
16.2.5.6 Apply Tide Data ............................................................................. 404
16.2.5.7 Data Source Switch ....................................................................... 405
16.2.5.8 Cable Route Generation ................................................................ 407
16.2.5.9 Multibeam Statistics Report ........................................................... 409
16.2.5.10 Import POSPac............................................................................ 409
16.2.5.11 Import TerraPos........................................................................... 410
16.2.5.12 Quick Calibration ......................................................................... 410
16.2.5.13 Generate TPE Results File .......................................................... 411
16.2.5.14 Validate All Caches ..................................................................... 413
16.2.5.15 Force Recache Selected Item ..................................................... 413
16.2.5.16 Revert To Original ....................................................................... 414
16.2.5.17 Repair File ................................................................................... 414
16.2.5.18 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps ............................................. 415
16.2.5.19 Force Recache GPS Positions .................................................... 415
16.3 Editing Data ...................................................................................................... 416
16.3.1 Editing Multibeam Data in a 3D View ..................................................... 416
16.3.2 Editing Data Points ................................................................................. 416
16.4 3D Box View ..................................................................................................... 417
16.4.1 3D Box Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................ 418
16.5 3D View ............................................................................................................ 421
16.5.1 3D View – Standard Toolbar and Context Menu .................................... 422
16.5.1.1 Beam Color Mode.......................................................................... 425
16.5.2 3D View – Standard Properties .............................................................. 426
16.5.3 3D View – Standard Layers .................................................................... 427
16.6 Data Source Switching ..................................................................................... 428
16.6.1 Edit Data Source Switches ..................................................................... 429
16.6.1.1 Insert a Data Source Switch .......................................................... 429
16.6.1.2 Modify a Data Source Switch ........................................................ 430
16.6.2 Data Source Switching Toolbar and Context Menu ................................ 430
16.7 Dekdienst .......................................................................................................... 432
16.8 Line-Based Editing ........................................................................................... 433
16.8.1 Select Data for the Line-Based Editing ................................................... 433
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xi

16.8.2 Line-Based Editing – Standard View ...................................................... 434
16.8.3 Line-Based Editing – Multiline View ....................................................... 436
16.8.4 Line-Based Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ..................................... 436
16.9 Messages ......................................................................................................... 438
16.10 Multibeam Area Editing .................................................................................. 438
16.10.1 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View ............................................. 438
16.10.2 CUBE Model Mode ............................................................................... 439
16.10.2.1 CUBE .......................................................................................... 439
16.10.2.2 Create a CUBE Model ................................................................ 441
16.10.2.3 Information of the CUBE Model .................................................. 442
16.10.2.4 Editing the CUBE Model ............................................................. 443
16.10.2.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with a CUBE Model ........................... 444
16.10.2.6 Export the CUBE Model .............................................................. 445
16.10.2.7 Sync the CUBE Model ................................................................ 446
16.10.3 Grid Model Mode .................................................................................. 446
16.10.3.1 Create a Grid Model .................................................................... 447
16.10.3.2 Information of the Grid Model ..................................................... 449
16.10.3.3 Editing the Grid Model ................................................................ 451
16.10.3.4 Remove Spikes in the Grid Model .............................................. 452
16.10.3.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with Grid Model .................................. 454
16.10.3.6 Export the Grid Model ................................................................. 455
16.10.3.7 Sync the Grid Model ................................................................... 455
16.10.4 Multibeam Filter Mode .......................................................................... 456
16.10.5 Multibeam Calibration Mode ................................................................. 459
16.10.6 Pipe Detection Mode ............................................................................ 460
16.10.6.1 Create Pipe Route ...................................................................... 461
16.10.6.2 Pipe Edit Mode ............................................................................ 462
16.10.7 Sound Velocity Editor Mode ................................................................. 463
16.10.8 Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ............................ 465
16.11 Numerics View ............................................................................................... 476
16.11.1 Numerics – Sonar Targets View ........................................................... 476
16.12 Ping View ....................................................................................................... 476
16.12.1 Ping Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................... 479
16.13 Position Editing .............................................................................................. 481
16.13.1 Position Editing – Standard Toolbar and Context Menu ...................... 481
16.13.2 Selecting Position Data for Editing ....................................................... 484
16.13.3 Dead Reckoning ................................................................................... 484
16.14 Profile View .................................................................................................... 484
16.14.1 Profile Toolbar and Context Menu ........................................................ 485
16.15 Sonar .............................................................................................................. 488
16.15.1 Sonar View Toolbar and Context Menu ............................................... 489
16.16 Sonar Targets View........................................................................................ 491
16.16.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and Context Menu ............................... 492
16.17 Tide Station .................................................................................................... 493
16.17.1 Tide Station – Viewer ........................................................................... 493
16.18 Time-Based Editing ........................................................................................ 494
16.18.1 Select Data for the Time-Based Editing ............................................... 494
16.18.2 Time-Based Editing – Standard View................................................... 495
16.18.3 Time-Based Editing – Echogram View ................................................. 496
16.18.4 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph View ........................................... 497
xii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

16.18.5 Time-Based Editing Toolbar and Context Menu ................................... 497
17 Create Model 499

17.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 499
17.1.1 Create Model Toolbar and Context Menu............................................... 500
17.1.2 Model Preview Layer Properties ............................................................. 501
17.2 Importing Data .................................................................................................. 502
17.2.1 Selecting Data Files ................................................................................ 502
17.2.2 Data File Parameters .............................................................................. 503
17.2.2.1 Grid Model ..................................................................................... 504
17.2.2.2 PDS2000 Log Data........................................................................ 504
17.2.3 Preview ................................................................................................... 504
17.3 Create Grid or TIN Model ................................................................................. 504
17.3.1 Grid Model............................................................................................... 505
17.3.2 TIN Model................................................................................................ 505
18 Grid Model 507

18.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 507
18.2 Grid Model Editor .............................................................................................. 508
18.2.1 Grid Model View Toolbar and Context Menu .......................................... 509
18.3 Actions .............................................................................................................. 511
18.3.1 Create Page ............................................................................................ 511
18.3.2 Info Page ................................................................................................. 514
18.3.3 Edit Page................................................................................................. 516
18.3.4 Filter Page ............................................................................................... 517
18.3.5 Update Page ........................................................................................... 519
18.3.5.1 Update with Grid Model ................................................................. 519
18.3.5.2 Update with 3D Model ................................................................... 520
18.3.6 Export Page ............................................................................................ 520
18.3.6.1 Export to ASCII .............................................................................. 521
18.3.6.2 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid ............................................................ 521
18.3.6.3 Export to OpenGIS ........................................................................ 522
18.3.6.4 Export to GeoTIFF ......................................................................... 522
18.3.6.5 Generate Update Package ............................................................ 522
18.3.7 Import Page ............................................................................................ 523
18.3.8 Operations Page ..................................................................................... 525
18.3.8.1 Generate Color Table .................................................................... 525
18.3.8.2 Apply Z Corrections ....................................................................... 526
18.3.8.3 Set/Clear Value ............................................................................. 526
18.3.8.4 Make Empty................................................................................... 527
18.3.8.5 Create Resampled Model .............................................................. 528
18.3.8.6 Create Difference Model ............................................................... 528
18.3.8.7 Compute Volumes ......................................................................... 530
18.3.8.8 Extract Profiles .............................................................................. 533
18.3.9 Interpolate Page ...................................................................................... 534
18.3.9.1 Clean Interpolated ......................................................................... 535
18.3.9.2 Interpolate Circular ........................................................................ 535
18.3.9.3 Interpolate Triangular .................................................................... 536
18.3.9.4 Interpolate Directional ................................................................... 536
18.3.9.5 Interpolate Singlebeam ................................................................. 537
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xiii

19 TIN Model Viewer 539
19.1 General ............................................................................................................ 539
19.1.1 Drag & Drop ............................................................................................ 539
19.2 TIN Model Viewer Menu Bar ............................................................................ 540
19.2.1 File .......................................................................................................... 540
19.2.2 Edit.......................................................................................................... 541
19.2.3 Tools ....................................................................................................... 541
19.2.3.1 Decimate Model ............................................................................ 541
19.2.3.2 Filter Triangles .............................................................................. 543
19.2.3.3 Generate Contours ....................................................................... 544
19.3 TIN Model Viewer Toolbar ............................................................................... 544
19.4 TIN Model Viewer Context Menu ..................................................................... 544
20 Plot 547
20.1 Getting Started ................................................................................................. 547
20.1.1 Create a Plot Project .............................................................................. 547
20.1.2 Add Data Files ........................................................................................ 549
20.1.3 Place a Plan View ................................................................................... 549
20.1.4 Create a Plot ........................................................................................... 551
20.1.5 Place Panels ........................................................................................... 553
20.1.6 Add Layers ............................................................................................. 554
20.1.7 Print or Export a Plot .............................................................................. 554
20.2 How Plotting Works .......................................................................................... 555
20.2.1 Regeneration .......................................................................................... 555
20.2.2 Panel and Layer Order ........................................................................... 556
20.2.3 Overwrite Suppression ........................................................................... 556
20.2.4 Templates ............................................................................................... 557
20.2.5 Keywords ................................................................................................ 557
20.3 Available Panels ............................................................................................... 557
20.3.1 Plan Panel .............................................................................................. 558
20.3.2 North Arrow Panel .................................................................................. 559
20.3.3 Profile Panel ........................................................................................... 560
20.3.4 Profile Volume ........................................................................................ 561
20.3.5 Profile Series Panel ................................................................................ 564
20.3.6 Profile Cross Series Panel...................................................................... 565
20.3.7 Profile Info Panel .................................................................................... 566
20.3.8 Text Block Panel and Text Box .............................................................. 566
20.3.9 DXF Panel .............................................................................................. 567
20.3.10 Color Mapping Panel ............................................................................ 568
20.3.11 Image Panel ......................................................................................... 568
20.3.12 Key Map Panel ..................................................................................... 569
20.3.13 Scale Bar Panel .................................................................................... 569
20.4 Available Layers ............................................................................................... 570
20.4.1 Clipping Polygon Layer........................................................................... 571
20.4.2 CMap Layer ............................................................................................ 571
20.4.3 Dredge Track Layer ................................................................................ 572
20.4.4 DXF Layer .............................................................................................. 572
20.4.5 Events Layer ........................................................................................... 573
20.4.6 Event Markers Layer .............................................................................. 573
20.4.7 Geographic Grid Layer ........................................................................... 573
xiv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

20.4.8 GLW Grid Layer ...................................................................................... 574
20.4.9 Grid Model Layer .................................................................................... 575
20.4.10 Grid Model Contour Layer..................................................................... 576
20.4.11 Grid Model Difference Layer ................................................................. 577
20.4.12 Grid Model Profile Layer ....................................................................... 578
20.4.13 Grid Model Profile Statistics Layer ........................................................ 579
20.4.14 KP Grid Layer ....................................................................................... 580
20.4.15 Log Data Layer ..................................................................................... 580
20.4.16 Log Data Profile Layer .......................................................................... 581
20.4.17 PDS1000 Electronic Chart Layer .......................................................... 581
20.4.18 Pipe Profile Layer .................................................................................. 582
20.4.19 Plan Views Layer .................................................................................. 582
20.4.20 Raster Layer ......................................................................................... 583
20.4.21 Route Layer .......................................................................................... 583
20.4.22 Runlines Layer ...................................................................................... 583
20.4.23 Satellite Geographic Grid Layer ............................................................ 584
20.4.24 Sonar Targets ....................................................................................... 584
20.4.25 Streak Lines Layer ................................................................................ 585
20.4.26 Text Layer ............................................................................................. 586
20.4.27 Theoretical Model Layer ....................................................................... 586
20.4.28 TIN Model Layer ................................................................................... 587
20.4.29 TIN Model Contour Layer...................................................................... 587
20.4.30 User Map Layer .................................................................................... 588
20.4.31 Waypoints Layer ................................................................................... 589
20.4.32 Work Areas Layer ................................................................................. 590
20.4.33 XY Grid Layer ....................................................................................... 590
20.5 DXF Export Wizard ........................................................................................... 591
20.5.1 Output DXF File Page ............................................................................. 593
20.5.2 Select Data Page .................................................................................... 594
20.5.3 Plan Panel Page ..................................................................................... 595
20.5.4 Log Data Page ........................................................................................ 595
20.5.4.1 Log Data Settings Page ................................................................ 596
20.5.5 Grid Model Page ..................................................................................... 597
20.5.5.1 Grid Model Settings ....................................................................... 597
20.5.6 Contours Page ........................................................................................ 598
20.5.6.1 Contours Settings Page ................................................................ 598
20.5.7 Runlines Page ......................................................................................... 599
20.5.7.1 Runlines Settings Page ................................................................. 599
20.5.8 Waypoints Page ...................................................................................... 600
20.5.8.1 Waypoints Settings Page .............................................................. 600
20.5.9 Options and Preview Page ..................................................................... 601
21 End Area Volumes 603

21.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 603
21.1.1 Operation Method ................................................................................... 603
21.2 Volume Computation ........................................................................................ 604
21.2.1 Volume Computation Wizard .................................................................. 604
21.2.2 Setup ....................................................................................................... 607
21.2.2.1 Views in the End Area Volumes .................................................... 607
21.2.3 Volumes .................................................................................................. 608
PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xv

21.2.3.1 The Table of the Volumes ............................................................. 608
21.2.4 Vertical Areas ......................................................................................... 609
21.2.5 Report ..................................................................................................... 610
21.2.5.1 Comma Separated Report ............................................................ 610
21.2.5.2 Standard Report ............................................................................ 611
22 Export 613
22.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 613
22.1.1 Export Configuration File ........................................................................ 613
22.1.2 Export Type ............................................................................................ 614
22.2 Export Window ................................................................................................. 615
22.2.1 Excel and Comma Separated ................................................................ 615
22.2.2 Simrad EM Datagram ............................................................................. 617
22.2.3 Multibeam XYZ ....................................................................................... 618
22.2.4 XTF ......................................................................................................... 620
22.2.5 S7K ......................................................................................................... 622
22.2.6 SDS ........................................................................................................ 622
22.2.7 SZ ........................................................................................................... 623
22.2.8 Magnetometer DAT ................................................................................ 624
22.2.9 FAU......................................................................................................... 625
22.2.10 GSF ...................................................................................................... 625
22.3 Exporting .......................................................................................................... 625
xvi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

Figures
Figure 3-1 Welcome page of the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard ....................................................... 13
Figure 3-2 Type of setup in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard .......................................................... 13
Figure 3-3 Update C-Map SDK software ............................................................................................ 14
Figure 3-4 Repair or Remove PDS2000 in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard .................................. 15
Figure 3-5 File structure of PDS2000 ................................................................................................. 15
Figure 3-6 Device Manager window with the Moxa extender card ..................................................... 18
Figure 3-7 Port settings for a COM port .............................................................................................. 18
Figure 3-8 Welcome page of the Found New Hardware Wizard ........................................................ 19
Figure 3-9 Install page of the Found New Hardware Wizard .............................................................. 19
Figure 3-10 The About Control Center window where the PDS2000 dongle can be updated ............. 20
Figure 3-11 Dongle Update information window................................................................................... 21
Figure 3-12 The All Dongles.dk4 file ..................................................................................................... 21
Figure 3-13 The separate patch for the dongle update ........................................................................ 22
Figure 3-14 Remote Presentation window with PDS-Develop-5 as the main computer ...................... 23
Figure 3-15 Connections window with a connection to the remote PC (RESON) ................................ 23
Figure 3-16 Setup dialog ....................................................................................................................... 24
Figure 3-17 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the eToken dongle and the C-
Map software ..................................................................................................................... 25
Figure 3-18 eToken dongle selection ................................................................................................... 25
Figure 3-19 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the C-Map software .......................... 26
Figure 3-20 Welcome page of the C-Map Professional SDK Runtime Setup wizard ........................... 26
Figure 3-21 Installation folder for the C-Map software ......................................................................... 27
Figure 3-22 Confirm the installation of the C-Map software ................................................................. 27
Figure 3-23 Calibrate the screen diagonal ............................................................................................ 28
Figure 3-24 C-Map user setup dialog ................................................................................................... 28
Figure 3-25 Confirmation to remove licenses ....................................................................................... 28
Figure 3-26 Last page of the C-Map installation wizard ....................................................................... 29
Figure 3-27 eToken dongle driver and C-Map software is installed ..................................................... 29
Figure 3-28 C-Map Chart Manager with the Databases page .............................................................. 30
Figure 3-29 Database registration is successful ................................................................................... 30
Figure 3-30 C-Map Chart Manager with the registered database ........................................................ 31
Figure 3-31 C-Map Chart Manager with the Professional+ database set as default ............................ 31
Figure 3-32 System Info page of the C-Map Chart Manager ............................................................... 32
Figure 3-33 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager .................................................................... 33
Figure 3-34 Add License Manually window to add the license code(s) ................................................ 33
Figure 3-35 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager with a license for a zone. ........................... 34
Figure 3-36 C-Map Chart Manager ....................................................................................................... 34
Figure 3-37 Database is updated ......................................................................................................... 35
Figure 3-38 Professional+ database is updated ................................................................................... 35
Figure 3-39 License is updated for new database ................................................................................ 35
Figure 3-40 Layers window with a C-Map layer.................................................................................... 36
Figure 3-41 C-Map Layer Properties .................................................................................................... 36
Figure 3-42 Select language for the installation ................................................................................... 38
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xvii

Figure 3-43 Welcome page of the Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard ........................................................ 38
Figure 3-44 The installation folder for the Navigis software ................................................................. 39
Figure 3-45 Additional tasks ................................................................................................................. 39
Figure 3-46 Ready to install the software ............................................................................................. 40
Figure 3-47 The installation of the software ......................................................................................... 40
Figure 3-48 The Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard is finished ................................................................... 41
Figure 3-49 Welcome page of the Tresco Kernel Setup Wizard .......................................................... 41
Figure 3-50 Installation folder of the kernel .......................................................................................... 42
Figure 3-51 Folder exist........................................................................................................................ 42
Figure 3-52 Additional task ................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 3-53 Ready to install the kernel ................................................................................................. 43
Figure 3-54 Screen width ..................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 3-55 Layers window with a Tresco layer ................................................................................... 44
Figure 3-56 Tresco Layer Properties .................................................................................................... 45
Figure 4-1 Docking ............................................................................................................................. 48
Figure 4-2 Docking context menu ...................................................................................................... 48
Figure 4-3 Dock areas ........................................................................................................................ 49
Figure 4-4 Context menu in the Acquisition ....................................................................................... 49
Figure 4-5 Context menu of a Plan View............................................................................................ 50
Figure 5-1 Project structures .............................................................................................................. 54
Figure 5-2 Select Project window with the option Run the New Project wizard checked .................. 55
Figure 5-3 Start of the new project wizard.......................................................................................... 56
Figure 5-4 Project Configuration window ........................................................................................... 57
Figure 5-5 Project description ............................................................................................................ 57
Figure 5-6 Units dialog ....................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 5-7 Coordinate System information ......................................................................................... 58
Figure 5-8 Formats dialog .................................................................................................................. 59
Figure 5-9 Log Files settings .............................................................................................................. 59
Figure 5-10 Selected file types for a backup ........................................................................................ 61
Figure 5-11 Set when the oldest log data files have to be deleted ...................................................... 61
Figure 5-12 Select the alerts sounds for the alarms ............................................................................ 62
Figure 5-13 Select the options ............................................................................................................. 62
Figure 5-14 Leap seconds as a GPS time parameter .......................................................................... 63
Figure 5-15 Sonar Targets file selection and list with classifications ................................................... 63
Figure 5-16 Icon Images file selection .................................................................................................. 64
Figure 5-17 Select Application Type .................................................................................................... 64
Figure 5-18 Run Configuration Wizard page ........................................................................................ 65
Figure 5-19 Vessels page to add or select the vessels ........................................................................ 66
Figure 5-20 Select a vessel (configuration) or create a new vessel..................................................... 66
Figure 5-21 Select a Remote Vessel and download the vessel configuration ..................................... 67
Figure 5-22 Layouts page of the configuration ..................................................................................... 67
Figure 5-23 Layout dialog ..................................................................................................................... 68
Figure 5-24 Events page of the configuration ...................................................................................... 68
Figure 5-25 Alarms page in the configuration ...................................................................................... 69
Figure 5-26 Last page of the new project wizard ................................................................................. 70
Figure 6-1 Project Configuration with the option Coordinate System ................................................ 72
Figure 6-2 New Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard .................................... 73
Figure 6-3 Select Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard ................................. 74
Figure 6-4 Ellipsoids page of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................................................ 75
Figure 6-5 Select an ellipsoid from the list of available ellipsoids in PDS2000 .................................. 75
xviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 6-6 Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard ....................................... 76
Figure 6-7 Select Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................ 77
Figure 6-8 Datum Transformation Parameters of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................. 78
Figure 6-9 Geoid Model page of the Coordinate System Wizard ....................................................... 79
Figure 6-10 Unit page of the Coordinate System Wizard ..................................................................... 81
Figure 6-11 New Unit dialog to create a new unit type ......................................................................... 81
Figure 6-12 Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard ........................................................... 82
Figure 6-13 Select Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard ................................................ 83
Figure 6-14 Projection Parameters page of the Coordinate System Wizard ........................................ 84
Figure 6-15 Post Correction page of the Coordinate System Wizard................................................... 85
Figure 6-16 Save Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard ................................... 86
Figure 6-17 Coordinate System Overview page of the Coordinate System Wizard ............................. 87
Figure 6-18 Select Coordinate System window with only the user defined coordinate systems ......... 88
Figure 6-19 Edit Coordinate System window with an user defined coordinate system ........................ 88
Figure 7-1 First page of the new vessel wizard .................................................................................. 92
Figure 7-2 Geometry page of the vessel configuration ....................................................................... 93
Figure 7-3 Vessel coordinate system ................................................................................................. 94
Figure 7-4 Vessel Contour editor ........................................................................................................ 95
Figure 7-5 Equipment page of the vessel configuration ..................................................................... 96
Figure 7-6 Device Test ........................................................................................................................ 98
Figure 7-7 Navisound Control Center to set the port(s) and check the communication with the
echo sounder ..................................................................................................................... 99
Figure 7-8 Output Messages window ............................................................................................... 100
Figure 7-9 Computations page in the vessel configuration .............................................................. 101
Figure 7-10 Advanced Computations page ........................................................................................ 102
Figure 7-11 Data Sources page in the vessel configuration ............................................................... 103
Figure 7-12 Condition added .............................................................................................................. 104
Figure 7-13 Creating a condition......................................................................................................... 104
Figure 7-14 Tools page with the Anchor Definition page of the cutter dredge application ................. 106
Figure 7-15 Tools page with the Crane Configuration page of the excavator application .................. 107
Figure 7-16 Tools page with the Rope page of the rope excavator application ................................. 108
Figure 7-17 Tools page with the Cutter configuration page ................................................................ 109
Figure 7-18 Tools page with the Dredge Logging Settings page of the excavator application .......... 110
Figure 7-19 Tools page with the Interval Logging page of a cutter dredge application ...................... 111
Figure 7-20 The Tools page with the Magnetometer Dialog page of the maggy survey
application ....................................................................................................................... 113
Figure 7-21 Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction hopper
application ....................................................................................................................... 114
Figure 7-22 Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing suction hopper
application for two bunkers .............................................................................................. 115
Figure 7-23 Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction hopper application .... 116
Figure 7-24 Logging page in the vessel configuration ........................................................................ 117
Figure 7-25 Log File Index in the logging page for PDS2000 format ................................................. 118
Figure 7-26 Backup log in the logging page for PDS2000 format ...................................................... 118
Figure 7-27 PDS2000 Grid Model setup in the logging page ............................................................. 119
Figure 7-28 Cleaned XYZ logging reduction in the Logging page ...................................................... 119
Figure 7-29 Grid model input for the production ................................................................................. 120
Figure 7-30 Dredge track sampling rate ............................................................................................. 120
Figure 7-31 File name for the DXF file ................................................................................................ 120
Figure 7-32 Grid model input for backscatter grid model logging ....................................................... 121
Figure 7-33 7K logging reduction ........................................................................................................ 122
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xix

Figure 7-34 Backup log in the logging page for S7K format .............................................................. 122
Figure 7-35 FAU 1 or FAU 2 format for the FAU logging ................................................................... 123
Figure 7-36 Uncorrected or fully corrected multibeam data selection for the GSF logging ............... 124
Figure 7-37 Log space management ................................................................................................. 125
Figure 7-38 Logging conditions .......................................................................................................... 126
Figure 7-39 Create new log file .......................................................................................................... 126
Figure 7-40 Simulation page in the vessel configuration ................................................................... 127
Figure 7-41 Alias page in the vessel configuration with an alias for NMEA GGA .............................. 128
Figure 7-42 Alarms page in the vessel configuration ......................................................................... 129
Figure 7-43 Alarms window with an alarm ......................................................................................... 129
Figure 7-44 Conditions window with an alarm .................................................................................... 130
Figure 7-45 Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an attribute can be
selected ........................................................................................................................... 130
Figure 8-1 Route page in the guidance ............................................................................................ 132
Figure 8-2 Route editor..................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 8-3 Route Properties for the standard route (left) and for the pipe / cable route (right) ........ 134
Figure 8-4 Example of an exported route ......................................................................................... 135
Figure 8-5 First page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route ........................................................... 136
Figure 8-6 Second page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route ..................................................... 136
Figure 8-7 Last page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route ........................................................... 137
Figure 8-8 Runlines page in the guidance........................................................................................ 138
Figure 8-9 Runlines editor ................................................................................................................ 139
Figure 8-10 Waypoints page in the guidance ..................................................................................... 141
Figure 8-11 Waypoints editor ............................................................................................................. 142
Figure 8-12 Waypoint Properties in the waypoints editor ................................................................... 143
Figure 8-13 Design Model page in the guidance ............................................................................... 143
Figure 8-14 3D Design Model editor .................................................................................................. 144
Figure 8-15 A checked 3D model with errors ..................................................................................... 145
Figure 8-16 Cutter Dredge page in the guidance ............................................................................... 146
Figure 8-17 Work Areas page in the guidance ................................................................................... 147
Figure 8-18 Restricted Areas page in the guidance ........................................................................... 148
Figure 8-19 Restricted Areas editor ................................................................................................... 148
Figure 8-20 Vessel Placement page in the guidance ......................................................................... 149
Figure 8-21 Placement Points editor .................................................................................................. 150
Figure 8-22 Dredge Instruction page in the guidance ........................................................................ 151
Figure 8-23 Dredge Instruction Editor ................................................................................................ 151
Figure 8-24 Object Distance page in the guidance ............................................................................ 152
Figure 8-25 Views in the Acquisition that have an alarm frame with text ........................................... 153
Figure 9-1 Mode page of the Events page ....................................................................................... 155
Figure 9-2 Conditions menu ............................................................................................................. 156
Figure 9-3 Event Definition editor ..................................................................................................... 157
Figure 9-4 Field definition for a separator delimited message ......................................................... 158
Figure 9-5 Field definition for a fixed field message ......................................................................... 159
Figure 9-6 Select Data in the event definition editor ........................................................................ 160
Figure 9-7 Data Source page of the events ..................................................................................... 160
Figure 9-8 Select Data item for the position source ......................................................................... 161
Figure 9-9 Numbering page of the events ........................................................................................ 161
Figure 10-1 Help menu of the Control Center .................................................................................... 164
Figure 10-2 Clock Synchronization window with a selected clock device .......................................... 166
Figure 10-3 Clock synchronization is activated in the Connections window ...................................... 167
Figure 10-4 Icon in the taskbar with its context menu ................................................................... 167
xx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 10-5 Interfacing window ........................................................................................................... 168
Figure 10-6 Example of an IP-address for a XSE server ................................................................... 169
Figure 10-7 Example of a network settings for a socket communication port .................................... 169
Figure 10-8 Example of the settings for a serial port .......................................................................... 170
Figure 10-9 Example of the settings for a R7K communication ......................................................... 171
Figure 10-10 Example of the settings for a RGL communication ......................................................... 171
Figure 10-11 Example of the settings for a R7KI communication ........................................................ 171
Figure 10-12 Example of the settings for a R7K communication ......................................................... 172
Figure 10-13 OPC server has to be selected for the OPC communication .......................................... 172
Figure 10-14 Example of the settings for an Edgetech communication ............................................... 173
Figure 10-15 PDS2000 Import Utility .................................................................................................... 174
Figure 10-16 First page of the Single Beam XYZ Import ...................................................................... 175
Figure 10-17 ASCII File Options page in the import configuration ....................................................... 176
Figure 10-18 Runline Options page in the import configuration ........................................................... 176
Figure 10-19 File Selection page in the import configuration ............................................................... 177
Figure 10-20 Import file settings for the import data file ....................................................................... 178
Figure 10-21 Calendar .......................................................................................................................... 178
Figure 10-22 ASCII parsing in the import configuration ........................................................................ 179
Figure 10-23 Settings for parsing the XYZ data ................................................................................... 180
Figure 10-24 Select the delimited columns in the data file ................................................................... 181
Figure 10-25 Select the month in the date column ............................................................................... 182
Figure 10-26 XTF Import page .............................................................................................................. 183
Figure 10-27 S7K Import page.............................................................................................................. 184
Figure 10-28 Text file with the offsets values for the offsets dialog ...................................................... 185
Figure 10-29 Offsets dialog in the Import ............................................................................................. 185
Figure 10-30 SZ Import page ................................................................................................................ 186
Figure 10-31 Simrad EM3000 Import page .......................................................................................... 187
Figure 10-32 Batch Plot ........................................................................................................................ 189
Figure 10-33 Quick Profile Plot with a plot project and a plot template selected ................................. 191
Figure 10-34 Tab Filesets in the Quick Profile Plot .............................................................................. 191
Figure 10-35 Tab DTM in the Quick Profile Plot ................................................................................... 192
Figure 10-36 Tab Design in the Quick Profile Plot................................................................................ 192
Figure 10-37 Tab Text in the Quick Profile Plot .................................................................................... 193
Figure 10-38 Still 176 DXF files has to be created ............................................................................... 194
Figure 10-39 Manual Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator ........................................... 195
Figure 10-40 TM grid convergence ....................................................................................................... 196
Figure 10-41 Advance Manual Conversion page in the Geo Calculator .............................................. 197
Figure 10-42 Compute 3 Shift Parameters page in the Geo Calculator ............................................... 198
Figure 10-43 File Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator ................................................. 199
Figure 10-44 User Accounts window .................................................................................................... 200
Figure 10-45 User dialog ...................................................................................................................... 201
Figure 10-46 Manage user level access window with the two default access levels, Administrator
and Basic Operator.......................................................................................................... 201
Figure 10-47 Add user access level dialog ........................................................................................... 202
Figure 10-48 Manage user level access window with new user level .................................................. 202
Figure 10-49 New user account with the new user level ...................................................................... 203
Figure 10-50 User accounts can be changed ....................................................................................... 203
Figure 10-51 Language tab in Options window .................................................................................... 204
Figure 10-52 Message to restart PDS2000 to made the new language active .................................... 204
Figure 10-53 Message when Control Center is started ........................................................................ 205
Figure 10-54 Power management check tab in Options window ......................................................... 205
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxi

Figure 10-55 Power management check with everything is OK .......................................................... 206
Figure 10-56 Power management check with one check failed ........................................................... 206
Figure 10-57 General Settings tab in the Options window ................................................................... 207
Figure 11-1 Explorer with the different context menus ....................................................................... 210
Figure 11-2 General context menu ..................................................................................................... 211
Figure 11-3 File group context menu ................................................................................................. 213
Figure 11-4 File context menu ............................................................................................................ 213
Figure 11-5 File group context menu of C-MAP Databases .............................................................. 215
Figure 11-6 File context menu of the C-MAP Databases ................................................................... 216
Figure 11-7 Convert S-57 to C-Map dialog ........................................................................................ 217
Figure 11-8 Store HW ID for S-63 support ......................................................................................... 218
Figure 11-9 Install permits for S-63 support ....................................................................................... 218
Figure 11-10 SA Certificate information for S-63 support .................................................................... 218
Figure 11-11 File context menu of the BSB Charts (KAP) ................................................................... 220
Figure 11-12 File group context menu of the Clipping Polygons ......................................................... 220
Figure 11-13 File context menu of the Clipping Polygons .................................................................... 220
Figure 11-14 File group context menu of the Runlines ........................................................................ 222
Figure 11-15 File context menu of the Runlines................................................................................... 222
Figure 11-16 File group context menu of the Track Guidance Routes ................................................ 223
Figure 11-17 File context menu of the Waypoints ................................................................................ 224
Figure 11-18 Clipping Polygon editor ................................................................................................... 225
Figure 11-19 Color Table generator with a color table added (between 0 and -5) to the existing
color table........................................................................................................................ 226
Figure 11-20 Color table with the option from 0 to -2 ....................................................................... 227
Figure 11-21 Color table with the option from 0 to -2 ....................................................................... 228
Figure 11-22 Color Table Entry ............................................................................................................ 229
Figure 11-23 Value -1.10 is added to the color table ........................................................................... 229
Figure 11-24 Color table for bottom classification ................................................................................ 230
Figure 11-25 Color Table Entry for the bottom classification color table.............................................. 230
Figure 11-26 Dredge differential color table generator ........................................................................ 231
Figure 11-27 Contour definition generator ........................................................................................... 232
Figure 11-28 Contour Properties .......................................................................................................... 232
Figure 11-29 Generate Contours ......................................................................................................... 233
Figure 11-30 Design Profile Template editor ........................................................................................ 233
Figure 11-31 Exclude Areas editor with one excluded area ................................................................. 234
Figure 11-32 Profile Design Model Editor with runlines ....................................................................... 235
Figure 11-33 Add a template to a design model .................................................................................. 235
Figure 11-34 Profile Design Model Editor with a route ......................................................................... 236
Figure 11-35 Select a template for the profile design model ................................................................ 237
Figure 11-36 Sound Velocity Profile Editor .......................................................................................... 238
Figure 11-37 Tide Station editor ........................................................................................................... 240
Figure 11-38 Tide Station information .................................................................................................. 240
Figure 11-39 Edit Tide Values editor .................................................................................................... 242
Figure 11-40 Time Range Setting dialog .............................................................................................. 243
Figure 11-41 Import window for ASCII tide files ................................................................................... 243
Figure 11-42 Tide Station Report generator......................................................................................... 244
Figure 11-43 A tool tip of a PDS2000 logdata file ................................................................................ 245
Figure 11-44 File context menu of the PDS2000 Log Data ................................................................. 245
Figure 11-45 Log File info of a PDS2000 log data file ......................................................................... 245
Figure 11-46 File group context menu of the Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images ............. 246
Figure 11-47 Raster Editor with a satellite image................................................................................. 247
xxii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 11-48 Enter the local grid coordinates for the selected location................................................ 247
Figure 12-1 Context menu in the Acquisition ...................................................................................... 252
Figure 12-2 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views ......................................... 252
Figure 12-3 Add Display to add a view ............................................................................................... 253
Figure 12-4 Add Display in the context menu ..................................................................................... 253
Figure 12-5 3D Object Manager ......................................................................................................... 256
Figure 12-6 Dialog for the log file names ............................................................................................ 257
Figure 12-7 Tool Select Dialog ........................................................................................................... 258
Figure 12-8 Measure with dredge tool dialogs .................................................................................... 258
Figure 12-9 Select a runline ................................................................................................................ 260
Figure 12-10 Overview of the default Defined Keyboard Shortcuts ..................................................... 262
Figure 12-11 Customize window with the toolbars page ...................................................................... 262
Figure 12-12 Commands page in the customize window ..................................................................... 263
Figure 12-13 Default properties for the F-keys ..................................................................................... 263
Figure 12-14 Select Attribute window to select an equipment attribute ............................................... 265
Figure 12-15 Attach an attribute through the Raw Data view ............................................................... 265
Figure 12-16 Select Data window ......................................................................................................... 266
Figure 12-17 Attach an attribute to a F-key .......................................................................................... 266
Figure 12-18 Select Data window to select a manual input device ...................................................... 267
Figure 12-19 Select View window to select a view in the Acquisition ................................................... 267
Figure 12-20 Select Layer window to select the layer in the view ........................................................ 268
Figure 12-21 Select View Attribute window to select an attribute in the view ...................................... 268
Figure 12-22 Attach an attribute from the layer properties ................................................................... 269
Figure 12-23 Attach an attribute from the view properties .................................................................... 269
Figure 12-24 Shortcut Keys page of the Customize window ................................................................ 270
Figure 12-25 Assign a shortcut key to the selected macro ................................................................... 270
Figure 13-1 3D View – Online with multibeam and laser scan data ................................................... 273
Figure 13-2 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated active grid model ....... 274
Figure 13-3 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated active grid model
with a dredge differential color table ................................................................................ 275
Figure 13-4 Measure window.............................................................................................................. 276
Figure 13-5 Coverage Settings view of the 3D View .......................................................................... 277
Figure 13-6 Alerts view with several timeouts .................................................................................... 278
Figure 13-7 Alarm indicator in the status bar ...................................................................................... 279
Figure 13-8 Compass view with True Heading, CMG and Waypoint heading ................................... 280
Figure 13-9 Sonar Settings for the Device Configuration ................................................................... 281
Figure 13-10 Ocean Menu for the Device Configuration – RESON-7K view ....................................... 282
Figure 13-11 Data Recording for the Device Configuration – RESON-7K view ................................... 283
Figure 13-12 Multibeam Settings of the Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view .................... 284
Figure 13-13 Ocean Menu of the Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view .............................. 285
Figure 13-14 Dredge – Bars Horizontal view with two attributes .......................................................... 286
Figure 13-15 Dredge – Bars Vertical view with two attributes .............................................................. 287
Figure 13-16 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view for two suction tubes ..................................... 287
Figure 13-17 Dredge – Load and Draught view with the Load page .................................................... 289
Figure 13-18 Dredge – SCADA view with two suction tubes ................................................................ 290
Figure 13-19 Dredge Status view with Sailing full as dredge status ..................................................... 290
Figure 13-20 Echosounder Graphical Trace view with four channels .................................................. 291
Figure 13-21 Magnify window with the zoom option 2x ........................................................................ 292
Figure 13-22 Print window of the snapshot with a start and end marker ............................................. 293
Figure 13-23 General page of the Settings ........................................................................................... 294
Figure 13-24 Advanced page of the Settings ....................................................................................... 294
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxiii

Figure 13-25 Color page of the Settings .............................................................................................. 295
Figure 13-26 Channel page of the Settings.......................................................................................... 296
Figure 13-27 Paper page of the Settings ............................................................................................. 297
Figure 13-28 Various page of the Settings ........................................................................................... 298
Figure 13-29 Communication page of the Settings .............................................................................. 298
Figure 13-30 Helmsman view with a runline ........................................................................................ 299
Figure 13-31 Icon Image view with an image of a vessel .................................................................... 301
Figure 13-32 Interval Logging view with 2 items with the sampling method ........................................ 302
Figure 13-33 Laser Scan Control View for the MDL laser scan ........................................................... 303
Figure 13-34 Laser Scan Control View for the Riegl Z Series laser scan ............................................ 303
Figure 13-35 Manual Input – Dredge Status view with all the dredge statuses and delays ................ 304
Figure 13-36 Main Page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view .............................................................. 305
Figure 13-37 Event page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view ............................................................. 306
Figure 13-38 BITE page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view .............................................................. 306
Figure 13-39 Messages – I/O Port view with incoming data ................................................................ 306
Figure 13-40 Messages – System Messages view with information.................................................... 307
Figure 13-41 Multibeam QC- 3D Seafloor view with the raw data in the display mode Quality ........... 308
Figure 13-42 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with the multibeam xyz computation in the
display mode Quality ....................................................................................................... 308
Figure 13-43 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Detection .................................... 309
Figure 13-44 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth Dots ................................. 309
Figure 13-45 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth Grid ................................. 310
Figure 13-46 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth Sample Grid .................... 310
Figure 13-47 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope Grid .................................. 311
Figure 13-48 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope Sample Grid..................... 311
Figure 13-49 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view with the multibeam xyz
computation and all four the multipings .......................................................................... 312
Figure 13-50 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the raw data in the color mode Quality ............. 313
Figure 13-51 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the multibeam xyz computation in the color
mode Quality ................................................................................................................... 313
Figure 13-52 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with one ping in the color mode Detection
Process ........................................................................................................................... 314
Figure 13-53 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with multipings in the color mode Sequence
number ............................................................................................................................ 314
Figure 13-54 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view with the color mode
Quality and the vertical and horizontal TPE’s ................................................................. 315
Figure 13-55 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view with the vertical and horizontal
TPE’s and IHO errors ...................................................................................................... 316
Figure 13-56 Vertical error diagram ..................................................................................................... 317
Figure 13-57 Horizontal error diagram ................................................................................................. 318
Figure 13-58 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view with the multibeam data item Quality .............. 320
Figure 13-59 Multibeam Filters view .................................................................................................... 324
Figure 13-60 Depth and Range filters .................................................................................................. 327
Figure 13-61 Intersection and Slope filters ........................................................................................... 327
Figure 13-62 Flying Object Filter .......................................................................................................... 328
Figure 13-63 Port and Starboard Angle Nadir filter .............................................................................. 328
Figure 13-64 Incidence angle ............................................................................................................... 329
Figure 13-65 Angle to the detection point ............................................................................................ 329
Figure 13-66 Port and Starboard Distance Nadir filter ......................................................................... 329
Figure 13-67 Statistic filter with 3x3 beams .......................................................................................... 330
Figure 13-68 Parameters for the smart filter ........................................................................................ 331
Figure 13-69 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with interferometry data ........................................... 332
xxiv  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 13-70 Interferometry data with the four areas ........................................................................... 332
Figure 13-71 Interferometry data with the averaging clips and the average depths ............................ 333
Figure 13-72 Interferometry data with the tolerance areas ................................................................... 334
Figure 13-73 Multibeam Video view of the RESON SeaBat 8125 with a depth filter ........................... 334
Figure 13-74 Example of a Numerics – Standard view ........................................................................ 335
Figure 13-75 Configuration window for the Numerics – Standard view shown above ......................... 336
Figure 13-76 Alarm Definition dialog for an item in the Numerics view ................................................ 337
Figure 13-77 Numerics – Sonar Targets view ...................................................................................... 337
Figure 13-78 Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking view ................................................................. 338
Figure 13-79 Output Control view for the RESON SeaBat 8125 .......................................................... 340
Figure 13-80 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view with the J-Lay tower, the criteria and the pipe. ................... 341
Figure 13-81 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and the detected pipe
for the Pipe Position Monitor application ......................................................................... 342
Figure 13-82 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and the detected pipe
for the Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay application ............................................................... 342
Figure 13-83 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view with the pipe position for the Pipe Position Monitor
application ....................................................................................................................... 343
Figure 13-84 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars ............................................................................. 344
Figure 13-85 Plan View – Dredge Instruction with a dredge instruction ............................................... 345
Figure 13-86 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning with a bull’s eye and a waypoint ................................ 346
Figure 13-87 Plan View – General Dredge Operation with an updated grid model ............................. 347
Figure 13-88 Plan View – Navigation with a C-Map layer .................................................................... 348
Figure 13-89 Plan View – Production with a production grid model ..................................................... 349
Figure 13-90 Plan View – Survey Coverage with an active grid model ................................................ 350
Figure 13-91 Measure window in the plan views .................................................................................. 351
Figure 13-92 Measure Relative Vessel window.................................................................................... 351
Figure 13-93 Measure Relative window ............................................................................................... 351
Figure 13-94 Find C-Map object in the plan view ................................................................................. 353
Figure 13-95 C-MAP Object Information window with a radio calling point .......................................... 353
Figure 13-96 Context menu in the Edit Mode and without user maps.................................................. 355
Figure 13-97 Context menu in the Edit Mode with the user maps options ........................................... 356
Figure 13-98 Select a symbol from the list in the Select User Symbol window .................................... 356
Figure 13-99 Context menu after editing or selecting an object ........................................................... 357
Figure 13-100 Layers window for one of the plan views ........................................................................ 358
Figure 13-101 Properties window for most of the plan views ................................................................. 359
Figure 13-102 Plan View with an off-center of -100% (left) and +100% (right) with a vessel radius
of 10 ................................................................................................................................. 360
Figure 13-103 Coverage Settings window for the plan views ................................................................. 361
Figure 13-104 Positioning System XY – Manual Input view ................................................................... 362
Figure 13-105 Profile – Grid Model view derived from the ‘Draw Profile’ option in the plan view .......... 364
Figure 13-106 Profile – Multibeam view with an active grid model profile .............................................. 364
Figure 13-107 Profile – Projected Runline view with a profile ................................................................ 365
Figure 13-108 Single beam echo sounder filters .................................................................................... 365
Figure 13-109 Profile – Realtime Design view with a right view of a suction hopper and the design
difference as up/down indicator ....................................................................................... 366
Figure 13-110 Profile – Realtime Design view with a left and a back view for an excavator ................. 366
Figure 13-111 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view with a design model ........................................... 367
Figure 13-112 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen with an active grid model, an active design
model, dredge limits and level contacts .......................................................................... 367
Figure 13-113 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view with a grid model and a design model ................ 368
Figure 13-114 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view with a top and side view of the trailing suction
hopper with a drag head .................................................................................................. 369
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxv

Figure 13-115 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view with a top and side view of the trailing
suction hopper with a drag head ..................................................................................... 369
Figure 13-116 Profile – Sound Velocity view of the active sound velocity profile .................................. 370
Figure 13-117 Properties for the Profile – Realtime Design view .......................................................... 372
Figure 13-118 Raw Data view of the Multibeam xyz computation ......................................................... 373
Figure 13-119 Data item ‘GPS mode’ can be moved with the ‘Drag & Drop’ method ........................... 374
Figure 13-120 Scatterplot view ............................................................................................................... 374
Figure 13-121 Reference Point window to enter or select the reference position ................................. 375
Figure 13-122 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three different views ............. 376
Figure 13-123 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view ................................................................... 377
Figure 13-124 Sonar – Sidescan view with for color palette rust and gray ............................................ 378
Figure 13-125 Sonar – Snippets view with for color palette rust and gray ............................................. 379
Figure 13-126 Sonar – Bathy view of the 7125 in simulation mode ....................................................... 382
Figure 13-127 Status – Alarms view ...................................................................................................... 384
Figure 13-128 Status – Computations view with not working computations .......................................... 384
Figure 13-129 Status – Equipment view with no data for some equipment ........................................... 385
Figure 13-130 Status – Logging view with the logging on ...................................................................... 385
Figure 13-131 Status – Remote Connections view ................................................................................ 386
Figure 13-132 Tide Manual Input view ................................................................................................... 386
Figure 13-133 Time Series view with two graphs stacked ..................................................................... 387
Figure 14–1 Replayer toolbar with a file set bar.................................................................................. 389
Figure 14–2 Replayer toolbar with a vessel bar .................................................................................. 390
Figure 14–3 Select the external files for the replay ............................................................................. 390
Figure 16-1 Editing with two editors ................................................................................................... 396
Figure 16-2 File Set Editor to select or create a file set. .................................................................... 397
Figure 16-3 Selected files for a file set ............................................................................................... 397
Figure 16-4 Context menu in the Editing ............................................................................................ 398
Figure 16-5 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views in the Editing ................... 398
Figure 16-6 Add Display window to add an editor .............................................................................. 398
Figure 16-7 Add Display in the context menu of the Editing .............................................................. 399
Figure 16-8 Find window .................................................................................................................... 401
Figure 16-9 Apply the modified vessel configuration ......................................................................... 402
Figure 16-10 Vessel Selection Dialog to select a different vessel configuration .................................. 402
Figure 16-11 Vessel Selection Dialog with an invalid active vessel configuration ............................... 403
Figure 16-12 Dialog when active vessel configuration is different from the other vessel
configurations .................................................................................................................. 403
Figure 16-13 Dialog when there is no difference in the vessel configurations ..................................... 404
Figure 16-14 Transponder position update for the slave vessel .......................................................... 404
Figure 16-15 Apply tide ........................................................................................................................ 405
Figure 16-16 Data source selection page of the Data Source Switch Wizard ..................................... 406
Figure 16-17 Data groups page of the Data Source Switch Wizard .................................................... 406
Figure 16-18 Data elements page of the Data Source Switch Wizard ................................................. 407
Figure 16-19 Cable Route Dialog to generate a cable route ................................................................ 408
Figure 16-20 Dialog for the multibeam statistics report ........................................................................ 409
Figure 16-21 POSPac selection dialog ................................................................................................ 410
Figure 16-22 Quick Calibration ............................................................................................................. 411
Figure 16-23 Generate TPE Results File ............................................................................................. 412
Figure 16-24 Part of the depth errors table .......................................................................................... 412
Figure 16-25 Example of a depth error graph ...................................................................................... 413
Figure 16-26 Dialog for Validate ALL Caches ...................................................................................... 413
Figure 16-27 Dialog for recaching ........................................................................................................ 414
xxvi  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 16-28 Dialog for revert to original data ...................................................................................... 414
Figure 16-29 Repair the logdata file(s) ................................................................................................. 415
Figure 16-30 Dialog to fix the time stamp ‘Time in Message’ ............................................................... 415
Figure 16-31 Dialog to do a force recache of the GPS positions ......................................................... 415
Figure 16-32 3D Box view with a grid model and multibeam data ....................................................... 418
Figure 16-33 3D View – Standard with the cross and high-resolution data ......................................... 422
Figure 16-34 Spotlight window.............................................................................................................. 422
Figure 16-35 3D View – Standard with a measure window with a distance, bearing and a
elevation between two points .......................................................................................... 423
Figure 16-36 Properties of the 3D View – Standard ............................................................................. 426
Figure 16-37 Layers of the 3D View – Standard................................................................................... 427
Figure 16-38 Layers which can be added to the 3D View – Standard ................................................. 427
Figure 16-39 Data Source Switching editor .......................................................................................... 429
Figure 16-40 Data Source Switch Editor .............................................................................................. 430
Figure 16-41 Dekdienst view ................................................................................................................ 432
Figure 16-42 Dekdienst Channel Manager with the items for the Dekdienst view ............................... 432
Figure 16-43 Line-Based Editing – Standard, with two stacked data channels ................................... 434
Figure 16-44 Properties (left) and Channel Properties (right) to select and enable a second file
set .................................................................................................................................... 434
Figure 16-45 Channel Properties of the channel data to select a design model type .......................... 435
Figure 16-46 Line-Based Editing – Standard; with second file set and a profile of a grid model ......... 435
Figure 16-47 Line-Based Editing – Multiline, with three surveys over the same runline ...................... 436
Figure 16-48 Messages – System Messages view with information for the Editing ............................. 438
Figure 16-49 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a CUBE model and multibeam data
both in depth color mode ................................................................................................. 439
Figure 16-50 Create page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ........... 441
Figure 16-51 Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ................ 442
Figure 16-52 Edit page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with
one of the edit modes selected ....................................................................................... 443
Figure 16-53 Filter page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .............. 444
Figure 16-54 Export page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ............ 445
Figure 16-55 Sync page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .............. 446
Figure 16-56 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a grid model in depth color mode ........... 447
Figure 16-57 Create page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ............... 447
Figure 16-58 Info page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................... 449
Figure 16-59 Cell info window for the selected area............................................................................. 450
Figure 16-60 Edit page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................... 451
Figure 16-61 Filter page to remove spikes in the grid model in the mUltibeam Area Editing –
Standard view .................................................................................................................. 452
Figure 16-62 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color .............................................. 453
Figure 16-63 Beam Filter page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ........ 454
Figure 16-64 Export page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ................ 455
Figure 16-65 Sync page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................. 455
Figure 16-66 Filter page for the multibeam filters in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ...... 457
Figure 16-67 Calibration mode with a Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view and the three
Profile views .................................................................................................................... 459
Figure 16-68 Pipe Detection mode in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a
detected pipe ................................................................................................................... 460
Figure 16-69 Create page to create a pipe route in the pipe mode of the Multibeam Area Editing
– Standard view ............................................................................................................... 461
Figure 16-70 Correlation filter with a pipe diameter .............................................................................. 461
Figure 16-71 Edit pipe option in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view .................................... 463
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxvii

Figure 16-72 Svp Edit Profile view with a sound velocity profile view on the left and a profile view
on the right with above the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view ............................ 464
Figure 16-73 CUBE model with the number of hypotheses as color mode ......................................... 467
Figure 16-74 CUBE model with the main surface strength as color mode .......................................... 467
Figure 16-75 CUBE model with the depth as color mode .................................................................... 468
Figure 16-76 CUBE model with the hit count as color mode ............................................................... 468
Figure 16-77 CUBE model with the uncertainty as color mode ........................................................... 469
Figure 16-78 Hypothesis 1 surface of the CUBE model with the selected data in main surface as
color mode ...................................................................................................................... 469
Figure 16-79 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color .......................................................... 471
Figure 16-80 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with BSR=50 and BRR=50 .......... 472
Figure 16-81 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with BSR=20 and BRR=80 .......... 473
Figure 16-82 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color + Intensity ......................................... 473
Figure 16-83 Laser scan data with the Beam Color Mode Depth ........................................................ 474
Figure 16-84 Numerics – Sonar Targets view ...................................................................................... 476
Figure 16-85 Ping view with one ping .................................................................................................. 477
Figure 16-86 Ping view with 5 pings ..................................................................................................... 477
Figure 16-87 Side Ping view with 100 pings ........................................................................................ 478
Figure 16-88 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with 250 highlighted pings which are
displayed in the Ping view ............................................................................................... 478
Figure 16-89 Position Editing – Standard ............................................................................................. 481
Figure 16-90 Position Editing – Standard with the tracks colored with their GPS status ..................... 483
Figure 16-91 Profile view with multibeam data and a grid model ......................................................... 485
Figure 16-92 Sonar – Sidescan view ................................................................................................... 488
Figure 16-93 Sonar – Snippets view .................................................................................................... 489
Figure 16-94 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three different views ............. 491
Figure 16-95 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view ................................................................... 492
Figure 16-96 Tide Station – Viewer with two tide stations ................................................................... 493
Figure 16-97 Time-Based Editing – Standard ...................................................................................... 495
Figure 16-98 Time-Based Editing – Echogram view with 2 echo sounder channels with graphical
trace information ............................................................................................................. 496
Figure 16-99 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph .............................................................................. 497
Figure 17-1 Create Model with a preview of a model ......................................................................... 499
Figure 17-2 Model Preview Layer Properties window ........................................................................ 501
Figure 17-3 Select the types of data files ........................................................................................... 502
Figure 17-4 Select Caris HDCS data ................................................................................................. 503
Figure 17-5 Additional information for data files ................................................................................. 503
Figure 17-6 Grid model data type selection for the Grid Model ......................................................... 504
Figure 17-7 Computation selection for PDS2000 log files ................................................................. 504
Figure 17-8 Data Reduction - dynamic gridding for a TIN model ....................................................... 505
Figure 18-1 3D grid model in the Grid Model Editor ........................................................................... 508
Figure 18-2 Spotlight window ............................................................................................................. 509
Figure 18-3 Create page to create a grid model ................................................................................ 512
Figure 18-4 Info page with information of the grid model ................................................................... 514
Figure 18-5 Edit page to edit the grid model data .............................................................................. 516
Figure 18-6 Filter page to remove spikes ........................................................................................... 517
Figure 18-7 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color .............................................. 518
Figure 18-8 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation ....................................... 519
Figure 18-9 Update with a different grid model .................................................................................. 519
Figure 18-10 Update with a 3D model .................................................................................................. 520
Figure 18-11 Data type and clipping polygon selection in the Export page ......................................... 521
xxviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 18-12 Export to ASCII ................................................................................................................ 521
Figure 18-13 Export to ASCII ESRI grid ............................................................................................... 521
Figure 18-14 Export to OpenGIS .......................................................................................................... 522
Figure 18-15 Export to GeoTIFF ........................................................................................................... 522
Figure 18-16 Update package .............................................................................................................. 522
Figure 18-17 Import page to import data in a grid model ..................................................................... 523
Figure 18-18 Generate a color table for the grid model ........................................................................ 525
Figure 18-19 Apply Z corrections to the grid model .............................................................................. 526
Figure 18-20 Set/Clear values of the grid model .................................................................................. 526
Figure 18-21 Make empty ..................................................................................................................... 527
Figure 18-22 Grid model filter criteria ................................................................................................... 527
Figure 18-23 Create a resampled model .............................................................................................. 528
Figure 18-24 Create a difference model ............................................................................................... 528
Figure 18-25 Create Report dialog (left for the PDF report and right for the CSV report) .................... 531
Figure 18-26 Volume Computation Results .......................................................................................... 532
Figure 18-27 Extract profiles ................................................................................................................. 533
Figure 18-28 Destination for the extracted profiles ............................................................................... 534
Figure 18-29 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation ........................................ 535
Figure 18-30 Interpolate circular ........................................................................................................... 535
Figure 18-31 Interpolate triangular........................................................................................................ 536
Figure 18-32 Interpolate directional ...................................................................................................... 536
Figure 18-33 Interpolate singlebeam .................................................................................................... 537
Figure 19–1 TIN Model Viewer with a TIN model ................................................................................ 539
Figure 19–2 TIN model properties ....................................................................................................... 540
Figure 19–3 Empty cache .................................................................................................................... 541
Figure 19–4 Decimation parameters ................................................................................................... 541
Figure 19–5 Feature angle .................................................................................................................. 542
Figure 19–6 Simple vertex ................................................................................................................... 542
Figure 19–7 Interior edge vertex.......................................................................................................... 543
Figure 19–8 Boundary vertex .............................................................................................................. 543
Figure 19–9 Contour interval parameters ............................................................................................ 544
Figure 20-1 Plot project wizard ........................................................................................................... 548
Figure 20-2 Plot overview window ...................................................................................................... 548
Figure 20-3 Context menu of the overview tree and overview plot .................................................... 549
Figure 20-4 Data added to the overview ............................................................................................. 549
Figure 20-5 Plan View Properties in the overview .............................................................................. 550
Figure 20-6 Overview with a plan view ............................................................................................... 550
Figure 20-7 Create a new plot ............................................................................................................ 551
Figure 20-8 Plot Properties window .................................................................................................... 551
Figure 20-9 New blank plot ................................................................................................................. 552
Figure 20-10 Context menu of the plot tree and the plot view .............................................................. 553
Figure 20-11 Plan panel properties ...................................................................................................... 553
Figure 20-12 Plot with panels and layers .............................................................................................. 554
Figure 20-13 Regenerating a plot ......................................................................................................... 555
Figure 20-14 Regeneration errors......................................................................................................... 555
Figure 20-15 Overwrite suppression in action; behind the easting text are no depth values plotted ... 556
Figure 20-16 Example of a plan panel .................................................................................................. 558
Figure 20-17 Mapping page of the plan panel properties ..................................................................... 558
Figure 20-18 Sample of a north arrow .................................................................................................. 559
Figure 20-19 North Arrow page of the north arrow panel properties .................................................... 559
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxix

Figure 20-20 Sample of a profile panel ................................................................................................ 560
Figure 20-21 Horizontal and Vertical pages of the profile panel properties ......................................... 560
Figure 20-22 Sample of a profile volume panel.................................................................................... 561
Figure 20-23 A box with one profile volume ......................................................................................... 561
Figure 20-24 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile volume panel properties ............. 562
Figure 20-25 Design model page of the profile volume properties ...................................................... 562
Figure 20-26 Design line and colors page of the profile volume properties ......................................... 563
Figure 20-27 Survey data and colors page of the profile volume properties ....................................... 563
Figure 20-28 Sample of a profile series panel...................................................................................... 564
Figure 20-29 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel properties ............... 564
Figure 20-30 Sample of profile cross series panel ............................................................................... 565
Figure 20-31 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series panel properties ..... 565
Figure 20-32 Sample of a profile info panel ......................................................................................... 566
Figure 20-33 Profile Info page of the profile info panel properties ....................................................... 566
Figure 20-34 Sample of a text block panel with two text boxes ........................................................... 566
Figure 20-35 Text page of the text box properties ............................................................................... 567
Figure 20-36 DXF page of the DXF panel properties ........................................................................... 567
Figure 20-37 Sample of a color mapping panel ................................................................................... 568
Figure 20-38 Color Table page of the color mapping panel properties ................................................ 568
Figure 20-39 Image page of the image panel properties ..................................................................... 568
Figure 20-40 Sample of a key map panel with the current plot highlighted ......................................... 569
Figure 20-41 Sample of a scale bar panel ........................................................................................... 569
Figure 20-42 Scale Bar page of the scale bar panel properties ........................................................... 569
Figure 20-43 Polygon page of the clipping polygon properties ............................................................ 571
Figure 20-44 CMap settings page of the CMap properties .................................................................. 571
Figure 20-45 Data page of the dredge track properties ....................................................................... 572
Figure 20-46 Text Size page of the DXF properties ............................................................................. 572
Figure 20-47 Line Style page of the DXF properties ............................................................................ 573
Figure 20-48 Grid page of the geographic grid properties ................................................................... 573
Figure 20-49 GLW 3D Model page of the GLW grid properties ........................................................... 574
Figure 20-50 Cells page of the grid model properties .......................................................................... 575
Figure 20-51 Contouring page of the grid model contour properties ................................................... 576
Figure 20-52 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with the option Show
labels checked ................................................................................................................ 576
Figure 20-53 Design Model page of the grid model difference properties ........................................... 577
Figure 20-54 Options page of the grid model profile properties ........................................................... 578
Figure 20-55 Options page of the grid model profile statistics properties ............................................ 579
Figure 20-56 Grid page of the KP grid properties ................................................................................ 580
Figure 20-57 Options page of the log data properties .......................................................................... 580
Figure 20-58 Options page of the log data profile properties ............................................................... 581
Figure 20-59 Options page of the pipe route properties ...................................................................... 582
Figure 20-60 Plan Views page of the plan views properties ................................................................ 582
Figure 20-61 Labels page of the route properties ................................................................................ 583
Figure 20-62 Runlines page of the runlines properties ........................................................................ 583
Figure 20-63 Grid page of the satellite geographic grid properties ...................................................... 584
Figure 20-64 Options page of the sonar targets properties ................................................................. 585
Figure 20-65 Marker options page of the streak lines properties ......................................................... 585
Figure 20-66 Options page of the theoretical model properties ........................................................... 586
Figure 20-67 Cells page of the TIN model properties .......................................................................... 587
Figure 20-68 Contouring page of the TIN model contour properties.................................................... 587
xxx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 20-69 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with the option Show
labels checked ................................................................................................................. 588
Figure 20-70 Text Size page of the user map properties ..................................................................... 588
Figure 20-71 Line Style page of the user map properties .................................................................... 589
Figure 20-72 Options page of the waypoints properties ....................................................................... 589
Figure 20-73 Options page of the work areas properties ..................................................................... 590
Figure 20-74 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the plan panel and key map panel .................... 590
Figure 20-75 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the different profile panels ................................. 591
Figure 20-76 Overview with a grid model ............................................................................................. 592
Figure 20-77 Plan View Properties with an exact size for the plan view .............................................. 592
Figure 20-78 Output DXF file page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................................. 593
Figure 20-79 The Select Data page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................................ 594
Figure 20-80 The Plan Panel page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................................. 595
Figure 20-81 The Log Data Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard .................................................. 596
Figure 20-82 The Grid Model Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................... 597
Figure 20-83 The Contours Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard .................................................. 598
Figure 20-84 The Runlines Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard .................................................. 599
Figure 20-85 The Waypoints Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................... 600
Figure 20-86 The Options and Preview page of the DXF Export Wizard ............................................. 601
Figure 21-1 Horizontal area ................................................................................................................ 603
Figure 21-2 Delta Z ............................................................................................................................. 604
Figure 21-3 Volume Computation Wizard – Runlines......................................................................... 604
Figure 21-4 Volume Computation Wizard – Reference ...................................................................... 605
Figure 21-5 Volume Computation Wizard – Combine ........................................................................ 606
Figure 21-6 End Area Volumes with the Setup page.......................................................................... 607
Figure 21-7 End Area Volumes with the Volumes page ..................................................................... 608
Figure 21-8 End Area Volumes with the Vertical Areas page ............................................................ 609
Figure 21-9 End Area Volumes with the Report page ........................................................................ 610
Figure 22-1 Dialog in the Export window to select or create an export configuration file ................... 613
Figure 22-2 Selecting export type ....................................................................................................... 614
Figure 22-3 Export setup with a selected file set ................................................................................ 615
Figure 22-4 Options page for Excel and Comma Separated export................................................... 616
Figure 22-5 Data Selection page with an export list ........................................................................... 617
Figure 22-6 Options page for Simrad EM Datagram export ............................................................... 617
Figure 22-7 Options page for Multibeam points (ASCII) export .......................................................... 618
Figure 22-8 Options page for XTF export ........................................................................................... 620
Figure 22-9 First page of the XTF Settings Wizard ............................................................................ 620
Figure 22-10 Second page of the XTF Settings Wizard ....................................................................... 621
Figure 22-11 Last page of the XTF Settings Wizard............................................................................. 621
Figure 22-12 Options page for SDS export .......................................................................................... 622
Figure 22-13 SDS settings .................................................................................................................... 622
Figure 22-14 Options page for SZ export ............................................................................................. 623
Figure 22-15 Options page for Magnetometer export .......................................................................... 624
Figure 22-16 Options page for the FAU export..................................................................................... 625
Figure 22-17 Options page for the GSF export .................................................................................... 625
Figure 22-18 Save As dialog for the ‘Excel’ and the ‘Comma Separated’ export ................................. 626
PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxxi

1 Introduction
1.1 PDS2000
PDS2000 is a software package for hydrographic survey and dredging
operations. It offers modules that cover the entire operation from
acquisition to an end product. The software runs on standard PC’s with
the Windows operating system. PDS2000 is available in different versions
tailored to specific operations.
The purpose of all the measurements is real time reading of data from
one or more sensors, make computations with the data, show the results
of the computations and simultaneously log the data. To be able to control
those processes a number of Views has been developed that will show
the reading, computations, results and logging processes. A view can
show the data either graphically or alpha-numerically.
Data needs to be checked after the measurements. PDS2000 gives
several options to remove anomalies and outliers, either manually or
automatically.
The final presentation of the cleaned data can be in the form of models,
tables, files, volumes, nautical charts and reports.
This manual is also available as a HTML Help file. Press F1 or select
Help > Help Topics to open the PDS2000 help files.
PDS2000 - User Manual Introduction  1

2 PDS2000 Documentation
2.1 Introduction
This chapter will give an overview of all the manuals that will be delivered
with a PDS2000 version.
All these documents are accessible as PDF via the Start menu of
Windows at the location Start > Reson > PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x > PDS2000
Documentation. The documents can also be found in the folder
‘C:\Program Files\RESON\PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x\manuals’.
2.2 Overview
The manuals are listed not in order of importance but in alphabetic order.
For each manual a brief explanation will be given.
2.2.1 Anchor Handling

Anchor Handling is a system that keeps track of the pontoon/barge
anchor positions, anchor wires and anchor planning. Anchor Handling can
be done in a stand-alone mode where the positions of the anchors are
maintained from the Pontoon only.
The Anchor Handling can also be used in an integrated mode with a tug
management where anchor requests are sent to the tugs and the anchor
positions are automatically transmitted from the tug when the anchor is
dropped or when the anchor is moved by the tug. There is an anchor
planning mode where the new anchor locations can be determined.
For more information see the file Anchor Handling.pdf.
2.2.2 Bar Sweep

A bar sweep survey is usually carried out to find minimum depths in an
area after a dredge operation
A bar is lowered underneath a survey vessel. It hangs on wires or chains
on both sides of the vessel, and is lowered to the minimum depth of the
area. By sailing the vessel around the area, shoals are found whenever
the bar hits something. The operator then presses a button (Event button)
and makes a record of the location of the shoal.
For more information see the file Bar Sweep.pdf.
PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  3

2.2.3 Boeilog
With Boeilog PDS2000 will assist in laying buoys or other markers.
PDS2000 will assist in the navigation to and at the work location. Once on
location tools are available for the exact position of the buoy, if needed
working with the DP of the vessel.
The documentation is in Dutch.
For more information see the file Boeilog.pdf.
2.2.3.1 Appendix Boeilog

Explanation of the improvements in PDS2000 made for the Boeilog
application.
For more information see the file Appendix Boeilog.pdf.
2.2.4 Boraciet
The Boraciet application is meant to monitor on the shore the work and
movements of the (dredging) vessel. To monitor this a GPRS link is made
between the vessel and on shore (called ‘wal server’). With this link it is
also possible to send data to the vessels. The ‘wal server’ is the central
place where the information of the different vessels comes together.
On shore the ‘wal server’ is connected by Ethernet with several PC’s
(called ‘wal clients’). On these ‘wal clients’ the activities of the vessels can
be monitored online. It is also possible to replay the activities of the
vessels on the ‘wal clients’.
For more information see the file Boraciet.pdf.
2.2.4.1 Addendum Boraciet

The system to send the tidal information to the vessels is modified, which
results in modifications in PDS2000. This with other small modifications is
explained in this addendum.
For more information see the file Addendum Boraciet.pdf.
2.2.5 Bottom Classification

In PDS2000 it is possible to create a bottom classification from the
snippets data of RESON SeaBats.
Before a bottom classification of the snippets data can be calculated, a
calibration value (offset) has to be determined. This value can be
determined before the survey starts by using a representative area or it
can be determined after the survey and applied to the logdata files.
After a calibration value is determined a model with bottom classification
information can be created from the snippets data and from a grid model
with depth information.
For more information see the file Bottom Classification.pdf.
4  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.6 Bucket Dredging
This application is for a project where for dredging a bucket dredger is
used.
The documentation contains an explanation on how to setup the project
for a bucket dredger and of the most used views in the Acquisition.
Also the calibration of the inclinometers on the bucket chain will be
explained.
For more information see the file Bucket Dredging.pdf.
2.2.7 Cable Lay

A cable lay in PDS2000 will use, next to the standard equipment setup
and standard views, some extra device drivers and a couple of extra
views in the Acquisition to support a cable lay.
The documentation contains only an explanation of these extra device
drivers and extra views.
For a cable lay in PDS2000 the application type should be ‘Multi-purpose
survey’.
For more information see the file Cable Lay.pdf.
2.2.8 Cutter Dredge

This application is for a project where a cutter is used for dredging.
The documentation contains an explanation on how to setup the project
for a cutter dredger and of the most used views in the Acquisition.
Also the calibration of the sensors on the ladder will be explained.
For more information see the file Cutter Dredge.pdf.
2.2.9 ES3
This document is made as an additional section in the ES3 User Manual
to explain the setup of PDS2000 for the Odom ES3.
The Odom ES3 and the other sensors (navigation, motion, heading and
sv probe) are interfaced to the RTA (Real Time Appliance) box. Therefore
in PDS2000 the setup of the clock synchronization and the interface to
the different sensors is different from the standard interfacing in
PDS2000.
For more information see the file ES3.pdf.
2.2.10 Excavator
The application type ‘Excavator’ is for a project where an excavator is
used for dredging.
A project with the application type ‘Excavator’ can contain one or two
vessels. For a one vessel project the vessel is the excavator and for a two
vessels project the vessels are the excavator and a pontoon on which the
excavator is located.
In this application manual the setup of an excavator project for a stand-
alone excavator and for an excavator on a pontoon will be discussed.
After the project is setup the separate tools of the excavator configuration

have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the boom, stick and the tools
(bucket, grab or pump) will be explained.
At the end the views in the Acquisition will be discussed and an answer to
some frequent ask questions about PDS2000 in relation with an
excavator application will be given.
For more information see the file Excavator.pdf.
2.2.11 Frequently Asked Questions

The Frequently Asked Questions are from clients that have questions
about matters related to PDS2000 or sensors interfaced with PDS2000.
In the document the questions are divided into different chapters.
For more information see the file FAQ.pdf.
2.2.12 HydroBat
The HydroBat is a multibeam system where the data collection and the
control of the HydroBat will take place in PDS2000.
An explanation of the setup of the HydroBat in the equipment list will be
discussed and the special views for the HydroBat in the Acquisition will be
explained.
For more information see the file HydroBat.pdf.
2.2.13 Interface Setup

This document is made as an additional document to explain for specific
sensors the interface setup in PDS2000.
It will explain how for these sensors the interface has to be setup. In most
cases this interface is not a standard setup. If necessary the interfacing in
the Equipment page of the vessel configuration is explained.
For the following sensors the interface with PDS2000 is explained:
 Odom – ES3
 Coda Echoscope
 Laser Riegl VZ-400
 Novatel SPAN
For more information see the file Interface Setup.pdf.
2.2.14 Multibeam
The Multibeam Survey application in the PDS2000 software is an
application type for a survey with one or more multibeam systems.
In this manual the equipment, which is necessary for a multibeam survey,
will be discussed and also how to setup PDS2000 for this type of survey.
For more information see the file Multibeam.pdf.
2.2.15 Multibeam Calibration

In PDS2000 the new Multibeam Calibration application is available from
version 3.7.0.0. onwards.

The steps of the multibeam calibration in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view will be explained.
For more information see the file Multibeam Calibration.pdf.
2.2.16 PDS2000 LiteView

The PDS2000 LiteView is a freeware viewer which can be used to view
PDS2000 data files. The viewer will read the PDS2000 logdata files, grid
models and 3D design models. The multibeam data will be extracted from
the logdata files and will be visible in the viewer.
The Area Viewer is a true viewer; this means that the data cannot be
adjusted in the viewer. For editing the data, the PDS2000 Editing module
in PDS2000 has to be used.
In the manual will be explained how to add data to the viewer and how the
parameters and settings in the viewer can be modified.
For more information see the file PDS2000 LiteView.pdf.
2.2.17 PDS2000 User Manual

This manual describes how PDS2000 has to be setup and configure in
general. For specific setups or configurations see the other manuals.
Next to that, the Acquisition and all possibilities to process the data (like
Editing or Grid Model Editor) with their possible views will be explained.
2.2.18 Pipe Detection

In PDS2000 with the multibeam data a pipe detection can be done in the
Acquisition and in the Editing.
In this manual the next to the general setup the specific setup for the pipe
detection is discussed.
The manual explains how the pie detection works in the Acquisition and
Editing by modifying the pipe detection parameters.
The final result is a pipe route file that can be generated in the Acquisition
and Editing.
For more information see the file Pipe Detection.pdf.
2.2.19 Pipe Position Monitor

The ‘Pipe Position Monitor’ application in the PDS2000 software is
designed for pipe monitoring onboard pipe lay vessels of Allseas only.
For the pipe monitoring 2 RESON SeaBat 6012 systems are used which
are mounted on the stinger to look upwards to the pipe. They are
mounted underneath the outgoing pipe and measure the actual pipe
position relative to the bottom of the stinger.
The manual will guide the user through all the aspects of PDS2000 which
are used for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor’.
For more information see the file Pipe Position Monitor.pdf.

2.2.20 Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay
The ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’ application in the PDS2000 software is
designed for pipe monitoring onboard the Balder of Heerema Marine
Contractors.
For the pipe monitoring 2 RESON SeaBat 8125 systems will be used
which are mounted on the side near the J-Lay tower looking sideward to
the pipe.
The manual will guide the user through all the aspects of PDS2000 which
are used for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’.
For more information see the file Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay.pdf.
2.2.21 Rope Excavator

The application type ‘Rope Excavator’ is for a project where a rope
excavator is used for dredging.
A project with the application type ‘Rope Excavator’ can contain one or
two vessels. For a one vessel project the vessel is the rope excavator and
for a two vessels project the vessels are the rope excavator and a
pontoon on which the rope excavator is located.
In this application manual the setup of a rope excavator project for a
stand-alone rope excavator and for a rope excavator on a pontoon will be
discussed. After the project is setup the separate tools of the rope
excavator configuration have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the
boom and the rope will be explained.
At the end the views in the Acquisition will be discussed and an answer to
the frequent ask questions about PDS2000 in a rope excavator
application will be given.
For more information see the file Rope Excavator.pdf.
2.2.22 Slope Protection

PDS2000 is used to position a crane barge equipped with a grab crane
and a special construction attached to the barge, which can be lowered
on a slope for the laying of a fabric cover. The construction has a roller
bar at the end that is used to keep the fabric cover at its place on the
slope. The grab crane places rock on the fabric cover just in front of the
roller bar.
PDS2000 displays both the position of the crane and the fabric cover
laying equipment. A grid model is updated each time rock is placed on the
fabric cover.
For more information see the file Slope Protection.pdf.
2.2.23 Sonar Swath

The Sonar Swath utility is made to analyze processed bathymetry data
and generate a report of sonar performance as a function of the beam
launch angle or the beam distance from the center.
The algorithm used in Sonar Swath compares independent pairs of depth
measurements along-track, at the same launch angle. Standard
deviations are calculated by beam angle or beam distance and the results
are displayed in a histogram.
For more information see the file Sonar Swath.pdf.

2.2.24 Tide Application
Tide affects the measured height (Z) of the vessel reference point. The
measured heights are brought back (reduced) to a mean level (Chart
Datum, sometimes-called MSL) by applying tide corrections to the
measured reference point height.
For more information see the file Tide Application.pdf.
2.2.25 Trailing Suction Hopper

The application type ‘Trailing Suction Hopper’ is for a project where a
suction hopper is used for dredging.
In this application manual the setup of a trailing suction hopper project will
be discussed. After the project is setup the separate tools of the trailing
suction hopper configuration have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the
upper pipe and lower pipe will be explained.
At the end the Acquisition and the most used views in the Acquisition will
be discussed.
For more information see the file Trailing Suction Hopper.pdf.
2.2.26 Trencher
In PDS2000 the application ‘Trencher’ is made for the support of a cable
trencher. The cable will be trenched with a cable trencher and in this
application the knife depth will be calculated to determine the burial depth
of the cable.
In PDS2000 two vessels have to be setup, one is the survey vessel and
one is the trencher. The trencher will be positioned by a USBL positioning
system.
In this document will be explained which equipment on the trencher and
on the survey vessel, next to the standard equipment, have to be
selected. After the setup the calibration will be explained and some views
in the Acquisition will be discussed.
For more information see the file Trencher.pdf.
2.2.27 USBL
In this manual the USBL (Ultra Short BaseLine) as used in PDS2000 will
be explained.
The USBL equipment has to be setup in the Equipment list of PDS2000.
A USBL transceiver device and a USBL transponder device has to be
selected and setup.
Before a USBL survey can be started, a USBL calibration has to be done
to find the misalignment of the USBL transceiver. In this manual the
procedure for the USBL calibration will be explained.
For more information see the file USBL.pdf.

3 Installation
3.1 Introduction
This part of the manual describes the minimum requirements, how to
install PDS2000, C-Map charts and Tresco charts on a computer and how
to configure the computer for optimum use with PDS2000.
3.1.1 Requirements
The supported operating systems are for 32 bit and 64 bit:
 MS Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or higher
 MS Windows Vista
 MS Windows 7
The system requirements for a desktop and laptop system are:
Minimal requirements:
 CPU: modern Quad Core Processor
 Monitor: single monitor system
 Graphic card with OPENGL support and 1 Gb of memory; i.e.
NVidia Geforce GTX 4xx
 4 Gb internal memory
 1 x 500 Gb Hard disk
 DVD Writer
 Multi serial I/O card
Preferred requirements:
 CPU: 8 Core Processor
 Monitor: dual monitor system
 Dual Graphic card with OPENGL support and 3+ Gb of memory,
i.e. NVidia GeForce GTX 6xx or ATI Radion HD 79xx
Having a 32 bit operating
system limits the amount of  8 Gb internal memory
usable internal memory to
 Raid 0 Hard disk system for data storage: 1 Tb minimum
4 Gb.
 DVD Writer
 Multi serial I/O card
The requirements for the PC are depending on the application. A single-
 beam application requires less computer power then a multibeam

application. Between these two applications a lot of other applications or
combinations are possible.
PDS2000 - User Manual Installation  11

3.1.2 Memory Improvement
For some applications in the PDS2000 the Large Address Aware is
enabled. As result of this the applications Editing, Backscatter
Processing, Grid Model Editor, LiteView and Plot can use more than 2 Gb
of memory on 32 bit platforms when the operating system boot.ini file is
adjusted.
 For Windows 7 platforms the following line has to be executed in
the command prompt with the proper user rights to increase the
applications maximum memory to 3072 Mb:
bcdedit /set IncreaseUserVa 3072
See also http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/windows/hardware/ff542202(v=vs.85).aspx
 For Windows XP platforms the boot.ini has to be adjusted as
follows:
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS=
"Microsoft Windows XP Professional 3GB" /3GB /fastdetect
See also http://support.microsoft.com/kb/289022
The crucial part is to add the /3GB option. It might be that your MS
Windows boot.ini file looks a bit different.
 Do this only once! It will be remembered by Windows the next time the
system is started.
When these steps are not performed the application can only use the
default maximum memory. So it is not necessary to apply these changes
but when done you get more memory for the applications.
The modification is only needed for 32 bit Windows operating systems. 64
 Bit Windows operating systems don’t need to be modified. They already
are able to give the applications memory allocation bigger than 2 Gb.
3.2 Install PDS2000

The PDS2000 software is distributed on a CD-Rom. This CD is written
according the ISO-9660 standard and can be read from nearly all CD-
Rom stations.
A new version of PDS2000 is always available on the ftp-site of RESON.
 The address is ftp.reson.nl with user name ‘pds2000’ and password

‘getlatestversion’. See also the Help menu of the Control Center on page
164.
3.2.1 Start PDS2000 Installation

If the option ‘Autorun for CD-Rom’ is selected in the operating system the
CD will start automatically when it is inserted and the welcome page of
the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard will appear.
In case the CD does not start automatically, follow these steps:
a. Select in Windows Explorer the CD and select the file ‘setup.exe’ to
start the installation of PDS2000. The welcome page of the PDS2000
InstallShield Wizard will appear. Click on to continue.
12  Installation PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 3-1 Welcome page of the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard
b. Before the actual installation will start the user has to select the type of
setup.
Figure 3-2 Type of setup in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard
 Client Control Center. A stripped Control Center made for Boraciet.

See for detailed information the Boraciet manual, ‘Boraciet.pdf’.
 Full. The full version of PDS2000 will be installed.
 Remote Presentation via Cable. For an installation on computers
that are connected through a network cable with the main
PDS2000 computer (see page 22).
 Remote Presentation via WiFi.For an installation on computers that
are connected through a WiFi network with the main PDS2000
computer (see page 22).
After the selection of the setup type click on to continue.

c. The next page asks for a destination to install the program. The default
directory is ‘C:\Program Files\RESON\PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x’, where
x.x.x.x is the version number. With the option any directory
name can be selected. Click on to continue.
d. A window will pop up in which the ACL installer will make the
PDS2000 Project folder accessible for each user.
ACL also makes for MS Windows 7 the folder ‘C:\Program
Data\RESON\PDS2000’ and for MS Windows XP the folder
‘C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\RESON\PDS2000’ accessible.
e. If already an older PDS2000 version is/was installed with not the latest
C-Map software, then an Update C-Map SDK dialog will appear.
Figure 3-3 Update C-Map SDK software
From this new PDS2000 version onwards PDS2000 will only run with
the new version of the C-Map software. Click on to start with
the installation of the new C-Map software. If the user clicks on
no C-Map software will be installed and PDS2000 will not run
with C-Map anymore. Only when the user install later on the new C-
Map software PDS2000 will run again with C-Map.
See the chapter ‘Installing and Using C-Map’ on page 24 for a detailed
explanation of the C-Map installation.
f. Click on in the next page of the install wizard to start the
PDS2000 installation. Click on to finish the installation.
Installing PDS2000 will place the PDS2000 and the Dongle software
on the hard disk of the computer.
g. Click on on the desktop to start PDS2000.

3.2.2 Repair or Remove PDS2000
Figure 3-4 Repair or Remove PDS2000 in the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard
After PDS2000 is installed and the PDS2000 InstallShield Wizard is

started again, a faulty installation of PDS2000 can be repaired or the
installed PDS2000 version can be removed from the system.
3.2.3 File Structure

After the installation is finished, in several folders on the hard disk
PDS2000 files are created.
The PDS2000 program is placed in the folder ‘C:\Program Files\RESON’
with the following folders:
Figure 3-5 File structure of PDS2000
PDS2000 V.x.x.x.x
Where x.x.x.x is the installed version number. This folder contains the
programs and supporting files to run PDS2000.
General
Contains device drivers and more supporting files.
GeoidModels
Contains the files with the geoid models (see page 79) and X, Y

and Z post corrections (see page 79) which are used in some
coordinate systems of the predefined database.
Northarrows
Contains DXF files which are used for the North Arrow in Plot (see
page 559).
Obsolete
Contains device drivers which are replaced by more general or
improved drivers in the equipment list. If these obsolete drivers are
already selected in a project then they can still be used in that
project. The obsolete drivers cannot be selected anymore in the
equipment list and the replaced drivers have to be used (see the
release notes for an updated list of the obsolete drivers).
ReportDefinitions
Contains the definitions for all the different types of reports
PDS2000 can generate.
Symbols
Contains the symbols which are used in the User Maps (see page
355).
HTML Help
Contains the online HTML Help files which can be activated with the
F1 key or with Help > Help Topics in the menu bar.
localizations
Contains the translations of PDS2000. At the moment next to the
English version a Dutch, an Italian, a German, a French, a Russian
and a Chinese version is available. For more information see the
chapter ‘Control - Language’ on page 203.
manuals
Contains next to this manual several other manuals in PDF format.
Release Notes
Contains the release notes of this PDS2000 version.
System Requirements
Contains the system requirement for PDS2000.
Team Viewer
Contains the RESON Support file to start Team Viewer setup specific
for RESON users. With Team Viewer the RESON support team can
then take over the system to assist the user.
During the installation a project folder called ‘PDS2000 Projects’ is
created. For MS Windows XP this folder is located in ‘C:\Documents and
 Settings\All Users\Shared Documents’ and for MS Windows Vista and MS

Windows 7 in ‘C:\Users\Public\Public Documents’. If the user wants a
different location for the project folder, he can create his own folder before
PDS2000 is started.
In the project folder a general folder called ‘Projects Common Files’ is
 created. Common vessel settings will be stored in this folder (see
pagexxx).

For MS Windows XP the setting files of PDS2000 are placed in ‘C:\
Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\RESON\PDS2000’
and for MS Windows Vista and MS Windows 7 in
 ‘C:\ProgramData\RESON\PDS2000’. These files contain information that
can be used over different projects. Also when a new PDS2000 version is
installed these files will not be overwritten, so the old settings can be used
in the new PDS2000 version.
3.3 Adapting Hardware

Sometimes it is necessary to make hardware changes in the computer to
run PDS2000.
 Install a network card (see below).
 Install one or more serial extenders (see page 17).
 Optionally, connect multiple monitors (see page 19).
 Place the dongle on a parallel port or USB port (optional) (see page
19).
3.3.1 Network Card

PDS2000 uses network protocols to transfer data internally between the
various sections. In case the computer has a network installed and
configured, no further adjustments are required.
However is the computer a standalone machine then the installation of a
network card and adding TCP/IP protocols is required. Configuring
TCP/IP is necessary in case sensors use network interfaces.
3.3.2 Serial Extender Cards

Most of the supported sensors use serial connections to transfer data.
Modern computers have one or two serial ports only. To have the
possibility to use more sensors the installation of a serial extender is
necessary. In principle, any card supported by the operating system is
acceptable; however RESON B.V. prefers to use PCI cards of the brand
Moxa. The port numbers (COM n:) that Windows assigns to the ports are
also valid for PDS2000.
Three types of serial extenders are available.
1. USB to serial converters.
2. PCI cards. Various brands are available, usually with 4 or 8 serial
ports.
3. PCMCIA cards for laptop/notebook computers.
The use of extender cards requires special drivers.
3.3.2.1 USB to serial converters

These converters can only be used for non-time-critical applications. The
ports are multiplexed/demultiplexed and therefore by nature rather
unstable in timing. It is acceptable to use these converters for
measurements that do not require a strict time control. Use the drivers
supplied by the manufacturer that suit the operating system.

3.3.2.2 Other cards
For the other cards use the drivers supplied by the manufacturer of the
card. If in Windows XP the Moxa card C168H/PCI has to be installed, use
the drivers that are available on the distribution CD-Rom in the directory
‘Moxa’.
Select the option Add Hardware in the ‘Control Panel’ of Windows XP and
select manually a ‘Multi-port serial adapter’.
After the driver is installed for each port, the receive buffers must be set to
the fastest timing:
a. Select in the ‘Control Panel’ the option System and the System
Properties window will be opened. Select in this window the tab
Hardware, click on to open the Device Manager
window and look for the ‘Multi-port serial adapters’.
Figure 3-6 Device Manager window with the Moxa extender card
b. Double click on the card to get the card properties.

c. Select in the tab Port Configuration one of the ports and click on
.
Figure 3-7 Port settings for a COM port
d. Set the Rx FIFO Trigger to 1. Check the option Set the change to all
the ports and click on .
This sets the timing for all ports to optimal, giving the shortest possible
delays.

3.3.3 Monitors
This is not a specific PDS2000 feature. All Windows versions support
It is recommended to multiple monitors. This can be achieved by a dedicated graphics card with
install the drivers which are
more outputs or with additional adapter cards in the computer. When
supplied with the graphic
card multiple monitors are installed on the PC, PDS2000 can use them. It is
required that the graphics card has full support for Open GL.
3.4 PDS2000 Dongle

PDS2000 is protected with a dongle or a key. The dongle software is
loaded during the installation of the PDS2000 software. A dongle is
supplied with each PDS2000 license and contains the purchased options.
When an USB key is used, Windows will detect the key and extra
software to use the USB key on that USB port has to be installed.
Figure 3-8 Welcome page of the Found New Hardware Wizard
Select in window Found New Hardware Wizard dialog the option Yes, this
time only and click on to continue with the wizard.
Figure 3-9 Install page of the Found New Hardware Wizard

Select the option Install the software automatically (Recommended) and
click on to start the installation for the USB port. Click after the
installation on to finish the wizard. If the USB key is placed on a
different USB port then the extra software for the dongle has to be
installed again.
During startup, PDS2000 looks for the dongle or key on all parallel or
USB ports until it is found. Thereafter that port is checked at intervals. Is
the dongle or key not present at startup or removed during working, then
PDS2000 falls into a simulation mode. This means logging of data and
saving or printing is not possible.
3.4.1 Update of PDS2000 Dongle

Each PDS2000 dongle is related to a maintenance contract. When this
maintenance contract ends an update of the dongle is necessary. If the
dongle is not updated it is not possible to use newer PDS2000 versions.
To update the dongle a patch has to be loaded with the latest information
for the dongle. This patch can be available with the latest PDS2000
release or is sent to the user as a separate file. The update procedure is
for both patches identical.
Select in the Control Center the menu option Help > About Control Center
to open the About Control Center window.
Figure 3-10 The About Control Center window where the PDS2000 dongle
can be updated
At the bottom of this window the dongle information is available. Click on

to start the update of the dongle. An information window will
be opened where the dongle settings are displayed.

Figure 3-11 Dongle Update information window
Click on to start the file selection for the dongle update.
Figure 3-12 The All Dongles.dk4 file
When the dongle update is available with the latest PDS2000 installation
select the ‘All Dongles.dk4’ file. This file contains the dates for all
PDS2000 released dongles as maintained by RESON.

Figure 3-13 The separate patch for the dongle update
When the user has received a separate patch for his dongle then browse
to the correct folder and select the dk4 file as received from RESON.
Click on to start the update of the dongle. When the update is
not successful contact your local agent or RESON B.V. and inform them
on the internal ID and the dongle s/n.
3.5 Installing a Remote Presentation

A remote presentation can be run on any computer provided it is
connected to the main PDS2000 computer over a network.
For the installation of a remote presentation the same procedure as for
the installation of PDS2000 (see page 12) has to be followed. Select in
the page where the type of setup has to be selected the option Remote
Presentation via Cable or Remote Presentation via WiFi (see Figure 3-2
on page 13).
When the option via Cable is selected the installation copies some files to
the PDS2000 folder, makes some system changes and a remote
presentation icon ( ) will be placed on the desktop. These changes will
ensure that the remote presentation program runs at startup.
When the option via WiFi is selected the installation installs a full
PDS2000 and a remote presentation icon will be placed on the desktop.
 The Remote Presentation should have the same version number as the
PDS2000 version on the main computer!!
If a new driver is added to PDS2000 then when as remote presentation

 via WiFi is used this new driver has to be added to the PDS2000 and to
the remote presentation.
If PDS2000 is already installed on the remote computer then starts up the
file ‘RemotePresentation.exe’ from the PDS2000 folder.

 1. On the main PDS2000 computer the PDS2000 program folder in the
directory ‘C:\Program Files\RESON’ and the project folder have to be
shared with the remote computer. Also the folder PDS2000 in the
 directory ‘C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\RESON’ (MS Windows XP) or ‘C:\Program Data\RESON’ (MS
Windows 7) has to be shared with the remote computer.
If it is not possible to share one of the folders try to share the folder
one or two levels higher.
2. If both computers are in a network and are only accessible with a user
name and a password, then the authorization to read data on the
PDS2000 computer has to be set. Use Windows Explorer on the
remote computer to logon to the data on the PDS2000 computer.
 If this is not done an error message (error 0) will appear when the
remote presentation is started.
3. On the main PDS2000 computer the Control Center should be running
before the remote presentation can be started. Select from the list the
main PDS2000 computer when the remote presentation is started for
the first time. The remote presentation program tries to find the Control
Center and when successful, minimizes itself into the right side of the
taskbar with a green ‘connect’ icon . Double click on the icon will
open the Remote Presentation window.
Figure 3-14 Remote Presentation window with PDS-Develop-5 as the main

computer
As long as the Control Center on the main PDS2000 computer is not

running, the connection icon on the remote computer is orange or
yellow. As soon as the Control Center is started on the main PDS2000
computer, this icon turns to green. The Connections window in the
Control Center will indicate a connection with the remote computer.
Figure 3-15 Connections window with a connection to the remote PC

(RESON)

3.5.1 Running a Remote Presentation
Before the remote presentation can be running, a presentation has to be
added to the layouts. There are two methods to add a presentation.
1. Open the vessel configuration with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar in the Control Center. Add a
presentation to the layout page of the vessel configuration (see page
67).
2. Add a presentation in the Connections window of the main PDS2000
computer. This is only possible when the Acquisition is running. Open
in the Connections window with a right click the context menu, and
select the option Add Presentation… and the Layout dialog will be
opened to select the remote computer and layout (see page 68).
If a presentation is added to the layouts on the main PDS2000 computer
and the connect icon is green, then when the Acquisition is started
automatically the Presentation will be opened on the remote computer.
3.6 Installing and Using C-Map

C-Map is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
that optionally can be used with PDS2000. When C-Map is installed it can
be used as a layer in different views of PDS2000.
To get C-Map in your system, the following steps have to be taken.
1. Buy C-Map from RESON B.V or directly from C-Map.
A DVD with C-Map charts in the CM-93 format and an eToken dongle
is supplied.
2. Install the eToken dongle driver and C-Map (see page 24).
3. Install the C-Map charts on your computer.
4. Get a license from the C-Map distributor (see page 29).
The procedure is detailed below.
3.6.1 Install eToken Dongle Driver and C-Map

The driver for the eToken dongle has to be installed before the C-Map
 software installation is started. When the eToken dongle is installed after

the C-Map installation C-Map does not work!!
If the user has an existing C-Map license which is not expired yet, it is not
 necessary to install the driver for the eToken.
a. Select the folder ‘CMap’ on the CD-Rom of PDS2000, and start the file
‘Setup.exe’.
Figure 3-16 Setup dialog

Insert the eToken dongle and click on to continue with the
installation of the eToken driver (continue with ‘b’), click on if
no eToken driver has to be installed (continue with ‘e’).

It is very important not to install the driver when Windows detects the
eToken driver and wants to install it.
b. If on is clicked in ‘0’ then the next dialog will be the C-Map

Professional SDK Setup.
Figure 3-17 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the eToken
dongle and the C-Map software
Click on to start the installation of the eToken dongle and the

C-Map software. Click on to stop the installation.
c. A dialog will be opened where the user has to select which dongle is
used. With a new dongle, eToken PRO 72k (JAVA), it is possible that
this dialog does not appear, the installation detect then automatically
the right dongle. The type of the dongle can be checked on the dongle
itself.
Figure 3-18 eToken dongle selection
The eToken PRO (32k) Select when the old eToken dongle is used, select
does not work on MS when the new dongle is used.
Windows 7 64bits!!!!!
d. It is possible that after the installation of the eToken driver or after
 removing an old eToken driver or C-Map version, the installation ask to

restart the computer. Restart always the computer and the installation
dialog will start again and answer the questions from the beginning to
 continue with the installation. This restart request can appears 1, 2 or

3 times, depends on the Windows settings on the computer and what
have to be installed.

e. If no eToken dongle has to be installed in ‘0’ then the next dialog will
be the C-Map Professional SDK Setup.
Figure 3-19 C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the C-Map
software
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map software. Click

on to stop the installation.
f. The welcome page for the C-Map software will appear.
Figure 3-20 Welcome page of the C-Map Professional SDK Runtime Setup
wizard
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map Professional

SDK software.

g. The next page will be the Installation Folder page.
Figure 3-21 Installation folder for the C-Map software
Click on to start the installation of the C-Map software.

h. In the next page of the wizard the user has to confirm the start of the
installation.
Figure 3-22 Confirm the installation of the C-Map software
Click on to confirm the start of the installation.

i. In the next dialog the screen diagonal has to be entered.
Figure 3-23 Calibrate the screen diagonal
The diagonal of the main computer screen used for PDS2000 has to
be set. This will be used to find the best display resolution. Click on
when the diagonal is not known.
Click on after the right screen diagonal is entered.
When the C-Map software is installed on a computer where no C-Map
software was installed before then the next dialog will be ‘l‘.
j. When old C-Map software with a license was active before the new
software is installed then the next dialog will ask what to do with the
license.
Figure 3-24 C-Map user setup dialog
Click on to keep the active license and no new license has to

be activated. Go to ‘m’ for the next dialog.
Click on when a new license has to be activated, the old one
will be remove.
When the license is for an old eToken dongle and now a new eToken
 dongle is used then click always on . The new eToken dongle
does not work with the license for the old eToken dongle.
k. This dialog will be opened when in ‘j’ on is clicked.
Figure 3-25 Confirmation to remove licenses

Click on when the licenses have to be removed and click on
to keep the existing license(s). After both selection, the next
dialog is ‘m’.
l. The last page of the C-Map installation will only appear when the
software is installed for the first time on the computer.
Figure 3-26 Last page of the C-Map installation wizard
Click on to close the installation wizard.

m. As confirmation of the installation the next dialog will show what is
installed.
Figure 3-27 eToken dongle driver and C-Map software is installed
When only the C-Map software has to be installed, as displayed in ‘e’,

then this dialog will show only the C-Map software.
Click on to close the complete installation.
3.6.2 Applying for a C-Map License

A chart database can also To be able to display a C-Map chart database in full precision, a license
be one or more imported from C-Map is necessary and RESON B.V. will assist where required.
S-57 charts. The charts
should be in one folder, so A C-Map license is only valid for one eToken dongle. C-Map can be
C-Map can see the folder installed on more computers but only the computer with the eToken
as a database. dongle, for which the license is installed, will give a full precision of C-
Map.
By default the location for the C-Map software is ‘C:\Program Files\C-Map
Professional SDK Runtime’.

In the Explorer of a. Use ‘Windows Explorer’ to locate the file 'ChartManager.exe' in the
PDS2000 the C-Map Chart folder ‘System’ of the C-Map directory and double click on the file to
Manager can be opened in run the application.
the PDS2000 Database It is also possible to open the C-Map Chart Manager through the start
(see page 215). menu; All Programs > C-Map Professional SDK Runtime > C-Map
Chart Manager.
Figure 3-28 C-Map Chart Manager with the Databases page
 The users who are only using the S-57 converted charts in C-Map can
skip the items b – h and continue with item i on page 33.
b. If the database Professional+ is not present in the list of registered

databases click on and browse to the (DVD) location
and click on to copy the database to the PC. When this is
finished a message appears that the database registration was
successful.
Figure 3-29 Database registration is successful

c. If the database is registered then it will be displayed in the list of
registered databases.
Figure 3-30 C-Map Chart Manager with the registered database
d. Select the database Professional+ and click on to set

the database as the default database for C-Map.
Figure 3-31 C-Map Chart Manager with the Professional+ database set as
default

e. Before C-Map can be used the license information has to be obtained
from C-Map. Open in the C-Map Chart Manager the System Info page.
Figure 3-32 System Info page of the C-Map Chart Manager
The eToken dongle number will be displayed as the System ID and

click on to export a user file with the information
about the dongle.
f. Send an E-mail to RESON B.V. (Sales@reson.nl) or to C-Map with the
user file as attachment.
Make sure to include the following information in the e-mail:
- The full company name and e-mail return details.
- Reason (Purchase or Subscription).
g. RESON B.V. will process the information and get the license
information from C-Map or C-Map will send the information directly.
h. The user will receive a return e-mail with an attachment called
‘password.usr’ with the following information.
Example for an eToken PRO (32k):
[Reson eT 30021]
CD-ROM ID=Professional+.449
Expired=04.2011
Zone 1, Area13=C7906FE45FBACBAE
Example for an eToken PRO 72k (JAVA) dongle:
[JeT Reson 00001]
CD-ROM ID=Professional+.449
Expired=04.2011
Zone 1, Area13=C7906FE45FBACBAE
Example for S-57 to C-Map conversion:
[JeT Reson 00001]
CD-ROM ID=Software Modules.1
Expired=7.2011
CM933CMP=F695465EF659F83A
V3CATMGR=BFC33C0FB0825A52

i. On receipt of the email, open the C-Map Chart Manager application
once more and select the Licenses page.
Figure 3-33 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager
To use C-Map with the Select the right database at the top and choose one of the license
same eToken dongle on a actions.
different computer the
same license information Click on when the user wants to read the usr file with
has to be activated again. the license information. Select the file and click on in the
‘Select a license file’ dialog to read the license code(s) from the file.
For clients who are only using the converted S-57 files select as
 database ‘Software Modules’ and use always
this database does not have a Zone defined in the usr file.
because
Click on when the user wants to enter the license

code(s) manually. An ‘Add License Manually’ window will be opened.
Figure 3-34 Add License Manually window to add the license code(s)
Select the right zone with the right area and enter the license code as
given in the email or from the usr file. Click on to activate
the license for the selected zone. Repeat this for each zone and/or
area that needs a license.

j. After the licenses are activated, in the Licenses page of the C-Map
Chart Manager the selected zone(s) and area(s) are displayed with an
expiry date.
Figure 3-35 Licenses page of the C-Map Chart Manager with a license for
a zone.
k. C-Map with the right database is now installed and can be used in the
views of PDS2000.
3.6.3 Updating C-Map Database

The C-Map Chart Manager For updating the C-Map database the C-Map Chart Manager has to be
can also be opened in the opened again.
Explorer (see page 215).
Figure 3-36 C-Map Chart Manager
a. Place the new DVD with the database in the DVD drive and click on
.

b. When the copying is finished a message appears that the database is
updated.
Figure 3-37 Database is updated
c. In the C-Map Chart Manager the database is updated.
Figure 3-38 Professional+ database is updated
d. Also the license is updated for the new database.
Figure 3-39 License is updated for new database

3.6.4 Using the C-Map Layer in PDS2000
The new C-Map software will also work with PDS2000 versions before
 3.3.0.0. But before it will work in one of these ‘old’ versions, the file
‘CMGBase.dll’ located in the ‘PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x’ folder of the ‘old’ version
has to be deleted.
In some dedicated plan views in PDS2000, C-Map can be viewed as a
layer. Click on in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context
menu to get the Layers window.
Figure 3-40 Layers window with a C-Map layer
If there is no C-Map layer in the Layers window, click on and

select from the Add Layer dialog the C-Map layer. Automatically the
properties of the C-Map layer will be opened.
If the C-Map layer is already added to the Layers window, click on
to open the properties of the existing C-Map layer.
Figure 3-41 C-Map Layer Properties

Symbolization
There are three options:
S52 is the international standard for drawing a chart, and describes the
way chart items are drawn. The difference between the traditional and
the simplified mode is the way chart colors are used.
C-Map has its own standard for charting and does not show some
navigational areas (such as danger area or anchor area).
Scale Level
Controls the detail of the C-Map chart in the view. When scale level is
set to Automatic, the scaling is controlled by the current zoom factor of
the view. Other options are fixed modes, from coarse to fine, which are
mentioned in the table below:
Chart Scale Chart
Scale Level Accuracy
From To (m)
Z – Background (small) 1:50,000,000 1:5,000,001 15,000.00
A – Background (medium) 1:5,000,000 1:500,001 1,500.00
B – Overview 1:1,500,000 1:500,001 450.00
C – General 1:500,000 1:150,001 150.00
D – Coastal 1:150,000 1:50,001 45.00
E – Approach 1:50,000 1:15,001 15.00
F – Harbor 1:15,000 1:5,001 4.50
G – Berthing 1:5,000 1:1,501 1.50
C-Map charts are digitized with a precision of 0.3 mm. This results in
chart accuracy on the display, which is given in the table above for the
largest scale of each scale level.
Display Detail
For the details of the C-Map chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the C-Map
chart.
Show Light Info
The light information can be switched on or off.
Show Generic Text
The names of ports and areas can be switched on or off.
Show Other Text
Additional text such as names of features can be switched on or off.
Anti Cluttering
Switch override suppression (C-Map's anti-cluttering engine) on or off.
Show Chart Boundaries
The red chart boundaries in the display can be switched on or off.
Use C-Map Filters
C-Map filters are not user definable. Contact RESON B.V. in case
special requirements for C-Map filters are needed. This function
enables or disables the filters.
C-Map Filter Name
At the moment three filters are available:
- No Buoys
- No Buoys and Beacons
- No Buoys, Beacons and Piles
These filters remove the filtered items from the chart.

3.7 Installing and Using Tresco
Tresco is an Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
that optionally can be used with PDS2000. When Tresco is installed it can
be used as a layer in different views of PDS2000. The charts can be
displayed as background with the Tresco S-52 presentation library.
To get Tresco in your system, the following steps have to be taken.
1. Buy Tresco from RESON B.V.
A DVD with Tresco charts and Navigis software is supplied. Also a
Sentinel dongle is needed to open Tresco charts in PDS2000.
2. Install the DVD; the Tresco charts, the Navigis software and the
Sentinel dongle driver will be installed.
3. Run the extra file ‘SetupTrescoKernel.exe’ to get Tresco charts
working with PDS2000.
The procedure is detailed below.
3.7.1 Install Tresco Charts and Dongle Driver

The Navigis software is normally used to display the Tresco charts. The
setup from the Navigis software now be used to display the Tresco charts
in PDS2000.
a. Place the Tresco DVD in the DVD drive and run the file ‘setup.exe’.
Figure 3-42 Select language for the installation
Select the language and click on to start the installation.

b. The welcome page for the Navigis software will appear.
Figure 3-43 Welcome page of the Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard

Click on to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.
c. The next page will be the Select Destination Location page.
Figure 3-44 The installation folder for the Navigis software
Click on to continue with the installation.

d. On the next page some additional tasks can be selected which will be
performed during the installation.
Figure 3-45 Additional tasks
The option ‘Install Sentinel driver’ should be selected when the Tresco
charts are installed for the first time and no Sentinel driver is installed
yet.
The other three options are not needed for a proper installation of the
Navigis software.
Click on to continue.

e. The next page is to start the installation of the Navigis software.
Figure 3-46 Ready to install the software
Click on to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software

and the additional tasks, click on to go back to check the
settings.
f. This will be next page of the installation wizard.
Figure 3-47 The installation of the software
When the installation is finished the following window will be displayed.

Figure 3-48 The Tresco Navigis Setup Wizard is finished
Click on to finish the installation.
 g. When the installation is finished the Sentinel dongle can be inserted

and the device driver for the dongle will be installed.
3.7.2 Run SetupTrescoKernel.exe

At this stage the Tresco charts are not working in PDS2000. An extra
setup file has to be run to set all the settings so PDS2000 has access to
the Tresco charts.
Select the folder ‘Tresco’ on the CD-Rom of PDS2000 and start the file
‘SetupTrescoKernel.exe’.
a. When the file is started the first page will be the welcome page of the
wizard.
Figure 3-49 Welcome page of the Tresco Kernel Setup Wizard
Click on to continue with the setup.

b. The next page is the Select Destination Location page for the kernel.
Figure 3-50 Installation folder of the kernel
 The selected folder should be identical with the folder that is selected
for the Navigis software in Figure 3-44 on page 39.
Click on to continue with the installation.
Figure 3-51 Folder exist
This will be displayed when the same folder is selected. Click on

to continue. This setup will overwrite some existing files in
the selected folder.

c. In the next page the Sentinel driver can be selected to install as
additional task.
Figure 3-52 Additional task
Don’t select the option ‘Install Sentinel driver’ because the driver is
already installed during the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.
Click on to continue with the setup.
d. In the next page the installation of the kernel can be started.
Figure 3-53 Ready to install the kernel
Click on to start the installation of the kernel, click on

to go back to check the settings.

e. During the installation of the kernel a screen width has to be entered.
Figure 3-54 Screen width
The Tresco kernel needs to know the width of the screen to calculate
the scale to display the charts in the correct scale on the screen.
Click on after the right screen width is entered and the
installation will be finished. Click on to finish the installation of
the kernel.
When no detailed information on the Tresco chart is displayed it is
possible that the file TE.PMT, which has to be used in conjunction with
 the dongle, is not installed on the right location. Check if the file is present
on the DVD, if not contact RESON BV or Tresco about this problem. If the
file is present copy the file to the folder ‘C:\Navichart\S57’.
3.7.3 Using the Tresco Layer in PDS2000

In some dedicated plan views in PDS2000, Tresco charts can be viewed
as a layer. Click on in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context
menu to get the Layers window.
Figure 3-55 Layers window with a Tresco layer
If there is no Tresco layer in the Layers window, click on and

select from the Add Layer dialog the Tresco layer. Automatically the
properties of the Tresco layer will be opened.
If the Tresco layer is already added to the Layers window, click on
to open the properties of the existing Tresco layer.

Figure 3-56 Tresco Layer Properties
Display Detail
For the details of the Tresco chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the Tresco
chart.
Show Geographic Names
The geographic names can be switched on or off.
Show Names For Position Reporting
The labels for the position reporting can be switched on or off.
Show Buoys and Beacons
The buoys and beacons can be switched on or off. The light for the
buoys and beacons can be switched on or off with the option ’Show
Lights’.
Show Lights
The light and the labels can be switched on or off.
Show Light Descriptions
The labels for the lights can be switched on or off.
This option will only work when the option ‘Show Lights’ is on.
Show Full Length Sector Lights
The full length for some of the sector lights can be switched on or
off. Most of the lights don’t have a full length option.
This option will only work when the option ‘Show Lights’ is on.
Text Resolution
The size of the text on the charts can be defined in dpi.
Symbol Resolution
The size of the symbols on the charts can be defined in dpi.

4 Using PDS2000
4.1 Introduction
PDS2000 is designed with a Windows ‘Look and Feel’. On top of that
PDS2000 has some additional features.
Double click on ‘PDS2000 Control Center’ on the desktop to open the

Control Center of PDS2000. From the Control Center every module of
PDS2000 can be started. See for a detailed explanation of the Control
Center the chapter ‘Control Center’ on page 163.
Before the Control Center of PDS2000 is started PDS2000 will do a check
 on the Operating System running on the computer. When the OS is

Windows XP SP2 or lower the Control Center will not be started. A
message will appear on the screen.
With the options Tools > Customize… in the menu bar of the Control
Center the layout of the toolbar can be changed and shortcut keys can be
defined for several macros (see page 262).
Each module has its own menu bar, one or more toolbars and a status
bar. In each module it is possible to select a number of windows that
show the processes of the module. In PDS2000 these windows are called
views.
PDS2000 - User Manual Using PDS2000  47

4.2 Docking
Figure 4-1 Docking
A fixed location for a view is often desirable. A possibility to lock views on

a fixed location in a window is called ‘docking’.
A dedicated button is located on the title bar of each view. Clicking on
this button fixes the view in one of the docking areas. Clicking on the
button once more undocks the view again.
Another way to dock a view is giving a right click on the title bar of the
view and a context menu will appear with a number of choices.
Figure 4-2 Docking context menu
Docked
The view is fixed in one of the dock areas (see below).
Floating
The view is docked but movable. Floating views can be located
outside the window.
MDI Child
‘Multiple Document Interface’ child. The view behaves like any other
view in a Windows application.
Docked to
When pressed, the choice is given to dock a view to any of the four
dock areas (see below).
48  Using PDS2000 PDS2000 - User Manual

MDI Child as
Minimized, Maximized or Restored.
Dragging with the Ctrl-key All the type of views can be moved and resized by dragging the borders.
makes a docked view One click on the title bar brings a floating view back to the previous dock
floating. location.
4.2.1 Dock Areas
Figure 4-3 Dock areas
As shown above, the client area has four dock areas: top, bottom, left and
right. Each dock area can have multiple views.
4.3 Context Menus

Right click in a view or in a specific view area opens a context menu.
Nearly every view in PDS2000 has one. The context menus can be used
to add displays (views), to start a command or to zoom in/out in the view.
There are two types of context menus available in PDS2000, one for the
modules and one for the views. The context menu for the modules is to
add, (de)select or remove views in that module.
Figure 4-4 Context menu in the Acquisition
With the option Displays the Displays window can be opened in which
views can be added, modified or removed from the module. The option
Add Display is a quick method to add a new view to the module. Check
one of the existing views and this view will appear in the module. When a

view is unchecked this view is still available for the module but will not be
displayed in the module.
The context for the views contains commands for the view. Most of these
commands are also available through the toolbar of the view.
Figure 4-5 Context menu of a Plan View
4.4 Navigation in a 3D View

In the Acquisition, Editing and Grid Model Editor several types of 3D
Views can be opened. Because a 3D View has three dimensions, which
are shown on a two-dimensional screen, a special way to navigate in the
view is created.
4.4.1 Rotate the Data

In some editors, the left The center of the rotation is always the center of the view.
mouse button can be used
for other options, and then With the left mouse button or the mouse wheel pressed and dragging the
only the mouse wheel is mouse around will rotate the data in the view.
left to rotate the view.  Rotate the data clockwise.
Drag the mouse to the left or use the Shift + left arrow keys.
 Rotate the data counter-clockwise.

Drag the mouse to the right or use the Shift + right arrow keys.
 Rotate the bottom of the screen (near the user) upwards.
Drag the mouse to the top of the viewer or use the Shift + up arrow
keys.
 Rotate the top of the screen (far from the user) upwards.
Drag the mouse to the bottom of the viewer or use the Shift + down
arrow keys.
50  Using PDS2000 PDS2000 - User Manual

4.4.2 Shift the Data
With the Shift key + left mouse button or Shift key + mouse wheel pressed
and dragging the mouse will shift (pan) the data only in a horizontal
direction.
 Shift the data to the left.
Drag the mouse to the left or use the left arrow key.
 Shift the data to the right.
Drag the mouse to the right or use the right arrow key.
 Shift the data away from the user.
Drag the mouse to the top of the viewer or use the up arrow key.
 Shift the data towards the user.
Drag the mouse to the bottom of the viewer or use the down arrow
key.
 Shift the data down.
Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the Shift + ‘numerical –’ keys.
 Shift the data up.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the Shift + ‘numerical +’ keys.
4.4.3 Zoom in/out in the Data

With the mouse wheel, the user can zoom in or out in the data.
 Zoom out.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the ‘numerical –’ key.
 Zoom in.
Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the ‘numerical +’ key.
4.4.4 Scale the Data

With the Ctrl key + mouse wheel will modify the scale factor of the Z-axis
of the data.
If the scale factor > 1, the  Increase the scale factor.
color of the vertical axis of Scroll the mouse wheel down or use the Ctrl + ‘numerical +’ keys.
the grid will change to red.
 Decrease the scale factor.
Scroll the mouse wheel up or use the Ctrl + ‘numerical –‘ keys with a
minimum scale factor of one.
4.4.5 Center the Data

Double click with the left mouse button or the mouse wheel on a location
with data and that location will move to the center of the view. It will not
work on the sea level.

5 Starting PDS2000
5.1 Introduction
The Control Center should From the Control Center every module of PDS2000 can be started. But
always be running while before one of the modules is started a project, an application type and a
PDS2000 is used. configuration have to be created or selected. The Control Center does not
start when no project is available.
5.1.1 Project
A project can be an area to be surveyed, a harbor to be made, a river that
has to be dredged to a navigable depth, etc. It may require the
employment of one or more vessels (survey vessels, dredgers, work
ships, excavators) and each vessel can have a special task in the project.
A project has the information on the method of measuring and all the
information necessary to do the measurements.
PDS2000 stores all the details of a project in one folder.
5.1.2 Application Type

In a project, one or more tasks can be carried out. A task can be a vessel
surveying the seafloor, a dredger dredging a river mouth, etc. Such a task
is called an application type in PDS2000.
The application type determines how PDS2000 behaves.
5.1.3 Configuration
A configuration describes the way an application type is carried out. It
contains the used vessel(s), the layout used for the Acquisition and (if
present) Presentation(s), how events are used and alarms are managed.
Multiple configurations are possible for all application types.
Any object that carries sensors is defined as a vessel in PDS2000. Some
application types can handle multiple vessels, and each vessel can have
multiple sensors. This makes it necessary to have a set-up for each
vessel in an application type. The vessel set-up is called the Vessel
Configuration (see page 91).
PDS2000 - User Manual Starting PDS2000  53

5.2 Project Structure
Each project contains of one or more application types (measuring
methods). Each application type has at least one, but may have multiple
configurations.
By selecting a project in the acquisition bar, followed by selecting a
configured application type, it is possible to choose between
configurations in case more than one was made.
Project 1 Project 2
Application Application Application Application

Type 1 Type x Type 1 Type x
Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration

1.1 x.1 1.1 x.1
Configuration Configuration Configuration

x.2 1.2 x.2
Configuration Configuration
1.n x.n
Figure 5-1 Project structures
There are three different ways to make or adjust a project.

1. Existing projects can be amended and adapted for a new
measurement. The configuration can be changed if necessary. By
selecting Acquisition > Configuration from the menu bar or by clicking
on in the toolbar of the Control Center the configuration is opened.
The project configuration can be accessed by selecting Edit > Project
Configuration from the menu bar or by clicking on in the toolbar in
the Control Center.
2. Open the New Project Wizard with File > New Project… to create a
new project.
When a project is copied
from one system to
3. Existing projects can be copied in the project folder and if necessary
another system the related with the logged data. This method is also usable for copying projects
files in the Projects from an office to another location and vice versa. Copying the projects
Common Files folder has can be done with Windows Explorer. The Control Center needs to be
to be copied manually. restarted before the added projects can be selected.
5.3 Projects Common Files

In the PDS2000 projects directory is a map created called ‘Projects
Common Files’. In this map vessel setups will be stored. If a vessel (or
crane) is used for several projects, most of the time the same setup will
be used.
54  Starting PDS2000 PDS2000 - User Manual

When for the same vessel a new project is created, the common
 information from the vessel will be copied from the ‘Projects Common
Files’ map. The changes made in the vessel configuration will be copied
back the common information in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map.
See also the Project The common information contains the following items:
Common tab in the
Explorer (see page 214).  Geometry information.
 Vessel contours, vessel wireframes and 3D studio models.
 Equipment setup.
 Crane configurations with the calibration results for (rope) excavators.

 Pipe configurations with the calibration results for trailing suction
hoppers; the pipe configurations are stored in the crane configuration
file.
 Draught tables and hopper tables for the trailing suction hoppers.
 Setup of the pages for the Numerics – Standard view in the
Acquisition.
 Import and export configurations.
 Events.
 These common information files are not stored in the project folder
anymore. For existing projects the files are not updated in the project
folder, but are stored in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map. For projects
 created with the PDS2000 3.2.0.0 version or later the files are only
available in the ‘Projects Common Files’ map.
5.4 New Project Wizard

If PDS2000 is started for the first time, there will be no project selected. It
is then possible to start the new project wizard directly after the start up.
Figure 5-2 Select Project window with the option Run the New Project wizard
checked
If there are no projects available in the project folder, then an error

window will come up. Click on in the error window and the Select

Project window will be opened. Check in this window the option Run the
New Project wizard and click on to start the project wizard.
If PDS2000 is already started with an existing project, the New Project
wizard can be started from the menu of the Control Center with File >
New Project…. That action starts the wizard’s first dialog window.
Figure 5-3 Start of the new project wizard
On the first page a choice has to be made, start from scratch with an
empty project or use an existing project as template. When an existing
 project is selected, all relevant files from the existing project are copied
into the new project. The logdata subfolders, grid models, CUBE models,
dtm XML files, logdata file sets and sound velocity profiles files are not
 copied to the new project. The new project can then be checked and
changed with the wizard.
As this is a wizard, each dialog window has that will close the
current page and will open the next one. The last page will have .
It is recommended to step through all pages of the wizard. Click on
to stop the wizard at that page without writing the required files
into the project folder. So it is advisable not to click on but to
finish the wizard even without entering data in the pages. That way a
project is made and data can be entered at a later stage.

5.4.1 Project Configuration
Figure 5-4 Project Configuration window
The Project Configuration With both choices in the previous page, the next page gives the Project
can be modified with Edit > Configuration window. When a project was copied the inputs fields
Project Configuration from contain data from the old project, when an empty project was started
the menu bar or with these fields contain default values.
from the toolbar in the
Control Center. In both cases it is advised to check each possible input and the
corresponding input fields. All possible inputs with their input fields are
detailed below.
5.4.1.1 Description
Figure 5-5 Project description
A project description is not compulsory and for project reference purposes

only. All or one of the lines may be left blank.

5.4.1.2 Units
Figure 5-6 Units dialog
The project and all computations in the project use the selected units.
These units are only for display purposes; PDS2000 has its own internal
units for logging the data.
5.4.1.3 Coordinate System
Figure 5-7 Coordinate System information
Click on to select one of the existing coordinate systems that are

available in the database (see page 72) or click on to open the
coordinate system wizard to create a new coordinate system (see page
73). The button is only available when the coordinate system is

created by the user. The coordinate systems which are already created
by PDS2000 cannot be modified.
5.4.1.4 Formats
Figure 5-8 Formats dialog
The project formats are used to present computation results throughout

the project.
Chart coordinates can be shown in grid or geographical coordinates. The
selection above is for the standard displays.
5.4.1.5 Log Files
Figure 5-9 Log Files settings

Enter for Log directory the required name of the folder that has to be used
as logging directory. The default name is ‘LogData’ and will be a sub-
folder of the project folder. In case a different name and/or path are
wanted, enter the name (with the complete path) of the desired folder.
The folder will be created by PDS2000 on the given location.
To activate the backup Check the option Use backup log directory when the user wants a copy of
logging for the logdata and the logdata files and / or the S7K files. The backup log file is made
S7K files check the option simultaneous with the standard logging, so the file size increases during
Enable Backup log in the logging. Click on to select or change the log directory for
Logging page for these file
the backup. The directory will be displayed in the box.
formats (see page 118 and
page 122). For the log file names the user can choose how the log files are called.
The first option, Automatic log file names, is the default option with the
standard PDS2000 log file names (see example in the dialog).
The second option, User defined log file names, is the option where the
user can create a log file name with some standard items and/or with a
user text. The different items that can be selected for the log file name are
 Vessel name
The name of the vessel configuration in the Vessels page of the
Configuration (see page 66). The vessel name cannot be unchecked
and will be always in the log file name.
 Survey type
This is the name of the application type that is selected for the project
(see page 64).
 Run line name
The name of the active runline file as selected in the Runline tab of the
Guidance page (see page 138).
 Start date
The date when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
When no start time is  Start time
selected, a sequence The time when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
number will be used to
differentiate the different  User text
log files. Text that can be added to the log file name. Enter behind the option
User text: the text that has to be added to the log file name.
Check the items that have to be in the log file name. The order of the
items in the log file name can be changed by using or .
Select the item that has to be moved and use one of the buttons to move
the item upwards or downwards.
Between the different items in the log file name a separator is needed.
Selected for the option Separator the right separator (- _ . ,).
At the bottom the option Replace all dots in the log file name will replace
the dots with a dash (or an underscore when a dash is selected as
separator. This means that all the dots, also in the name of the runline,
will be replaced.
With the log file name will be reset to the default log file setting.
In the Acquisition it is possible to change the name of the log file name. If
 the option is active in the Acquisition and a new logdata file is created the
user can specify a different log file name (see page 257).

5.4.1.6 File History
Figure 5-10 Selected file types for a backup
Historical data can be stored in the ‘Backup’ folder in the project. For all
the file types that are checked in the list a copy is made when a new
logging file is opened. The copy will only be made if the file is changed
after the last backup.
Check the option Keep history of files for Replayer and Editing if the
backups have to be made. The backups are used in the Replayer (see
page 389) and in the Editing (see page 395) when a log data file is
opened. The log data file will use the available files from the backup to
show the information. For instance when the color table is changed after
the data is logged; the color table that was used during the logging will be
used if ‘Color Tables’ is checked for a backup.
To avoid that the backup folder will be overloaded with backups, a
maximum number of days can be set. If a backup is older it will be
removed from the backup folder.
5.4.1.7 Disk Space
Figure 5-11 Set when the oldest log data files have to be deleted
It is possible that a lot of information is logged during a survey, for

instance two sonar’s with snippets and side scan data, and then the hard
disk will be full in a short period. To avoid this problem the user can define
when the oldest log data files are removed (deleted) from the hard disk.
Two different options can be used to define the criteria to delete the
oldest log data files.
With the option When files are older than the files older than the number
of days set will be deleted.

With the option When free disk space is lower than the oldest files will be
deleted when the free hard disk space is lower than the specified GB’s.
The user can select one of the option or both. When both options are
selected then when one of the two options is valid the oldest log data files
will be deleted.
It is advisable to select always the option When free disk space is lower
 than because if the number of days is too high then it is possible that the
hard disk is full before the oldest log data files are deleted. A full hard disk
will stop the system.
 It is very important to backup the old log data files before one of the
options becomes valid; otherwise the log data files are lost.
5.4.1.8 Alert Sounds
Figure 5-12 Select the alerts sounds for the alarms
If external speakers are connected to the PC the alert sounds can be

used. These three sounds are .WAV files and are placed in the PDS2000
tab of the Explorer.
For the three severities are a low, intermediate and high sound created.
Click on to hear the selected sound.
If no external speakers are available, the internal speaker of the computer
can be used to generate beeps. Select the option Use beeps and three
different predefined beeps will be used.
The different severities for the alarms can be set for each alarm in the
Conditions window for the Alarms (see page 129).
5.4.1.9 Options
Figure 5-13 Select the options
This page will show options that can be important to display or compute
data.
Show multibeam beams with no bottom detection
In PDS2000 the beams that have no bottom detection get a 0 (zero)
for the beam Z. By default the zero beams will not be displayed in the
views of PDS2000. When the user wants to see the zero beams then
he can check this option.
Lat/Lon on Local Spheroid – Lat/Lon on Satellite Spheroid
The user can select by selecting one of these options which latitude
and longitude are displayed in PDS2000.

Lat and Lon mean the latitude and longitude on the local spheroid and
Sat Lat and Sat Lon on the satellite spheroid (normally WGS’84).
5.4.1.10 GPS Time Parameters
Figure 5-14 Leap seconds as a GPS time parameter
This page will show the settings for the GPS time parameters. At the
moment only one setting is available.
st Leap Seconds
From 1 of January 2013 The leap seconds for GPS receivers with a GPS time. The leap
the number of leap
seconds is 16.
seconds are used to correct the GPS time to UTC time.
The leap seconds as set here will be used through PDS2000.
5.4.1.11 Sonar Target Parameters
Figure 5-15 Sonar Targets file selection and list with classifications
Select or create in this page the active sonar targets file which can be
used in the Acquisition, Presentations, Replay and Editing.
The sonar targets can be classified. The user can make his own list of
classifications which can be used to classify the sonar targets. It is always
possible to classify a sonar target with a classification that is not in the list.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets view
in the Chapter Views (see page 376).

5.4.1.12 Icon Images
Figure 5-16 Icon Images file selection
Select or create in this page the active icon images file which can be used
at the moment only in the Acquisition, Presentations, and Replay.
For more information about the sonar targets see the option Add Icon
Image in the chapter Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu on page
352.
5.4.2 Selecting the Application Type
Figure 5-17 Select Application Type
From the list of application types, select the one that describes the project
the best. The type and number of possible sensors and computations that

can be used in PDS2000 is set by the application type. The availability of
application types depends on the purchased options that are laid down in
the dongle.
5.4.3 Run the Configuration Wizard
Figure 5-18 Run Configuration Wizard page
By checking Run the configuration wizard the wizard goes over in a menu
where the configuration can be saved. When a name is given, click on
and the wizard will continue with the configuration name and the
vessels page (see below).
Is Run the configuration wizard not checked then by clicking on
the wizard will be finished and the configuration will not be saved. A new
configuration has to be made with the menu option Acquisition > New >
Configuration….

5.4.4 Vessel Selection
Figure 5-19 Vessels page to add or select the vessels
Depending on the application type, one or more vessel(s) can be entered

on the page and the used vessels will be checked.
With a vessel can be added to the project and with the
vessel configuration of the selected vessel will be opened (see for the
vessel configuration the chapter ‘Vessel Configuration’ on page 91).
Local
All the vessels from the Click on to open the Add Local Vessel window. Select one of
projects on the local the available vessel configurations.
computer and all the
Click on to create a new vessel configuration. The vessel
common vessels are
available in Add Local wizard will start with the Vessel Name page where a new name for the
Vessel. vessel has to be defined and will continue through all the pages of the
vessel configuration (see page 91).
Figure 5-20 Select a vessel (configuration) or create a new vessel
Remote
Vessels which are created on another location, that means for
instance on another ship, can be added or edited. This other ship can
be monitored by reading the data from that ship. To get a connection
with the other ship the Control Center on the remote vessel has to be
running.

Figure 5-21 Select a Remote Vessel and download the vessel
configuration
 Give the hostname or the IP-address of the remote vessel. The port
704 will be used to get the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel. Do not change this port number!!
During the acquisition the sensor data from the remote vessel can be
read, but because of the data load an update rate can be set. Check
the option Use limited data update rate and set the update rate (in the
example above on 5 seconds).
Click on to download the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel.
If the vessel configuration on the remote vessel is changed or the
update rate has to be changed, click on under ‘Remote’ to
download the new vessel configuration or modify the update rate.
5.4.5 Layout
Figure 5-22 Layouts page of the configuration
The layouts page shows where the real time modules are displayed. The
module Control Center is by default on the local computer. The
acquisition server and presentations can be on the local computer or on
another computer in the network.
Click on to add new presentations to the list. Select one of the
modules and click on or just click on to go to the Layout
dialog.

Figure 5-23 Layout dialog
If the layout is not running on the local computer (main PDS2000) but on
a remote computer, give the name of the remote computer or select with
the computer in the network.
The name of the layout can be selected. Click on to create a new
empty layout. This empty layout can be filled with views in the Acquisition
or Presentation. It is better not to use the same name for the layout in the
Acquisition and in the Presentation.
The UI (User Interface) profile is always the default. The user can defined
a UI profile where his own toolbar and ‘shortcut keys’ settings are saved.
Click on , give a new name for the profile and make the module
according the wishes of the user. A new UI profile starts always with the
default settings for the shortcuts and the toolbar.
5.4.6 Events
Figure 5-24 Events page of the configuration
On this page the events can be defined. Three automatic eventing modes
In the real time mode are available, conditions can be set and an event string can be defined.
manually eventing is
possible with F6.
For more detailed information about events see chapter ‘Events’ on page
155.

5.4.7 Alarms
Figure 5-25 Alarms page in the configuration
On the alarms page real time alarms can be defined. The alarms are
related to the configuration and will be active for each vessel in the
configuration.
Vessel specific alarms can be set in the vessel configuration (see page
129).
When an alarm is added a Conditions window, similar to the one in the
Vessel Alarms on page 129, is opened. In this window the alarm can be
defined.
If the condition for an alarm is not known yet leave the alarms page
empty. When an alarm is required on a measurement it is easy to make a
condition in the Acquisition with Edit > Alarms (see page 254). That way,
alarms can be checked immediately.

5.4.8 Closing the Wizard
Figure 5-26 Last page of the new project wizard
Click on in the alarms page to close the wizard and once more on
in the ‘Wizard is Finished’ page.
5.5 Create Project from Log Data

If the user has only a standard PDS2000 logging file available, it is
possible to create a new project with the project configuration and the
vessel configuration from the logging file.
To create a new project select File > Create Project from Log Data… from
the menu bar in the Control Center and a standard Open dialog will be
opened. Select in this dialog the logging file for the new project.
Give in the Project Name dialog a new project name and click on
and the new project will be created.
The selected logging file will be copied from the original location to the
LogData folder in the new created project.
At the moment a configuration file is not created, because the relevant
 information for the configuration is not available in the logging file. The
user has to create a new configuration with the configuration wizard.
Select Acquisition > New > Configuration…from the menu bar in the
Control Center to start the wizard and the Configuration Name window will
be opened. Give a name for the configuration and click on to
continue the wizard. The wizard will open sequentially the vessels page
(see page 66), the layouts page (see page 67), the events page (see
page 68) and the alarms page (see page 69).

6 Coordinate System
6.1 Introduction
In PDS2000, a coordinate system database is available where for the
most common countries the standard coordinate systems are predefined.
It is also possible for the user to add new coordinate systems to the
database.
The active coordinate system has to be selected in the Project
Configuration (see page 58).
A new coordinate system can be created in the Project Configuration and
in the PDS2000 tab of the Explorer (see page 215). The new coordinate
systems will be stored in a separate database, where all the user defined
coordinate systems are available.
In the PDS2000 tab of the Explorer two different databases are available,
It is not possible to modify the pdsgeodatabase and the pdsusergeobase. The pdsgeodatabase is
the predefined coordinate the database with all the predefined coordinate systems and the
systems. pdsusergeobase is the database with all the user defined coordinate
systems.
In this chapter will be discussed how to select, to create and/or modify a
coordinate system through the Project Configuration. For creating and/or
modifying a coordinate system in the ‘Explorer – General’ the same
dialogs and windows will be used.
Select in the Control Center the menu item Edit > Project Configuration or
click on in the toolbar and select in the Project Configuration window
the option ‘Coordinate System’.
PDS2000 - User Manual Coordinate System  71

Figure 6-1 Project Configuration with the option Coordinate System
6.2 Project Coordinate System

The coordinate system that has to be used in the project can be selected
in the Project Configuration window, see Figure 6-1.
If another coordinate system has to be used, click on and select
one of the existing coordinate systems in the Select Coordinate System
window (see page 74). The predefined coordinate systems are specified
per country and the coordinate systems which are created by the user are
in the group ‘User Defined Coordinate Systems’ or in a group created by
the user.
If none of the coordinate systems can be used for the project, a new
coordinate system has to be created with the Coordinate System
Wizard(see below).
72  Coordinate System PDS2000 - User Manual

6.3 Coordinate System Wizard
Click on in the Project Configuration to create a new coordinate
system and the coordinate system wizard will be started.
6.3.1 New Coordinate System
Figure 6-2 New Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
Give a name for the new coordinate system and check the option Based
on existing coordinate system if an existing coordinate system has to be
used as a start for the new coordinate system.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard.
If the option Based on existing coordinate system is checked the next
page is the Select Coordinate System page (see below) to select from the
list an existing coordinate system.
If the option is not checked the user can select a satellite and local
ellipsoid from the list in the Ellipsoids page (see page 75).

6.3.2 Select Coordinate System
Figure 6-3 Select Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The base of an existing On this page the user can select one of the existing coordinate systems
coordinate system is as a base for the new coordinate system. All the coordinate systems as
always both ellipsoids. The defined in both databases (pdsgeodatabase and pdsusergeobase) are
other settings of the available in the list of coordinate systems.
system can be modified.
If an existing coordinate system is selected, click on to go to the
next page of the wizard. The next page will be the Datum Transformation
Parameters page (see page 78).

6.3.3 Ellipsoids
Figure 6-4 Ellipsoids page of the Coordinate System Wizard
This page will be opened if the user create a new coordinate system that
is not based on an existing coordinate system.
It is not possible to create Click on to select a satellite ellipsoid and a local ellipsoid from the
a new ellipsoid. list of ellipsoids.
Figure 6-5 Select an ellipsoid from the list of available ellipsoids in PDS2000
If both ellipsoids are selected, click on to go to the next page of

the wizard. This page will be the Datum Transformation page (see below).

6.3.4 Datum Transformation
Figure 6-6 Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The user can choose to use an existing datum transformation or create a

new datum transformation that can be based on an existing datum
transformation or not.
If the option Use existing datum transformation is selected the parameters
of the selected datum transformation cannot be modified. With option
New datum transformation in combination with the option Based on
existing datum transformation an existing datum transformation can be
modified.
Select only the option New datum transformation if a complete new datum
transformation has to be created.
If only the option New datum transformation is checked, the next page will
be the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see page 78).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Datum
Transformation page (see below).

6.3.5 Select Datum Transformation
Figure 6-7 Select Datum Transformation page of the Coordinate System

Wizard
On this page only the datum transformations that are possible between
the two selected ellipsoids of the new coordinate system will be available.
If one of the datum transformations is selected, click on to go to
the next page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the
Datum Transformation page (see page 76) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing datum transformation was checked the next
page will be the Geoid Model page (see page 79).
For the other options the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see
page 78) will be opened.

6.3.6 Datum Transformation Parameters
Figure 6-8 Datum Transformation Parameters of the Coordinate System

Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Datum Transformation page (see page
76) the option New datum transformation is checked. If also the option
Based on existing datum transformation is checked, first the Select Datum
Transformation page (see page 77) is opened before the Datum
Transformation Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a new name for the to be created new datum transformation.
Method
At the moment the only available method is the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Shift X, Y and Z
The translations in the X, Y and Z direction, to translate from the
satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Rotation X, Y and Z
The rotations around the X, Y and Z axis, to rotate from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Scale factor (ppm)
The scale factor between the two ellipsoids in parts per million (ppm).
Prime meridian shift Greenwich (deg)
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
File name
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Description
The user can enter a short description for the new datum
transformation.
If all the parameters are entered, click on to go to the next page
of the wizard. The next page will be the Geoid Model page (see below).

6.3.7 Geoid Model
Figure 6-9 Geoid Model page of the Coordinate System Wizard
In this page a geoid model can be selected for the coordinate system.
The geoid model will correct the satellite ellipsoid height to a local height.
The methods available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest geoid model for Belgium.
DeMin
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
Denmark DVR90
The latest geoid model for Denmark.
EGM2008
The Earth Gravitational Model 2008 is a spherical harmonic model of
the earth’s gravitational potential.
Grid Model (Grid coordinates)
If this option is selected, a geoid model grid model can be selected
The geoid model grid model with grid projection coordinates (easting and northing).
has to be created in the grid
model editor (see page 524). Grid Model (Satellite coordinates)
If this option is selected, a geoid model grid model can be selected
with satellite ellipsoid coordinates (latitude and longitude in WGS’84).
Norway
For Norway the latest geoid model file is available: HREF2008a.
Null Model
A geoid model with a 0 (zero) correction. This model can be used to
get the GPS antenna height as a local height.

OSGM02 – GB
The latest geoid model for England, Scotland and Wales.
This geoid model can only be used in a coordinate system with
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is
that this geoid model contains the National Grid coordinates and not
the latitude and longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the
other geoid models do.
OSGM02 – NI
The latest geoid model for Northern Ireland.
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
OSGM02 – RoI
The latest geoid model for Republic of Ireland.
 ETRS89 – GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
Quasigeod EGG97
The European Gravimetric Geoid based on all high-resolution gravity
and terrain data available in 1997.
If this option is selected, a BIN file can be selected. This BIN file is
standard not available in PDS2000, it has to be order. The BIN file has
to be placed in the folder Project Common Files.
RDNAPTRANS2004
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest geoid model for The Netherlands.
Sweden
For Sweden the following geoid models are available: SWEN01L,
SWEN08_RH2000 and SWEN08_RH70.
US State Plane
The geoid models for the United States on the NAD83 State Planes.
PDS2000 will detect which geoid model has to be used.
At the moment PDS2000 uses the GEOID06 and GEOID09 model for
Alaska and the GEIOD03 and GEOID09 models for all other states.
Select 2003, 2006 or 2009 and the right geoid model will be used.
When for instance 2006 is selected and the location is not Alaska
PDS2000 will select the state plane from 2003.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Unit page (see below).

6.3.8 Unit
Figure 6-10 Unit page of the Coordinate System Wizard
Select an unit that will be used for the projection parameters. Because
this unit is used for the projection it will become the system unit for the
project.
Click on to create a new unit type and the New Unit dialog will be
opened.
Figure 6-11 New Unit dialog to create a new unit type
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created unit type.
Meters per unit
Enter the number of meters per one new unit.
Name suffix
Give a suffix for the new unit type, like a ‘m’ for meters.
If the right unit is selected or create, click on to go to the next
page of the wizard. The next page will be the Projection page (see
below).

6.3.9 Projection
Figure 6-12 Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard
The user can choose to use an existing projection or create a new

projection that can be based on an existing projection or not.
If the option Use existing projection is selected the parameters of the
selected projection cannot be modified. With the option New projection in
combination with the option Based on existing projection an existing
projection can be modified.
Select only the option New projection if a complete new projection has to
be created.
If only the option New projection is checked, the next page will be the
Projection Parameters page (see page 84).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Projection page
(see below).

6.3.10 Select Projection
Figure 6-13 Select Projection page of the Coordinate System Wizard
On this page all the projections will be available. If a projection is selected

with a different unit as selected before an error message will appear
where is mentioned that an other unit has to be selected if this selected
projection has to be used.
If one of the projections is selected, click on to go to the next
page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the Projection
page (see page 82) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing projection was checked the next page will be the
Post Correction page (see page 85).
For the other options the Projection Parameters page (see page 84) will
be opened.

6.3.11 Projection Parameters
Figure 6-14 Projection Parameters page of the Coordinate System Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Projection page (see page 82) the
option New projection is checked. If also the option Based on existing
projection is checked, first the Select Projection page (see page 83) is
opened before the Projection Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created projection.
Unit
The unit that will be used cannot be changed on this page. If the unit
has to be changed click on to go back to the Unit page (see
page 81).
Method
In PDS2000 several projection methods are available.
 Cassini-Soldner
 Hotine Oblique Mercator (A)
 Hotine Oblique Mercator (B)
 Lambert 1 Parallel
 Lambert 2 Parallel
 Mercator
 RD (is only valid with the unit Meters)
 Transverse Mercator
 Stereographic
 Universal Transverse Mercator (is only valid with the unit
Meters)
The number of parameters on this page will depend on the projection
method that is selected. The values of the parameters False Easting and
False Northing have to be in the unit, which is mentioned on this page.

If all the parameters are entered, click on to get to the next page
of the wizard. This next page will be the Post Correction page (see
below).
6.3.12 Post Correction
Figure 6-15 Post Correction page of the Coordinate System Wizard
It is possible that a position calculated on the local grid not match with the
actual X, Y and Z for that point. With a post correction this point can be
moved so it match with the actual grid coordinates. This post correction is
only applied when a calculation is done from the local ellipsoid to the local
grid or vice versa.
On this page two ways to add a post correction are possible, manual or
with a model. The manual post correction is always a fixed shift in all the
X, Y and/or Z coordinates, while with post correction with a model for
each point a different shift can be used.
The models available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest post correction model for Belgium.
Denmark DVR90
The latest post correction model for Denmark.
HARN
The latest correction model for the United States.
If HARN or OSTN02 is In theory is HARN a correction on the local latitude and longitude and
selected, PDS2000 will correct not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS2000 the only place for a post
the local ellipsoid coordinates correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
before the coordinates are
projected on the grid.
OSTN02
The latest post correction model for England, Scotland and Wales.
In theory is OSTN02 a correction on the local latitude and longitude
and not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS2000 the only place for a
post correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
 This correction can only be used in a coordinate system with ETRS89

– GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is that this
correction are specific calculated for this coordinate system.

RDNAPTRANS2004
The old post correction model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest post correction model for The Netherlands.
Click on to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Save Coordinate System page (see below).
6.3.13 Save Coordinate System
Figure 6-16 Save Coordinate System page of the Coordinate System Wizard
A new coordinate system cannot be saved in the group with the

predefined coordinate systems, it has to be saved in the always existing
User Defined Coordinate Systems or in a group which is created by the
user.
Select where the new coordinate system has to be saved, click on
to go to the last page of the wizard, the Coordinate System
Overview page (see below).

6.3.14 Coordinate System Overview
Figure 6-17 Coordinate System Overview page of the Coordinate System

Wizard
On this page an overview is given of all the settings for the new
coordinate system.
Click on to check the new coordinate system by entering a
known point in the Geo Calculator (see page 194).
If the new coordinate system is accepted, click on to save the
coordinate system in the group as selected by the user. If one of the
settings in the overview is not right, click on to go back the
relevant page in the wizard to change the settings. It is also possible to
save the coordinate system and use the Edit option (see below) to
change the coordinate system.
6.4 Edit Coordinate System

It is possible to modify the selected coordinate system in the Project
Configuration window (see Figure 6-1 on page 72). Click on in
the Project Configuration window to open the Edit Coordinate System
window.
If the coordinate system is created by the user or is created with the
information from an old project, it is possible to modify the complete
 coordinate system. For the pre-defined (country) coordinate systems only
the geoid model can be modified!!
When for a pre-defined coordinate system a different geoid model is
 selected the coordinate system cannot be saved. It will be available is the

project, but it cannot be selected from the database. If this coordinate
system has to be used for other purposes it is better to make a new (user
 defined) coordinate system that is based on the existing pre-defined

coordinate system (see page 73) with a different geoid model. This user
defined coordinate system is stored in the database.
This window can also be opened in the ‘Explorer – PDS2000’ (see
pagexxx). Select in the Coordinate System Databases the file

pdsusergeobase and click on the option Edit in the context menu to open
the Select Coordinate System window.
Figure 6-18 Select Coordinate System window with only the user defined
coordinate systems
Select one of the user defined coordinate systems and click on

to open the Edit Coordinate System Window.
Figure 6-19 Edit Coordinate System window with an user defined coordinate
system
This window gives an overview of the selected user defined coordinate

system. In this window it is possible to modify the coordinate system.

From the pre-defined coordinate systems only the geoid model can be
modified, the user defined coordinate systems can be modified
 completely. For all pre-defined coordinate system only the geoid models
EGM2008, Grid Model (Grid and Satellite coordinates) and Null Model are
available and for some systems also the local geoid model, if available.
For different geoid models first the method or country has to be selected
 before a geoid model file, if needed, can be selected. This is for instance
valid for Sweden and US State Plane.
When a geoid model is added to a pre-defined coordinate systems, the
coordinate system cannot be stored in the geodatabase. In the project the
 coordinate system can be used. But when the user wants to use it in the
Geo Calculator or in other projects it is better to make an user defined
coordinate systems based on the pre-defined and add the geoid model.
The different parts of this window have the same functionality as the
different pages in the coordinate system wizard (see page 73).
It is possible to select a different ellipsoid for the coordinate system. But
the consequence is then that also the datum transformation parameters
and the name has to be modified.
If the parameters of a datum transformation are changed and the name of
 the datum transformation not, then when the coordinate system is saved
with the datum transformation is also changed in the coordinate
systems where the same name for the datum transformation is used.
There is also a relation between the selection of the projection and the
unit. Because the parameters of for instance the Easting and Northing in
the projection are specified in the unit that is selected for the coordinate
system.

7 Vessel Configuration
7.1 Introduction
PDS2000 always needs a vessel configuration before the Acquisition can
be started. The vessel configuration will contain all the settings which are
necessary to do all the measurements.
Before a vessel configuration can be made a project has to be setup as
discussed in chapter ‘Starting PDS2000’ on page 53.
7.2 Setup a Vessel Configuration

There are several ways in PDS2000 to create or modify a vessel
configuration.
1. In the New Project Wizard a new vessel configuration can be created
in the Vessel Selection (see page 66).
2. In the ‘Explorer – Project – Vessels’ a vessel configuration can be
created (option New File) or the existing one (option Edit) can be
modified (see ‘Project Database’ on page 219).
3. With Acquisition > Configuration from the menu bar or with from
the toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window is opened
and in the tab Vessel the existing vessel configuration can be edited.
Click on to view and/or modify the settings of the vessel
configuration.
Click on to open the Add Local Vessel window. Click on
to start the vessel wizard to create a new vessel
configuration.
4. With Acquisition > New > Vessel… from the menu bar of the Control
Center a vessel wizard will be started to create a vessel configuration.
Use and to go through the vessel configuration
wizard. The tabs are not visible.
This vessel wizard is identical with the vessel wizard that can be
started in the Vessel Selection of the New Project Wizard (see page
66).
The vessel configuration editor will be used to explain the setup of the
vessel configuration. Each page in the vessel wizard is a tab in the vessel
configuration editor. In the editor are even more tabs available then pages
in the wizard.
PDS2000 - User Manual Vessel Configuration  91

7.2.1 New Vessel Configuration
With one of the above mentioned methods a new vessel configuration can
be created. The first page of the wizard is the Vessel Name page.
Figure 7-1 First page of the new vessel wizard
A new name for the vessel configuration has to be entered. The user can
choose to create a complete new vessel configuration or to use an
existing vessel configuration as template.
When the option Use existing vessel as template is checked, the user can
select from all the vessel configurations that are available in the Projects
Common Files map.
 Click on to continue with the wizard. It can take a while before the
next page of the wizard will be opened. The reason is that PDS2000 first
check if the new vessel configuration name exists or not. If the name
already exists an error message will appear and the user can enter a
different name.
The next pages of the wizard will be explained with the separate tab
pages below.
92  Vessel Configuration PDS2000 - User Manual

7.3 Geometry
Figure 7-2 Geometry page of the vessel configuration
The first page in the vessel configuration is the vessel geometry with the
vessel visualization, vessel draught, vessel turn radius, sea level, vertical
position and the offsets on the vessel.
Visualization mode 2D
Select as 2D vessel contour a vessel contour (made in PDS2000) or a
vessel Wireframe; after that select the file for the selected
A vessel wireframe is a 3D visualization.
drawing of the vessel and
can be used in the 3D
Click on to create a new vessel contour in PDS2000 or click
views in PDS2000. It is on to open the selected vessel contour. In both cases the
also possible to display the vessel contour editor will be opened (see page 95). For a survey
wireframe in the standard vessel usually only a top view is entered.
2D views. These Select the active shape (vessel contour) that will be displayed in the
wireframes should be 3D Acquisition.
DXF files.
Visualization mode 3D
Select as 3D vessel contour a vessel Wireframe or a 3D Studio file;
after that select the file for the selected visualization.
Vessel
Draught
The draught is the distance from the waterline to the deepest point
on the vessel and is always positive. It is used in computations
such as depth below keel.

Turn radius
Turn radius of the vessel is used to compute the lead-in lines (see
page 138) and for autopilot outputs.
Sea level
Sea level is the distance from the CGP (Center of Gravity Point) on
the vessel to the waterline and will be positive when the waterline is
above the CGP.
Center of Gravity Point Offset
Enter the offset from the CRP (Common Reference Point) to the
CGP (Center of Gravity Point).
When RTK is used the This offset is needed when tide is used in combination with sea
Center of Gravity Point level and the CRP is far away from the CRP; for instance the CRP
Offset is not relevant. is on the bow where the multibeam with its sensors is located.
Vessel vertical position
Select that the selected vessel is above water level (Surface) or under
water (Subsurface). PDS2000 has to know how the depths have to be
calculated. For a surface vessel the measured depth is the actual
depth but for a subsurface vessel the measured depth has to be
combined with the depth of the vessel (for instance a ROV or an AUV)
to get the actual depth.
Offsets
This is just a list of offsets, An offset is a point of interest on the vessel, such as the location of a
at a later stage offsets are
assigned to the sensors.
sensor. The ’Zero Offset’ is a PDS2000 pre-defined offset, the CRP
and cannot be changed.
Click on for an overview of the vessel contour and offsets. A top-
and a starboard view of the vessel are shown. If no vessel contour is
available, a default contour will be used.
PDS2000 uses a vessel coordinate system. This system is centered
around an arbitrary point on the vessel. This point is called the CRP and
has the coordinates X=0, Y=0 and Z=0. The units used are the PDS2000
computation units. Offsets and contour points are entered relative to the
CRP, using the sign convention as shown in the figure below. Sensor
offsets are entered from the CRP to the sensor.
+Z
Top
-X +Y
Port Bow
CRP
X=0
Y=0
Z=0
-Y +X
Stern Starboard
-Z
Bottom
Figure 7-3 Vessel coordinate system

7.3.1 Vessel Contour
Figure 7-4 Vessel Contour editor
The options in the right top panel of the vessel contour editor are:
Name: Point(x)
Add the X and Y value for point(x) in the vessel coordinate system.
Type
Point. Select this type if point(x) is not a start of line or a start of
polygon.
Start of Line. Select this type if point(x) is the first point of the line. Until
a new start of line or start of polygon is selected all points after this
point will be part of the line.
Start of Polygon. Select this type if point(x) is the first point of the
polygon. Until a new start of line or start of polygon is selected all
points after this point will be part of the polygon. The polygon will be
solid.
The buttons and options on the right side in the editor are:
Add a new point to the contour. The added point comes always at the
end of the list.
Insert a new point above the location of the cursor in the list.
Delete the selected point from the list.
Select the view side of the vessel contour; top, bottom, left, right, front
and back.
,
Zoom Extents, Zoom In / Out.
Click on to save the vessel contour and to close the vessel
contour editor.

7.3.1.1 Import Vessel Contours
Select the view side that agrees with the view side in the DXF file. Select
in the menu bar of the Vessel Contour editor the option Import > From
DXF file to import a vessel contour. The coordinates used in the DXF file
should match the vessel coordinate system and the origin of the DXF
drawing should be the same as the CRP of the vessel.
7.4 Equipment
Figure 7-5 Equipment page of the vessel configuration
In the Equipment page the devices (sensors) are selected, linked

computation parameters are set and device tests are carried out. Which
groups of devices are available depends on the selected application type.
The vessel configuration supports also sub systems. A sub system is a
set of sensors/computations which act together and are loosely
 connected to the vessel (main system). Currently only a few sensor
groups are supported for a sub system: Multibeam, VRU, Heading and
Bearing.
The procedure to add sensors to the list is:
 From the ‘Groups’ list, select a group of devices, e.g. ‘Positioning
system Geogs’.
 From the ‘Device Drivers’ list, select the required device, e.g. ‘NMEA
2.30 GGA’ and click on to place the device in the device list. It
is not possible to give directly a distinguished name for the selected
device, see for more information ‘Aliases’ on page 128.

 When a sub system is needed, click on to add a sub system
and automatically a sub system position device is added. From now on
when a device driver is added with PDS2000 will ask to which
system the device has to be added.
Now it is also possible to move devices from the main system to the
sub system. Select a device in the main system and click on to
move the device to the sub system. From sub system to main system
is also possible.
For more information about how the sub system works see Sub
System below.
 There is a group called ‘Multibeam (All Options)’. In this group a
RESON HydroBat or RESON SeaBat 7K can be selected. When one
of these device drivers is selected, it is possible to add all related
device drivers in one time. For instance select RESON SeaBat 7K and
click on . Now a display will open where all related devices are
already selected. If necessary uncheck one of the devices and click on
to add all these devices.
 After a device driver is added to the device list, check the items in the
device or computation by selecting the device or computation and click
on to open the properties.
Most of the sensors have a timestamp mode available. When this is
For Snippets devices the
set on Computer Clock latency can be applied when available in the
offset (and multibeam data. For the other timestamps the latency have no effect.
calibration values) are For some equipment, like multibeam, position and VRU, an offset as
taken from the multibeam specified in the Geometry page has to be selected. For sub system
computation. devices the offset has to be entered manually.
 For several devices the units for the incoming data can be specified.
Normally the units as set by PDS2000 will be the system unit. If for
instance the coordinate system is in feet then the system unit is feet
and most of the values related to distance are then in feet. With
 the units can be modified when the input data has a different unit than
the system unit.
 Each device has to be assigned to a communication port. Select the
device from the device list and click on . Select a port and
change the settings if necessary. Add a new port by clicking on
If as echo sounder one of . See for more information about the interfacing on page 168.
the Navisound Graphical
168
Trace device drivers is
selected, the option By default all the selected devices are active ( ) in the device list. If one
and of the devices is not connected yet, it will give alarms in the Acquisition.
will give a To avoid these alarms, the device can be switched off in the device list by
different view (see page unchecking ( ) the device.
99).
An equipment test is possible when the selected device is attached to the
port. Click on and a test program checks the communication
with the device and the device driver.
It is recommended to test the equipment interfacing prior to the start of
the Acquisition.

Figure 7-6 Device Test
7.4.1 Sub System

An example of a sub system can be a multibeam mounted on a platform
in a moonpool of the vessel where the platform is not solid linked to the
vessel. The multibeam will require its own attitude and heading sensors.
When a sensor is added to the sub system it will not be added to a group
of the data sources. This is to avoid a selection of the wrong sensor
during a data source switching.
The sub system sensor offsets cannot be selected from the offset list but
have to be entered manually. The offsets are local offsets relative to the
sub system reference point.
The Sub System Reference Position Computation will use the local
attitude and heading sensors when available. When there is no sub
system heading, the heading from the main system reference point
computation will be used. When there is no sub system attitude, the main
system attitude will be used and converted to use the sub system heading
to sub system attitude.
The sub system position will be computed using the offset and the main
system reference point, main system heading and main system attitude.
The sub system heave will be replaced by the local heave when available.
The sub system position Z will be obtained using the offset reference
point Z minus the remote heave plus the local heave.

7.4.2 Navisound Graphical Trace
Figure 7-7 Navisound Control Center to set the port(s) and check the
communication with the echo sounder
This view will be opened when in the Equipment one of the Navisound
Graphical Trace devices is selected and on or is
clicked.
Click on in the Navisound Control Center to set the Input Port(s)

for the echo sounder. When the port(s) are set, click on or
and if the port(s) settings are right data will be displayed in the
view.
In the Equipment page the port is always NCC. The port settings for the
Navisound are stored in a different way than all the other devices in
PDS2000, it will be done through .

7.4.3 Outputs
Figure 7-8 Output Messages window
With the outputs as selected in the Equipment data can be outputted to a

different system. The default settings for the outputs can be used. If more
than one sensor of the same type is selected the output message always
use the sensor as set as primary. The user can change this by selecting
the output device and click on to open the Output Messages
window.
Select the output message and for specific output messages when the
output message is selected the Data to trigger output message becomes
available. In this box the data item can be selected that will trigger the
output message.
Select an item of the output message and the Output message element
source becomes available. In this box the source for that selected item
can be set.

7.5 Computations
Figure 7-9 Computations page in the vessel configuration
A number of standard computations are default in PDS2000. These are

displayed in the Computations page.
The number and type of standard computations depends on the selected
application type. Click on to edit the properties of the selected
computation. For the standard computations the user influence on the
properties is limited. Nevertheless, it is advisable to check and inspect
each property carefully and set the associated parameters as required.
7.5.1 Advanced Computations

Apart from the standard computations, advanced or user computations
can be added. For normal survey operations it is expected that these
additional computations are not required. Advanced computations are
seen as an option for special operations. A lot of the advanced
computations are already available as a linked computation with a
selected device driver.
Click on in the Computations page (see above) to open the
Advanced Computations page.

Figure 7-10 Advanced Computations page
is grayed out The user selects the required computations from the left window and adds
when a computation is not these with to the list of defined computations. By default the given
possible (anymore) for the computation name will be used and the properties of the selected
chosen application type. computation will be opened.
The properties of the added computations can be opened by selecting the
computation in the defined computations list and click on to
access the properties of that computation.

7.6 Data Sources
Figure 7-11 Data Sources page in the vessel configuration
A data source is a computation in PDS2000. An item in the ‘Data groups'

can be a computation or a device and can give an input to a data source
with assigned priorities.
Example: The data source 'Position' computes the position of the vessel.
In the ‘Data Groups’ two items can compute the position. One item can be
moved to the top and gets number 1, that item becomes the primary data
input for the Position computation. The others become the secondary
computation.
PDS2000 can automatically switch between data groups with a user
definable condition. Double click on the first data group item or select the
first data group item and click on to enter the switch
parameters.
At the start of every cycle in PDS2000 the order in the data group is as
specified in the data group list and the conditions will be checked. It is not
necessary to set a condition for the secondary device to go back to the
primary. This will be done automatically after each cycle in PDS2000.

Figure 7-12 Condition added
Figure 7-13 Creating a condition
Multiple conditions can be set on any data source. If one of the conditions
is ‘true’ it will lower the rank of the source, provided automatic switch is
checked in the Data Sources page.
7.7 Guidance
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks or towards a pre-defined location or area. The guidance methods
are:
1. Route
2. Runlines
3. Waypoints
4. Design Model
5. Cutter Dredge
6. Work Areas
7. Restricted Areas
8. Vessel Placement
9. Dredge Instruction
10. Object Distance
The number of guidance methods that is available is depending on the
selected application type.

Each method has its own definitions and computations. An application
can have many guidance files of any of the types above and it is possible
to select a file in the Acquisition.
There is a number of ways the guidance can be setup or modified. As it is
a part of the vessel configuration, all methods to open the vessel
configuration can be used to open the guidance window. On top of that
most of the individual guidance file can be opened in the Explorer (see
page 219).
For more details about guidance see the chapter Guidance on page 131.
7.8 Tools
The Tools page is skipped in the vessel configuration wizard. If the vessel
configuration is opened outside the wizard always the interval logging tab
is available.
For several applications like (Rope) Excavator, Cutter, Trailing Suction
Hopper, Maggy Survey and Multibeam Survey extra tabs are added to the
Tool page.
The different tabs in the Tools Page are:
 Anchor Definition (see below)
 Crane Configuration (see page 107)
 Cutter (see page 109)
 Dredge Logging Settings (see page 110)
 Interval Logging (see page 111)
 Magnometer Dialog (see page 113)
 Pipe Configuration (see page 114)
 Production Parameters (see page 115)
 Trip Registration (see page 116)

7.8.1 Anchor Definition
The Anchor Definition is only available when the option is set in the
dongle.
Figure 7-14 Tools page with the Anchor Definition page of the cutter dredge
application
In the Anchor Definition page the anchor definitions for the vessel
(pontoon) and the handling tugs can be specified.

7.8.2 Crane Configuration
The crane configuration is available for the (Rope) Excavator application.
Excavator:
Figure 7-15 Tools page with the Crane Configuration page of the excavator
application
This page is to setup the crane configuration for an excavator with a

backhoe, a pump or a grab.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the stick and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom, stick and tool can be calibrated (see page 258). For some ‘Dredge
Positioning Systems’ a fourth subpage is available for the bucket steering
and the engine control.
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the
‘Excavator’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

Rope Excavator:
Figure 7-16 Tools page with the Rope page of the rope excavator application
This Tools page is valid for the Rope Excavator application to setup the
crane configuration for a rope excavator with a backhoe.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the rope and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom and rope can be calibrated (see page 258).
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the ‘Rope
Excavator’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

7.8.3 Cutter
Figure 7-17 Tools page with the Cutter configuration page
This Tools page is valid for the Cutter Dredge application to setup the
cutter configuration.
For more information about the Cutter see the manual for the ‘Cutter
Dredge’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

7.8.4 Dredge Logging Settings
Figure 7-18 Tools page with the Dredge Logging Settings page of the
excavator application
This page is to setup the logging conditions for the grid model logging
with a (rope) excavator, cutter or hopper.
In the Logging page the grid model logging should be setup as explained
 on page 119. Next to that setup the option Enable grid model logging
should be checked otherwise there is no grid model logging in the
Acquisition.

7.8.5 Interval Logging
Figure 7-19 Tools page with the Interval Logging page of a cutter dredge
application
This Tools page is present for all different type of applications.

Check the option Enable interval logging and a table will be displayed. In
the table items can be selected that will be displayed in the Interval
Logging view in the Acquisition and logged in an interval log file.
At the bottom of the window the user can select if he wants the interval
logging file per day or per week. For the week period the start day can be
set. Also the logging interval in the file can be specified.
The user can set the what type of time format has to be logged in the file.
The option Use windows date, time makes a date and time column in the
file, while the option Use only item values makes a column with the
st
number of days since 1 of January 1900.
 In the Logging page the interval logging format have to be checked before
an interval log file is created (see page 123).
Item to log
Double click on a field and the Select Data window will be opened. In
this window the item from one of the available computations can be
selected.
When an item is selected automatically the row is filled with the default
settings.
User name
Double click on a field and the text in the field can be modified.
This name will be visible in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.

Method
Three options are available to select as method to display the values
in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.
Sampling. The last value will be displayed.
Averaging. The displayed value is the average of all the values in that
period.
Cumulating. All the values of that period are added together, a
cumulated value is displayed.
Start day
Select a day when the interval logging has to start.
Now. The interval logging will be started directly.
Today. The interval logging will start today at the time as specified in
the column ‘Start time’.
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and
Saturday. The interval logging will start on the specified day of the
week at the time as specified in the column ‘Start time’.
Start time
The interval logging will start on the time as specified in the start time.
When the start time is earlier than the actual time the interval logging
will not start.
When for ‘Start day’ today or one of the days of the week is selected
the default start time become 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and the
user can modify the start time.

Period
At the end of a period the actual value will be logged to the interval log
file.
By default the period is set on 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and
the user can modify the period.
Reset
The reset is for the methods averaging and cumulating.
Yes. The calculation starts again when a new period starts.
No. The calculation continues after a new period is started.
In the Acquisition the interval logging can be monitored in the Raw Data
view and in the Interval Logging view (see page 302).
 When in the Logging page the Interval Logging Format is checked (see
page 123) then the data will be logged in the file xxxx_Interval.log-
yyyymmdd.csv in the Logdata directory of the project, where xxxx is the
vessel name.

7.8.6 Magnometer Dialog
Figure 7-20 The Tools page with the Magnetometer Dialog page of the maggy
survey application
This Tools page is valid for the Maggy Survey application to setup the
offsets for a multi-channel magnetometer.
The number of channels that will setup by default will depend on the
magnetometer device driver that is selected in the Equipment.

7.8.7 Pipe Configuration
Figure 7-21 Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application to setup the
pipe segments.
In the Pipe Configuration page the configuration for a suction tube with a
bend, an upper pipe, a lower pipe and a draghead (suction head) has to
be setup. When the trailing suction hopper has a starboard and port
suction tube two Pipe Configuration pages are available in the Tools
page.
‘Trailing Suction Hopper’ application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.

7.8.8 Production Parameters
Figure 7-22 Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing
suction hopper application for two bunkers
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application.

In the Production Parameters page the settings for the production
computation has to be set. With these settings and the draught the load
and the production of the vessel can be calculated.
The same page with only the Product specification section is valid for the
Cutter Dredge and the Excavator applications.

7.8.9 Trip Registration
Figure 7-23 Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trialing Suction Hopper application.

In the Trip Registration page the definition for a start and end of a trip can
be set. Also the definition for a track plot and/or a report at the end of the
trip can be defined.

7.9 Logging
Figure 7-24 Logging page in the vessel configuration
How the logging is done is defined in the Logging page. The dialog sets
the file formats, manages log space and sets the log conditions. The
layout of the Logging page depends on the selected application type and
on the selected logging formats.
On top of the page it is possible to change the log directory. Select an
existing directory or enter in the box a new log directory. This is same
option as in the Log Files page of the Project Configuration (see page 59).
7.9.1 File Formats

The number of available file formats depends on the selected application
type. The following file formats are supported by PDS2000:
 PDS2000 Format (see below)
 PDS2000 Grid Model (see page 119)
 Winfrog Format (see page 119)
 Simrad EM3000 Format (see page 119)
 Cleaned XYZ Data (see page 119)
 Production Format (see page 120)
 Dredge Track Format (see page 120)
 DXF Format (see page 120)
 XTF Format (see page 120)

 Backscatter Grid Model (see page 121)
 S7K Format (see page 122)
 SDS Format (see page 123)
 Interval Logging Format (see page 123)
 FAU Format (see page 123)
 GSF Format (see page 124)
If one of the files is created in the Replay, its name will be extended with ‘-
R-date-time’ whereby ‘date-time’ are the date and time of the replay.
Every time PDS2000 opens a module, like the Control Center or
Acquisition, the activities done in that module are logged in a file. There
will be one file per day. The file name is ‘Modulename_date.LOG’
7.9.1.1 PDS2000 Format

This is the standard PDS2000 logging format. The file contains
configuration parameters and raw sensor data.
Figure 7-25 Log File Index in the logging page for PDS2000 format
Index file after logging means that direct after the log file is closed an
index file of the log file is created. This will save time when the log file is
opened in for instance the Editing.
Figure 7-26 Backup log in the logging page for PDS2000 format
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 59). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the PDS2000 logdata file also in the backup log
directory which is specified in the Project Configuration.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.PDS
The runline name is for a (rope) excavator application replaced by the
project name and for the dredge applications by the trip number.
This file name mentioned above is the default file name. With the option
user defined log file names in the Project Configuration a user-defined file
name can be defined (see page 59).
 From PDS2000 version 3.6.0.0 onwards, the sonar image, side scan and
snippets data in the PDS2000 log file is compressed to reduce the size of
the log files. When this PDS2000 log file is opened in an earlier version
 (3.5.0.x or older) the data of the sonar image, side scan or snippets
cannot be opened anymore!
From multibeam data all the pings will be logged in the PDS2000 format,
even the pings that are out of order. The pings with a bad time stamp will
only be logged when they are newer than the ping before and when they
meet the data rate criteria.

7.9.1.2 PDS2000 Grid Model
A grid model is filled with depths and can be used as an on-line coverage.
For echo sounder surveys

the grid model is not filled
with depths, but with
heights. Selection of the
minimum value gives in
that case the minimum
height, which is identical to
the maximum depth.
Figure 7-27 PDS2000 Grid Model setup in the logging page
Select the grid model file name. If no file exists click on and give a
new file name. Select one or more data types and enter a cell size.
The grid model is filled with data from the added device in Data for grid
model logging.
File name: Name of the grid model.DTM
7.9.1.3 Winfrog Format

This is standard single-beam data in Winfrog format and cannot be edited
in PDS2000. Single beam data can also be logged in PDS2000 Format
and edited in the standard PDS2000 editors.
File name: Runline name-day-time.RAW.
7.9.1.4 Simrad EM3000 Format

An industry accepted standard format for multibeam data. Raw data files
in this format can be processed with HDCS cleaning software.
File name: Vessel name_runline name_date_time_RAW.ALL
7.9.1.5 Cleaned XYZ Data

The file is a space separated XYZ file in ASCII format.
The data is filtered according the criteria of the sensor computation. A
further reduction is possible for every swath of the multibeam data.
Figure 7-28 Cleaned XYZ logging reduction in the Logging page
The tolerance is the minimum difference of the Z-value with the previous
Z-value. If the difference is more than the tolerance (e.g. 0.05 m) the data
point is added to the file.
The width of a sway is defined as 100%. By setting a minimum distance
(e.g. 10%) a point at every 10% of the width of the sway is added to the
file.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XYZ

7.9.1.6 Production Format
A grid model with production data from the device driver ‘Dredge
Production’.
Figure 7-29 Grid model input for the production
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS2000 Grid Model (see page
119).
File name: Name of the Grid Model.DTM
7.9.1.7 Dredge Track Format

This file logged the position of the drag head(s). The calculated position
comes from the device driver computation ‘Absolute Dredge Head
Computation’.
Figure 7-30 Dredge track sampling rate
By setting the sampling rate the logging interval is defined (e.g. 30 sec).
File name: Vessel name[application type]_year_month_day.TRK
7.9.1.8 DXF Format

This format is only available with the application type ‘Barsweep’. Each
time the event button is pressed, the location and the size of the bar plus
the direction of sailing is logged in the DXF file.
Figure 7-31 File name for the DXF file
File name: File name.DXF
7.9.1.9 XTF Format

The XTF (eXtended Triton Format) format is only available for multibeam
applications and can contain multibeam, side scan and/or snippets data.
Click on to go through the settings of XTF format. See for a
detailed explanation of the XTF settings in the chapter ‘Export’ on page
620.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XTF

The XTF_HEADER_POSITION record is mentioned in XTF
documentation but it is not explained. Below this record will be explained.
Byte aligned structure of XTF_HEADER_POSITION:

typedef struct
{
WORD MagicNumber; // Set to 0xFACE
BYTE HeaderType; // XTF_HEADER_POSITION (100)
BYTE SubChannelNumber; // Unused. Set to 0.
WORD NumChansToFollow; // Unused. Set to 0.
WORD Reserved1[2]; // Unused. Set to 0.
DWORD NumBytesThisRecord; // Must be 64.
DWORD ID; // Unique id for this sensor. In case
// multiple GPS are used in survey.
DWORD TimeTag; // Millisecond timetag.
double PositionX; // X position as reported by GPS
// (Easting(meters) or
// Longitude(degrees))
double PositionY; // Y position as reported by GPS
// (Northing(meters) or
// Latitude(degrees))
double PositionZ; // Z position as reported by GPS
// (always meters)
BYTE IsHeightUsed; // 0 = Z not used.
// 1 = Z is used (RTK).
BYTE TypeUnits; // Applies to PositionX and PositionY
// above. 0 = lat/lon, 1 = E/N.
BYTE Reserved2[16]; // Unused. Set to 0.
} XTFPOSITIONDATA;
7.9.1.10 Backscatter Grid Model

A grid model where next to the depth an extra layer is added for the
backscatter data (the intensity) of the side scan sonar or snippets data.
Figure 7-32 Grid model input for backscatter grid model logging
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS2000 Grid Model (see page
119) but with an extra layer for the backscatter data.
The old backscatter grid models (created with the Sidescan sonar format
 in the PDS2000 versions before 3.4.0.0) can still be used for logging the
side scan sonar or snippets data). Only in these old grid models is no Z
Average available to show the data in a 3D view.
File name: Name of the Grid Model [Backscatter-Model].DTM

7.9.1.11 S7K Format
This format is only available for a multibeam application with a RESON
SeaBat 7K system and can contain multibeam, side scan sonar and/or
snippets data.
Figure 7-33 7K logging reduction
Check the option Reduce on nadir filter if not all the data has to be
logged. The data that is rejected by the nadir filter (see page 328) will not
be logged.
Figure 7-34 Backup log in the logging page for S7K format
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 59). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the S7K file also in the backup log directory as
specified in the Project Configuration.
At the moment the following records, if available, will be logged:
1003 - Position
The position is the position of the vessel reference point.
The height is the height of the vessel reference point
relative to sea level when height source is ‘None’,
otherwise the height is relative to chart datum.
1008 - Depth
Depth of the vessel reference point relative to sea level.
1010 - 7K Sound Velocity Profile
1015 - Navigation
The position is the position of the vessel reference point.
The height is the height of the vessel reference point
relative to sea level when height source is ‘None’,
otherwise the height is relative to chart datum.
1016 - Attitude
7000 - 7K Volatile Sonar Settings
7004 - 7K Beam Geometry
7006 - 7K Bathymetry Data
The along track and across track values are related to the
vessel reference point and not to the sonar reference
point. The depths are relative sea level when the height
source is ‘None’, otherwise the depths are relative chart
datum.
7007 - 7K Backscatter Image Data (Side Scan Data)
7008 - 7K Beam Data (Snippets Data)
7009 - Vertical Depth
7027 - 7K Bathymetry Data new style
The along track and across track values are related to the
vessel reference point and not to the sonar reference
point. The depths are relative sea level when the height
source is ‘None’, otherwise the depths are relative chart
datum.
7028 - 7K Beam Data dB (Snippets Data)

7030 - Sonar Installation Parameters
7057 - 7K Backscatter Image Data dB (Calibrated Side Scan
Data)
7058 - 7K Beam Data dB (Calibrated Snippets Data)
7200 - 7K File Header
File name: Date_time.s7k
7.9.1.12 SDS Format

The SDS (Self Defining Structure) format will be available for multibeam
applications and is special made to collect large amount of multibeam
data. Click on to open the SDS settings. Next to the SDS file a
CTL file will be created with a format that is depending on the selections
made in the SDS settings. See for a detailed explanation of the SDS
settings and the CTL file formats the chapter ‘Export’ on page 622.
File name: Vessel name_runline name-date-time(1).SDS
The number 1 mentioned the first multibeam system from the equipment
list. If more multibeam systems are logged simultaneously then the
second gets a 2, the third a 3, etc.
7.9.1.13 Interval Logging Format

The interval logging format is available for all applications. In the Tools
page (see page 111) the interval logging has to be enable and specified
before any data can be logged in the interval logging file, which will be
one file for each day.
File name: Vessel name_Interval.log-date.CSV
7.9.1.14 FAU Format

The FAU (FArvandsvæsenets Utm) format from the Danish Hydrographic
Office is available for the multibeam applications and will contain only
multibeam data. The raw multibeam data, that means unfiltered, will be
logged in the FAU file.
The FAU logging is available in two formats where one field can be beam
angle or beam number.
Figure 7-35 FAU 1 or FAU 2 format for the FAU logging
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.FAU
When the number of beams is changed during the logging the actual file
will be closed and a new FAU file will be created. In a FAU file the number
of beams is placed in the header of the file.
At the moment some fields in the header of the file are not filled in due to
 varies reasons. The fields that are not filled are TimeOffset,
SensorValsEdited, SwathNtPosJump, MaxNonLinearity, Major, Minor,
Autoflags, RotRectValid and BB_Tilt. All these fields will have a value 0.

 The FAU format is made for UTM projections, but in PDS2000 all different
projections will be accepted. The header for the field
Minilab[MAXLABLNG] will have normally the UTM zone and the satellite
ellipsoid mentioned, like ‘#utm32nNwgs84’ for UTM Zone 32 and
WGS’84.
 For non UTM projections the field will be empty, except for the places
which are restricted. The field will look like ‘# N’.
7.9.1.15 GSF Format

The GSF (Generic Sensor Format) format is designed to efficiently store
and exchange information produced by geophysical measurement
systems, particularly for data sets created by systems such as multibeam
echosounders.
The GSF logging is available for the multibeam applications and can
contain uncorrected or corrected multibeam data from RESON SeaBat 7K
and RESON SeaBat 8K. The multibeam data will be logged in the GSF
file.
Figure 7-36 Uncorrected or fully corrected multibeam data selection for the
GSF logging
Select Uncorrected when the raw multibeam data has to be logged in the
GSF file. Select Fully Corrected when the corrected multibeam data has
to be logged in the GSF file. The corrected multibeam data in the GSF file
is computed according the multibeam xyz computation in the multibeam
device data.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.GSF
Below is a short explanation of the current implementation of GSF File
Logging in PDS2000:
 The GSF logging is based on a modified version of the GSF 2.09
library provided by SAIC.
 The logger uses CF_MBXYZREL PDS data blocks as a starting point.
 Only fully computed results are stored in the GSF File.
 Sonar specific data is only written for sonar models: 8101, 8111, 8124,
8125, 8150 and 8160.
 Multi-head sonar data is logged into two separate GSF files.
 Single beam sonar’s are not supported.
The following GSF types are written to the GSF file:
 GSF header
 GSF Processing Parameters
 GSF Sensor Parameters
 GSF Comment
 GSF MB Ping
 GSF Attitude

 GSF Ping Summary
For the GSF MB Ping record the following fields are written to the GSF
file:
 depth
 across_track
 along_track
 travel_time
 quality_flags
 beam_flags
 vertical_error
 horizontal_error
7.9.2 Log Space Management

PDS2000 has some possibilities to keep an eye on the amount of logged
data.
Figure 7-37 Log space management
System required free disk space

This is 1% of the system disk and cannot be changed.
Next to the settings below an automatic free disk space system is also
 in place. The checks for that system are 1% on the system disk with a
minimum of 500 MB and 100 MB on the data disk.
The logging will stop when one of these two limits is reached. One
 hour, 30 minutes and 15 minutes before these limits are reached a
message will be reported.
Minimum free disk space warning
Give the amount of disk space that should be kept free at all times, in
MB.
Allowed log space warning
The maximum space to be used by PDS2000 for logging purpose, in
MB.
The log space management system is not active when the minimum free
disk space and/or the allowed log space are zero.
PDS2000 will generate a warning signal when the limit for the minimum
free disk space or the allowed log space is reached and it will continue to
log the data.

7.9.3 Condition Check
Logging can take place under selectable conditions. When that is required
activate the Condition check and check the wanted conditions. Logging
will be suspended when one of the conditions is true.
Figure 7-38 Logging conditions
Guidance online condition

The offtrack limit which is set in the runlines page of the guidance (see
page 138). PDS2000 stops logging when the offtrack exceeds the limit
value.
Inside clipping polygon
PDS2000 logs only when the vessel is inside a polygon. Choose a
polygon from the selection window. The clipping polygons can be
created in the Explorer (see page 224).
No user alarms
When one of the conditions of the alarms set in the configuration is
active, PDS2000 stops with logging. The alarms can be set in the
configuration (see page 69) and in the vessel configuration (see page
129).
User conditions
Click on and set a condition (the same menu as on page 104)
which stops the logging in PDS2000.
7.9.4 Create New Log File

PDS2000 allows the user to define when a new log file has to be created.
Figure 7-39 Create new log file
A maximum size of the log file can be set. This means that when the file
exceeds the file size a new log file will be created.
Another option is by setting a time limit on logging in one file. If the time
limit is reached a new log file will be created.

7.10 Simulation
Figure 7-40 Simulation page in the vessel configuration
On this page the simulation parameters can be set. The simulator is build-
in for training purposes.
Vessel position
Enter the grid position where the simulator will start.
Heading
The initial heading of the vessel.
Vru
Maximum values of the VRU simulator, Max. Heave in project units,
Max. Roll and Max. Pitch in degrees.
Depth
For each channel a depth value. Depth channel 1 is also used to
simulate a multibeam echo sounder.
Speed
Initial speed of the vessel. Depending on the chosen project units, in
knots or meters/second.
Simulate using runlines
Check Use Runlines to have the simulator running over the runlines.
Check Automatic Mode and the simulator will select the next runline
automatically.
Multibeam noise factor
Adds noise to the simulated multibeam swath, giving a more realistic
effect.

7.11 Aliases
Figure 7-41 Alias page in the vessel configuration with an alias for NMEA
GGA
Aliases are used to give multiple sensors of the same type distinguished
names. E.g. when there are two GPS sensors both using the device
driver ‘Standard NMEA GGA’, these sensors will have the same name in
the program. To give those sensors aliases such as ‘GPS1’ and ‘GPS2’ it
is more clear to the user.
Aliases are used throughout PDS2000 wherever the device name comes
forward.

7.12 Alarms
Figure 7-42 Alarms page in the vessel configuration
The alarms that can be set in this page are vessel specific or device
specific alarms and will be valid only for the vessel that is setup in this
vessel configuration.
7.12.1 Vessel Alarms

Click on to create a new alarm file for the vessel and click on
to edit the selected alarm file. In both cases the Alarms window
will be opened where alarms can be added, edited, removed or renamed.
Figure 7-43 Alarms window with an alarm
Click on to edit the selected alarm or on to add a new

alarm. In both cases the Conditions window will be opened where the
alarm can be modified, the sound alarm can be set and the severity can
be selected.

Figure 7-44 Conditions window with an alarm
Check the option Enable Alarm when the alarm has to be active.
Check the option Sound Alarm when the alarm should give a sound when
the alarm becomes valid. Each Severity (Low, Intermediate or High) gives
a different sound for the alarm.
With or a Condition dialog will be opened where the
selected condition can be modified or added. In this dialog an attribute
from the equipment or computation list can be selected and a condition
with a value for this attribute can be defined.
Figure 7-45 Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an

attribute can be selected
The vessel alarm file will be placed in the ‘Explorer - Project’ (see page
 219), but cannot be edited through the explorer. It is only possible to
modify a vessel alarm file in the vessel configuration.
7.12.2 Device Alarms

When in the Equipment list the IXSEA OCTANS TAH device driver is
selected as Compass and/or as Attitude device then several device
alarms will be added to the Alarms.
In these drivers status values are available to check the quality of the
data. For each data item a status flag is available and therefore the status
flag can be used as a check. For the attitude device driver four device
alarms will be added and for the compass device driver two.
With each device alarm can be modified. The same windows and
dialogs are available as describe above in the vessel alarms.

8 Guidance
8.1 Introduction
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks, towards a pre-defined target or in/out pre-defined areas.
The number of guidance methods available in PDS2000 depends on the
application type that is selected. At the moment the different guidance
methods shown below are available through the different application
types:
1. Route (see page 132). A route is a sequence of points connected
with lines. The lines are straight lines between tangent points, or
circle segments when a center point is given. Routes are often used
in rivers and channels, but can also be used to follow a pipe or a
cable.
2. Runlines (see page 138). Runlines are straight lines or route wing
lines which can be grouped in blocks. A number of block methods are
available.
3. Waypoints (see page 141). A waypoint is a location towards the
vessel is moving.
4. Design Model (see page 143). A selection can be made between a
3D model and a grid model as guidance for dredging.
5. Cutter Dredge (see page 146). A work route for a cutter dredger.
6. Work Areas (see page 147). A work area is an area where the work
takes place. A work area can be a rectangle or a polygon area.
7. Restricted Areas (see page 148). A restricted area is an area where
it is not allowed to come or work. A restricted area can be a polygon
or an area on both sides of a route (e.g. a pipe or a cable route).
8. Vessel Placement (see page 149). A vessel placement is a location
with a heading towards the vessel is moving.
9. Dredge Instruction (see page 151). A dredge instruction gives the
dredge area with the depths for the dredger.
10. Object Distance (see page 152). Generate alarms when distance to
selected object become in alarm range.
Each method has its own definitions and computations and can have
many guidance files. In the Acquisition the user can change from
guidance file.
PDS2000 - User Manual Guidance  131

8.2 Route
Figure 8-1 Route page in the guidance
When a new route is created the user can select from three different
types of route; a generic route, a pipe route or a cable route. The generic
route is the standard route with Eastings and Northings. The pipe / cable
route has next to the Eastings and Northings also a Z-value or a depth.
This way a pipe / cable route can be used to show a pipe / cable with the
right depth.
The route editor can also A route is a number of points connected by lines. The route points can be
be opened in the Explorer - either tangent points (TG) or center points (CP). Tangent points can be
Project with the Track connected with a straight line or with a curve.
Guidance Routes option
(see in the ‘Project On the route page a route file can be selected and edited or a new file
Database’ on page 223). can be created. This opens automatically the route editor.
132  Guidance PDS2000 - User Manual

8.2.1 Route Editor
Figure 8-2 Route editor
Click on to add a new point to the route or click on to

insert a new point on the location of the cursor in the list. The details of
that new point are displayed in the upper right corner of the route editor.
Name
A name can be given to a tangent point. This name will be listed and
shown in the view.
Type
The two types are ‘TANGENT’ and ‘CENTERPOINT’. If ‘TANGENT’ is
selected it is possible to give a name to that point.
or
With ‘Auto KP’ the KP value for the added or inserted point will be
calculated automatically.
With ‘Manual KP’ the user has to give the KP value for the added or
inserted point.
Enter the coordinates; several coordinate types can be used. The

latitude and longitude are on the local or satellite ellipsoid; depends on
the selection in the project configuration (see page 62).
Lat/Lon (º) Latitude/Longitude in degrees.
Lat/Lon (º ’) Latitude/Longitude in degrees and minutes.
Lat/Lon (º ’ ”) Latitude/Longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds.
X/Y Grid coordinates.

Pipe Z
The pipe / cable depth for the entered coordinates.
When a center point is selected the following options are added to the
editor:
Radius
The radius of the curve.
Automatic
PDS2000 can compute either the coordinates of the center point or the
radius.
None. The coordinates and the radius have to be entered by the user.
Center. The user has to enter the radius and PDS2000 computes the
coordinates.
Radius. The user has to enter the coordinates and PDS2000
computes the radius.
For the curves PDS2000 needs two adjacent tangent points to determine
the direction of the curve.
To check the fit of the curve against its adjacent tangent points. In
case a curve fit is not possible warnings are written in the ‘Status’ field
of the list.
From the menu bar some extra functions can be selected:
Route > Properties…
Figure 8-3 Route Properties for the standard route (left) and for the pipe /
cable route (right)
Start KP
Enter a Start KP for the (pipe / cable) route.
Pipe Diameter
Enter a pipe / cable diameter for the pipe / cable route.
KP calculation mode
Select the mode for the KP calculation, Grid distance or True
distance.
Grid distance. Calculate a distance between two tangent points on
the Easting – Northing plane.
True distance. Calculate a distance between two tangent points on
the local ellipsoid.
First curve turn
Select the direction of the first curve in the route, Clockwise or
Counter clockwise.
Manual KP handling
When a tangent point on the route is defined with a manual KP, this
option becomes valid.

Allows gaps. The KP value on the line segment between the two
tangent points is calculated from the first tangent point onwards. It
is possible that at the end of the line segment the calculated KP
does not match with the manual KP value of the second tangent
point.
Non metric route. The KP value on the line segment between the
two tangent points is interpolated between the two points. At the
end of the line segment the interpolated KP match the KP value of
the second tangent point.
Route > Import
An ASCII import wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings (see for more detail the ‘ASCII Import Wizard’ on page
136).
The manual KP values should
be in km. To import the KP values as manual KP’s an extra column with the
value ‘1’ should be made in the ASCII file, a ‘0’ mean that the KP value
 in the import file is not a manual KP. Select then in the import wizard
‘KP’ for the KP column and ‘Man KP’ for the column with ‘1’.
Route > Export
An ASCII file with the route information will be created.
Figure 8-4 Example of an exported route
Options > Electronic Chart…

Select a PDS1000 electronic chart as background.
Options > Grid Properties…
Select the grid to be shown in the plan view: Grid Crosses, Solid Line
Grid, Dotted Line Grid or Scale Bar. The grid can be with or without a
grid annotation.
When the cursor is on the plan view, its coordinates are displayed in the
window below the zoom buttons. Right clicking on the plan view window
opens a context menu with the zoom functions.

8.2.2 ASCII Import Wizard
The ASCII import wizard in the route editor can be opened with Route >
Import from the menu bar of the route editor (see above).
Figure 8-5 First page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route
If an import configuration The ASCII file with the route information has to be selected. If the file is
file is used, click on selected the user can use an existing import configuration file or continue
to import the with the wizard to configure the import. If the user continues with the
ASCII file. wizard there is a possibility to save the import configuration file, so the
next time the configuration file can be used to import a route. Click on
to continue with the import wizard.
Figure 8-6 Second page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route
Select the file type for the ASCII import file; the data in the file is delimited
with a character (like a comma, a tab, a space or user defined) or the data
is presented in fixed columns. Click on to go to the last page of
the import wizard.

Figure 8-7 Last page of the ASCII Import Wizard for a route
On the last page of the import wizard the delimiter and the columns have
to be defined.
Delimiter
Select a character as delimiter between the data columns. The options
are comma, tab, space or custom. With custom a user defined
character can be added.
Extra
The extra option is used to skip the header lines of the ASCII import
file. First check the option before a number can be filled in.
Select Column Names
Click with the right mouse button on a column and select one of the
available field names for the selected column. On the right top side of
the page a column number will be added to the selected field name.
If the right delimiter is selected, the right number of header lines is
skipped and all the columns are selected, which are needed for the route,
click on to import the ASCII file.
If on the first page of the import wizard the options ‘Save configuration as’
is checked and a file name is given, the settings made on the second and
third page of the wizard will be saved in the import configuration file and
can be used the next time when an ASCII import for a route has to be
done.

8.3 Runlines
Figure 8-8 Runlines page in the guidance
The runlines editor can A runline can be a straight line or a route wing line. It is possible to have
also be opened in the several groups of runlines in a runlines file.
Explorer - Project with the
Runlines option (see in the On the runlines page a runlines file can be selected and edited or a new
‘Project Database’ on page file can be created. This will automatically open the runlines editor (see
222). page 139).
Lead-in Lines
When the option Show lead-in lines is checked, PDS2000 computes a
lead-in line from the current vessel position to the start point of the
next runline. The lead-in curve is based on the lead-in line length and
the ‘Vessel turn radius’ as set in the vessel geometry (see page 93).
The lead-in line length is the length of the straight line that is in line
with the next runline.
Check Use lead-in lines to compute off-line distances; distance to go
and traveled distances along the lead-in line.
Next line selection
In the next line selection the runline retrieval method needs to be set.
Normal. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the coordinates as defined in the runlines file.
Reverse. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the end and start coordinates.
Alternate. Each time a next line is selected from the list, the start and
end coordinates are alternately as normal or reversed. This allows
sailing line-by-line in a continuous way.
Enter or choose a number of lines to skip each time a next line is taken
automatically.
Check the option Automatic next line and click on to set a
condition to discard the current line and goes to the next runline in the
list. The condition editor is equal to the one described on page 104.
Online condition
This condition is used for logging purposes. Check the Offtrack limit
and give a value for the offtrack limit. When a vessel is further away
from the selected runline than the offtrack limit, logging stops if the
appropriate check marks are set in the ‘Condition Check’ in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration (see page 126).

8.3.1 Runlines Editor
Figure 8-9 Runlines editor
For each runlines file one or more line types can be defined in this editor.
For blocks of lines the first line is entered and the computation of the
coordinates for the other lines is done automatically.
Click on under the ‘Full Name’ to create a new set of runlines.
Select from the Add Runline window a runline type to add. Each selection
gets a different line entry window on the bottom left-hand side of the
runlines editor.
Single line (rectangular)
Enter a line name, a line number and the start and end coordinates.
Single line (polar)
Enter a line name, a line number, the start coordinates and a line
length and bearing to the end coordinates.
Parallel lines (rectangular)
Enter a name for the runlines, the start and end coordinates for the
first line, a start number for the first line, the number of lines, the
number interval and the line spacing (= the distance between adjacent
lines).
Parallel lines (polar)
As above but instead of end coordinates for the first line a line length
and bearing to the end coordinates.
Grid
Enter a name for the runlines, choose an origin where the grid box
starts, the coordinates of the origin, the width and height of the grid
box and a rotation for the grid box.
Enter the start numbers, the number interval and the line spacing for in
the X and Y direction of the grid box.
Perpendicular lines
Creates a block of lines perpendicular to a centerline.
Enter a name for the runlines, for the centerline the start and end

coordinates or the length and the bearing to the end coordinates.
Enter a start number, the number interval, the line spacing and the line
length for the left and right side of the centerline.
Route Crosslines
Creates a block of lines perpendicular to a route.
Enter a name for the runlines and select the file name of an existing
route. Under the selection of the route comes a message ‘Center line
is correct’. If the route is not correct then the route cannot be used for
the crosslines. The next fields show ‘Route info’ in the form of the first
and last KP of the selected route.
Select a part of the route where the cross lines should be generated by
entering a start and end KP on the route.
Enter the start number for the runlines, the number interval, the line
spacing and the line length for the left and right side of the route.
Route Winglines
Creates a block of lines parallel to a route.
Enter a name for the runlines and select the file name of an existing
route. Under the selection of the route comes a message ‘Center line
is correct’. If the route is not correct then the route cannot be used for
the winglines. The next fields show ‘Route info’ in the form of the first
and last KP of the selected route.
Select a part of the route where the winglines should be generated by
entering a start and end KP on the route.
Enter for the left and the right side of the route the start numbers, the
number intervals, the line spacing and the number of lines.
Fan Shaped lines
Creates a set of lines which are all rotated around the start coordinates
of the first line.
Enter the name for the runlines. For the first line enter the start
coordinates and either the end coordinates or the length and bearing
to the end coordinates.
Enter the start number, the number of lines, the number interval and
the step angle for the rotation.
Multiple runlines
A set of individual straight lines that have no relation with each other.
Enter a name for the runlines and add an individual line by entering a
line name and the start and end coordinates.
Saltpan runlines
Creates a block of straight parallel lines where the first line is between
the start of both selected routes (side B) or between the end of both
routes (side A). The offset is the offset of the first from the line
between the starts or ends of the routes. Enter a step interval for the
distance between two parallel lines.
Click on to start the ASCII import wizard. With the import wizard
multiple runlines can be imported in the runlines editor. Every line in the
ASCII file should have a name; otherwise the runlines editor cannot
recognize the line. See ‘ASCII Import Wizard’ on page 136 for more
details about the functionality.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with several
functions. The most of these functions are also in the toolbar.
Zoom functions ( )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window, Zoom Extents and Zoom to the
selected runline.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse

button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Measure ( )
Measure a distance by clicking on one location and move the cursor to
the other location.
Add Runline
Draw a line between two points. Automatically a runline is created.
When a runline of more than two points is drawn, PDS2000
automatically creates a route file and the runline becomes a wing line
of that route with a line spacing of 0.
Draw Route
Draw a route and PDS2000 will ask for the route file name.
Save User Defaults
The settings of the runlines editor created by the user will be saved.
Layer Control ( )
The background and foreground layers that are used in the runlines
editor. New layers can be added to the editor.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model that can be added in the view (see page
361).
Properties ( )
The background color can be modified and the option Zoom to
Selection can be enabled/disabled.
All the attributes of the selected layers of the Layer Control are
available.
8.4 Waypoints
Figure 8-10 Waypoints page in the guidance
The waypoints editor can Waypoints are target points or points of interest. Around a waypoint
also be opened in the tolerance circles can be drawn. In the Acquisition a wayline can be drawn
Explorer - Project with the from the current vessel position to a waypoint, indicating distance and
Waypoints option (see in bearing from the vessel to the waypoint.
the ‘Project Database’ on
page 224). On the waypoints page a waypoints file can be selected and edited or a
new file can be created. This will automatically open the waypoints editor.

8.4.1 Waypoints Editor
Figure 8-11 Waypoints editor
Click on to add a new waypoint to the list. The details of the new
waypoint are displayed in the upper right corner of the waypoints editor.
Name
Enter a logical name for the waypoint. By default the name will be the
‘Waypoint’ with between brackets the date and time when it was
created.

Z
A high can be entered for the waypoint. When for instance a waypoint
is on the bottom then a negative high can be entered and the waypoint
will be displayed on the bottom in a 3D view.
Tolerance
Tolerance 1 and 2 are circles around the waypoint. They will give an
idea about the distance between the vessel and the waypoint when
the vessel comes close to the waypoint.

Waypoint > Properties
Figure 8-12 Waypoint Properties in the waypoints editor
Default tolerances can be set. For a new waypoint the user defined
tolerances in the top right corner are replaced by the default tolerances
set in here.
grid annotation.
Options > Import from ASCII…
An ASCII Import Wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings. This import wizard is the same type of import wizard
as discussed on page 136. The ASCII file should contain at least a
waypoint name, the X and Y co-ordinate. The two tolerance circles are
optional.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with the
zoom functions, which are also on the right side in the editor.
8.5 Design Model
Figure 8-13 Design Model page in the guidance

The 3D design model A design model is often used as reference for a maximum dredge depth.
editor and the grid model In PDS2000 two different model types can be used: 3D Models or Grid
editor can also be opened Models.
in the Explorer - Project
with the 3D Models or the On the Design Model page a model type and a model file can be selected
Grid Models option (see in or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the 3D design
the’ Project Database’ on model editor (see below) or the grid model editor (see page 508).
page 219 or on page 221).
Offset
When checked, an offset perpendicular to the design model will be
applied.
Z Shift
When checked, an offset to the Z-value of the design model will be
applied.
Z lower limit
When checked, the new Z-value for the design model.
Underdredge limit
The value is an offset perpendicular to the design model and is shown
in the different Profile – Realtime Design views just as an indication
(see ‘Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View’ on page 367). At the
moment no alarm is set or checks are done with this limit.
Overdredge limit
Same as for the ‘Underdredge Limit’.
8.5.1 3D Design Model Editor
Figure 8-14 3D Design Model editor
In the 3D design model editor data can be imported, checked and

exported. There are three types of data that can be imported:
DXF
A 3D-DXF file made with e.g. AutoCAD can be converted to a 3D
model.
There are some restrictions to the DXF file: no blocks, no circles or

circle segments and remove the text if possible. PDS2000 works with
straight lines and every point should have an X, Y and Z value.
Profile Design Model
Convert a profile design model to a 3D model.
Clipping Polygon
Select a clipping polygon and enter a Z-value to create a 3D model
inside the clipping polygon.
PDS2000 will check every imported file automatically. An already existing
3D model can be checked by clicking on .
When a file is checked and everything is OK the message in the info box
should look like as shown above in the example of the 3D design model
editor.
If data is checked and there are errors the info box looks like:
Figure 8-15 A checked 3D model with errors
After the check the errors are visible in the plan view of the editor. Zoom
in to one of the errors and click on the error to open a Fix window to solve
the error. After the error is fixed, click on again to check if the error
is gone. Continue to solve all the errors. Click on or to save
the model, this is only possible when there are no errors left. As
mentioned in the info box the non-flat and overlapping areas cannot be
fixed.
If an error is fixed but the result is not what the user wants then with
the modification made to the error can be undone.
The 3D model can be exported to a 3D-DXF file. When it is not possible
to solve all the errors in the model, like the non-flat and overlapping
areas, the only option is to export the data to a DXF file and try to solve
the errors outside PDS2000 e.g. in AutoCAD.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with several
functions. The most of these functions are also in the toolbar.
Zoom functions ( )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
button.

Measure ( )
Measure a distance by clicking on one location and move the cursor to
the other location.
Save User Defaults
The settings of the 3D design model editor created by the user will be
saved.
Layer Control ( )
The background and foreground layers that are used in the 3D design
model editor.
The settings of the grid model that can be added in the view (see
pagexxx).
Properties ( )
The background color of the view can be modified.
All the attributes of the selected layers of the Layer Control are
available.
8.6 Cutter Dredge
Figure 8-16 Cutter Dredge page in the guidance
The route editor can also A cutter dredger uses a work route as guidance. A work route is the same
be opened in the Explorer - as a route in ‘Route’ on page 132.
Project with the Track
Guidance Routes option Work route
(see in the ‘Project On the cutter dredge page a (work) route file can be selected and
Database’ on page 223). edited or a new file can be created. This opens automatically the route
editor (see page 133).
Work offset
An offset can be given to the work route. This offset route becomes
then the guidance route for the cutter dredger.
Swing limits
Angular swing limits
The maximum swing of the cutter to port and starboard side in
degrees.
Use also distance limits
Check this option to make it active.

The maximum distance from the cutter to the center line on port and
starboard side.
Prewarning distance end of cut
The distance from the end of cut (distance limits) from where a
warning is generated.
8.7 Work Areas
Figure 8-17 Work Areas page in the guidance
A work area can be a dredge or dump area, and each area has a name
that can be descriptive and shown in the plan view.
With the option Only allow In the Acquisition one or more work areas can be selected and becomes
single area selected in the the active work area(s). A line is drawn from the current vessel position to
Acquisition only one work the active work area or the center of active work areas. That line stays on
area can be selected and the vessel’s tracking point while the vessel moves, guiding the vessel
will be active. toward the active work area.
The work areas editor can A work areas file can be selected or created with . Different work
also be opened in the areas can be kept together in one work areas file in the work areas editor.
Explorer - Project with the There is no limit to the number of areas in one file.
Work Areas option (see in
the ‘Project Database’ on Click on to create a new work area. Two work area types are
page 224). available:
Polygon Area
Select an existing clipping polygon from the project as work area.
Rectangular Area
Enter a name, the center coordinate, the width, the height and the
rotation of the work area.
Alternatively, work areas can be created by importing ASCII files, click on
and converts these files to work areas. The ASCII file should be a
comma separated file with the format <Name>, <Center X>, <Center Y>,
<Length>, <Width>, <Rotation>.

8.8 Restricted Areas
Figure 8-18 Restricted Areas page in the guidance
Restricted areas are areas where dredging is forbidden or are dangerous.

Such an area can be enclosed in a polygon, or it can be a route with a
certain tolerance (width). Route areas are often pipelines, cables etc.
The restricted areas editor Restricted areas are kept together in files. A restricted areas file can hold
can also be opened in the multiple areas; each area is either a polygon or a route. All areas of the
Explorer - Project with the current file are valid in the Acquisition.
Restricted Areas option
(see in the ‘Project On the restricted areas page a restricted area file can be selected and
Database’ on page 222). edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
restricted areas editor.
8.8.1 Restricted Areas Editor
Figure 8-19 Restricted Areas editor
To create a new area click on and select as restricted area a

polygon or a route with a tolerance. The polygon or route should exist in
the project.
In the tab Options, options can be set for action when a vessel is inside a
restricted area:
 Highlight the area when the vessel is inside.
 Generate an alarm when the vessel is inside the restricted area.

 Additional Positions. An offset position computation that triggers the
alarm. E.g. in case the tracking offset point is used, the bulk of the
vessel can already be inside the restricted area before the alarm is
triggered. Then, an advanced or user computation ‘Offset Position’ can
be set on another point on the vessel, f.i. the bow. If this computation
is added as an additional position, alarm trigger occurs the moment
this offset point enters the restricted area.
The Advanced tab has additional possibilities for the restricted areas.
 A data condition can be set. The alarm is triggered in case this
condition is met.
 Advanced actions are: Highlight area in plan view, Generate alarm and
Trigger Output.
 Advanced actions take place when the (offset point on the) vessel is
inside or outside the area.
8.9 Vessel Placement
Figure 8-20 Vessel Placement page in the guidance
The placement points A vessel placement is a target location with a heading. In the Acquisition
editor can also be opened a line will be drawn from the current vessel position to a placement point,
in the Explorer - Project indicating distance and bearing from the vessel to the placement point.
with the Placement Points
option (see in the ‘Project On the vessel placement page a placement point file can be selected and
Database’ on page 222). edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
placement points editor.

8.9.1 Placement Points Editor
Figure 8-21 Placement Points editor
Click on to add a new placement point to the list. The details of

the new point are displayed in the upper right corner of the placement
points editor.
Name
Enter a logical name for the placement point.

Heading
The heading for the vessel when it arrives at the placement point
location.
grid annotation.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with the
zoom functions, which are also on the right side in the editor.

8.10 Dredge Instruction
Figure 8-22 Dredge Instruction page in the guidance
This option is only available for one specific client.

The dredge instruction A dredge instruction is an instruction for the dredger where all related
editor can also be opened data and information is defined. The dredge location will be set by
in the Explorer - Project selecting a dredge polygon.
with the Dredge
Instructions option (see in On the dredge instruction page an existing instruction can be edited or a
the ‘Project Database’ on new one can be created. In both cases automatically the dredge
page 221). instruction editor will be opened.
8.10.1 Dredge Instruction Editor
Figure 8-23 Dredge Instruction Editor
On the left side of the dredge instruction editor all the information can be
added or modified. This information will be shown directly in the plan view
on the right side.

Grid model
The grid model that will be shown the actual situation at the dredge
area.
3D design model
The 3D model that will be used in the dredge area.
Dredge depth offset
It is possible, by giving an offset to the 3D model, to dredge to an other
depth as specified in the 3D model.
Dredge polygon
The dredge polygon is the area where has to be dredged. A new
dredge polygon can be created through the context menu of the plan
view.
Create grid model update
A dredge instruction can be send to a vessel with all the information as
given in the instruction, that means also the data. The file size of a grid
model can be very large. To avoid sending every time the whole grid
model only the data of the grid model inside the dredge polygon will be
send.
Historical vessel tracks
The tracks from several vessels can be shown in the plan view and will
be send to the vessel.
Description
A description of the dredge instruction.
Class
One of the four classes for the quality of the dredge material can be
specified.
Disposal location
The location where the dredge material has to be dumped.
When the user is finished with the dredge instruction the instruction can
be saved and send later or send directly to the vessel.
8.11 Object Distance
Figure 8-24 Object Distance page in the guidance
 This option is available for the (rope) excavator and grab crane dredge
applications will only work when 3D shapes of the crane are used.

PDS2000 can generate alarms to warn the user when he is too close to
an object. The object can be selected as a DXF file in this page.
In the Object Distance page two alarms can be defined. Add a distance
for which the alarm becomes valid and enter a text that will be displayed
in the Acquisition. In the Profile – Realtime Design view and Plan View –
General Dredge Operation when the alarm becomes valid the frame will
be highlighted (grey or red) and the added text will be displayed in the
frame (see below).
Figure 8-25 Views in the Acquisition that have an alarm frame with text

9 Events
9.1 Introduction
Before events can be viewed in the Messages – System Messages view
in the Acquisition, the event and the conditions to show the event have to
be defined. At the same time when an event is shown in the Messages –
System Messages view the information is logged in the PDS2000 log file.
The Events page can be opened in two different ways:
1. Through the New Project wizard. Select File > New Project… from the
menu bar of the Control Center to open the wizard (see page 68).
2. With Acquisition > Configure from the menu bar or with on the
toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window will be opened.
Click on the tab Events to open the Events page.
9.2 Events Mode
Figure 9-1 Mode page of the Events page
On this page the eventing interval, the conditions and the event definition
have to be set.
The option Enable eventing has to be checked if the user wants events in
the Acquisition.
When the option Follow Logging Enable is checked the event logging is
started and stopped with the PDS2000 logging. This option overrules the
PDS2000 - User Manual Events  155

option Enable eventing. When the Acquisition is started and the option
Enable eventing is checked the event logging is started even if the
PDS2000 logging is off, but when the PDS2000 logging is started and
stopped the event logging follows the PDS2000 logging.
For each day an event logfile is generated with the information as defined
in the event definition (see page 156).
The name of the event logfile is ‘Acquisition_EVENT_yyyymmdd.log’.
9.2.1 Mode
Select one of the three interval modes for the eventing:
Time
Set a time interval, e.g. 60 sec. Every 60 sec an event is generated.
Distance
Set a distance interval, e.g. 100 m. Every 100 m sailed an event is
generated.
Line
Set a line distance interval, e.g.100 m. Every 100 m sailed along a
runline, a route or a wayline an event is generated.
9.2.2 Conditions
Click on to define the conditions for the eventing.
Figure 9-2 Conditions menu
An event can only be generated when this is according the selected

interval mode and when all the conditions set in the Conditions menu are
‘true’.
9.2.3 Push Button

In the Acquisition use F6 Next to the automatic eventing with the interval mode and the conditions a
for a manual event. state event can be generated. Check the option Generate manual event if
a state event is needed. Click on to select a push button device. This
device has to be selected in the Equipment page (see page 96).
This state event works independent from the automatic eventing. It only
looks at the information from the push button device to generate an event.
9.2.4 Event Definition

The way events are shown in the Messages – System Messages view
(see page 307) in the Acquisition is defined in the ‘Event Definition’.
156  Events PDS2000 - User Manual

Multiple definitions can be made and each definition has a name. The
event messages can be selected by that name in the Acquisition.
Select one of the event definitions and click on to open the Event
Definition editor. If no events are available, click on and a new
event definition can be created in the Event Definition editor. Another way
to open this editor is in the Explorer under the tab General. A new event
definition can be made only in the Projects Common tab of the Explorer
(see page 214).
Figure 9-3 Event Definition editor
The characteristics for an event are:

 An event can have multiple messages.
 Each message is divided into fields.
 The fields in one message have either field separators or fixed fields.
 Each field may contain text or a PDS2000 data item.
The way to build an new event definition is as follows:
 Create in the Explorer a new event. Enter a descriptive file name and
click on to open the Event Definition editor. Click on
in the editor to save the empty event.
 The event can be defined in the Acquisition (see page 254) or through
 the Event Definition editor in the Events page of the Configuration (see
page 68).
 In the Event Definition editor click at the bottom of the editor on
to add a new message. An event can contains several
messages. Select the type of message: Separator Delimited or Fixed
Field.
 Start creating a template. The template can contain text and/or data
items. The text can be typed directly in the template. For the data
items reserve space or place separators depending on the type of
message.
 Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
 If all the data items are selected the event string can be checked by
clicking on .

9.2.4.1 Separator Delimited
An example of a separate delimited event looks like:
>>>EVENT,[data item: event nr.],TIME,[data item: time of event],<<<
1. Select in the ‘Field separator’ the field separator needed for the event
message; in this case a comma ‘,’.
2. Type the following text in the template box: >>>EVENT,,TIME,,<<<
Where:
Field 1 is ‘>>>EVENT’
Field 2 is still empty
Field 3 is ‘TIME’
Field 4 is still empty
Field 5 is ‘<<<’
3. Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
Figure 9-4 Field definition for a separator delimited message
In this example select for ‘Field number’ number 2 or 4 to add one of

the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the field selection see the
‘Field Selection’ on page 159.
9.2.4.2 Fixed Field

An example of a fixed field event looks like:
Reference position X = xxxxxxxxx.xx Y = yyyyyyyyy.yy
1. Type the following text in the template box:
Reference position X = xxxxxxxxx.xx Y = yyyyyyyyy.yy
Where the x’s and y’s are the placeholders for the data items.

2. Click next to ‘Field separator’ on to add the data items.
Figure 9-5 Field definition for a fixed field message
In this example select for ‘Start character’ 23 for the X or 40 for the Y
and for ‘Field length’ in both cases 12 to add the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the fixed field see the ‘Field
Selection’ below.
9.2.4.3 Field Selection

The fields that are in both field definitions, separator delimited and fixed
fields, will be explained.
Label Mode
This describes the method how the data item is written in the event
string.
None. Only the value of the data item.
Data Description. The full data description plus the value of the data
item.
Data Mnemonic. A reduced data description (only its mnemonic) plus
the value of the data item.
User Label. The users can make their own label in the ‘User Label’
window.
User Label
The label in the event string created by the user. Only when for ‘Label
Mode’ the option User Label is selected.
Factor
A multiplication factor to multiply the value of the data item.
Offset
A constant that is added to the value of the data item.
Number of Decimals
The number of decimals for the value of the data item in the event
string.
Single Field
One data item can be selected for the location in the event string.
Double Field
Two data items can be selected for one location in the event string.
Between the data items a separator can be selected.

Select a data item for the event string.
If the Event Definition editor is started from the Explorer, the
 button is not available anymore.
If the Event Definition editor is started in the Configuration or in the
Acquisition, the standard PDS2000 equipment and computations tree
is shown.
Figure 9-6 Select Data in the event definition editor
9.3 Events Data Source

On this page the data sources can be selected for the events, e.g. in case
the distance interval is selected in the mode page, PDS2000 has to know
the data item for the distance measurement; a position source.
Figure 9-7 Data Source page of the events
Click on to select from the Select Data dialog the data item for the
relevant data source.

Figure 9-8 Select Data item for the position source
9.4 Events Numbering

On the numbering page the event number sequence can be set.
Figure 9-9 Numbering page of the events
Set a start number for the first event number and set the number
increment to the next event numbers. If the counting of the event numbers
is decreasing, check the Count down checkbox.

10 Control Center
10.1 Introduction
When PDS2000 is started always the Control Center will be opened.
From the Control Center all modules of the program can be started.
Before the Control Center of PDS2000 is started PDS2000 will do a check
 on the Operating System running on the computer. When the OS is

Windows XP SP2 or lower the Control Center will not be started. A
message will appear on the screen.
It is possible that after the Control Center is opened a popup is displayed
about the power management. See for more information about this
message and the checks the chapter ‘Power Management’ on page 204.
Most of the modules of PDS2000 can be started through the menu bar
and/or with a click on one of the buttons in the toolbar, a small part is only
accessible through the Explorer. See for more information the chapter
‘Explorer’ on page 209.
In this chapter the items that are not discussed in other chapters of the
manual will be discussed:
 Support issues in Help menu (see below)
 Display Mode (see page 165).
 Clock Synchronization (see page 165).
 Interfacing (see page 168).
 Import (see page 173).
 Batch Plot (see page 188)
 Quick Profile Plot (see page 190).
 Geo Calculator (see page 194).
 User Accounts (see page 200).
 Language (see page 203).
 Power Management (see page 204)
 General Settings (see page 206)
Some items will not be discussed in this manual; Lite View, Simulator and
SonarSwath.
The PDS2000 LiteView utility is a 3D viewer for multibeam data from
PDS2000 logdata files, for PDS2000 Grid Models and for 3D Design
Models. The Lite View can be opened from the menu bar with Tools > Lite
View.
See for a detailed explanation the manual PDS2000 LiteView (the file
PDS2000 LiteView.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
PDS2000 - User Manual Control Center  163

The Simulator utility is a stand-alone program that can simulate the most
common sensors. With this Simulator a setup in PDS2000 can be tested
before the actual sensors are connected. At the moment no manual is
available. The Simulator can be opened from the menu bar with Tools >
Simulator.
The SonarSwath utility is made to analyze processed bathymetry data
and generate a report of sonar performance as a function of the beam
launch angle or the beam distance from the center. The SonarSwath can
be opened from the menu bar with Tools > SonarSwath.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Sonar Swath (the file Sonar
Swath.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
10.2 Help Menu

In the menu item Help of the Control Center are several items available to
assist the user to update PDS2000 or contact RESON.
Figure 10-1 Help menu of the Control Center
Help Topics
It will open the Help file of PDS2000 which contains a copy of all the
PDS2000 manuals. The Help file can also be open with the F1-key.
Download PDS2000 Updates
The FTP site of PDS2000 will be opened to download the latest
version of PDS2000.
PDS2000 On The Web
The PDS2000 site on the RESON website will be opened.
PDS2000 On Twitter
The PDS2000 twitter site will be opened where the latest information
of PDS2000 is available.
View Release Notes
The release notes of PDS2000 will be opened in the default PDF
reader.
Send Feedback To RESON
Via email
The default email editor will be opened to send an email to the
helpdesk of PDS2000 (pds2000@reson.nl).
Via the web
The Support page on the RESON website will be opened.
Show Support Phone Numbers
The telephone numbers for the PDS2000 support in The Netherlands
and for the RESON support in Denmark and USA will be given.
164  Control Center PDS2000 - User Manual

Start RESON Remote Assistance
The RESON remote assistance will be started. In the start dialog the
ID of the user will be displayed. If the user tells his ID to the RESON
support, the RESON support can log in on the computer of the user to
see what the problem is.
Request Maintenance Contract (Update)
The default email editor will be opened to send an email to the
PDS2000 sales department (info@reson.nl). This contact can be used
to send an email when the dongle has to be updated or for questions
about the maintenance contract.
About Control Center
Information about the PDS2000 version, the dongle and the
maintenance contract will be displayed. See also the chapter ‘Update
of PDS2000 Dongle’ on page 20.
10.3 Display Mode

With the display mode the light conditions for the screen can be modified.
The display mode can be changed with View > Display Mode from the
menu bar or with from the toolbar.
The four different display modes are:
Normal ( )
The standard light conditions.
Night ( )
Less contrast and brightness, can be used during the night.
Twilight ( )
Less contrast, can be used when there is a twilight condition.
Bright ( )
Extra contrast and brightness, can be used when there is a sunshine
light condition.
The display modes are working fine for the Windows Themes
‘Windows Classic’ and ‘Windows 7 Basic’. For Night, Twilight and
 Bright in the Windows Theme ‘Windows 7’ (Aero Theme) not all the
items will be supported!
The display mode is also available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation windows with View > Display Mode from the menu bar.
10.4 Clock Synchronization

With this option in the Control Center an external clock can be selected to
synchronize PDS2000 with this clock. With the output option other
systems can be synchronized with PDS2000. After the selection of the
external clock, the clock synchronization can be switched on / off.
For a good synchronization between an external clock and PDS2000 a
clock with a 1PPS pulse is needed. It is also possible to use an external
clock without the 1PPS pulse, but this will not be that accurate as the
clock with the 1PPS pulse.
When no external clock and a time in message is used in PDS2000 in
 combination with a RESON SeaBat 7K sonar an alarm will be generated

to warn the user. PDS2000 needs an external clock before proper survey
can be done with a RESON SeaBat 7K sonar.

10.4.1 Clock Synchronization Settings
Select System > Clock Synchronization from the menu bar or click on
in the toolbar to open the Clock Synchronization window.
Figure 10-2 Clock Synchronization window with a selected clock device

External Clock Synchronization
Check this option to activate the clock synchronization.
This option may only be RESON 7k I/O module

used when the 7K I/O Select the option Use RESON 7k I/O module for clock synchronization
module runs on the same and the 7K I/O module will set the time of the PDS2000 computer. The
computer!!. 7K I/O module will also update the time on a regular bases.
PDS2000 ClockSync module
Select the option Use PDS2000 ClockSync module for clock
synchronization and the time of the PDS2000 computer will be synced
with the time from the selected clock device.
Clock device
The leap seconds can be
Select one of the clock devices and click on to display the
set in the GPS Time clock device as the ‘Selected clock device’.
Parameters of the Project For the clock devices with a GPS time automatically an extra item
Configuration (see page will be displayed in the window; the leap seconds. With these leap
63). seconds the GPS time will be corrected to UTC time.
Input
Click on the first select the right communication port with
the right settings (see page 168) for the time message of the
selected clock device.
When the pulse (PPS) is on the same port as the time message
then the pulse is automatically interfaced. If the pulse is on a
different port then click on the second to select the port for
the pulse.

If the clock device is connected to the system, click on to
check the communication port and the data received from the
selected clock device. The Clock Sync window is from the same
type as the Device Test window in the Equipment page (see page
96).
Output
Check the option Enable if a time output is wanted for another
system. Click on to select the clock output device and the
right communication port with the right settings for the output.
Click on to activate the clock synchronization.
If the clock synchronization is activated and the Clock Synchronization
window is opened, the clock synchronization will be inactivated. This is
done to run for instance the device test in the Clock Synchronization
window. Click on to activate the clock synchronization again.
10.4.2 Activate Clock Synchronization

PDS2000 will display on two locations if the clock synchronization is
activated, in the Connections window of the Control Center and with in
the taskbar on the bottom right hand side. These two locations will only
show that the clock synchronization is activated, not that it is working
properly.
 If the clock synchronization is activated but no data is received then it is

not possible to start the Acquisition in the Realtime mode!!!!
Figure 10-3 Clock synchronization is activated in the Connections window
With double click on in the taskbar the Clock Sync window will be
opened. This is the same window (Clock Sync – System messages) as
when on is clicked in the Clock Synchronization window (see
page 166). The only difference is that in the menu bar the option Edit is
added.
Click with the right button of the mouse on and a context menu is
opened with the options Show and Exit. With Show the same window as
with the double click on the icon is opened and with Exit will disappear
from the taskbar but the clock synchronization will not be inactivated.
Figure 10-4 Icon in the taskbar with its context menu
The only way to inactivate the clock synchronization is to uncheck the

 option External Clock Synchronization in the Clock Synchronization
window (see page 166).
10.4.3 PDS2000 SetTime Service

During the installation of PDS2000 the PDS2000SettimeService will be
installed. This service can modify the computer clock when the clock

synchronization is running and the computer clock has to be synced with
the time from the clock device.
When a new PDS2000 version is installed while another version is
already installed then the PDS2000SettimeService will be uninstalled and
installed again for the new version. This is done to be sure that the latest
version of the PDS2000SettimeService is running. It will still work for the
older versions.
When the user decide to remove an older version of PDS2000 then also
the PDS2000SettimeService will be uninstalled. It is possible that the
service is still available because Windows sometime does not allow to
uninstall the service. But in most cases the service is uninstalled thus not
available anymore for the other already installed versions of PDS2000.
The Clocksync will give a warning when the PDS2000SettimeService is
not available anymore. To make the service active again the user has to
 re-install the PDS2000 version that is already installed on the PC. Use
during the re-installation the option ‘Repair’ to get the service running
again (see page 15).
10.5 Interfacing
On the Equipment page an IO port has to be set when a sensor is added
to the device list (see page 96). When in the Equipment page on
is clicked only the communication ports for that specific
device driver are available and not all possible interfaces can be selected.
In the Interfacing window which can be opened in the Control Center all
the different communication ports are available.
10.5.1 Interfacing Page
Figure 10-5 Interfacing window
Select from the menu bar the option System > Interfacing or click on in
the toolbar to open the Interfacing window.
By default only the serial communication ports COM1 – 16 are displayed
in this window. If in the Equipment page for a specific device driver
another communication port is added then this new communication port
will be visible in the Interfacing window.

The visible ports can be selected and on the right side in the window the
settings will be displayed and can be modified if necessary. If a
 communication port is modified in the Interfacing window then the settings
of this port, if it is used in the Equipment page, will also be changed.
Click on to add a new port or a new type of port to the list. In the
Select Interface dialog one of the available types for the selected device
can be selected. Select one of the available interface types and a new
network port name, a new com port name or a new OPC port name has
to be entered.
The different interfaces that are available are:
 XSE (see below)
 Socket (see page 169)
 Serial (see page 170)
 RTA (see page 171)
 RGL (see page 171)
 R7KI (see page 171)
 R7K (see page 172)
 OPC (see page 172)
 NCC (see page 173)
 EDGETECH (see page 173)
It will depend on the device driver which interfaces will be available.
10.5.1.1 XSE
This type of communication port is only used for an Elac system. A
network port has to be entered and on the right side in the Interfacing
page an IP-address has to be entered for the XSE server.
Figure 10-6 Example of an IP-address for a XSE server
10.5.1.2 Socket
This type of communication port is a network connection and can be used
for receiving and/or sending data through a network connection.
Figure 10-7 Example of a network settings for a socket communication port

Local Port
The network port on the PDS2000 computer.
Host Address
The IP-address of the remote system. This is the system that sends
the data.
If the remote system is on the same computer as where PDS2000 is
running, the host address is 127.0.0.1.
Host Port
The network port on the remote system.
Check host address
This option is only relevant if the protocol is UDP/IP.
If the option is checked, only the data from the host address will be
accepted.
Protocol
There are two network protocols available:
UDP/IP. This protocol will be used for the communication with the
RESON multibeam systems.
TCP/IP. If this protocol is used an IP-address has to be entered as
host address. This protocol checks the communication between the
two ports before it send or received data.
IP Multicast
This is broadcasting from/to a select group of recipients. Check the
option Join multicast to receive or send data in the group. The group
name has to be entered. Normally this name is created by the sender
of the data. The protocol for IP multicast is always UDP/IP.
The table below gives the setting for receiving and sending data:
Receiving Sending Receiving & Sending
Local Port local port number 0 local port number
Host Address empty host IP address host IP address
Host Port 0 host port number host port number
 The ‘empty’ mentioned above in the table can also be replaced by ‘host IP
address’ when only the data from the host address has to be accepted.
10.5.1.3 Serial
This type of communication port is a serial connection, called COM port,
and can be used for all the sensors with a serial connection.
If more than one COM port has to be used, serial extender cards have to
be installed. See in the chapter ‘Installation’ on page 17 for more
information.
Figure 10-8 Example of the settings for a serial port

10.5.1.4 RTA
The RTA communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the devices which are received from the RTA (Real Time Appliance) box
used for the Odom ES3.
Figure 10-9 Example of the settings for a R7K communication
The Base Port Number is by default set on the right number (2020), do
not change this!!
Select the sensor type that matches with the selected device.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Interface Setup chapter Odom
ES3 (the file Interface Setup.pdf in the folder ‘manuals’).
10.5.1.5 RGL
The RGL communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the laser scan devices Riegl and Riegl Vline. The port cannot be selected
it will automatically selected when one of these laser scan types is
selected as device.
Figure 10-10 Example of the settings for a RGL communication
Host Address
The IP address is always from the Riegl laser scan.
10.5.1.6 R7KI
The R7KI communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. This communication port is identical with
the Socket port as described above.
Figure 10-11 Example of the settings for a R7KI communication
See ‘Socket’ on page 169 for an explanation of the view.

10.5.1.7 R7K
The R7K communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. The port cannot be selected it will
automatically selected when a RESON SeaBat 7K system is selected as
device.
Figure 10-12 Example of the settings for a R7K communication
Host Address
The host is always the 7K data server and, when it is running on the
same computer as PDS2000, the address is 127.0.0.1. If the 7K data
server is running on another computer then the address is the IP
address of the other computer.
Protocol
The protocol has to be UDP/IP.
This port can be used for all 7K drivers that need information from the 7K
data server, like the multibeam, the side scan sonar and the snippets, or
send information to the 7K data server, like the output to 7K.
10.5.1.8 OPC
The OPC communication port is a kind of network connection. The port
cannot be selected it will automatically selected when an OPC device is
selected.
Figure 10-13 OPC server has to be selected for the OPC communication
Before OPC (OPen Connectivity) can be used special software has to be

installed on the PDS2000 or external computer.
Force OPC 1.0a connection
Check this option when an old 1.0a connection is used.
Server on local computer
Check this option when the OPC server is running on the PDS2000
computer.
Address
This will automatically be filled with ‘localhost’ when the option
Server on local computer is checked.
When the OPC server is running on an external; computer add
here the IP address of the external computer.
Server name
Select the server name as use on the PDS2000 or external
computer.

OPC Server brand: ArchestrA FSGateway
Check this option when as OPC server brand the ArchestrA
FSGateway is used.
10.5.1.9 NCC
This type of communication port is needed for the Navisound echo
sounders. The port is a dummy port which is used in PDS2000 to
communicate with the Navisound. The actual port and settings are
defined in the Navisound Control Center (see page 99).
The NCC port is automatically created when a Navisound echo sounder is
selected in the Equipment. So it is not necessary to add a NCC port, but
when by accident the port is deleted while the Navisound is already
selected then the port can be added. It is not needed to define the baud
rate, etc. because this will be done in the Navisound Control Center.
There can be only one NCC port in the Interfacing available.
10.5.1.10 Edgetech
The Edgetech communication port is a network connection and is specific
for the Edgetech side scan sonar system. This communication port is
identical with the Socket port as described above, only the Local port and
the multicast are disabled.
Figure 10-14 Example of the settings for an Edgetech communication
10.6 Import
On several places in PDS2000 data files can be imported and converted
to information that can be used in PDS2000. The different import
possibilities will be discussed in the different modules of PDS2000.
The import in the Control Center is made to convert data files to PDS2000
log data files.
If the Select Tool dialog is
not visible, select File > Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Import or click on in the
New from the menu bar or toolbar to open the PDS2000 Import Utility. When the PDS2000 Import
click on in the toolbar Utility window is opened it will be an empty window with the Select Tool
to open the dialog. dialog on top of it.

Figure 10-15 PDS2000 Import Utility
Select in the Select Tool dialog the type of import for which a new import
configuration has to be created or select an existing import configuration.
An existing import configuration can also be opened with File > Open from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar.
If a new import configuration has to be created it is also possible to use
an existing import configuration file as a base. Check the option Copy
from existing config file and select the file that has to be used as a start.
At the end of the configuration the new import configuration can be saved
by clicking on in the toolbar or select File > Save As… from the menu
bar.
If there is already an import configuration that can be used with the import
files check the option Open existing and select the right import
configuration.
At the moment the PDS2000 Import Utility can import the following data:
 Single Beam XYZ (see below)
 XTF (see page 183)
 S7K (see page 184)
 SZ (see page 186)
 Simrad EM3000 (see page 187)

10.6.1 Single Beam XYZ Import
Figure 10-16 First page of the Single Beam XYZ Import
The three different XYZ options are:

ASCII (X,Y,Z)
Contains X, Y, Z data with or without an ID to identify the line.
ASCII Customised
Contains X, Y, Z data. It is also possible to have in each line a date, a
time and an ID.
Navisoft PRD
This is the ASCII output file from Navisoft.
Select one of the three formats, select the number of channels in the data
file(s) and the sign convention for the Z-value. Click on to start
the setup of the import configuration or to check the import configuration if
an existing configuration. If an existing import configuration is selected or
the import wizard is finished, click on to start the import of the
data.
For the Navisoft PRD files it is not necessary to open the import
configuration file. The user can click on and select the PRD files
for the import.
With the import configuration will be opened. It will depend on the
selection of the XYZ format and the number of channels which pages will
appear before the actual import can be started.

10.6.1.1 ASCII File Options
Figure 10-17 ASCII File Options page in the import configuration
This page will only appear when ASCII Customised is selected.

The options are:
Parsing with filter ID’s
Check this option when ID’s are present in the data file(s) and the ID’s
will be used to specify the data lines.
Timetag parsing
Date and time are available in the data file(s).
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate
No date or time is available in the data file(s). With this option a date
and a time will be generated from the manual information which can be
set in one of the other pages in the import utility (see page 177).
10.6.1.2 Runline Options
Figure 10-18 Runline Options page in the import configuration

This page will appear when ASCII (X,Y,Z) or ASCII Customised is
selected.
The options are:
Pick runline from project
An existing runline from the project have to be selected in the next
page.
Parse X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 to generate runline
Extract from the data file(s) with the use of an ID the start and end
coordinates of the runline (s).
Create runline from rough estimate of XYZ data
Calculate the start and end coordinates of the runline from the first and
last X and Y in the data file.
There is a restriction in the order of information in the data file(s) when the
runline information is extracted from the data file(s) with option Parse X1,
Y1, X2 and Y2 … The data file(s) can contain more sets of XYZ data,
where the first line in the data set starts with the ID of the runline and the
X1, Y1, X2 and Y2. The following lines should contain the ID for the XYZ
data and the XYZ data. If after the XYZ data a line contains the ID for the
runline again then a new file with a new runline and XYZ data will be
created.
10.6.1.3 File Selection
Figure 10-19 File Selection page in the import configuration
This page will appear for all three formats. The number of columns on this
page depends on the selections in the pages before.
Click on to add a data file to the file selection. If in the runline
options page (see page 176) the option Pick runline from project is
checked and/or in the ASCII file options page (see page 176) the option
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate is checked, an Edit
Import File Settings window will be opened after the selection of the
file(s).

Figure 10-20 Import file settings for the import data file
Import file
The added data file from the File Selection page.
Runline File
Select with an existing runline from the project.
This option will be shown if the option Pick runline from project in the
run line options page is checked (see page 176).
The next three fields will be shown if the options Timetag generation from
start time and ping rate in the ASCII file options page (see page 176) is
checked or the ASCII (X,Y,Z) data file with or without an ID is selected.
Start date
Click on next to the date and select in the calendar the right start
date.
Figure 10-21 Calendar
Start time
Set the right start time of the first XYZ in the data file. Select the hours,
minutes or seconds with the mouse, type in the right value or use the
up and down arrows to change the numbers.
Ping rate (Hz)
Set the frequency for the XYZ data; how many times per second is the
XYZ data presented in the data file.
Click on in the Edit Import File Settings window to go back to the
file selection page. With in the file selection page, the Edit Import
File Settings window can be opened to check or modify the import file
settings. will only be active if a runline, date or time can be set.
If all the data files are added and the runline, date and time are set, click
on .

10.6.1.4 ASCII Parsing Wizards
Figure 10-22 ASCII parsing in the import configuration
To click on behind one of the options will start the wizard for the right
settings of the selected option. It depends on the selection of the ASCII
data file and on the selections made in the pages before which parsing
options will be available on this page.
The different parsing options can be:
1. Parsing Of Date, Time, X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
2. Parsing Of X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
3. Parsing Of X1, Y1, X2, Y2 For Runline
Option 1 and 2 starts with the parsing of the XYZ data (see below). After
that option 1 will continue with the parsing of the date and time (see page
182) and option 2 will be finished. Option 3 is a separate parsing option
(see page 183).
If the parsing of one of the options is finish a checkmark ( ) will be
placed before the option. If all the parsing is done will become
active. Click on and the first page of the import utility will be
opened again.

10.6.1.5 Parsing XYZ Data
Figure 10-23 Settings for parsing the XYZ data
On this page the settings for the XYZ data are set, so that on the next
page the right columns with XYZ data can be selected.
File
The filename displayed in the file box is the first file from the file
selection page. At the bottom, in ‘Preview Data’, the data of that file is
shown.
Original data type
Delimited. Check this option if the data is separated with a delimiter,
such as a comma, a tab or a space.
Fixed Width. Check this options if the data is aligned in columns with
spaces in between.
Skip lines
Check this option if the first line(s) of the data file(s) contains
information that is not runline data or XYZ data.
Give a number for the number of lines that have to be skipped.
Line ID
Give an ID for the lines that have to be extracted from the data file. If
an ID is given, the preview data will change and will only show the
lines in the data file with the given ID. In the example shown above,
the ID for the XYZ data is ‘EC’ and for the runline ‘RT’.
If all the settings are set, click on to go to the second page for
parsing XYZ data.

Figure 10-24 Select the delimited columns in the data file
This page will appear when Delimited is checked on the first page of
parsing XYZ data. If Fixed Width is checked the page will be similar as
the page for parsing the date and time, only the sub items will be X, Y, Z
and optional date and time (see page 182).
On this page the delimiter and the columns have to be defined.
Delimiter
Select a character as delimiter between the data fields. The options
are comma, tab, space or custom. With custom a user defined
character can be added.
If in the ASCII file options Fields
page (see page 176) the If a column is selected in ‘Select Column Names’, a column number
option Timetag parsing is will be added to the selected field name.
checked, also the date and
the time column have to be Select column names
selected. Click with the right mouse button on a column and select one of the
available field names for the selected column.
If all the columns which are necessary for the import are selected, the
button will become active (only for parsing XYZ data). Click on
and go back to the first page of the import utility.
If the parsing contains a date and time, the ASCII Parsing Wizard will
continue with parsing date and time (see below).

10.6.1.6 Parsing Date And Time
The next type of page will appear when a date and a time column is
selected in parsing XYZ data on page 181 or when Fixed Width is
selected as delimiter in the first page of parsing XYZ data on page 180.
Figure 10-25 Select the month in the date column
The locations of the year, month and day in the date column are defined
with a start and end position in the column.
Double click in ‘Column For Field Name:’ on year, month or day and an
edit window will be opened.
Start Position
Set the start position of the item; in the example above the month
(here 02) starts at position 5.
Stop Position
Set the stop (end) position of the item; in the example above the
month (here 02) stops at position 6.
Factor
The multiplication factor should be 1.
Offset
An offset can be added to the selected item value to get the right
value. If for instance the year is presented in the data file as 05, then
with an offset of 2000 the year becomes 2005.
If the year, month and day are set, click on to go to the page for
parsing the time. This page works similar as the page for parsing the
date, only here are the items hour, minute, second and millisecond. If the
hour, minute and second is set (millisecond is optional) becomes
active.

10.6.1.7 Parsing Runline Data
If in the runline options page (see page 176) the option Parse X1, Y1, X2
and Y2 to generate runline is checked, a page will be opened to set the
settings for the runline data in the data file.
This page will be similar to the first page of the parsing XYZ data on page
180. Give on this page an ID for the line where the X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 are
defined.
If all the settings are set, click on to go to the second page for
parsing runline data.
This second page will similar to the second page of parsing XYZ data
(see page 180). On this page four columns have to be selected before
will become active.
10.6.2 XTF Import
Figure 10-26 XTF Import page
Click on to select the XTF file for the import. It is possible to add
more XTF files before the import is started.
Check one of the options Import sidescan data, Import snippet data or
Import tide data if side scan data, snippets or tide data is available in the
XTF file(s) and have to be imported.
Click on to start the import of the XTF file(s).

10.6.3 S7K Import
Figure 10-27 S7K Import page
Click on to select the S7K file for the import. It is possible to add
more S7K files before the import is started.
For bathymetry data at least the following records should be logged in the
 S7K file:
 For Position :1003; or 1015
  For Heading and Attitude: 1004; or 1011 and 1012; or 1016

 For Bathymetry: 7000, 7004 and 7006; or 7000, 7004 and 7027
Check one of the options Import sidescan data or Import snippet data if
side scan data or snippets data is available in the S7K file(s) and have to
be imported.
When the data is logged with a survey vessel check the option Surface
Vessel and when the data is logged with an underwater vehicle, like a
ROV or AUV, check the option Subsea Vessel.
Click on to start the import of the S7K file(s).
10.6.3.1 Offsets
When in the S7K file(s) the record 7030 is missing, automatically an
offsets dialog will be opened. The offsets for the Position, Attitude,
Multibeam and Sealevel can be added manually or loaded from a file.
In the file all the items in the dialog should be mentioned with the terms as
displayed below in the text file.

Figure 10-28 Text file with the offsets values for the offsets dialog
Figure 10-29 Offsets dialog in the Import
Check the option Apply to all files when for all the S7K files in the import
the same offsets have to be applied.

10.6.4 SZ Import
Figure 10-30 SZ Import page
Click on to add SZ files to the list. If the SZ data contains records

with survey data (record 2122), the ‘Grid model settings’ becomes
relevant. The survey data will be placed in a grid model. The default
setting for the ‘Interpolation’ is No interpolation. If the user wants to fill the
grid model, select the option Interpolate circular and the empty cells
between the runlines will be interpolated. This circular interpolation will
take a long time. The cell size of the grid model can be set, with the
smaller the cell size the more detailed the grid model is and the longer it
takes to fill the grid model.
Click on to start the import of the added SZ files. It will depend on
the information in the SZ file, what will be generated in the import. For SZ
files with design information the following files will be generated.
 3D Model file with the design profiles.
 3D Model file with the GLW values (levels).
 Track Guidance Route file with the route of the axis of the river.
 Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river.
 Runline file with the reference lines for the left and right side of the
sailing channel, for the left and right side of the river and for the axis of
the river.
For SZ files with survey data the following files will be generated.
 Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river. If also design
information is available in the SZ file, this file is identical with the
runline file mentioned above.
 Grid Model file with the survey data and with the interpolated data if
applicable.
 PDS2000 log data files for each cross line.

 Log data file set with all the PDS2000 log data files mentioned above.
10.6.5 Simrad EM3000 Import
Figure 10-31 Simrad EM3000 Import page
Click on to select the ALL files for the import. It is possible to add
more ALL files before the import is started.
Check the option Apply imported sound velocity profile to PDS2000 file
when the imported sound velocity profile data from the ALL file has to be
 applied to the created PDS2000 logdata file. When more ALL files have
the same sound velocity profile only one sound velocity profile file is
created in PDS2000.
Click on to start the import of the Simrad EM3000 file(s).
10.6.6 Save Import Configuration

When the import was successful the import configuration can be saved
with File > Save or File > Save As...from the menu bar or with from
the toolbar.
If the PDS2000 Import Utility is closed without saving the import
configuration, the program will ask to save the import configuration.
The next time the same type of data files have to be imported the import
configuration can be selected.
For a single beam XYZ import click on and the file selection page
(see page 177) will be opened. After the to be imported files are selected,
click on and the import will start.
For a XTF, a S7K, a SZ and a Simrad EM3000 import add the files and
click on to start the import.

10.6.7 PDS2000 Log Data File
The created PDS2000 log data files are automatically placed in a File Set
which can be used in the Editing (see pagexxx).
The format of the created log data files is similar to the standard
PDS2000 log data files. The log data file created through the import will
look like:
Import name[Application type]_Runline name-date-time.pds
where:
Import name
ImportSingle Beam - 01; the import name is contains the file name of
the data file; here ‘Single Beam - 01.asc’.
Application type
The application type will be the application type of the active project.
Runline name
In the single beam XYZ import a runline name can be selected. This
runline name will be written in the log data file name.
If the runline is made with the start and end X and Y or the X1,Y1,X2
and Y2 from the XYZ data file, then the runline name will always be
‘Runline.0’. This runline will not be created in the project, but is only
available with the data of the log data file.
In the S7K import the runline name is always ‘Runline.0’, which is
generated from the start and end coordinates in the file.
In the SZ import the runline name is always the runline as used in the
SZ file. That means that for each runline in the SZ file a separate log
data file will be generated.
In the XTF import and in the Simrad EM3000 import the runline name
is always ‘NO_LINE’, which means no runline is defined.
date-time
The date and time of the import.
10.7 Batch Plot

The Batch Plot is a tool to generate a plot with grid model data based on
a plot template. The Batch Plot uses a plot template in combination with
user specified XYZ data.
Before the Batch Plot can be started a plot project with a plot template
has to be created in the Plot (see pagexxx). The plot template should be a
plot with a grid model in the plan.
The Batch Plot can be started with Tools > Batch Plot from the menu bar.
10.7.1 Batch Plot Dialog

The Batch Plot will open without any data or information selected. When a
setup is saved it is possible to open a setup so all the data and
information is loaded.

Figure 10-32 Batch Plot
Survey data
A XYZ file have to be selected with . From this XYZ data file a grid
model will be generated and that grid model will replace the grid model
in the plot template.
The Name Prefix is automatically generated when the XYZ data file is
selected. The user can modified the prefix if he wants. The prefix
name will be used in the plot file and in the DXF file.
Check the option XYZ file contains Depths when the Z values in the
XYZ data file are depths. This is necessary because the depths in the
 grid model are negative heights. So the Z values from the XYZ file get
a minus sign when the option is checked.
DTM
The generated grid model will Set the cell size for the grid model that have to be generated from the
be store with the name of the XYZ data file. The cell size doesn’t have to be the same as in the XYZ
XYZ file in the project. data file.

If there are gaps in the data or the grid model cell size is smaller than
the size in the XYZ data file then the data in the grid model can be
interpolated. As interpolation methods are available Circular and
Triangular. For more information about the interpolation see page 535
and pagexxx.
In the grid model the Hit Count is always present. The user can select
which data types should be in the grid model, he can choose between
Z Average, Z Minimum (Deepest) and Z Maximum (Highest). The data
type that is used in the plot template should always be selected
otherwise no data will be plotted. The other two data types are extra.
 When there is an interpolation and all three data types are selected
then for all three an interpolation will be done.
Plot selection
Select a plot project with . In this plot project the plot template
should be available.
Add one or more plot templates from the selected plot project for which
the generated grid model is valid.
Text labels
The text labels as defined in the plot template can be modified in the
column ‘User Text’. This modified text will be used in the plot which will
be generated.
A Batch Plot setup file (BPP file) can be opened. This file contains all
the information to set all the items in the Batch Plot dialog.
Saves a modified setup to the related BPP file.
Saves the setup and specify the name for the BPP file.
Opens the Print Setup dialog to setup the printer.
Prints the generated plot to the printer that is selected in the Print
Setup dialog.
Creates a plot file with the prefix name, date and time in the selected
plot project.
Creates a DXF file with the prefix name, date and time in the project
folder.
Closes the Batch Plot dialog without saving the setup in a BPP file.
10.8 Quick Profile Plot

The Quick Profile Plot is a tool to generate quickly profile plots based on a
plot template. The Quick Profile Plot uses the plot template in combination
with user specified data, like runlines and grid models.
Before the Quick Profile Plot can be started a plot project with a plot
template has to be created in the Plot (see page 547). The plot template
should be a profile plot based on runlines. Next to the runlines, file sets,
grid models, design models and text can be used to setup the plot
template. For each runline as selected in the runlines files a different
profile plot will be generated.

The Quick Profile Plot can be started with Tools > Quick Profile Plot from
the menu bar.
10.8.1 Quick Profile Plot Setup

The Quick Profile Plot will be opened with no plot project and plot
template specified. Specify the plot project and from the plot project the
plot template that has to be used in the Quick Profile Plot. Automatically
all the runlines files used in the project that is related to the plot project
will be displayed.
Figure 10-33 Quick Profile Plot with a plot project and a plot template selected
In the tabs Filesets, DTM, Design and Text the right files for the profiles
plots can be selected and also the right text can be specified.
Under Select Runlines the runlines files or a set of runlines can be
selected which will be used to generate the profile plots.
10.8.1.1 Filesets
Figure 10-34 Tab Filesets in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template log data is specified as a layer
then with this tab the file set for the profile plots can be specified. Click on
to select an existing log data file set in the project for the
selected layer.

10.8.1.2 DTM
Figure 10-35 Tab DTM in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a grid model is specified as a

layer then with this tab the grid model for the profile plots can be
specified. Click on to select an existing grid model in the
project for the selected layer.
10.8.1.3 Design
Figure 10-36 Tab Design in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a design model is specified as a

layer then with this tab the design model for the profile plots can be
specified. Click on the arrow in , select the model that will be
used (a profile design model, a grid model or a 3D design model) and
select then an existing model in the project for the selected layer.

10.8.1.4 Text
Figure 10-37 Tab Text in the Quick Profile Plot
If in the profile panel of the plot template a text block is specified as a

layer then with this tab the text for the profile plots can be specified. Click
on to set the text for the selected text block.
10.8.2 Quick Profile Plot Options

In the Quick Profile Plot the setup can be saved and opened again, the
profile plots can printed, plot files and DXF files can be generated.
 If the setup with the file selections is saved, the saved setup can be
opened again. Before
selected.
is used the plot project has to be
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with the name of the plot template.
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with a name specified by the user.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a preview
of the plot will be displayed. Click on in the preview file plot to
close the preview and continue with the preview of the next selected
runline. The preview can be stopped by closing the file plot preview
with .
For the selected runline in the General tab a preview of the plot will be
displayed. Click on or to close the preview.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab
pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file with the name of the plot template and a sequence number.
After the plot files are generated they will be printed.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab

pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file.
A dialog will be opened to define the plot file name. The name can be
the plot template name, the name of the runline or a name specified by
the user. The plot files will be generated with the defined name and a
sequence number. The plot files with the runline name do not have a
sequence number.
Before the DXF file can be created the plot files has to be generated
as discussed above in the option .
After the plot files are generated for each plot file a DXF file will be
created and will be placed in the plot project directory.
If a lot of DXF files has to be created, it can take a long time before the
 creation of all the DXF files is finished. Move the cursor over the plot
icon ( ) in the taskbar and a display will tell the user how many tasks
(DXF files) still have to be processed. In the example below still 176
DXF files has to be created.
Figure 10-38 Still 176 DXF files has to be created
The Quick Profile Plot will be closed and the setup will not be saved.
10.9 Geo Calculator

The Geo Calculator is a tool for coordinate conversions. At the moment
two different manual coordinate conversions with a reporting capability
are available.
The first conversion is a conversion where only the project configuration
and the project coordinate system can be used. The second conversion is
a conversion between two selectable coordinate systems.
It is also possible to compute a 3 parameters shift from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid and to convert a file with coordinates using
the project coordinate system.
The values for the latitude and longitude in the different pages does not
 have to be in the format as displayed, it can be entered in several
formats. For example: 56°30’07.2” N, 56 30 7.2 N or 56.502 N.
The Geo Calculator can be started with Tools > Geo Calculator from the
menu bar.
10.9.1 Manual Coordinate Conversion

The manual coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator can
convert satellite ellipsoid coordinates (like WGS’84 or ETRS89) with the
use of a datum transformation to local ellipsoid coordinates and projection
coordinates or vice versa.
When a route is selected the KP and offtrack will be calculated for the
coordinate that is used in the conversion. When a KP and offtrack is
entered the satellite ellipsoid coordinates, the local ellipsoid coordinates
and the projection coordinates will be calculated.
The coordinate system in this conversion is always the project coordinate
system. A report can be generated with the calculated conversion.

When the manual coordinate conversion is selected, the project
configuration with the project coordinate system will be displayed.
Figure 10-39 Manual Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Satellite ellipsoid coordinate

The latitude, the longitude and the altitude for the satellite ellipsoid, for
instance WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates.
With the display Local ellipsoid coordinate
format for the coordinates The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
can be changed. will be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates can be
added manually and all other coordinates will then be calculated
automatically.
Grid coordinate
The Easting, the Northing and the height in projection coordinates will
be calculated automatically. When a geoid model is present in the
coordinate system the height becomes the geoidal height. If necessary
the coordinates and height can be added manually and all other
coordinates will then be calculated automatically. The convergence
(see below) and point scale factor (see page 196) are always
calculated.
Route Coordinate
Select a route and the KP and offtrack will be calculated. If necessary
the KP and/or offtrack can be added manually and all other
coordinates will then be calculated automatically.
Generate a report that is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select the

menu option File > Save as… in the reporter to save the report as PDF
file.

10.9.1.1 Convergence
The grid convergence is the angle between grid north and true north, so
in fact the angle between the grid lines and the projection of the
meridians. When using a gyro compass, and its input is read by
PDS2000, the heading value cannot directly be used in the computations.
The value has to be corrected for the grid convergence to obtain a grid
heading which can be used for the computations.
The complete computation for the grid heading is:
Grid Heading = True Heading + Convergence + Heading Correction
For some projection there is a grid skew. This skew will be added to the
convergence.
The heading correction is the correction derived from a gyro compass
calibration.
Below an example for a Transverse Mercator (TM) grid convergence.
Figure 10-40 TM grid convergence
10.9.1.2 Point Scale Factor

For the projections a scale factor on the central meridian is defined. This
is done to minimize the distortion in the conversion from the latitude and
longitude on the local ellipsoid to the grid easting and northing.

For an UTM the scale factor is 0.9996 on the central meridian. When we
move to the east or west the scale factor will become bigger.
10.9.2 Advance Manual Conversion

The advance manual conversion page of the Geo Calculator can convert
from one local ellipsoid with its own projection to another local ellipsoid
with its own projection. The conversion from one ellipsoid to the other will
go via WGS’84 or ETRS89. All the coordinate systems in database can
be selected, that means that both coordinate system should have the
same satellite ellipsoid. A report can be generated with the calculated
conversion. Use to change the coordinate system.
Figure 10-41 Advance Manual Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Local ellipsoid coordinate

With the display The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
format for the coordinates will be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates can be
can be changed. added manually and all other coordinates will then be calculated
automatically.
Grid coordinate
be calculated automatically. If necessary the coordinates and height
can be added manually and all other coordinates will then be
calculated automatically. The convergence (see page 196) and point
scale factor (see above) are always calculated.
Generate a report that is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select the

menu option File > Save as… in the reporter to save the report as PDF
file.

10.9.3 Compute 3 Shift Parameters
On this page of the Geo Calculator a 3 parameters shift can be computed
for the transformation from the satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid. This
 3 shift parameters will be calculated for the satellite ellipsoid and local
ellipsoid as specified in the project coordinate system.
Figure 10-42 Compute 3 Shift Parameters page in the Geo Calculator
Satellite ellipsoid coordinate

The latitude, the longitude and the altitude for the satellite ellipsoid, for
instance WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates.
With the display Local ellipsoid coordinate
format for the coordinates The latitude, the longitude and the altitude in local ellipsoid coordinates
can be changed. will not be calculated automatically when the satellite ellipsoid is
entered. If the coordinates are entered the grid coordinates will be
Grid coordinate
be calculated automatically when the local ellipsoid is entered. If the
coordinates are entered the local ellipsoid coordinates will be
3 Shift Parameters
The 3 shift parameters for the transformation from the satellite ellipsoid
to the local ellipsoid.

10.9.4 File Coordinate Conversion
In the file coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator a file with
 coordinates can be converted to a file with converted coordinates using
the two selectable coordinate systems.
Figure 10-43 File Coordinate Conversion page in the Geo Calculator
Source Coordinate System

Click on to select the coordinate system that is used in
the ASCII file. Select then the coordinate type that is used in the file.
The four different coordinate types are:
Satellite Ellipsoid
The coordinates should be WGS’84 or ETRS89 coordinates. The
The coordinates can be
latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude
specified in different
formats: 56°30’07.2” N, 56 is available the conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
30 7.2 N or 56.502 N. If no Local Ellipsoid
N,S, E or W is added The coordinates should be in the local ellipsoid system that is
PDS2000 assumes that it
specified in the project coordinate system. The latitude, longitude
is N or E.
and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude is available the
conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
Grid
The coordinates should be in the projection that is specified in the
coordinate system. The Easting, Northing and height are required.
If no height is available the conversion assumes that the height is
0.
Route
The coordinates should be in KP, Offtrack and height. The KP and
Offtrack should be related to the route that selected. If no height is
available the conversion assumes that the height is 0.

Destination Coordinate System
Click on to select the coordinate system that has to be
used in the output file. Select then the coordinate type that has to be
used in the output file. The four different coordinate types are:
Satellite Ellipsoid
The latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are in WGS’84 or
ETRS89, depends on what is defined in the destination coordinate
system.
Local Ellipsoid
The latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are in the local
coordinate system as is defined in the destination coordinate
system.
Grid
The Easting, Northing and height are in the projection as defined in
the destination coordinate system.
Route
The KP, Offtrack and height are related to the route that is
specified.
File Conversion
In the file conversion 4 At the moment only one output format is available, Comma Separated
extra fields can be Volume (the output file is a CSV file).
converted from the source Click on to start the file conversion. The ASCII Import
file to the destination file. Wizard will be open to select the right columns in the ASCII file. See
for more information about the ASCII Import Wizard on page 136.
10.10 User Accounts

For the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation it is possible
to create user accounts. By default two accounts are already present,
Administrator and Basic Operator. The Administrator level has access to
all options in PDS2000 while the Basic Operator has very limited access.
The administrator is set as the default user account.
To add and/or modified the user accounts select in the Control Center the
menu option Tools > User Accounts… and the User Accounts window will
be opened.
Figure 10-44 User Accounts window
The two default user accounts, Administrator and Basic Operator, do not
have a password yet. If the user wants a password to protect these two
accounts, select a user account and click on to open the User
dialog to add a password.

Figure 10-45 User dialog
Enter the password in the field Password and repeat this in Retype
password. With the option Show password the actual text of the password
is displayed, if this option is unchecked only dots will be displayed (see
above).
At the moment are two access level present. With a new
access level can be added or an existing user level can be modified (see
below).
10.10.1 Manage User Levels
Figure 10-46 Manage user level access window with the two default access
levels, Administrator and Basic Operator.
In this window the menu options from the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation that can be switched on/off are displayed. The menu
options that are accessible in all different access levels are not displayed.

The access levels are only valid for one application type. Each application
 type has its own access levels, this is due to that menu options per
application type can differ.
The two default access levels, as displayed above, cannot be deleted or
modified. If the user wants for some menu options a different access as
defined with the two defaults then a new access level has to be created.
Click on and the Add user access level dialog will be opened.
Figure 10-47 Add user access level dialog
Check the option Make copy of access level if an existing access level
has to be used as base for the new one. If the option is unchecked all the
menu options in the new access level will be switched off (set on No).
Figure 10-48 Manage user level access window with new user level
Click on a Yes or No in the window and the selected menu item can be
changed. So is in the figure above the menu item Logging/Logging
Settings in the Acquisition changed to Yes.

10.10.2 New User Account
If in the Manage user level access window a new user level is added, a
new user account with that new user level can be added to the user
accounts.
With in the User Accounts window a new user account can be
added to list.
Figure 10-49 New user account with the new user level
10.10.3 Changing User Account

After the different user accounts with the different user levels are setup,
the user can change the user account only in the Control Center,
Acquisition or Presentation.
Figure 10-50 User accounts can be changed
On the top right side in the application the user account can be changed.
Select the option and select one of the available user accounts. If for the
user account a password is added, then the user has to enter the
password before the selected user account becomes active.
10.11 Language
At the moment, next to the English language, the other languages that are
available in PDS2000 are Deutsch (German), Français (France), Italiana
(Italian), Nederlands (Dutch), Russian and Chinese.
If PDS2000 is running in a not English language it is possible that not all
items in a menu or in the text of the menus are in the right language. The
translation is made for a specific version of PDS2000, so if software
modification took place after that version the new items or text will be in
English.
Select from the menu bar of the Control Center the option Tools >
Options…and in the Language tab select a different language for
PDS2000.

Figure 10-51 Language tab in Options window
After a language is selected and confirmed with a message will

appear on the screen.
Figure 10-52 Message to restart PDS2000 to made the new language active
Restart PDS2000 and the selected language will be the active language
for PDS2000.
10.12 Power Management

At the start of PDS2000 a check will be done on the performance of the
PC / laptop on which PDS2000 is running. Two checks are done; on the
CPU throttling and especially for the laptops if the AC adapter is
connected.
The CPU throttling should be of to get a better performance of the system
and in PDS2000.
When the AC adapter is not connected the performance on a laptop is
less than with the AC adapter connected.
When at least one of these checks failed a message will popup when the
Control Center is started. If both are OK no message will be shown.
 The message is only a warning that the performance can be better if the
advice as mentioned in the message is followed.

Figure 10-53 Message when Control Center is started
In the figure above both checks failed. Click on to do a check the

next time the Control Center is opened, click on when no checks
have to be performed.
10.12.1 Power Management Check

The setup and the check can be started in the Control Center with the
menu option Tools > Options… and then selecting the Power
management check tab.
Figure 10-54 Power management check tab in Options window
By default the options Enable power management check on startup of the

Control Center is enabled. This means that the check is done each time
the Control Center is started.
When the Control Center is started and in the message (see Figure 10-53
above) on is clicked then the above mentioned option is
unchecked and no checks will be done when the Control Center is
started.

Click on to do a manually power management check. If everything
is OK then the following text will be displayed.
Figure 10-55 Power management check with everything is OK
When one of the checks failed the following text will be displayed.
Figure 10-56 Power management check with one check failed
In the message from a manually check also the power management

scheme is mentioned. The best performance is off course with the
scheme ‘High performance’ but when the scheme is something else, like
‘Balanced’, then it will be mentioned but no warning will be displayed.
10.13 General Settings

For other users this tab is This option is only available for one specific client. It will add an extra tab
not visible in the Options called ‘User General’ to the Explorer. In this tab data from several projects
window. can be stored and can be used in the different projects.
The items that are available in this tab are: 3D Models, Contour
Definitions, Design Profile Templates, DXF Drawings, Profile Design
Models, Runlines and Track Guidance Routes.

Figure 10-57 General Settings tab in the Options window
Select the user general folder and automatically the selected folder will
become the folder used in the User General tab in the Explorer.

11 Explorer
11.1 Introduction
PDS2000 uses different types of data files to store the relevant
information and settings. All these data files are accessible through the
Explorer.
It is also possible to use The Explorer is one of the windows that is available in the Control Center.
the context menu of the If the Explorer is not present in the Control Center, select View from the
Control Center to add or menu bar and check Explorer. To remove the window from the Control
remove the view. Center uncheck Explorer.
In the Explorer the information is divided in seven databases.
Projects Common
The settings and data files from the ‘Projects Common Files’ folder in
the PDS2000 Projects directory (see page 214).
PDS2000
General settings that can be used by all the applications and projects
in PDS2000 (see page 215).
Project
Project related settings and data files (see page 219).
Log Data
All available types of project related log data files (see page 244).
Multimedia
The multimedia files in PDS2000; the AVI, BMP, JPG and (Geo)TIFF
files (see page 246).
Report
The report files in PDS2000; CSV and PDF files (see page 248).
Sonar Targets
The sonar targets files with the GeoTIFF images of the targets (see
page 248).
Icon Images
The icon images files with the BMP and JPG images for the icons (see
page 248).
In the Explorer a directory structure is made with a separate folder for
It is possible to drag files each data type. The folders with in front of contain data files. Click on
and folders from for or double click on or the folder name to open the folder and make the
instance Windows Explorer data files accessible. With double click on one of the data files the specific
to the PDS2000 Explorer. editor for that data file will be opened. Notice that not all the data files
have their own editor.
At the moment for some data files a preview is available. Select a file and
on the right side in the Explorer, if possible, the data will be displayed. If
PDS2000 - User Manual Explorer  209

the preview pane is not visible click on in the Explorer on the top right
side to open the preview pane. Click on to close the preview pane.
The order in the folder name, the size or the date can be modified with a
click on the relevant header on top of the Explorer. With an arrow the
order direction will be indicated; arrow down is descending and an arrow
up is ascending.
The database, the file groups and the data files have their own context
menu. With the options in the context menus the items can be checked
and/or modified. The different options in the context menus will be
discussed in this chapter.
The editors which are not discussed in other chapters of the manual
and/or the editors that are only accessible through the Explorer will be
discussed in this chapter.
11.2 Context Menus
Figure 11-1 Explorer with the different context menus
In the Explorer are three different context menus available; a general, a

file group and a file context menu.
It is possible that not all the options in the context menu are available.
There are also file groups or files that have different options than the
standard options.
210  Explorer PDS2000 - User Manual

11.2.1 General Context Menu
The general context menu can be opened with a right mouse click on one
of the tabs or on the directory name at the top.
Figure 11-2 General context menu
It is easier to add files with Add Files

the Add Files option in the Add files to the selected database. Files can be selected in a standard
file group context menu dialog window. Only files which belong to the database group can be
(see below). added.
Copy Project
Only available in the Project database. Copy the project to a different
location on the PC.
Backup Project
Only available in the Project database. A backup of the project will be
made. All project files will be compressed to a ZIP file, which can be
stored on any location on the PC.
For more information about how to backup files outside the PDS2000
project folder see below.
Show Details
If checked, behind the data files the size and date will be displayed. If
not checked, no size and date is visible.
Refresh View
Refresh the view in the Explorer.
Properties
A window with the properties of the selected database will be opened.
11.2.1.1 Backup Files Outside Project

The PDS2000 Explorer in Control Center provides a method for creating
backups of entire projects (see above). However, this method only
creates a backup for files located in the project folder.
Since a new common project folder called ‘Projects Common Files’ has
been added to the PDS2000 projects folder to store for instance the
vessel outline and the equipment configuration. Additionally, this folder
contains also other files which are common for all projects and is a sub
folder of the project folder.
In the table below the file types are listed which have their location in the
‘Projects Common Files’ folder instead of the project folder. Files in this
‘Projects Common Files’ folder which are used in the backup project have
to be copied to the backup also.
Project Common Files
Type Extension
3D Studio Models 3ds
ASCII Import Configurations aic
Crane Configuration ccf

Project Common Files
Type Extension
Draught Table ddt
Export Configurations exp
Hopper Table hdt
Import Configurations imp
Numeric Pages npg
Vessel Contours vsl
Vessel Setups vsf
Wireframe Drawings dxf
Besides the project folder and the project common folder, there is the
common application folder. This folder is for Windows XP ‘C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data’ and for Windows 7
C:\ProgramData\RESON\PDS2000 and is used for storing PDS2000
application settings.
Common Application Files
File name Description
CustomActions[<module>].ini User defined action definitions
DeviceTest.ini Device test module layout settings
Editor.ini Settings for general editors (route,
waypoint, etc.)
InterfaceDef.ini I/O port definitions
Master.ini Control Center module layout settings
pds2000.ini General PDS2000 variables
pdsusergeobase.geo User coordinate system definitions
PlotApp.ini Plot module settings
R7KDistribution.ini R7K distribution module communication
settings
Commonly spoken, it is essential to backup the InterfaceDef.ini file,
 which contains the communication settings for COM and NET ports, and
the CustomActions[<module>].ini file, which contains actions defined
by the user.
When using the RESON 7k distribution module, the R7KDistribution.ini
file should be added to the backup.
Care must be taken when restoring project backups, since the backup
 could overwrite existing files in the destination ‘Projects Common Files’

and common application folders that also could be used by other projects
that are installed on the destination location.

11.2.2 File Group Context Menu
The file group context menu can be opened with a right mouse click on a
file group.
Figure 11-3 File group context menu
New File
For some files the New File A new file for the selected file group can be made and the editor of that
and/or the Add Files file group will be opened.
options are not active,
because there is no editor Add Files
available or it is not Add files to the selected file group. Files can be selected in a standard
possible to add files. dialog window. The file type is set to the file extension for the selected
file group.
Backup
A backup of the selected file group will be made. All the files in the file
group will be compressed to a ZIP file, which can be stored on any
location on the PC.
Refresh
Refresh the view in the Explorer.
11.2.3 File Context Menu

The file context menu can be opened with a right mouse click on a file in
the file group.
Figure 11-4 File context menu
Edit
For some files the Edit Will open the editor belonging to the selected file. In the editor the file
and/or the View options can be checked and/or modified.
are not active, because The editor can also be opened with a double click on the file.
there is no editor available
or it is not possible to view View
the file in Notepad. Will open the selected file in Notepad where the file can be checked
and/or modified. It is better to use the editor to modify the file.
Delete
Use the Ctrl key and the Delete the selected file(s) from the file group. It is possible to delete
Shift key to select multiple
files.
more files at the same time.
Also the ‘Delete’ key on the keyboard can be used to delete the files.
Rename
Change the name of the file.
Duplicate
Make a copy of the file. The copy will be placed in the same file group.

Backup
A backup of the selected file will be made. The file will be compressed
to a ZIP file, which can be stored on any location on the PC.
Properties
A window with the properties of the selected file will be opened.
11.3 Projects Common Database

This database shows the file groups with the projects common
information for PDS2000 (see page 54) and can be opened by selecting
the tab Projects Common at the top of the Explorer.
The different file groups of the projects common files database will be
mentioned below. It will depend on the application type which groups are
visible.
3D Studio (3DS) Models
3D models made in Studio. At the moment these models can be used
as 3D vessel contours.
ASCII Import Configurations
The import configuration files for the import options in the following
places:
 Route Editor (see page 133)
 Runlines Editor (see page 139)
 Clipping Polygon Editor (see page 225)
 Sound Velocity Profile Editor (see page 238)
 Waypoints Editor (see page 142)
 File Coordinate Conversion in the Geo Calculator (see page 199)
See also the ‘ASCII Import Wizard’ on page 136.
Crane Configurations
The crane configuration file with the configurations for the boom, stick
and tool of the (rope) excavators as they are used in the Tools page of
the vessel configuration (see page 107).
The file contains also the pipe configurations for the suction pipes of
the trailing suction hoppers as they are used in the Tools page of the
vessel configuration (see page 114).
Draught Tables
The draught tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 115). Also the bending table and the
ballast table is incorporated in the draught table.
Events
The available events in PDS2000 (see page 155).
 The events can also be edited in the Events page in the Configuration
(see page 68).
Export Configuration
The export configuration files as created in the Export Utility (see page
613).
Hopper Tables
The hopper tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 115).
Import Configuration
The import configuration files as created in the Import Utility (see page
173).

Numerics Pages
These are the numeric pages that are created in the Numerics –
Standard view of the Acquisition and Presentation (see page 335).
Vessel Contours
The contours that are drawn in the vessel contour editor (see page
95).
Vessel Setups
The part of the vessel configuration with the geometry and the
equipment setup.
Wireframe (DXF) Drawings
The DXF files that are used as wireframes for the vessels and cranes.
11.4 PDS2000 Database

This database shows the file groups with the general information for
PDS2000 and can be opened by selecting the tab PDS2000 at the top of
the Explorer. This general information is not project related and can be
used by all the projects.
Most of the modules in PDS2000 read the information from the PDS2000
 database when the module is started. If modifications are made to the

files in this database, the module have to be closed and started again
before the modifications are visible in the module.
The different file groups of the PDS2000 database will be mentioned
below. The groups which are not discussed in other chapters of the
manual will have a detailed explanation.
Application Types
The different applications which are possible with PDS2000.
The use of an application type is set in the dongle, so it is not
advisable to setup a project with a different application type then the
type(s) that is/are set in the dongle.
C-MAP Databases
All the C-map databases; the original C-Map databases from the C-
Map DVD and databases from the conversion from S-57 to C-Map.
The S-57 converted files can be used as a C-Map database in
PDS2000.
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in
the views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
 displayed. The message ‘No proper chart scale level available’ will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.
The file group context menu has other options than the standard
context menu:
Figure 11-5 File group context menu of C-MAP Databases
Convert S-57 to C-MAP – The Convert S-57 to C-MAP dialog will be

opened to convert S-57 files to a C-Map database (see page 217 how
to convert S-57 files).
C-Map Chart Manager – This is the same Chart Manager as explained
in the Installation (see page 29).
The file context menu have only two options which are not in the
standard context menu:

Figure 11-6 File context menu of the C-MAP Databases
Set as default database – With this option the selected database can
be set as default, which means that the selected database will be used
in the C-Map layers in PDS2000. It is also possible with the Chart
Manager from C-Map to set a default database.
Unregister database – The selected database will be unregistered
from the available databases in the Chart Manager.
C-MAP Filters
There are three C-Map filters available; for not showing the buoys, the
buoys and beacons and the buoys, beacons and piles in the C-Map
layer (see page 36).
Color Maps
The four different display modes (light conditions) which are available
in the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation (see page
165).
Coordinate System Databases
A new coordinate system The different databases for the coordinate systems. The
that is created through pdsgeodatabase is the database with the coordinate systems as given
New File, will be stored in by PDS2000 and the pdsusergeobase is the database with the
the pdsusergeobase. coordinate systems made by the user. see page 71 for more
information about the coordinate system database.
Devices
The devices which are available in the Equipment page (see page 96).
Display Support Files
The files with setup information for different modules in PDS2000.
Dredge Status Configurations
The configuration files with dredge settings special made for Boraciet.
In these configuration files are defined which button are available in
the Manual Input – Dredge Status view (see page 304) and how the
flow will be displayed in the Dredge – SCADA view (see page 290).
These configuration files are only available for Boraciet application
types.
Formats
The formats as defined in the project configuration (see page 59).
PDS2000 Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP files as used in the views in PDS2000.
Presentation Definitions
The views which can be opened in the Control Center, in the
Acquisition and/or in the Presentation.
System Files
The system files as used by PDS2000.
Units
The units as defined in the project configuration (see page 58).
Wave Sounds (WAV)
The WAV files for the alerts sounds as specified in the Alert Sounds
page of the Project Configuration (see page 62).

11.4.1 Convert S-57 to C-Map
The dialog to convert S-57 data to a C-Map database can be opened with
the file group context menu option Convert S-57 to C-Map or in the
Control Center with the menu option Tools > Convert S57 to C-Map.
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in the
views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
 displayed. The message ‘No proper chart scale level available’ will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.
Figure 11-7 Convert S-57 to C-Map dialog
Convert S-57 to C-Map

ENC root path
The location where the S-57 files are located. With the
right folder can be selected.
When next to the original file (.000) also updates (.001, .002, etc.)
 are available see Updates on page 219 how the conversion should
be done.
SENC database destination path
The location where the converted files will be stored as a C-Map
database, this can be any folder on the computer. With the
right folder can be selected.
Database name
Enter the name for the C-Map database in which the converted S-
57 files will be stored. Click on to start the conversion.
Before the conversion can be started, an eToken dongle from C-
 Map with the permission to convert S-57 files to C-Map should be

installed!!!!
If the S-57 files are encrypted with S-63 protection then the S-63
 support option have to be filled before the conversion can be
started.

S-63 support
S-63 is an IHO standard for encrypting and securing electronic
navigational chart (ENC) data. This option is to decrypt encrypted ENC
data, authenticate and verify it in compliance with the procedures
defined in the S-63 protection scheme.
To decrypt the data an hardware ID is needed, this can be

available in the eToken dongle or can be added manually.
Figure 11-8 Store HW ID for S-63 support
The permits to decrypt, authenticate and verify the S-63 encrypted

data have to be installed before the data can be converted.
Figure 11-9 Install permits for S-63 support
A SA certificate given by C-Map has to be installed before the S-63

encrypted data can be converted.
Figure 11-10 SA Certificate information for S-63 support
Processing
Information will be displayed for each converted file.
For each file conversion a log file is generated with the conversion
information, warnings and errors. With this button the list with log files
becomes available.

Close the dialog when the conversion is finished.
11.4.1.1 Updates
The original file has When updates for the S-57 charts are available then the updates and the
extension 000, while the original S-57 file have to be converted at the same time. The update files
updates have 001, 002, need the original file to do the conversion to the C-Map database.
etc.
The original file cannot be the old original file that is converted before;
there should be a new one next to the update files. The new original file
knows how much update files are available and need them to make the
new database.
It is possible that the update is only a new original file. Then convert only
the new original file. Keep in mind that when the conversion is started the
folder with the existing database is replaced by a new database. So for an
 update of some files all S-57 files have to be converted again to create a
new C-Map database.
11.5 Project Database

The number of visible file This database shows the file groups with all the settings and data files for
groups depends on the the selected project, and can be opened by selecting the tab Project at
dongle settings and the the top of the Explorer. These files are project related and can therefore
application type. only be used in the selected project.
Most of the modules in PDS2000 read the information in the project

database when the module is started. If modifications are made to the
files in the project database, the module have to be closed and started
again before the modifications are visible in the module.
The different file groups of the project database will be mentioned below.
The groups or the editors of that group that are not discussed in other
chapters of the manual will have a detailed explanation.
3D Models
The 3D models that can be used as a guidance in the project (see
page 143).
3D Objects
The 3D Objects file with the objects as added to the 3D Object
Manager in the Acquisition (see page 255). There will be only one 3D
Objects file per project.
Don’t rename the file otherwise the objects aren’t visible anymore in
the 3D view.
Alarms
The alarm files as created in the vessel configuration. These files can
only be edited in the tab Alarms of the vessel configuration (see page
129).
BSB Charts (KAP)
The raster (navigational) charts in BSB file format. The extension for
the BSB charts is KAP.

Figure 11-11 File context menu of the BSB Charts (KAP)
Export to GeoTIFF is an extra option in the file context menu of the

BSB Charts. The BSB charts cannot be used in PDS2000. The file has
to be exported to a GeoTIFF file before PDS2000 can use the
information (see page 246).
Clipping Polygons
The clipping polygons that can be used on several places in the
project (see page 224).
Figure 11-12 File group context menu of the Clipping Polygons

Import from DXF files is an extra option in the file group context menu
of the clipping polygon. A DXF file can be imported with the restriction
that the data in the DXF file contain only one polygon.
Figure 11-13 File context menu of the Clipping Polygons

Export to DXF file is an extra option in the file context menu of the
clipping polygon. A clipping polygon file can be exported to a DXF file
and will be stored in the project.
It is possible to import multiple DXF files and also to export multiple
clipping polygons in one time. Each DXF file that is imported becomes
a clipping polygon file and each exported clipping polygon file
becomes a DXF file.
Color Tables
The color tables that can be used for the grid models, the 3D views, in
the plotting, etc (see page 226).
Configurations
The different configurations that are created in this project. The active
configuration can also be opened with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with in the toolbar of the Control Center.

Contour Definitions
The contour definitions that can be used in the plotting (see page 231).
CUBE Models
The CUBE models as generated in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view (see page 439).
Design Profile Templates
These templates can be used for creating 3D models in the project
(see page 233).
Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Drawings
All different DXF drawings used in the project. The DXF drawing can
be used as background layer or as import file in several editors.
 The DXF wireframes that are used in the project are available in the
Projects Common tab (see page 214).
Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Export Files
The DXF export setting files which are created after the DXF Export
Wizard in the plot module is finished (see page 591).
 With the file context menu option Edit, the DXF Export Wizard will be
opened.
Dredge Instructions
The dredge instructions are at the moment only available for one
specific client (see page 151).
ESRI Shapes (SHP)
ESRI shapes which can be added in the Plan View – Navigation.
Excluded Areas
The excluded areas used for creating a CUBE model (see page 441).
See page 234 to create or modify an excluded area.
This item is only available in the multibeam application type with a
specific dongle.
Generic ASCII (ASC) Files
All the ASCII files that are generated in the project.
Grid Model Filters
The filters that are created in the grid model editor for the option ‘make
empty’. See for the grid model filter dialog on page 527.
Grid Model Metadata
The grid model metadata files contain the information about the related
grid model; how it is created, which data is used, etc.
Grid Models
The grid models that are created or generated in the project (see page
507).
Log Data File Sets
These files are the file sets that are created with the File Set Editor
(see page 397) or with the Import Utility (see page 173).
Module Configurations
The only configuration at the moment is made for a specific client and
can be used for data exchange between vessels and onshore.
Multibeam Calibrations
The configurations of the multibeam calibrations.
OpenGIS KML Encoding Standard (KML) files
The KML files are point cloud files with the Z values of a grid model.
These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid Model
Editor (see page 522). The KML files can be opened in an OpenGIS
system, i.e Google Earth.

The KML files contain the X and Y which are converted to WGS’84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS’84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The
Z value is the value of the selected data type of the grid model.
OpenGIS Zipped KML Encoding Standard (KMZ) files
The KMZ files contain a compressed GeoTIFF file representing a grid
model. These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid
Model Editor (see page 522). The KMZ files can be opened in an
OpenGIS system, i.e Google Earth.
PDS1000 Electronic Charts
The charts that are created with the old PDS1000 software can be
used as a layer in several views or in the plotting.
Placement Points
The created vessel placement points which can be used as a guidance
in the project (see page 149).
Profile Design Models
The profile design models that can be used to create 3D models in the
project (see page 144). The profile design models can also be used for
the volume computations (see page 604). See for more information
page 234.
Project Files
The project configuration files of the project. The project configuration
can also be opened with Edit > Project Configuration from the menu
bar or with in the toolbar of the Control Center. See for more
information on page 57.
Restricted Areas
The created restricted areas that can be used as a guidance in the
Runlines
The created runlines that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 138).
Figure 11-14 File group context menu of the Runlines

Import from DXF is an extra option in the file group context menu of
the runlines. From the DXF file only the lines that contain two points
(straight lines) can be converted to runlines. The lines have to be of
the linetype ‘Line’ One runlines file will be generated with all the lines
from the DXF file.
Figure 11-15 File context menu of the Runlines


Export Runlines is an extra option in the file context menu of the
runlines. The runlines will be exported to an ASCII file containing the
runline name and the start and end coordinates of the runline.
Screen Layouts
The screen layout files as they are used in the Acquisition, the
Presentation and Editing.
Sound Velocity Profiles
The sound velocity profiles that are created and can be used in a
multibeam or single beam survey project (see page 237).
Stations
The station files with a position for a range – range system.
Text (TXT) Files
The TXT files as generated in PDS2000.
Tide Stations
The tide stations that are setup in the project (see page 239).
Tide Values
The monthly files belonging to the tide stations that are setup in ‘Tide
Station’.
TIN Models
The TIN models that are created in the project (see page 539).
Track Guidance Routes
The created routes that can be used as a guidance in the project (see
page 132).
Figure 11-16 File group context menu of the Track Guidance Routes

Import from DXF is an extra option in the file group context menu of
the track guidance routes. From the DXF file only the polylines can be
converted to track guidance routes. For each polyline a separate track
guidance route will be generated.
User Interface Profiles
The UI Profiles which are used for the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation(s). These profiles contains the settings of the
toolbars used in the three windows. When the user changes one of the
toolbars it will be saved and the next time the new toolbar layout will
come up. Delete in the Explorer the UIP file of a window, if the user
wants to go back to the original (default) toolbar for that window.
User Maps
The user maps are files with user objects that can be created in the
plan views. The different user objects are lines, rectangles, circles,
polygons, text and symbols (see pagexxx).
User Presentation Defaults
There is only one file available, the file ‘EditorView’ and it contains all
the defaults for the editors. When in the context menu of a view the
option Save as Default is selected, the file ‘EditorView’ will be created
or updated.

Vessels
The vessel configurations which are setup in the project. See for more
information the chapter ‘Vessel Configuration’ on page 91.
Volume Computations
The end area volume computations that are computed during the
Waypoints
The created waypoints that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 141).
Figure 11-17 File context menu of the Waypoints

Export Waypoints to Geo is an extra option in the file context menu of
the waypoints. The waypoints will be exported to an ASCII file
containing the waypoints with their geographical coordinates.
Work Areas
The created work areas that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 147).
11.5.1 Clipping Polygons

A clipping polygon defines the borders of an area and can be used for
various purposes in PDS2000.
 Make a condition check on the logging (see page 126).
 Import a plane in the 3D model (see page 144).
 Create a work area (see page 147).
 Create a restricted area (see page 148).
 Create an excluded area (see page 234).
 Use as a boundary in the create model editor (see page 499).
 Use as a boundary in the grid model editor (see page 508).
The Clipping Polygon editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing clipping polygon or by selecting the option New File in the context
menu of the file group ‘Clipping Polygons’ in the Explorer.

11.5.1.1 Clipping Polygon Editor
Figure 11-18 Clipping Polygon editor
A clipping polygon is always closed. The clipping polygon editor

automatically close the polygon, the user do not have to add the first point
again to close the polygon. The (red) dot in the editor is the selected point
from the table at the top.
Click on to add a new point to the table. The coordinates can be
added in the upper right corner of the editor. Click on to select the
coordinate type, grid or geographical coordinates. Click on to
insert a point above the selected point in the table and click on to
delete the selected point in the table.
In the menu bar some extra functions are available:
Options > Grid Properties
Select the grid to be shown in the view of the editor: Grid Crosses,
Solid Line Grid, Dotted Line Grid or a Scale Bar. The grid can be with
or without a grid annotation.
Options > Import from ASCII…
An ASCII import wizard will be started to guide the user through the
import settings. This import wizard is the same type of import wizard
as discussed on page 136. The ASCII file should contain the X and Y
coordinates of the clipping polygon.
Options > Import from DXF…
Select a DXF file with a polygon and the polygon will be imported in
the Clipping Polygon editor.

Options > Export to DXF
The clipping polygon as displayed in the editor will be exported to a
DXF file. The DXF file will be stored in the project.
11.5.2 Color Tables

Color tables are used to show measured values in different colors in the
various models and views.
The color table generator can be opened by double clicking on an existing
color table, by selecting the option New File in the context menu of the file
group ‘Color Tables’ in the Explorer and by double clicking on the color
table on the right side in the views.
The color table of the bottom classification, [bottom-type], cannot be
opened in the color table generator. This type cannot be generated, only
the color and the label can be modified (see page 230).
The dredge differential color table has a special color table generator to
set the colors for the under- and overdredge limits (see page 231).
11.5.2.1 Color Table Generator
Figure 11-19 Color Table generator with a color table added (between 0 and -5)
to the existing color table
Add the values for the maximum and minimum range, select the number
of colors or the step size and click on to create a color table. With
a color table can be added to the existing color table.
If the option is selected the generator will use the whole color spectrum
to generates the colors. It will start with the selected color for the
maximum value and will stop with the color of the minimum value. With
the option only the two selected colors will be used to generate the
color table. The color starts with the selected color for the maximum value
and will stop with the color of the minimum value and for the intermediate
values the colors will run into one another.

The items in the color table generator are:
Name
This is the name of the color table.
When the Color Table generator is opened in a view or editor this
option becomes active and the user can select a different color table.
Generate range
Maximum
Select a color for the maximum value and add a maximum value for
the color table. All the values above the maximum value get the
same color as the maximum value.
Minimum
Select a color for the minimum value and add a minimum value for
the color table. The minimum value color will be used for all the
values below the minimum value.
Number of colors
Add a number and the Color Table generator will automatically
calculates the step size.
Step size
Add a step size to get a fixed interval and the Color Table
generator will automatically calculates the number of colors.
Mode
With this option the whole spectrum will be used to go from the
color of the maximum value to the color of the minimum value.
Figure 11-20 Color table with the option from 0 to -2

With this option only the colors of the maximum and minimum
value and the colors that run into one another will be used.
Figure 11-21 Color table with the option from 0 to -2
A color table will be generated using a part ( )or the whole ( )

spectrum started with the maximum value and stops with the
minimum value. The number of colors will depend on the number of
colors or the step size that is selected.
Set the maximum, minimum, number of colors or step size and a

color table will be added to the existing color table using the
selected settings. The values from the existing color table that
overlaps with the added color table will be overwritten.
Range colors
The maximum color becomes white and the minimum color

becomes black. The colors in between are divided in grey scales.
The maximum color becomes purple and the minimum color

becomes red. The colors in between are divided in the colors of the
spectrum.
The maximum color becomes yellow and the minimum color

becomes brown. Below the minimum the color is black. The will be
used to color the color table for the sidescan or snippets data.
The maximum and minimum colors will be reversed.
Select one of the colors on the left side and click on . A Color
Table Entry dialog will be opened where the color and the minimum
value for the selected color can be changed. Click on to
confirm the change and a star will be placed in the edited color as an
indicator (see below).

Figure 11-22 Color Table Entry
When the color table is

generated again the edited Add a new color and a minimum value to the color table. The same
values with a star will be Color Table Entry dialog as above will be opened. The added color
kept in the color table. gets a star, the same as above.
Figure 11-23 Value -1.10 is added to the color table
Will delete the selected color from the table.
Will delete the whole color table.

,
The colors in the table can be moved up and down.
Will show only the color table, there will be no buttons to generate a
color table.
Will show the Color Table generator again. This button appears when
is used to show only the color table.

11.5.2.2 Color Table for Bottom Classification
Figure 11-24 Color table for bottom classification
In this color table only the colors and the text of the labels can be
modified. Click on if it is needed to reset the colors and text to the
default settings.
Double click on one of the colors and the Color Table Entry dialog will be
opened.
Figure 11-25 Color Table Entry for the bottom classification color table
For the values between the minimum and maximum value as displayed
on top of the dialog a different color can be selected and another text can
be entered.
 It is not possible to modify the range and the steps for this type of color
table.

11.5.2.3 Dredge Differential Color Table
Figure 11-26 Dredge differential color table generator
The dredge differential color table generator has three section; above
underdredge limit, below overdredge limit and between the two limits. For
each section the number of colors and maximum/minimum color can be
set. The edges between the section are defined by the underdredge limit
and overdredge limit.
In the Acquisition the underdredge limit and overdredge limit will be
automatically synchronized with the settings of the design model. So
when the limits for the design model are specified as 1 and -1 then the
limits in the color table will be changed from 0.5 to 1 and from -0.5 to -1.
The color scheme stays the same.
See the 3D View – Online Dredge on page 274 for an example of the
dredge differential color table.
11.5.3 Contour Definitions

The contour definitions are used to plot contours in the plotting.
The Contour definition generator can be opened by double clicking on an
existing contour definition or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Contour Definitions’ in the Explorer.

11.5.3.1 Contour Definition Generator
Figure 11-27 Contour definition generator
If a new contour definition has to be generated, the left side will be empty.
Start then with or generate a contour definition with the option
or .
A contour line can be added to the list on the left side. A Contour
Properties window will be opened, where the settings for the line can
be set.
Figure 11-28 Contour Properties
Add a value for the level and select a color for the contour line.
For the line style three options are available; a continuous, a dashed
or dotted line.
Give a line width for the contour line.
 If a label with the depth value has to be plotted, check the option
Show labels.
Will delete the selected contour line.
Will edit the selected contour line. The Contour Properties window will
be opened (see above).
A contour definition will be generated based on a minimum level, a

maximum level and an interval. A Generate Contours window will be
opened.

Figure 11-29 Generate Contours
A color table will be used to generate the contours. Each value from
the color table becomes a contour line with the color from the color
table.
11.5.4 Design Profile Templates

A design profile template is a 2D shape of a profile. In the profile design
model editor a template can be combined with a route or runlines to
generate a profile design model (see page 234).
The Design Profile Template Editor can be opened by double clicking on
an existing design profile template or by selecting the option New File in
the context menu of the file group ‘Design Profile Templates’ in the
Explorer.
11.5.4.1 Design Profile Template Editor
Figure 11-30 Design Profile Template editor
Create a new template. Give a name for the new template and add the
offsets and heights.
Rename the selected template.

Delete the selected template.
If the design profile template is used in combination with a runline, the
zero offset is in the center of the runline. The start of the runline has a
negative offset and the end a positive offset.
If the design profile template is used in combination with a route, the zero
offset is on the route. The profiles are perpendicular to the route with on
the left side of the route a negative offset and on the right side a positive
offset.
Click on to delete the selected offset and the height.
11.5.5 Excluded Areas

An excluded area is an area that will be used to excluded areas during
the creation of a CUBE model.
An excluded area is a clipping polygon or a route with a tolerance. One
excluded area file can contain several excluded areas.
The Excluded Areas editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing excluded area file or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Excluded Areas’ in the Explorer.
11.5.5.1 Excluded Areas Editor
Figure 11-31 Exclude Areas editor with one excluded area
Click on to add a new exclude area to the list. Check the option
Polygon or Route and select the right clipping polygon or route with a
tolerance. The clipping polygon or route should exist in the project.
11.5.6 Profile Design Models

A profile design model is a combination of a design profile template with a
route or runlines. The design profile template can be generated in the
Design Profile Template Editor (see page 233).
The Profile Design Model Editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing profile design model or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Profile Design Models’ in the Explorer.
By selecting the option New File a wizard with two pages will be opened.
In the first page the new file name has to be added. In the second page

the design profile template can be linked to runlines or to KP positions on
a route. Both the options have their own Profile Design Model Editor.
11.5.6.1 Profile Design Model Editor with Runlines
Figure 11-32 Profile Design Model Editor with runlines
The editor is empty when a new model has to be created.
A template with the runlines can be added to the model. An Add to

Design Model window will be opened where the template and the
runlines can be selected.
Figure 11-33 Add a template to a design model
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.

The selected template can be edited in the Design Profile Template
Editor (see page 233).
The Design Profile Template Editor will be opened to create a new

design profile template (see page 233).
The plan view and the template view have their own context menu. In
both context menus the standard zoom functions Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Zoom Window and Zoom Extents are available.
11.5.6.2 Profile Design Model Editor with a Route
Figure 11-34 Profile Design Model Editor with a route
The editor is empty when a new model has to be created.
Before a design profile template can be added the right track guidance
route has to be selected. After that a template can be added with
. An Add to Design Model window will be opened where the
template can be selected.

Figure 11-35 Select a template for the profile design model
The template can be added to three different locations on the route;

Start KP, End KP or Specified KP.
If only one template is used for the whole route, it does not matter
where the template is located. The profile design model will be
generated over the whole route using the selected template.
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.
The selected template can be edited in the Design Profile Template

Editor (see page 233).
The Design Profile Template Editor will be opened to create a new

design profile template (see page 233233).
It is possible to have different design profile templates over the route.
Locate each template on a different KP position and the model will be
generated over the route using the different templates.
Check the options Link template to route Z level when the templates have
to move up and down with the Z value of the route. This is only possible
when the route is created as a pipe / cable route (see page 132).
Check the options Show template at specified KP and give a KP value to
show in the template view the template belonging to that specified KP
value. In the plan view the template on that KP position will become red.
11.5.7 Sound Velocity Profiles

Before a multibeam echo sounder survey can be carried out, a sound
velocity profile is required to correct for the sound velocity in the water. It
is also possible to have a sound velocity profile for a single beam echo
sounder survey.
The Sound Velocity Profile Editor can be opened by double clicking on an
existing sound velocity profile or by selecting the option New File in the
context menu of the file group ‘Sound Velocity Profiles’ in the Explorer.

11.5.7.1 Sound Velocity Profile Editor
Figure 11-36 Sound Velocity Profile Editor
When a new sound velocity profile is created the editor will be empty. The
table of the profile can be filled manually or an ASCII file with sound
velocity data can be imported with the option . Before this button is
opened to select the type of import the user has to select which part of the
data has to be imported; the upcast, the downcast or both.
The units for the four columns are not depending on the settings in the
project configuration (see page 58). The depth is always in meters, the
velocity is in m/s, the temperature is in °C and the salinity is in parts per
ton (ppt).
To add a SVP value to the table, fill in a depth value on the empty place
at the bottom of the depth column. When the next column is selected the
depth values will be automatically sorted.
A depth value can be deleted by selecting one of the values in a row and
click on . The whole row will be removed from the table. With
the Ctrl-key multiple values can be selected and with multiple
rows can be deleted.
If the data density is too dense, a reduction of the data is possible with
 . With too dense data it will take more time to do the

computations for the ray-bending.
The values for the velocity can be modified by adding an offset. This way
an imported profile that is not fully correct, which could be caused by a
wrong SVP probe, can be used. Add a value behind Sound velocity offset.
11.5.7.2 Import an ASCII Sound Velocity File

To import an ASCII file, select the option . The user can select
from the following import formats:
Using Wizard
This is the same ASCII import wizard as discussed in the chapter
‘Guidance’ on page 136.

Comma Delimited
ASCII file where the columns are separated with a comma. The data
has to be in the same order as in the table of the editor.
Space Delimited
As above but with a space as separator.
Tab Delimited
As above but with a tab as separator.
SVP 20, Format String
The sound velocities taken with the SVP20 probe and saved as a *.log
file can be imported directly in the editor.
The comma delimited, space delimited and tab delimited ASCII files
 import only the depth and the velocity. Use the import wizard if also the
temperature and the salinity have to be imported.
11.5.7.3 Editing SVP File

The sound velocity profile data can be modified by changing the values in
the table or by moving the points in the graph.
Select in the table the cell that has to be modified and enter a new value.
If the cell is a depth then the table will be sorted on depths after the new
value is entered.
Move the mouse in the view on the right side and the cursor will change
to a cross with a line segment. Select one of the white squares in the
graph and drag the point. During dragging the point, automatically the
depths are sorted. When the dragging is stopped the table will be
updated. With undo ( ) and redo ( ) the modifications done in the
graph can be undone or redone.
The actual sound velocity profile data can be compared with other sound
velocity profiles. In the Layer Control ( ) a sound velocity profile layer
can be added in where an different sound velocity profile can be selected.
Each added sound velocity profile will be colored automatically and the
file name will be displayed with the same color in the top left corner of the
view.
11.5.8 Tide Stations

Instead of using GPS RTK as height source, one or more tide stations
can be used to calculate the absolute height or depth.
During the acquisition the tide information can come from one or more
tide gauges or from predicted tide data. If predicted tide data is used the
tide data can be imported in PDS2000 through an ASCII file with date,
time and tide data. It is also possible to apply the tide data to the log data
files in the Editing (see page 404).
Before tide data can be applied in the Acquisition or in the Editing the tide
station with or without the tide data has to be setup in the Tide Station
editor. This editor can be opened by double clicking on an existing tide
station or by selecting the option New File in the context menu of the file
group ‘Tide Stations’ in the Explorer.

11.5.8.1 Tide Station Editor
Figure 11-37 Tide Station editor
Before the tide station can be used, the tide station has to be setup. Click
on to setup the information for the tide station.
Figure 11-38 Tide Station information
If more than one tide station will be used the location (Easting and
Northing) has to be entered. The ‘Station ID’ is only relevant if multiple
tide gauges are used with a tide gauge driver that supports multiple tide
gauges. With the ID, PDS2000 can relate the tide data from the incoming
message to the right tide station.
The gaps between two tide values in the predicted tide data will be
interpolated as long the gap between two tide values in the predicted tide
data is smaller then the specified maximum gap. The value for the
maximum gap has to be entered in seconds.
The maximum extend is the time in seconds that PDS2000 will
extrapolate the tide data after a tide value. This can happen after the last
tide value in the file or when the gap is bigger than the maximum gap.
After the tide station information is set, it will depend on how the tide
station is used in PDS2000 what the next step will be. If in the Acquisition
online tide gauges are used the editor can be closed. If predicted tides will

be used or the tide data will be applied in the Editing, the tide data has to
be imported in the editor (see the option Import Tide Values below).
Available tide will be indicated in the calendar to the left by highlighting
Select multiple days by and underscoring the dates where tide is available. Selecting a date will
dragging the mouse over show the tide of that day in the graph. Selecting multiple days in the
the days. calendar expands the tide graph accordingly.
11.5.8.2 Tide Station Editor Toolbar and Context Menu

Right clicking in the graph gives the context menu. In the context menu all
the options from the toolbar and some extra options are available.
Zoom Horizontal ( )
Zoom in/out horizontal, the vertical is fixed.
Zoom Vertical ( )
Zoom in/out vertical, the horizontal is fixed
Zoom Window, Zoom Extents ( )
Zoom extents applies to the selected day(s) only.
Selector ( )
Toggles the ‘Selector’ on/off.
Channel Partition
With multiple tide stations in the editor the data can be displayed as
stacked views or the data can be overlaid.
Set Y Scale
The low and high value of the tide data can be set.
Enable Channel Control ( )
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager. The Channel Manager allows editing the
properties of the current tide station and adding other tide stations
(e.g. for comparing purposes).

Edit Tide Values ( )
Opens the Edit Tide Values editor where the tidal data can be viewed
and modified.
Figure 11-39 Edit Tide Values editor
In the table new entries can be made at the bottom of the table. After
added an entry the tidal data will be order according the date and time.
By double clicking on a cell in the date column the date can be
modified. The cell will change to and the date can be
change with the arrows on the right or manually. Also by double on the
cell in the time column the time can be modified. The data in the tide
column can be modified when the cell is selected.
The time can be entered as hours (hh), hours minutes (hh:mm) or as
hours minutes seconds (hh:mm:ss). Below is displayed what can be
entered in the cell of the time column and what the time will be in the
column.
Entered value Displayed time
1 00:01:00
12 00:12:00
123 01:23:00
1234 12:34:00
12345 12:34:05
123456 12:34:56
With at the bottom of the editor a empty row is added to enter

one tide value to the table. By default the actual date is entered, the
time and tide value has to be entered by the user. The date can be
modified as explained above.

With multiple tide values can be entered with a fixed time
interval. A dialog will be opened where the start time, end time and
time increment can be set.
Figure 11-40 Time Range Setting dialog
 Please read the attention in the dialog, the time used in the tide station
file is always the local time.
Enter the date for which a tide values have to be added. Enter a start
time, end time and an interval (increment). Click on to accept
the settings. In the table the time is already filled in according the
start/end time and increment from the dialog. Only the tide values have
to be entered manually.
With one or more rows in the table can be deleted. Use the
Ctrl and Shift key to select more than one row. It is also possible to
drag with the mouse over the rows to select the rows that have to be
deleted.
Import Tide Values ( )
Import tide data from ASCII files.
Figure 11-41 Import window for ASCII tide files

 Please read the attention in the dialog, the time used in the tide station
file is always the local time.
Select the long date/time format and give the order of the data by
selecting the date, time and tide with the separator between the data
fields. For the date and time a format and a separator have to be
selected. If everything is set, click on to import the ASCII data
and the data will be displayed in the editor. In the group ‘Tide Values’
of the Explorer one or more PDS2000 tide files are added with the
name of the station, the year and the month. PDS2000 will create for
each tide station a separate PDS2000 tide file per month.
When in a file the GPS has Import PDS Log Tide Values ( )
been in RTK mode for at Import tide from PDS data files. PDS2000 will find all PDS data files in
least one minute, and over the current project from all log data folders. Make a selection of the
20 valid real time Z values
are available in that
PDS files to extract tide data from. Next select the device that has tide
minute, then the tide list is values, e.g. the GPS RTK positioning system.
appended with one mean Generate Report ( )
tide over the minute.
Generation of a tide report. When the option View report is checked
the report is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter where it can be saved
with an user defined name. If not checked the report will be saved as a
PDF file with a default filename in the ‘Reports’ folder of the project.
Figure 11-42 Tide Station Report generator
Enter a start and an end date and when View report is checked, the
report is opened automatically after generation. The width and height
of the images (graphs) can be set in the appropriate windows.
Channel Properties
The Properties window for the active tide station data will be opened.
Properties
The Properties window for the Tide Station editor will be opened.
11.6 Log Data Database

This database shows the logging directory, as specified in the project
configuration (see page 59), with the different logging files and can be
opened by selecting the tab Log Data at the top of the Explorer.
Most of the logging files are identical with the file formats in the logging
page of the vessel configuration (see page 116). The PDS2000 Grid
Model, the Production Format and the Backscatter Grid Model are not

logged in the logging directory, they are logged as grid models in the
project directory. Also the DXF Format will be logged in the project
directory.
In the log data database is also the ‘Event Log Data’ available. In the
‘Event Log Data’ the activities per view or editor are logged in a file per
day. The information about when the view or editor is opened, closed and
what actions are done in the view or editor will be logged in these files.
The standard PDS2000 logdata files are available in the folder PDS2000
Log Data and are listed per vessel. With the user defined log file names it
can be that it is not possible anymore to read information from the log file
name. If the user moves the mouse over a logdata file a tool tip will be
opened with the relevant information of the logdata file.
Figure 11-43 A tool tip of a PDS2000 logdata file
Next to the information that can be available in the file name, two extra
items are available: PDS2000 version and File version. The different file
versions are:
File version PDS2000 version Reason modification
1.0 Before 3.4.0.0 Original
2.0 3.4.x.x & 3.5.x.x User defined log file names
2.1 ≥ 3.6.0.0. Compression of side scan, snippets
and sonar image data
In the file context menu (see page 213) is next to the standard options an
extra option, Show log info, available. This option is only available for the
PDS2000 logdata files.
Figure 11-44 File context menu of the PDS2000 Log Data
Figure 11-45 Log File info of a PDS2000 log data file

Next to the same information as given in the tool tip it is possible in the
Log File info dialog to modify the runline name for the selected PDS2000
log data file. In the Plot module a profile or profiles are plotted with the
use of a runline that should be mentioned in the log data file name.
If the PDS2000 log data file is logged with the wrong runline or the user
wants profiles over a different runline then it is now possible to change the
runline in the log data file. Type a new runline name an click on
to apply the new runline name to the log data file.
11.7 Multimedia Database

This database shows the multimedia files as generated or used in
PDS2000 and can be opened by selecting the tab Multimedia at the top of
the Explorer.
The different file groups of the Multimedia database will be mentioned
below.
Audio Video Interleave (AVI) Files
The AVI files as recorded in the Acquisition.
Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP files that are generated when a snapshot is made from a
view.
Joint Photographic Group (JPG) Images
The images that are generated when a snapshot is made from a view.
Also the JPG images can be used in the plotting.
Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images
Geo referenced TIFF files which are created with the raster editor (see
below). The images can be used as background in the Plan views and
in the Grid Model Editor.
Figure 11-46 File group context menu of the Tagged Image File Format
(GeoTIFF) Images

Import From BSB Charts is an extra option in the file group context
menu of the Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images. A BSB
Chart with the extension KAP can be imported and will be converted to
a GeoTIFF image.
11.7.1 GeoTIFF Images

A GeoTIFF image is a geo referenced TIFF file. This means that the file
contains information about the location of the image.
The GeoTIFF files can be used as a background in a plan view and can
be created in the Raster Editor.
It is also possible to create Geo TIFF files from the view in the grid model
editor (see page 510) and in the plan views (see page 352).
The Raster Editor can be opened by double clicking on an existing
GeoTIFF image or by selecting the option New File in the context menu of
the file group ‘GeoTIFF Image’ in the Explorer.

11.7.1.1 Raster Editor
Figure 11-47 Raster Editor with a satellite image
The only way new files can be created is through the option New File in
the Explorer. After a filename is given the user can import a TIFF or a
JPG file to create a GeoTIFF file.
In the Raster Editor are two methods available to create from the
imported file a GeoTIFF file.
Tiepoint/Scale Mode
If one of the corners of the image is known in local grid coordinates
enter the pixel X and Y and the grid coordinates directly in the left
pane.
If not, select one location in the image that is known in local grid
coordinates. Use the zoom in and zoom window functions to get a
clear picture of the location, double click with the mouse on the
location and enter the right grid coordinates for that location.
Figure 11-48 Enter the local grid coordinates for the selected location
After that enter a scale X and scale Y in m/pixel to define the size of
the image.
Calibration Point Mode
For this mode two points have to be known in the image with local grid
coordinates. Enter the grid coordinates directly in the left pane or
select the option Calibration Point 1, double click with the mouse on

the known location in the image and enter the grid coordinates as
shown above. Repeat this for Calibration Point 2.
If one of the modes is finished, click on to save the image as a
GeoTIFF file. During the saving of the file the calibration point will be
recalculated to the bottom right corner and top left corner of the image.
This means when the saved image is opened again in the Raster Editor
the calibration points will be always 0,Y and X,0 as shown in the example
above, where X and Y represents the size of the image in number of
pixels.
11.8 Report Database

This database shows the reports files as generated in PDS2000 and can
be opened by selecting the tab Report at the top of the Explorer.
The different file groups of the Report database will be mentioned below.
Comma Separated Values (CSV) Files
The CSV files that are generated in PDS2000.
Portable Document File (PDF) Files
The PDF files from the reports that are saved in the PDS2000
Reporter.
11.9 Sonar Targets Database

This database shows the sonar targets data as generated in PDS2000
and can be opened by selecting the tab Sonar Targets at the top of the
Explorer.
The file groups of the Sonar Targets are:
Sonar Targets
The sonar target files as created in the Project Configuration (see
page 63) and filled with targets in the Acquisition or Replay. See for
more information the Sonar Targets view (see page 376).
 Export to Waypoints and Export to Commas Separated Values (CSV)
are extra options in the file group context menu of the sonar targets.
Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images
The GeoTIFF images which are generated when a sonar target is
created.
11.10 Icon Images Database

This database shows the icon images data as generated in PDS2000 and
can be opened by selecting the tab Icon Images at the top of the Explorer.
To each icon image location one image can be attached, BMP or JPG
image. The only place where images can be attached to the icons are in
the Plan View – Survey Coverage and in the Plan View – Navigation. See
for more information the option Add Icon Image in the chapter Plan View
– Toolbar and Context Menu on page 352.
The file groups of the Icon Images are:
Bitmap (BMP) Images
The BMP images that can be attached to the icon location in the icon
image database.

Icon Image Database Files
The icon image files as created in the Project Configuration (see page
64) with for each image (BMP or JPG) its position added.
Joint Photographic Group (JPG) Images
The JPG images that can be attached to the icon location in the icon
image database.

12 Acquisition
12.1 Introduction
The Acquisition in PDS2000 takes care of reading the sensor data, doing
the necessary computations, and data logging. The data and the
computations are visible through a number of views, which can be used to
get information over the processes and to control the survey. Some other
views are designed to guide the vessel.
The Acquisition can be started in a simulation mode and in a realtime
mode. The simulation mode can be used to setup in the office the
different layouts for the survey and the realtime mode is the online mode
where the actual survey can be monitored and logged.
12.2 Start Acquisition

When the Acquisition is started the default or last used layout will appear
on the screen.
12.2.1 Simulation
When the equipment is not yet connected to the PDS2000 computer the
Acquisition in simulation mode can be used to setup the different layouts
for the survey. The Acquisition in simulation mode can be opened from
the Control Center of PDS2000 with:
 from the acquisition bar.

 from the toolbar.
 Acquisition > Start Simulate from the menu bar.
The Acquisition in simulation mode can be stopped by selecting one of
the above mentioned actions again or by closing the Acquisition window.
12.2.2 Realtime
The Acquisition in the realtime mode can be started when the project and
a vessel configuration is created. The Acquisition in the realtime mode
can be opened from the Control Center of PDS2000 with:
 from the acquisition bar.

 Acquisition > Start Realtime from the menu bar.
PDS2000 - User Manual Acquisition  251

The Acquisition can be stopped by selecting one of the above mentioned
actions again or by closing the Acquisition window.
12.3 Data Visualization

The Acquisition has a number of views to show the continuation of the
survey. The settings in the dongle and the application type determine
which views are available in the Acquisition and in the Presentation.
To avoid overcrowding the monitor screen, views can be docked (see
page 48). All views have context menus as described on page 49 and
where possible, views have a dedicated toolbar for the most common
functions.
12.3.1 Layout
When the Acquisition is started for the first time, it will have only one view,
the Messages – System Messages view (see page 307).
In the Displays window the necessary views can be added to the layout.
There are several ways to open this window:
 Select View > Displays from the menu bar.
 Click on in the toolbar.
 Select Displays in the context menu.
Figure 12-1 Context menu in the Acquisition
Figure 12-2 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views
Click on and the Add Display dialog will be opened to select a

new view. PDS2000 gives a default name for the view, but the user can
give the view any name he wants. For information about the views see
the chapter Views on page 271.
252  Acquisition PDS2000 - User Manual

Figure 12-3 Add Display to add a view
In the Displays window the views can be checked on or off. This means
that the checked views will be displayed on the screen. The views that are
checked off are not removed from the layout file. It only means that these
views are not shown on the screen. A view can be removed from the
layout file by using in the Displays window.
There are also some fast methods to add views to the layout in the
Acquisition.
 Select View > Add Display… from the menu bar.
 Select Add Display in the context menu.
Figure 12-4 Add Display in the context menu
After all the wanted views are selected and placed on the right place in
the Acquisition window, with or without docking, the layout can be stored.
Use File > Save Layout As… from the menu bar to save the new layout.
To open another layout use File > Open Layout… from the menu bar and
select one of the created layouts.
With File > Save Layout As Preset the layout can also be saved as a
preset to one of the four layouts.

12.4 Acquisition Menu Bar and Toolbar
It is possible in the Acquisition window to select several options from the
menu bar or the toolbar. Below the options will be explained and it
depends on the application type and the dongle settings which options
are active.
File:
File > New Layout…
After a new name for the layout is given a new layout can be created.
As default, the Messages view is loaded in the new layout.
File > Open Layout…
An existing layout can be opened in the Acquisition.
File > Save Layout
The active layout can be saved.
File > Save Layout As…
The active layout can be saved under a different name.
File > Save Layout As Preset
The active layout can be saved as one of the 4 layouts presented by
the open layout buttons , , and .
File > Print Setup
The properties of the printer and the default printer can be selected.
File > Preview
This option is only active when the Messages – System Messages
view is open and it will give a print preview of all the messages in this
view.
File > Print…
This option is only active when the Messages – System Messages
view is open and it will print all the messages in this view.
File > Print Screen
Will directly print the screen to the default printer.
File > Save Screen…( )
The display of the Acquisition will be saved as a JPG file or BMP file.
File > Record Screen…( )
Start the recording of the display of the Acquisition as a AVI file. Click
on or select File > Stop Record Screen to stop the recording.
The AVI recording works fine for the Windows Themes ‘Windows
Classic’ and ‘Windows 7 Basic’. With the Windows Theme
‘Windows 7’ (Aero Theme) not all the views are supported. This
 results in that for instance the 3D Views and Sonar Views are
empty when the AVI is replayed.
Edit:
Edit > Events ( )
The event page of the configuration will be opened to check or modify
the events (see page 155).
Edit > Alarms ( )
The Alarms window will be opened to add a new alarm for the Status –
Alarms view (see page 384). The alarms in this dialog are related to
the configuration and not to the vessel configuration. These type of
alarms can also be added in the Configuration (see page 69).
Edit > Use Single Thread For All Comps.
If this option is checked each computation in the Acquisition will be run

in a separate thread. If the update in the Acquisition becomes too slow
then uncheck this option.
Edit > Select Active Vessel… ( )
This option is only active when more then one vessel configuration is
created. Only for the active vessel the settings can be changed in the
Acquisition.
Edit > Select Tracking Point… ( )
Select for the active vessel the tracking point that will be used for the
guidance (for example a route or a runline).
Edit > Equipment ( )
For the active vessel the equipment settings of the sensors can be
checked or modified, only when logging is off (see page 96).
Edit > Computations ( )
For the active vessel all the computations can be checked or modified,
only when logging is off (see page 101).
Edit > Data Sources ( )
For the active vessel the data sources can be checked or modified,
Edit > Simulation
The simulation settings can be modified and the simulation options to
steer the vessel are available. This options is only available in the
simulation mode.
Edit > Manual Input
If in the Equipment page (see page 96) a manual input is selected,
then with this option the right sensor can be selected and a manual
input can be given.
Edit > Remote Controls
Select a remote control for the remote towed vehicle. This remote
control starts an external program that has to be located in the
PDS2000 program directory.
View:
View > Displays ( )
The Displays window will be opened. In this window views can be
switched on or off. Also views can be added or removed from the
layout (see page 252).
View > Add Display… ( )
The Add Display dialog will be opened to add a view to the layout (see
page 252).
View > Lock Displays
 The views in the Acquisition will be locked. The views cannot be

deleted with , it is only possible through the Displays window. The
not docked views cannot be moved or resized in the Acquisition.
View > Display Mode ( )
The light conditions of the Acquisition screen can be modified (see
pagexxx).
View > Alerts
The Alerts view will be opened. It can also be opened with at the
bottom on the right side in the Acquisition window (see page 278).
Open 3D Object Manager ( )
Opens the 3D Object Manager where 3D objects can be added,
modified or deleted. When a 3D object is added it will be visible in the
3D Views.

Figure 12-5 3D Object Manager
Accept Alerts (F10)

When alerts are viewed in the Alerts view (see page 278) then with
this option or with key F10 all the alerts in the view will be accepted.
This does not mean that the alerts are solved, they are only accepted.
Guidance:
Guidance > Guidance Settings ( )
For the active vessel the guidance can be checked or modified, only
when logging is off (see page 131).
Guidance > Select Runline… ( )
A runline can be selected as guidance for the survey (see page 259).
Guidance > Next ( )
Select the next line in the runlines file as the guidance for the survey.
Guidance > Previous ( )
Select the previous line in the runlines file as the guidance for the
survey.
Guidance > Reverse ( )
Switch the start and the end of the line.
Guidance > Man Over Board ( )
When selected, an active waypoint (called MOB) will be placed on the
location of the vessel. The Plan View – Navigation, the Plan View –
Dredge Instruction and the Plan View – Dynamic Positioning will
display a bull’s eye with the MOB as center.
When deselected, the MOB is not the active waypoint anymore and
the bull’s eye is gone in the above mentioned Plan Views.
Guidance > Select Waypoint… ( )
Select a waypoint as guidance for the survey.
Guidance > New Waypoint ( )
A new waypoint can be created at the location of the tracking point.
Guidance > Update Wayline
Update the wayline from the tracking point on the vessel to the active
waypoint.

Guidance > Select Placement Point…
Select a (vessel) placement point as guidance for the survey. Select
‘None’ if the active placement point has to be cleared.
Guidance > New Placement Point ( )
A new (vessel) placement point can be created at the location of the
tracking point with the heading of the vessel.
Guidance > Select Work Areas…
Select one or more work areas from the active work areas file as
guidance for the survey.
Guidance > Enter Work Area Names
Enter the name of one or more work areas from the active work areas
file as guidance for the survey.
Guidance > Select Dredge Instruction…( )
In the Select Dredge Instruction window the user can search through
the available dredge instructions, view them and select one of the
dredge instructions as the new guidance for the survey.
Logging:
Logging > Logging Settings ( )
For the active vessel the Logging page can be checked or modified,
Logging > Prompt for log file names ( )
If this option is active then for each new log file that is created a dialog
will be opened where the user can specify the log file name. When the
log file is closed the default log file name will be overwritten by the
specified log file name.
Figure 12-6 Dialog for the log file names
Logging > Enable Data Logging (F4) ( )

The data logging can be switched on or off (see page 260).
Switch Log File ( )
When the data logging will continue in a new log file. The existing log
file will be stopped.
Logging > Enable Eventing ( )
The event logging can be switched on or off.
Logging > Enable Message Logging ( )
The message logging can be switched on or off.
Logging > Manual Event ( )
An event will be placed at the active location.
Logging > Manual Event with Comment ( )
An event will be placed at the active location and an event log entry
can be made.
Logging > Event Log Entry ( )
An event log entry ( = a comment) can be created which will be logged
in the acquisition_yyyymmdd.log file.

Tools:
Tools > Tools Settings
For a (rope) excavator application the crane configuration pages can
be opened (see page 107).
For the trailing suction hopper application the pages for the production
parameters (see page 115), the trip registration (see page 116) and
one or two pipe configurations (see page 114) can be opened.
For the cutter dredge application the pages for the cutter configuration
(see page 109) and the production parameters (see page 115) can be
opened.
Tools > Tools Calibration
The calibration pages for the tools of the (rope) excavator will be
opened. See for more information about the calibration pages the
application manuals of the excavator (Excavator.pdf) and rope
excavator (Rope Excavator.pdf).
Tools > Select Tool
For excavator applications several different tools can be used on the
excavator.
Figure 12-7 Tool Select Dialog
This selection is identical with selecting a different tool in the crane

configuration of the Tools Settings (see above).
Tools > Measure With Dredge Tool.
For excavator applications a distance can be measured by using the
bucket. This tool can be used to measure a distance under water.
Figure 12-8 Measure with dredge tool dialogs
Select the location on the bucket from where the measurement has to
start (for example the left side of the bucket, see above), click on
and in the Measure dialog the information under ‘From’ is
entered. Move the bucket and select the same or a different location
on the bucket, click on and in the Measure dialog the
information under ‘To’ is entered. Now the distance, bearing and
elevation between the two point is calculated.
Tools > Start Next Trip
For a trailing suction hopper application the next trip will be started.
Tools > Add Waypoint by Coordinate ( )
The options Add Waypoint A waypoint can added to the plan view with its satellite ellipsoid
by Coordinate and Add coordinates, its local ellipsoid coordinates or its grid coordinates.
Symbol by Coordinate are Tools > Add Symbol by Coordinate ( )
only available in the
A symbol can added to the plan view with its satellite ellipsoid
‘Boeilog’ application.
coordinates, its local ellipsoid coordinates or its grid coordinates.

Tools > Pulse Keyboard State Device
Activate the pulse state device that is selected in the Equipment page.
Tools > Calculator
A calculator will be opened where for a route KP, with or without an
offtrack, a position will be calculated in satellite ellipsoid, local ellipsoid
and projection coordinates or vice versa.
Tools > Vessel Backup Settings
A list of the vessel backups will be opened with a possibility to save
the current vessel configuration.
Tools > Import Grid Model Update…
A grid model update package can be imported to update the active
grid model. This update package can be created in the grid model
editor (see page 522).
Tools > Enable Tide Gauge Alarm
If checked the tide gauge alarm is on and in the Alerts window a tide
gauge alarm will be entered. If the option is not checked the alarm is
off.
Tools > Equipment Control
This option is only It will open a dialog where the Output Control view can be selected
available when in the and it will open the output control window for that sensor. These output
Equipment page an output
control is added to the
controls cannot be added to the Acquisition through the Displays
equipment list. window or Add Displays option. See page 340 for more information
about an output control view.
Tools > Customize…( )
The Customize window will be opened. Parts of the toolbar can be
added or removed from the acquisition toolbar, commands can be
added to a toolbar and shortcut keys can be defined. See also page
262.
Help:
Help > Help Topics
The PDS2000 help file will be opened. The help file can also be
opened with the F1.
Help > Helpdesk View
This option will open a new layout with only the Raw Data View. This
can be helpful when the user is in contact with the PDS2000 Helpdesk
and they ask to open the Raw Data View to check the interface with
the sensors.
Select this option again and the layout that was used in the Acquisition
will be visible again.
12.4.1 Selecting Guidance

One of the surveyor’s task is to select runlines or one of the other
guidances. In ‘Next line selection’ on page 138 the automatic methods is
explained. Automatic selections are however not always desirable.
Therefore PDS2000 also has a manual possibility.
In the Acquisition and Presentation, the option Guidance > Select
Runline… from the menu bar or in the toolbar opens a selection
window. In that window the runline files, and when expanded the
individual runlines can be selected. Just select one and click on
to make that line active.

Figure 12-9 Select a runline
In a plan view (see page 343) an other runline can be selected by clicking
on an other line. That line should be one of the lines in the runline file that
is selected in the layer Active Runlines. The button in the plan view
toolbar should be on before it is possible to click on a runline in the plan
view.
12.4.1.1 Making Runlines or Routes Real Time

Sometimes during a survey an anomaly is observed. That can make it
necessary to make an additional runline to guide the vessel over that
anomaly.
Open the context menu of the plan view, select the option ‘Add Runline’
and the cursor shape will change into a cross. Click on the start point of
the line, then on the end point. A right click now adds the line to the
current runline file as ‘User line X.X’ where X is a sequence number. The
new runline is visible in the view and can be selected as any other runline.
In case the line has more than two points, it will automatically become a
route. The line that is added as a route file will be automatically placed in
the route layer of the plan view which makes the line visible for the user.
12.5 Logging
There are three logging methods:
The logging formats and 1. Logging of RAW data in the predefined formats. (off), (on) or
the logging filenames are (conditional logging).
selected in the Logging
page (see page 116). In the Acquisition the data logging can be switched on and off with:
 F4 key on the keyboard.
 (Un)check Logging > Enable Data Logging from the menu bar.
 Click on or on (or ) in the frame indicator in the right
bottom of the Acquisition view to start or stop the data logging.
Switching from log file can be done with:
 Select Logging > Switch Log File from the menu bar.

2. Logging of events in an event log file. (off) or (on).
The event logging can be switched on and off with:
 (Un)check Logging > Enable Eventing from the menu bar.
 Click on or on in the frame indicator in the right bottom of
the Acquisition view to start or stop the event logging.
3. Logging of system messages to text files. (off) or (on).
The message logging can be switched on and off with:
 (Un)check Logging > Enable Message Logging from the menu bar.
 Click on or on in the frame indicator in the right bottom of
the Acquisition view to start or stop the message logging.
12.5.1 Check the Logging

In PDS2000 several methods are available to check the status of the
logging.
 On the right side in the status bar of the Acquisition and of each
Presentation are three fields, resp. LOG, EVT and MSG. The color of
the field shows the log status for logging raw data, events and
messages respectively. Not logging makes the field red, conditional
logging and logging blocked by a condition makes it yellow. Green
means logging is on.
 In the Status – Logging view (see page 385) the logging status can be
used as background. The background of the view will be colored red,
yellow or green depending on the logging status: off, conditional or on.

12.6 Shortcuts
In the Acquisition default keyboard shortcuts are defined. The user can
change or add new shortcuts that can be used in the Acquisition. Select
from the toolbar of the Acquisition to get an overview of the existing
defined keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 12-10 Overview of the default Defined Keyboard Shortcuts
As shown in the overview above PDS2000 has shortcuts under the F-

keys on the keyboard (see below) and shortcuts with a combination of
several keys (see page 270).
The Customize window can be opened with Tools > Customize from the
menu bar or with from the toolbar.
Figure 12-11 Customize window with the toolbars page

Select the option User Toolbar if the user wants to display the F-keys as a
part of the toolbar ( ).
12.6.1 F-Keys
There are two methods to attach an action to a F-key, through the Button
Properties window and through the ‘Attach to Button’ option.
The Button Properties window can be open in the Commands page of the
Customize window.
Figure 12-12 Commands page in the customize window
Select the category User Buttons and the F-keys will be displayed on the
right side in the page. If the selected F-key has already a shortcut it will
be displayed at the bottom under ‘Description’. With the selected F-
key can be modified in the Button Properties window.
Figure 12-13 Default properties for the F-keys

In the Button Properties window two pages are available, the Default and
the Custom page. In the Default page the actions as defined by PDS2000
are available. These default actions are already assigned to one of the F-
keys. In the Custom page all the actions are available which are added by
the user.
With an action from the list of available actions can be added to the
list of selected actions. It is possible to select more actions for one F-key.
With an action can be removed from the list of selected actions.
If more than one action is added to the list of selected actions, the order
of the actions can be modified by using or . With the list
of selected actions can be removed. For the actions in the list of selected
actions the description and the tool tip for that action can be modified by
the user.
If the actions are selected close the Button Properties window with
to accept the new actions for the F-key.
In the Custom page the user can add a new action to the list of available
actions. Select the right action group and click on . It depends on
the selected action group what the next steps will be.
The actions for the shortcuts are divided in different groups.
Attribute Actions
These actions have direct access to one of the attributes in the
properties of the equipment and the related computations (see page
265).
Handler Actions
These actions are the same as the options in the menu bar or in the
toolbar of the Acquisition. Only available in the Default page and the
user cannot add new handler actions to the list.
Manual Input Actions
These actions are the actions for the manual input devices which are
accessible in the Acquisition (see page 267).
View Attribute Actions
These actions have direct access to one of the attributes in the layer
properties of the views or to one of the attributes in the properties of
the views in the Acquisition (see page 267).
For the attribute actions and the view attribute actions an ‘Attach to
Button’ button becomes available in the properties windows to attach the
selected attribute directly to one of the F-keys.

12.6.2 Attribute Actions
The attribute actions can be attached to a F-key with both methods.
Select in the Button Properties window the ‘Attribute Actions’ in the
Custom page, click on and the Select Attribute window will be
opened to select one of the attributes in the equipment or the related
computations.
Figure 12-14 Select Attribute window to select an equipment attribute
Select the device or the related computation on the left side and the
properties will appear on the right side. Select one of the attributes in the
properties and click on . The selected attribute action can be
attached to the F-key in the Button Properties window as discussed on
page 263.
In the Acquisition are for the ‘Attach to Button’ option two ways possible to
open the properties of the equipment, through the Raw Data view and
through the Select Data window.
Figure 12-15 Attach an attribute through the Raw Data view

In the Raw Data view double click on an item in the tree and the related
properties window will be opened. Select in this properties window the
attribute for the F-key, click on and the Attach to Button window
will be opened (see below).
The Select Data window can be opened with in the toolbar or with Edit
> Equipment in the menu bar of the Acquisition.
Figure 12-16 Select Data window
With double clicking on one of the items in the Select Data window the
related properties window will be opened. Select in this properties window
the attribute for the F-key, click on and the Attach to Button
window will be opened (see below).
12.6.2.1 Attach to Button
Figure 12-17 Attach an attribute to a F-key
In the Attach to Button window the F-key can be selected. If already an

action is attached to this F-key it will be displayed in the window. Click on
to attach the new attribute to the selected F-key and the old
action will be overwritten.

12.6.3 Manual Input Actions
The manual input actions can only be attach through the Button
Properties window. Select the ‘Manual Input Actions’ in the Custom page,
click on and the Select Data window will be opened to select one of
the manual input devices that are added to the equipment list.
Figure 12-18 Select Data window to select a manual input device
Select the attribute of the device data that can be used fore the manual
input. and click on .
Attach this manual input action to a F-key in the Button Properties window
as discussed on page 263.
12.6.4 View Attribute Actions

The view attribute actions can be attached to a F-key with both methods.
Select in the Button Properties window the ‘View Attribute Actions’ in the
Custom page, click on and the Select View window will be opened
to select one of the views in the Acquisition.
Figure 12-19 Select View window to select a view in the Acquisition
Click on and select in the Select Layer window the layer from
which an attribute has to be selected.

Figure 12-20 Select Layer window to select the layer in the view
Click on and select in the Select View Attribute window the

attribute for the F-key.
Figure 12-21 Select View Attribute window to select an attribute in the view
Click on and attach this view attribute action to a F-key in the

Button Properties window as discussed on page 263.
The quick way to attach a view attribute actions to a F-key is with the
‘Attach to Button’ option.

Figure 12-22 Attach an attribute from the layer properties
Add an attribute from the layer properties by opening the Layers window
of the view in the Acquisition through the option Layer Control in the
context menu or with in the toolbar of the view. Select in this window
the layer from which an attribute has to be selected. Open this layer by
double clicking or by clicking on . Select in the Properties window
of the selected layer the attribute for the F-key and click on . The
Attach to Button window will be opened to attach the attribute to the right
F-key (see page 266).
Figure 12-23 Attach an attribute from the view properties
Add an attribute from the view properties by opening the properties of the
view in the Acquisition and select the attribute for the F-key. Click on
and the Attach to Button window will be opened to attach the
attribute to the right F-key (see page 266).

12.6.5 Shortcut Keys
In the shortcut keys page the shortcut with several keys can be defined.
Figure 12-24 Shortcut Keys page of the Customize window
Select one of the macro’s from the list and click on and a window to
enter a new shortcut key will be opened.
Figure 12-25 Assign a shortcut key to the selected macro
Type a shortcut and click on to accept the shortcut for the

selected macro. As short each combination of Shift, Ctrl, Alt and a F-key
is possible.
12.7 Presentations
A Presentation can have the same views as the Acquisition, but it gets the
information from the Acquisition. In other words, a Presentation is
connected to the Acquisition and send requests to the Acquisition to send
data for showing in the views.
That is the reason a Presentation cannot control data logging and further
system settings. The only selections that can be done in a Presentation is
selecting the active runline, selecting the active waypoint, create a new
waypoint and the Man Over Board option.
Multiple presentations can be connected to an Acquisition. Presentations
can run on the same computer as the Acquisition (Local computer) or
over a network on a remote computer. To connect to a remote, see page
22 where the installation and running of a remote presentation is
described.

13 Views
13.1 Introduction
To show all the survey information in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation(s) several views can be used. These views together are
called a layout.
There are two ways to create a layout and to add the views to that layout.
See ‘Data Visualization’ on page 252 to add a view to the layout.
 In the Acquisition or Presentation with File > New Layout… from the
menu bar.
 By changing an existing layout in the Acquisition or Presentation. Save
the changed layout with File > Save Layout As... from the menu bar.
In this chapter all the possible views for the Acquisition and the
Presentation will be discussed in alphabetical order. It will depend on the
application type if a view is available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation.
At the moment following views are available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation:
1. 3D Views (see below)
2. Alerts View (see page 278)
3. Compass View (see page 280)
4. Device Configuration Views (see page 280)
5. Dredge Views (see page 286)
6. Dredge Status View (see page 290)
7. Echosounder Graphical Trace View (see page 291)
8. Helmsman View (see page 299)
9. Icon Image View (see page 301)
10. Interval Logging View (see page 302)
11. Laser Scan Control View (see page 302)
12. Manual Input View (see page 304)
13. Messages Views (see page 305)
14. Multibeam QC Views (see page 307)
15. Multibeam Video View (see page 334)
16. Numerics View (see page 335)
17. Obstacle Avoidance (see page 338)
PDS2000 - User Manual Views  271

18. Output Control View (see page 340)
19. Pipe Lay Views (see page 340)
20. Plan Views (see page 343)
21. Positioning system XY - Manual Input View (see page 362)
22. Profile Views (see page 363)
23. Raw Data View (see page 373)
24. Scatterplot View (see page 374)
25. Sonar Targets View (see page 376)
26. Sonar Views (see page 378)
27. Status Views (see page 383)
28. Tide Manual Input View (see page 386)
29. Time Series View (see page 387)
13.2 3D View
In the Acquisition are two 3D Views available.
 3D View – Online (see below)
 3D View – Online Dredge (see page 274)
The views are nearly identical, the only difference is that the 3D View –
Online Dredge has as default a dredge layer instead of a vessel layer.
In the 3D View the standard 3D view navigation can be used (see page
50).
272  Views PDS2000 - User Manual

13.2.1 3D View – Online
The 3D View – Online can show the multibeam and/or laser scan data in
3D. If in the logging page also a grid model is selected (see page 116),
the multibeam data will be directly logged in the active grid model and will
be shown as a 3D grid model in the view.
Figure 13-1 3D View – Online with multibeam and laser scan data

13.2.2 3D View – Online Dredge
The 3D View – Online Dredge can be used for dredging purposes. It will
show the cutter dredger or trailing suction hopper in 3D with a 3D grid
model. When the cutter dredger or trailing suction hopper is working the
grid model will be updated.
Figure 13-2 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated
active grid model

Figure 13-3 3D View – Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated
active grid model with a dredge differential color table
13.2.3 3D View – Toolbar and Context Menu

The items in the toolbar and in the context menu are:
Show Toolbar
If checked, the toolbar will be shown in the view.
The + and – key of the Zoom Functions ( )
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
mouse wheel can also be
used for the Zoom In and Follow Vessel ( )
Zoom Out. If the option is ‘on’, the vessel will be displayed in the center of the
view.
If the option is ‘off’, the vessel can be anywhere in the view, even
outside the view.
Show Spotlight ( )
If the option is ‘on’, the spotlight window will be displayed in the view.
In this window the light source can be moved by moving the yellow dot
in the circle.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the 3D
distance between the two points is given.

Figure 13-4 Measure window
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a ‘hand’. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option.
Show Grid Layer ( )
If this option is ‘on’, the coordinate axis system is shown in the center
of the view.
Color Table Layer ( )
If the option is ‘on’, the color table will be displayed on the right side in
the view. This is only valid when in the Properties a color table is
selected (see page 278).
Save Snapshot ( )
An image of the 3D View will be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Create Sonar Target ( )
Draw a box around an area in the active grid model and the area will
be saved as a sonar target.
The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the view a context menu
becomes available for that sonar target. A right mouse click on or in
the symbol gives some extra options. For more information see page
355.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window of the view will be opened (see below). In this
window only the used layers will be displayed; layers can be added,
modified or removed.
If a grid model is added to the view then the available data types of the
grid model with their color table will be displayed in the Coverage
Settings view. Select the data type and its color table for the display of
the grid model.
The transparency of the grid model can be defined, where 0 is no
transparency and 100 complete transparency.
The resolution of the grid model can be set in 5 steps from Very Low to
Very High. This means that when the grid model is zoomed out and
the resolution is Very High more detail of the grid model is shown than
when the resolution is Very Low. The resolution has no impact when
the view is zoomed on the grid model, because then the resolution is
always high.

Figure 13-5 Coverage Settings view of the 3D View
Properties ( )
The Properties window of the view will be opened (see below).
13.2.4 3D View – Layers

In the Layers window of the 3D Views the used layers for the view will be
displayed. Below the most relevant layers for both 3D Views will be
explained.
Vessel Layer
This layer is only opened in the 3D View – Online and will display the
vessel in 3D. It is not possible to show a trailing suction hopper with
suction tubes or a cutter dredger with a ladder, because these objects are
combined shapes and in the vessel layer only one shape can be
displayed.
Multibeam Layer
This layer is also only opened in the 3D View – Online and will display the
multibeam data.
Active Grid Model Layer
In both 3D Views the active grid model layer is opened to show the
selected grid model in 3D. This active grid model will be updated with the
multibeam data or with the dredge activities when the logging is on.
3D Dredge Track Layer
This layer is only opened in the 3D View – Online Dredge and will
displayed the vessel with the suction tube(s) or the cutter ladder in 3D.

13.2.5 3D View – Properties
In the Properties window of the 3D Views some items are identical with
the options in the toolbar and/or context menu. Below the most relevant
items will be explained.
Color Table Name
Select an existing color table that will be used by all the relevant layers
in the view.
Follow Vessel
If the option is Enabled, the vessel will be displayed in the center of the
view.
If the option is Disabled, the vessel can be anywhere in the view, even
outside the view.
Follow Vessel Mode
If the option ‘Follow Vessel’ is Enabled, this mode will define how
the view follows the vessel.
Grid North will show the data with a steady position, although the
user can rotate the data in the view.
Vessel North will show rotating data with a steady vessel heading.
Allow Vessel Angle
If the option ‘Follow Vessel Mode’ is Vessel North, the north
heading can be modified.
If the option is Enabled, a new heading can be set by rotating the
view.
Position Source
Select a position source that can be used as position to follow
when the option ‘Follow Vessel’ is Enabled.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of the
Layer Control are available.
13.3 Alerts View
Figure 13-6 Alerts view with several timeouts
The alarms can also be The alarms and timeouts are displayed in the Acquisition with the Alerts
displayed in the Acquisition view. In this view all active alarms and active timeouts are displayed with
and Presentation with the an indication if they are accepted. There is an option in the view to set the
Status – Alarms view (see view as a pop-up view with the option that the view will pop up when an
page 384). alarm is created. Click on in the top left side of the view and checked
the option ‘Auto-Show Alerts’ and the view will act as a pop-up view.
This view will stay on the screen until the user click on or
. With View > Alerts from the menu bar or by clicking on the alarm

indicator (yellow) or (grey) in the status bar (see examples below)
the Alerts view can be made active again.
With all the active alarms can be accepted at the same time. It is
also possible to accept one alarm at the time with .
When the alarms are created in the configuration or in the vessel
configuration there is an option to set the sound (see pagexxx). When
such an alarm appears in the Alerts view the user can hear the alarm
sound. Click on in the view to stop the alarm sound. The alarm
itself is then not accepted yet.
When the Alerts view is already on the screen and a new alarm becomes
active, it will be added to the list in the view. If the view is not on the
screen and the pop-up option is set then the Alerts view will appear on the
screen. When the pop-up option is not set then in the status bar the alarm
indicator will become .
The alarm indicator in the status bar has several statuses; yellow ( )
when there are active alarms that are not accepted, grey ( ) when the
alarms are accepted but still active and no indicator when there are no
alarms.
Figure 13-7 Alarm indicator in the status bar
13.3.1 Error Messages

In this chapter the not obvious error messages will be explained. This list
will anticipate on questions from our clients.
 Time stamp error: Message time in the future
This message may occur for a few seconds during startup, after that it
should not occur anymore. Time stamp in the future means that
PDS2000 receives a message from a device where the time in the
message is newer then the computer time. In other words PDS2000
receives the result of a measurement in the future. This problem can
occur when there is a clock synchronization error or when for instance
the PosMV is predicting to hard.

13.4 Compass View
Figure 13-8 Compass view with True Heading, CMG and Waypoint heading
In the Compass view the true heading will be displayed with the CMG
(course made good). It is possible through the properties in the context
menu to display the guidance heading (route or waypoint) as an extra
heading (see below).
13.4.1 Compass – Properties

The only item in the context menu of the Compass view is the properties.
Below the most relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Compass Orientation Mode
With this mode the orientation of the compass rose in the view can be
set. The possibilities are North Up and Heading Up (this is True
Heading Up!).
Compass Guidance Mode
The heading of the active guidance can be displayed as extra heading
in the Compass view. The possibilities are Off, Waypoint or Route.
Off will display no extra heading in the view.
Waypoint will display the heading to the active waypoint, i.e. the
heading of the wayline.
Route will display the heading of the most nearby line segment of the
active route.
13.5 Device Configuration Views

With this type of views the settings of a RESON SeaBat 7K or a RESON
HydroBat can be controlled.
A Device Configuration view is not a standard view which can be added
through the Displays window or the Add Display option in the context
menu of the Acquisition.
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, a device configuration
 has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page
96).
Select the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu bar of the
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the right output control
in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on to

add the view to the Acquisition. After the Output Control view is added the
window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays
window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
In the Acquisition are two Device Configuration views available:
 Device Configuration – RESON-7K view (see below)
 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view (see page 284)
13.5.1 Device Configuration – RESON-7K View

The Device Configuration – RESON-7K view is a control view for the
RESON SeaBat 7K series. With this view the settings for the SeaBat 7K
can be modified.
13.5.1.1 RESON SeaBat 7K – Sonar Settings
Figure 13-9 Sonar Settings for the Device Configuration
In this page the Frequency, Range, Power, Max. ping rate, Gain, Pulse
Length and Pulse Type can be set. It will depend on the RESON SeaBat
7K type (f.i. 7101, 7125) what the values for each setting will be.
The different sonar settings are:
Frequency
The used frequency for the sonar will be displayed. If more
frequencies are possible for the used sonar then the user can select a
different frequency and the sonar will switch from frequency
automatically.
Range
The range setting determines how far the sonar will ‘see’.
Power
To increase or decrease the amount of power (acoustic energy)
transmitted into the water.

Max ping rate
The number of pings per second (p/s).
The actual number of ping If the maximum rate is set to 0, the system will not ping or receive
per second is also
depending on the range.
data.
If the maximum rate is set higher than the sonar’s actual maximum
ping rate, the sonar will ping at its actual maximum ping rate.
Gain
The amount of receiver gain applied to the returned sonar signal (in
addition to the calculated gain).
Pulse length
To change the pulse length of the transmitted signal.
For a given power setting, a narrow pulse length provides a higher
 resolution at a shorter range. A wider pulse length provides maximum
range with lower resolution image results.
Pulse Type
The pulse type can be CW (Continuous Wave) or FM (Frequency
Modulation). It will depend on the type of RESON SeaBat 7K which
option(s) is/are available.
13.5.1.2 RESON SeaBat 7K – Ocean Menu
Figure 13-10 Ocean Menu for the Device Configuration – RESON-7K view
In this page the Absorption, Spreading and the Sound Velocity can be set.
The different physics settings in the Ocean Menu are:
Absorption
The absorption is the amount of loss expected through the ambient
water medium.
Spreading
The spreading is the amount of cylindrical and spherical spreading
loss that is expected through the ambient water medium.
This coefficient value is used in conjunction with the absorption loss
value to compute the TVG curve applied to the returned signal.
Sound velocity
The sound velocity is an external measured speed of sound through
the local water.

13.5.1.3 RESON SeaBat 7K – Data Recording
Figure 13-11 Data Recording for the Device Configuration – RESON-7K view
With this data recording page the recording in the related 7K Center can
be started and stopped.
It is not necessary to have this view open to get an active synchronization
 with the PDS2000 logging. With the attribute Sync Sonar Data Recording
with PDS in the device driver of the Device Configuration – RESON
SeaBat 7K the synchronization can be enabled or disabled.
Recording Control
With and the user can manually start and stop the data
recording (=logging) in the 7K Center.
If the option Synchronize with PDS logging is checked both buttons are
inactive. Now when the logging is started in PDS2000 then automatically
the data recording will start in the 7K Center. If the logging is stopped in
PDS2000 also the data recording in the 7K Center will stop.
When the 7K logging is started with the default log file name will
be used, when the option Synchronize with PDS logging is checked the
log file name will be the default file name with ‘PDS’ added (as shown in
the figure above).
Recording status
Recording mode
When there is no logging the recording mode is set on Stopped.
When the logging is started the recording mode is set on Recording.
Directory name
Directory where the S7K file will be stored. This path has to be set in
the 7K Center.
Filename
When the data recording is started the name of the S7K file will be
displayed.
File size
Size of the S7K file will be displayed.
Free diskspace
Percentage that is free on the hard disk where the 7K Center is
running.

13.5.2 Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat
View
The Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat view is a control view for
the RESON HydroBat. With this view the settings for the HydroBat can be
modified.
13.5.2.1 RESON HydroBat – Multibeam Settings
Figure 13-12 Multibeam Settings of the Device Configuration – RESON

HydroBat view
In this page the Range, Gain, Power Level, Pulse Length and
Minimization can be set. When for the first time the Acquisition is opened
the HydroBat will not be pinging.
The different multibeam settings are:
Auto pilot
With the option Auto pilot, default settings depending on the Range
 setting will be used. The value for the Power Level and Pulse Length
are controlled by the auto pilot, the other settings can still be set by the
user.
When the auto pilot is off the Power Level is still depending on Range
 and the Pulse Length. It is not possible to set the Power Level on
maximum when the Range is small and/or the Pulse Length is on
maximum.
Range
The range setting determines how far the sonar will ‘see’.
Gain
The amount of receiver gain applied to the returned sonar signal (in
addition to the calculated gain).
Power Level
To increase or decrease the amount of power (acoustic energy)
transmitted into the water.

Pulse length
To change the pulse length of the transmitted signal.
For a given power setting, a narrow pulse length provides a higher
 resolution at a shorter range. A wider pulse length provides maximum
range with lower resolution image results.
Minimization
The minimization will help with the bottom detection and can be set by
the user.
, , and
First click on to do an internal calibration of the HydroBat
 system. This calibration has nothing to do with the standard multibeam
calibration that has to be done to calibrate the complete system (see
for more information the Multibeam Calibration manual).
With the HydroBat will ping one time. Click on to start
the Hydrobat pinging and with the pinging can be stopped.
13.5.2.2 RESON HydroBat – Ocean Menu
Figure 13-13 Ocean Menu of the Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat

view
In this page the Absorption and the Sound Velocity can be set.
The different physics settings in the Ocean Menu are:
Absorption
The absorption is the amount of loss expected through the ambient
water medium.
Sound velocity
The sound velocity is an external measured speed of sound through
the local water. See also Override sound velocity.
Override sound velocity
The sound velocity will normally be read from the sound velocity
sensor and therefore cannot be set in this page when the option
Override sound velocity is unchecked. Check this option and the slider
for the Sound Velocity becomes available. The user can now manually
set the sound velocity value and will overrule the data from the sensor.

13.6 Dredge Views
In the Acquisition, these are the available Dredge views.
 Dredge – Bars Horizontal view (see below)
 Dredge – Bars Vertical view (see page 287)
 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view (see page 287)
 Dredge – Load and Draught view (see page 289)
 Dredge – SCADA view (see page 290)
13.6.1 Dredge – Bars Horizontal View
Figure 13-14 Dredge – Bars Horizontal view with two attributes
The Dredge – Bars Horizontal view will display attributes from the
computations as a bar with the actual value.
A bar can be added to the view by opening the Layer Control in the
context menu of the view. Add an Up=Down Indicator Layer and select as
‘Source Item’ an attribute from the one of the computations.

13.6.2 Dredge – Bars Vertical View
Figure 13-15 Dredge – Bars Vertical view with two attributes
The Dredge – Bars Vertical view will display attributes from the
computations as a bar with the actual value.
A bar can be added to the view by opening the Layer Control in the
context menu of the view. Add an Up=Down Indicator Layer and select as
‘Source Item’ an attribute from the one of the computations.
13.6.3 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View
Figure 13-16 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view for two suction tubes
The Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter view displays the velocity (V)

and the density (C) of the dredge production. With these two values the
production (Q) can be calculated.
The dredge production can be read in the graph. The place where the two
needles cross each other is an indication for the production; the higher
the crossing, the higher the dredge production.

13.6.3.1 Flow/Concentration Meter – Properties
The only item in the context menu of the Dredge – Flow/Concentration
Meter view is the properties. In the Properties window the scales for the
meter can be adjust and for a vessel with one suction tube the second
tube can be disabled.
Below the most relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Flow/Concentration Meter
The display of the meter can be disabled.
Free Name String
This will be name of the meter which is displayed above the meter in
the view.
Data Item
For the ‘Flow’, the ‘Concentration’ and the ‘Production’ the data items
can be changed. This will be only relevant when dredge production of
another vessel is monitored. For the active vessel the data items are
set by default to the right data items.
Range
For the ‘Flow’ and the ‘Concentration’ the range in the meter can be
changed.
The above mentioned items in the properties are available for both the
suction tubes.

13.6.4 Dredge – Load and Draught View
The Dredge – Load and Draught view will give the draught, load and TDS
(Tons Dry Solid) information in a kind of time series view in combination
with a Numerics view.
Figure 13-17 Dredge – Load and Draught view with the Load page
By default are in the time series view the load, the hopper volume, the
TDS and the dredge status selected. In the numerics part of the view are
four pages by default defined; Hopper Sensor, Draught Sensor, Load and
TDS. In the view a context menu is available to setup the view or to add
extra items to the view.
 It will depend on the settings in the dongle which pages are available and
which computations will be computed to display the data in the view.
See the application manual for the Trailing Suction Hopper for more
information about this view.

13.6.5 Dredge – SCADA View
Figure 13-18 Dredge – SCADA view with two suction tubes
The Dredge – SCADA view In the Dredge – SCADA views the dredging processes can be displayed.
is at the moment special The view shows (the position of) the control valves, the pumps and the
made for Boraciet. piping. It is also possible to show the flow directions from the suction head
to the hopper.
When this view is opened the first time it will be empty. In the properties
of the view a filename representing a scada view with the data source has
to be selected (see below).
13.6.5.1 SCADA – Properties

The only item in the context menu of the Dredge – SCADA view is the
properties. In the Properties window the filename of the display and the
data source has to be selected.
Dredge Status Config File Name
Select the right file that represent the scada of the vessel.
SCADA Data Source
The data source should be the ‘Device Data’ of the ‘Dredge Vessel
Info’ of the vessel.
13.7 Dredge Status View
Figure 13-19 Dredge Status view with Sailing full as dredge status
The Dredge Status view is not a standard view which can be added
Acquisition to add the Dredge Status view. Select the view in the Add
Equipment control display(s) window and click on to add the view
to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be closed.

From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it has the
same functionality as all other views.
Before the view can be selected in the Add Equipment control display(s)
 window, the device driver for the dredge status has to be added to the
equipment list in the Equipment page (see page 96).
The number of buttons that are displayed in the view will depend on the
device driver that is selected. When the dredge status is in Automatic
mode the dredge state selection will be based on the status signals as
received from the vessel. With Idle the Automatic mode can be switched
off and the user can select the different statuses manually.
13.8 Echosounder Graphical Trace View
Figure 13-20 Echosounder Graphical Trace view with four channels
An Echosounder Graphical Trace view is not a standard view which can

be added through the Displays window or the Add Display option in the
context menu of the Acquisition.
Acquisition to add the Echosounder Graphical Trace view. Select the view
add the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be
closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it
has to same functionality as all other views.
 The Echosounder Graphical Trace view should always be opened. If

the view is closed NO echo sounder data is logged!!
With this type of view the echo sounder channels with the graphical trace
 will be displayed. From the Navisound firmware version 1.7.0 the
graphical trace is supported, so with firmware before version 1.7.0 no
graphical trace is possible.

With the buttons at the bottom of the view some general settings can be
modified by clicking on one of the buttons and a different setting can be
selected. All these options are also available in one of the settings pages
(see below).
Before this view can be selected, the echo sounder with graphical trace
96).
13.8.1 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Toolbar

The items in the toolbar of the view are:
Connect ( )
If the communication seems to fail a reconnection can be made.
If a NS600 system is connected the RT modules are turned off during
the reconnection.
Properties ( )
The settings for the view and for the echo sounder can be checked
and/or modified. See below for an explanation of the different pages in
the Settings.
Show Terminal ( )
The Navisound Terminal window keeps track of the communication
between the echo sounder or the RT modules and PDS2000.
Zoom Mode ( )
Opens a magnify window that follows the mouse movements in the
view. Click on the left mouse button to go through the different zoom
options; 2x, 4x and 8x.
Figure 13-21 Magnify window with the zoom option 2x
Save Snapshot ( )
A snapshot of all the data from the start to the present time will be
stored in a temporary file, called ‘snapshot.log’. Click on in the
Information dialog and a Print window will be opened where the data
can be selected that has to be printed.

Figure 13-22 Print window of the snapshot with a start and end marker
Use the slider to scroll through the data and set a start and end marker
in the window to select only a part of the data that has to be printed.
Click on to change to channel 3 & 4 (RT2), and vice versa.
13.8.2 Echosounder Graphical Trace – Settings

The Settings of the Echosounder Graphical Trace view can be opened
with in the toolbar of the view.
From the different pages in the Settings the most relevant items will be
explained. It will depend on the type of Navisound which items are
available in the settings.

13.8.2.1 General Page
Figure 13-23 General page of the Settings
In this page the port settings for Channel 1 &2 (Port 1) and, if applicable,
for channel 3 & 4 (Port 2) can be set.
13.8.2.2 Advanced Page
Figure 13-24 Advanced page of the Settings
Enable Depth Annotate

If the option is checked the horizontal lines and the depth annotation
will be displayed in the view.

Max Screen Rate
The update rate of the data in the view can be set; 35 Hz means an
update rate of 35 times per second.
13.8.2.3 Color Page
Figure 13-25 Color page of the Settings
In this page the graphics colors for the echo trace can be set.
There are 4 user defined possibilities for the color settings and one
default for the gray scale palette.
Graphic Level 1 is the background color; Graphic Level 8 has the highest
voltage level (strongest echo return) and Graphic Level 2 the lowest.
Click on to select for a graphic level a different color from the color
palette.

13.8.2.4 Channels Page
Figure 13-26 Channel page of the Settings
In the page of the settings nearly all the sounding related commands are
available. The most used commands are also available as buttons at the
bottom of the view.
The most important settings are:
Draft
The draft of the echo sounder transducer can be set. The draft is the
depth of the transducer below the water level. The draft is added to the
measured depth to get the total depth.
If the draft is entered here, the draft should also be entered in the
properties of the echosounder device in the equipment.
Frequency
The frequency of the transducer can be set.
Range
The range of the transducer can be set. The value should be more
then the actual depth below the transducer. The bigger the range the
slower the update rate of the data in the view will be.

13.8.2.5 Paper Page
Figure 13-27 Paper page of the Settings
In this page the settings for the paper or screen can be set.
Paper Range
The range (depth) as displayed on the paper or screen can be set.
The size of one pixel of the graphical trace is depending on the paper
range; the range is divided in 200 samples to present the graphical
trace.
 At the moment PDS2000 supports only the 200 samples as the
presentation for the graphical trace.
Paper Offset
An offset on the paper of screen can be set. The offset will shift the
paper range down so the echo sounder data can be displayed more in
the middle of the paper.

13.8.2.6 Various Page
Figure 13-28 Various page of the Settings
In this page all the settings that are not placed in the other pages can be
modified.
13.8.2.7 Communication Page
Figure 13-29 Communication page of the Settings
If a heave sensor is connected to the echo sounder check the option Use
Heave and fill in the port settings for the heave.

13.9 Helmsman View
Figure 13-30 Helmsman view with a runline
A Helmsman needs to know the position of the vessel in relation with the
current line. This can be a runline, a route or a wayline. With the
Helmsman view the offtrack, different headings and different distances
can be displayed.
At the top of the view an offtrack indicator is displayed with a user
selectable scale. The offtrack limit, as specified in the runlines page of the
Guidance (see page 138), will be shown as triangles.
The offtrack lines in green and red are always displayed at an interval of 5
system units (for example 5 meter or 5 feet). The offtrack limit, if
specified, will be displayed as light blue lines.
On the bottom line of the view from left to right: vessel heading, line
heading, current line, heading to steer to next point of the line and
distance to next point on the line. The next point can be the end point of
the line, if it a straight line, or it can be the next tangent point in a route.
On the right side the bar graph (here in black) gives the distance traveled
form the start of the line. The actual value for the distance traveled is
displayed at the bottom next to the bar graph. At the top next to the bar
graph is displayed the distance to go to the end of the line.
13.9.1 Helmsman – Toolbar and Context Menu

Show Toolbar
The + and – key of the If checked, the toolbar will be shown in the view.
numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
In and Zoom Out. Zoom in and out in the view.
Save Snapshot ( )
The picture of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.

Auto Ranging ( )
If checked or if the button is ‘in’, the view will zoom automatically to the
predefined settings as specified in the properties.
Perspective View ( )
If checked or if the button is ‘in’, the view is a top view but from behind
the vessel (a kind of 3D).
If not checked or if the button is ‘out’, the view will be a top view (2D).
View Reference ( )
The view point can be selected; the vessel or the runline.
Properties ( )
The properties of the view (see below).
13.9.2 Helmsman – Properties

In the properties some items are identical with the options in the context
menu and in the toolbar. For these items several settings can be
specified.
The relevant items in the Properties window will be explained below.
Line Computation Selection
The type of guidance line can be selected; Runline, Route or Wayline.
Track Buffer Length
The length of the history track behind the vessel can be specified.
Show To Go and Traveled
The values for distance traveled and distance to go alongside the bar
graph can be switched on or off.

13.10 Icon Image View
Figure 13-31 Icon Image view with an image of a vessel
The Icon Image view is a view that will be created for each icon image
that is selected in the Plan View. The view shows the image with as extra
an icon image info table.
In the caption of the Icon Image view is visible in which icon images file
the image is stored. In the example above the icon images file is ‘test’ and
it is the first image in the file.
The Icon Image view can be opened from the Plan View – Survey
Coverage or Plan View – Navigation. Double click on an icon and the
image with the info table will be opened.
Only the Description in the icon image info table as displayed below the
view can be modified by the user. The other item are generated when the
icon image is created. Click on the field right of the item Description and
enter some text. After the description is modified click on to save
the modification to the icon images file. The name of the icon images file
can be set in the Project Configuration (see page 64).
To delete an icon from the Plan View and form the icon images file, open
the context menu of the Icon (right mouse click on the icon) and select the
option Delete Icon Image.
All collected icon images will be saved in the selected icon images file,
 which is available in the Icon Images tab of the Explorer (see page 248).
The corresponding BMP and/or JPG files are also stored in the Icon
Images Database of the Explorer.

13.11 Interval Logging View
Figure 13-32 Interval Logging view with 2 items with the sampling method
The Interval Logging view displays the items as specified in the Interval
Logging page for a cutter dredge application (see page 111).
13.12 Laser Scan Control View

Not for all the different laser scans a control view is available. There is
only for the MDL laser scan and the Riegl Z Series a control view, which
is specific for each laser scan.
 Laser Scan – MDL View (see below)
 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View (see page 303)
A Laser Scan Control view is not a standard view which can be added
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, the right Laser Scan
 device driver has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page
(see page 96).
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the Laser Scan device
driver in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on
to add the view to the Acquisition. After the Laser Scan Control
view is added the window can be closed. From now on the view is
available in the Displays window where it has to same functionality as all
other views.

13.12.1 Laser Scan – MDL View
Figure 13-33 Laser Scan Control View for the MDL laser scan
13.12.2 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View
Figure 13-34 Laser Scan Control View for the Riegl Z Series laser scan
The values in the control view will be populated with values obtained from
the laser scan.
Select for Frame Motion the option Continuous to get a proper working
with PDS2000.

When the Frame Scan Number is zero there will be no frame movement.
If the background of an edit box becomes red it means that the value in
the edit box is out of range.
13.13 Manual Input View
Figure 13-35 Manual Input – Dredge Status view with all the dredge statuses
and delays
 When the Manual Input – Dredge Status view is opened the first time it
will be empty. In the properties the configuration file for the right vessel
can be selected.
At the moment the order of In the view several dredge statuses can be selected during the dredge
the dredge statuses is operation. Not all the dredge statuses will be displayed at the same time
fixed according the as it is displayed in the example above. Only the dredge statuses that can
instructions of Boraciet. be possible as next status are displayed in the view. If it is necessary,
with the Undo (Ongedaan maken) button it is always possible to go back
several dredge statuses. The OK button is only visible when a trip can be
finished. After the user clicked on the OK button the next trip will be
started.
Next to the dredge statuses several delays (Verlet) types can be switch
on or off. There is no delay when the delay button is white and the delay
is active when the button is red. An active delay can continue over several
dredge statuses and will be finished automatically when the OK button is
selected.

All the steps done in the Manual Input – Dredge Status view will be
reported in an activity report. This report will be generated at the end of
the dredge instruction and will be logged in the ‘Logdata’ directory.
13.14 Messages Views

In the Acquisition three Messages views are available.
 Messages – HydroBat or Messages – SeaBat 7K view (see below)
 Messages – I/O Port view (see page 306)
 Messages – System Messages view (see page 307)
13.14.1 Messages – HydroBat or Messages –

SeaBat 7K View
In the Acquisition this view is available for the RESON HydroBat and for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. For both systems the view is identical
accept that for the RESON SeaBat 7K an extra tab is available.
In this view the information received from the RESON HydroBat or
RESON SeaBat 7K will be displayed. The light in the tabs can be green,
yellow or red. Green means that everything is OK, yellow means that non
critical errors are received and red means critical errors received from the
system.
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, a device messages
96).
13.14.1.1 Main Page
Figure 13-36 Main Page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view
In the main page the available sonar systems are displayed, normally it
will be only one as displayed above. Double click on the sonar name and
for the RESON HydroBat the Event page will be opened and for the
RESON SeaBat 7K the BITE page will be opened.

13.14.1.2 Event Page
Figure 13-37 Event page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view
In the Event page the events (messages) from the sonar system will be
displayed.
13.14.1.3 BITE Page
Figure 13-38 BITE page of the Messages – SeaBat 7K view
In the BITE page the BITE messages from the RESON SeaBat 7K
system will be displayed.
This page is not available for the RESON HydroBat.
13.14.2 Messages – I/O Port View
Figure 13-39 Messages – I/O Port view with incoming data
In the Messages – I/O Port view the incoming and/or outgoing data can
be displayed.
Select in the Properties window (available through the context menu) for
the item ‘I/O Port Selection’ an I/O port and in the view the incoming
and/or outgoing data on that port will be displayed.
Also the font and the color for the different types of text can be modified in
the properties.

13.14.3 Messages – System Messages View
Figure 13-40 Messages – System Messages view with information
In the Messages – System Messages view relevant information, errors

and/or status messages can be displayed.
In the context menu two options are available, the messages can be
printed and the properties of the view can be opened. In the Properties
window the font and the colors for the different types of text can be
modified.
13.15 Multibeam QC Views

In the Acquisition six multibeam QC views are available to show the
information of the multibeam system.
 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view (see below)
 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view (see page
312)
 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view (see page 312)
 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view (see
page 315)
 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view (see page 316)
 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view (see page 320)
In most of the views the multibeam filters can be set (see page 324). The
multibeam filters can only be accessed when in the properties the item
 ‘Multibeam Source’ is set to Multibeam xyz computation. The current
presentation of the data is displayed in the title bar of the view, ‘Raw
Device Data’ for the mode Device Data and ‘XYZ Relative Data’ for the
mode Multibeam xyz computation.
The depths in the Multibeam xyz computation mode are corrected for the
Z-offset, heave, pitch, roll, sound velocity profile, sea level computation
and off course the multibeam filters. The depths displayed in the view are
then relative to the sea level.
13.15.1 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View

A number of sways are shown, the same data points of each sway
connected to those of the previous sway. This gives a view as if a 3D
seafloor is visible. New sways are placed in front; old sways disappear
from the view. This results in a sliding view that gives a good sight on the
seafloor.
In the Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view view the multibeam data can be
presented in different ways. Through the context menu the settings can
be changed to get other presentations of the data in the view. In this view

with the option Display Mode ( ) different ways of displaying the
multibeam data are available:
Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Device Data the multibeam
data is displayed in the color of the quality with four different colors;
quality good, colinearity not good, brightness not good and colinearity
and brightness not good.
Figure 13-41 Multibeam QC- 3D Seafloor view with the raw data in the
display mode Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Multibeam xyz computation the

multibeam data is displayed in the colors of the multibeam filters.
Figure 13-42 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with the multibeam xyz

computation in the display mode Quality

Detection
The multibeam data is displayed with the colors of detection method;
amplitude, phase or combined.
Figure 13-43 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode

Detection
Depth Dots
The multibeam data is displayed as dots. It is possible to show the
colors as the colors of the selected color table.
Figure 13-44 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Depth

Dots

Depth Grid
Between each four points of multibeam data a plane is displayed. It is
possible to show the colors as the color of the selected color table.

Grid
Depth Sample Grid

The same as with Depth Grid, only here with a sample of all the
multibeam data. It is possible to show the colors as the color of the
selected color table.

Sample Grid

Slope Grid
The data is displayed on the same way as the Depth Grid only the
coloring is based on the slope angle. It is possible to show the colors
as the color of the selected color table, with the values 0.1 = 10°, 0.2 =
20°, etc.
Figure 13-47 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope

Grid
Slope Sample Grid

The same as with Slope Grid, only here with a sample of all the
multibeam data. It is possible to show the colors as the color of the
selected color table, with the values 0.1 = 10°, 0.2 = 20°, etc.
Figure 13-48 Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view with display mode Slope

Sample Grid

13.15.2 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal
Strength Profile View
Figure 13-49 Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view with the
multibeam xyz computation and all four the multipings
In the Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view the

RESON SeaBat 7K series the backscatter signal strength is logged with
the bathymetric data of the multibeam system.
The backscatter signal strength can be displayed in all the different
multibeam data color modes as used for the other profile views.
13.15.3 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View

The view displays one sway of the multibeam where the ranges of the
multibeam are shown relative to the multibeam system.
In the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view the multibeam data can be
presented in different ways. Through the context menu the settings can
be changed to get other presentations of the data in the view.
With the option ‘Multibeam Data Color Mode’ in the Properties window the
color mode can be changed.

Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Device Data the multibeam
data is displayed in the color of the quality with different colors for the
quality is good, the colinearity is not good, the brightness is not good
and the colinearity and brightness are not good.
Figure 13-50 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the raw data in the
color mode Quality
When the ‘Multibeam Source’ is set on Multibeam xyz computation the

multibeam data is displayed in the colors of the multibeam filters.
Figure 13-51 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with the multibeam xyz
computation in the color mode Quality

Detection Process
The multibeam data is displayed with the colors of detection method;
Figure 13-52 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with one ping in the color
mode Detection Process
Sequence number
The RESON SeaBat 7K systems can be setup to output multipings.
This means that there are four different pings after each other and they
can be displayed in four different colors in the view.
When there are no multipings in the multibeam data, the data will be
displayed in black.
Figure 13-53 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with multipings in the color
mode Sequence number

13.15.4 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total
Propagation Errors View
Figure 13-54 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view with
the color mode Quality and the vertical and horizontal TPE’s
The Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view is a

combination of the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view (see page 312) and
the Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view (see page 316).

13.15.5 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors
View
Figure 13-55 Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors view with the vertical
and horizontal TPE’s and IHO errors
In the Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Error view the vertical and

If no IHO error filter is horizontal Total Propagation Errors (TPE) multibeam data are displayed.
selected in the Multibeam
As option it is also possible to show the IHO error filters in the same
Filters window, the IHO
order 1 is displayed. graph. The IHO error filters will be explained with the other multibeam
filters on page 330.
13.15.5.1 Vertical Total Propagation Error

The vertical total propagation error consists of three different issues:
1. The vertical base reduction.
2. The total swath heave error.
3. The total swath depth error.
The vertical base reduction is computed from the standard deviations of
the static draft, the dynamic draft and the loading of the transducer and
from the standard deviations of the tide measurement and tide prediction.
The total swath heave error is based on the measurement of the heave,
roll and pitch data. The error is computed from the standard deviations of
the variable heave, the fixed heave, the VRU offsets, the pitch, the VRU
alignment and the pitch stabilization of the transducer.
The total swath depth error is based on the measurements of the beam
nadir angle, the depth, the range and the sound velocity. The error is
computed from the standard deviations of the pitch, the roll, the VRU
alignment, the pitch stabilization of the transducer and the sound velocity.
The error is also based on the across and along beam width coefficients
of the transducer.

Swath Per beam
Total vertical
Total heave error Range error Angle error Pitch error Beamwidth error
reduction error
Errors for Draft, Measured heave Beam uncertainty Along beamwidth

or computed Total error over Total pitch error
Squat, Load, Tide, error, Induced coefficient over
range error beam range over beam range
GPS Z heave error depth
(sample distance,
pulse length) +
sound velocity
error
Total roll error: Total pitch error:
Base roll error + Pitch sensor error
Angle measured + Alignment error
error + Angle svp + Stabilization
error + Angle error
Surface speed
error
Base roll error:

Roll sensor error +
Alignment errors
IMU + MB
Angle measured
error:
Beam across
width error
(Amplitude/Phase)
Figure 13-56 Vertical error diagram
13.15.5.2 Horizontal Total Propagation Error

The horizontal total propagation error consists of four different issues:
1. The total GPS error.
2. The total horizontal transducer error.
3. The horizontal error related to latency.
4. The horizontal error related to the transducer.
5. The total GPS error is identical with the GPS DRMS.
The total horizontal transducer error is based on the measurements of the
beam nadir angle, the depth, the range and the computed range error.
The error is computed from the standard deviations of the sound velocity,
the heading, the pitch, the VRU alignment, the pitch stabilization of the
transducer and the roll.
The horizontal error related to the latency is based on the measurements
of the vessel speed and the pitch. The error is computed from the
standard deviations of the speed over ground, the GPS latency, the VRU
latency, the transducer head latency, the pitch, the VRU alignment, the
pitch stabilization of the transducer and the heading. The error takes also
in account the GPS latency.
The horizontal error related to the transducer is based on the
measurements of the roll and the pitch. The error is computed from the

standard deviations of the VRU offsets, the GPS offsets, the heading, the
roll and the pitch. The error takes also in account the GPS offsets.
Swath Per beam
Total GPS error Range error Heading error Angle error Pitch error Beamwidth error
GPS horizontal
error SV profile error +
Heading sensor Error due to Along
Range Angle error over Total pitch error
error over beam beamwidth over
measurement beam range over depth
range beam range
error
Total Latency
error
Range Angle measured Total pitch error:

measurement error + Angle svp Pitch sensor error
Vessel speed error: error + Angle + Alignment error
error, Heading Beam uncertainty surface speed + Stabilization
error, Pitch error or computed error error
range error
(sample distance,
pulse length)
Total Tx relative Angle measured
error error: Beam
across width error
(Amplitude/Phase)
Offset
measurement
error + related
heading, roll, pitch
errors
Figure 13-57 Horizontal error diagram
13.15.5.3 List of Standard Deviations of the TPE’s

In the overview all the standard deviations which are used in PDS2000 to
calculate the TPE’s are given per device.
Positioning:
Parameter Default Description
GPS latency error 0.00 s With or without the use of PPS the
value is always 0.00 s.
GPS X,Y,Z offset 0.02 m A tape measurement gives a value
measurement of 0.02 m and a theodolite
measurement gives a value of 0.005
m. The user has to fill in the right
value.
Speed-over ground 0.00 m/s For RTK the value is 0.05 m/s and
error for DGPS 1.7 m/s. This right value is
automatically used by PDS2000.
GPS error 0.00 m When available from the GPS
system and supported by the
PDS2000 driver, the real-time
accuracy information will be used.
When not available PDS2000 uses
default values for X, Y and Z:
RTK is 0.5 m, DGPS is 1 m and
GPS is 5 m.

VRU:
Roll and pitch 0.01 ° If a calibration is performed the value
alignment (C-O) should always be 0.01 °.
Heading alignment 0.01 ° If a calibration is performed the value
(C-O) should always be 0.01 °.
Latency error 0.00 s This value should always be 0.00 s.
X,Y,Z offset 0.02 m A tape measurement gives a value
measurement of 0.02 m and a theodolite
measurement gives a value of 0.005
m. The user has to fill in the right
value.
Roll error 0.05 ° This value is as per manufacturer.
Pitch error 0.05 ° This value is as per manufacturer.
Pitch stabilization 0.00 °
Fixed heave 0.01 m This is the fixed component of the
heave measurement error. With RTK
height this value should be 0.01 m.
For other situations the value is as
per manufacturer.
Percentage of heave 5% This is the variable component of the
variable error heave measurement as percentage
of the heave value. For other
situations the value is as per
manufacturer.
Multibeam:
Latency error 0.00 s The transducer head latency error.
Roll alignment (C-O) 0.01 ° If a calibration is performed the value
should always be 0.01 °.
Pitch alignment (C-O) 0.05 ° If a calibration is performed the value
should always be 0.05 °.
Heading alignment 0.05 ° If a calibration is performed the value
(C-O) should always be 0.05 °.
Range error 0.05 m Value is as per manufacturer.
SVP profile 0.25 m/s Value is as per manufacturer.
SVP at the head 0.25 m/s Value is as per manufacturer.
Water level 0.00 m The SDEV of the tide measurement.
Only a value when a tide station is
used and the value is as per
manufacturer.
Compass:
Compass ??? ° The default is per latitude and the
value is as per manufacturer.
Depth sensor:

Loading 0.00 m The SDEV of the measurement of
the draft changes (known loading as
e.g. fuel use). With RTK the value
should be 0.00 m. In other situation it
will depend on the selected device.
Dynamic draft 0.00 m With RTK the value should be 0.00
m. In other situation it will depend on
the vessel.
Tide gauge:
Tide gauge 0.02 m The SDEV of the tide gauge
readings. With RTK the value should
be 0.00 m. In other situations the
Tide prediction error 0.02 m The tide error due to spatial/temporal
variation. With RTK the value should
be 0.00 m. In other situations the
13.15.6 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View
Figure 13-58 Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view with the multibeam data
item Quality
In the Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view each sway is a horizontal

line, each new sway is printed on top of the view and will drop the
previous sways downwards.
With the option Ping Annotation Mode in the properties of the view (see
page 323) the ping numbers or the track distance can be shown on the
left side in view. The track distance is only useful when a route is selected
as guidance.

With the option Multibeam Data Item ( ) different ways of displaying
the multibeam data is available. The display options are similar to the
A message is displayed display modes in the Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view; Quality,
when the data cannot be Detection Process, Depth, Slope and Intensity. The intensity can only be
shown because it is not displayed if this value is available in the multibeam data. Also the TPE
available. Vertical Error and TPE Horizontal Error can be displayed (see above).
This is only possible if for the ‘Multibeam Source’ in the Properties
Multibeam xyz computation is selected.
13.15.7 Multibeam QC – Toolbar and Context

Menu
The items in the toolbars and in the context menus are:
The + and – key of the Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
numerics keyboard can Zoom in and out in the view. The zoom functions are only working
also be used for the Zoom when the ‘X Axis Range Mode’ is not Automatic. In both views with
In and Zoom Out. TPE’s it also works with the ‘Y Axis Range Mode’ is not Automatic.
Zoom Window, Zoom Extents ( , )
Zoom window is a zoom in by drawing a window around the are that
has to be zoomed in.
Zoom extents will display all the data in the profile view.
Only Show Valid Beams ( )
Toggles between showing all the data and only the valid data.
Layer Control ( )
The grid layer, the multibeam legend layer and the color table layer
can be edited. The color table layer is not available in the Multibeam
QC – Raw Profile view and in the Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal
Strength Profile view.
Color Table Layer
The layer contains the color table as selected in the properties and will
be displayed on the right hand side in the view.
Multibeam Legend Layer
The layer contains the text on the left side of the view. The text can be
the legend for the Quality, the Detection Process, the TPE Horizontal
Error or the TPE Vertical Error.
Grid Layer
The layer contains the horizontal and vertical lines in the view.
X Axis Range Mode
All Fixed. The minimum and maximum value is fixed.
Span Fixed. The span, the distance between the minimum and
maximum value, is fixed.
Automatic. The minimum, the maximum and the span are set
automatically.
Y Axis Range Mode
Same as for X Axis Range Mode.
Multibeam Data Color Mode
Select between the color mode Quality, Detection Process or
Sequence number.
Quality gives the colors of the filters as set in the multibeam filters.
Detection Process gives the colors for the detection method,
Sequence number gives the multipings of the RESON SeaBat 7K
systems.

Only available in the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view and in the
Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view.
Ping selection ( )
The selection of the multipings of the RESON SeaBat 7K systems; All
pings or one of the multipings of the RESON SeaBat 7K systems in
color will be displayed.
Display Mode ( )
Seven different ways of displaying the multibeam data in the
Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor view (see page 307).
Multibeam Data Item ( )
Different ways of displaying the multibeam data in the Multibeam QC –
Vertical Waterfall view (see page 320).
Automatic Cell Colors
The data in the view will be colored automatically and are not related
to a color table. This option only works for a display mode with a
depth.
Draw Connection Lines
Draw lines between the adjacent points of a sway.
Draw Beam Pattern
Draw lines from the multibeam head to the points of the sway.
Draw Reduced Profile
A red line is drawn through the valid points of the sway. In the right top
corner the percentage that is used for the XYZ log data file is
displayed. All the data will still be logged.
Show History
When checked, the sway before will also be displayed.
Multibeam Filter Settings
The Multibeam Filters view will be opened (see page 324 for a detailed
explanation).
Show TPE Error Ellipses
An ellipse will be shown in the raw profile data of the Multibeam QC –
Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view. The ellipse is created
with the vertical and horizontal total propagation error.
Properties ( )
The Properties window of the view will be opened, where most of the
options are identical with the items in the context menu.
Only Show TPE Error
Show only the TPE in the graph.
Only Show IHO Error
Show only the IHO error in the graph. If no IHO error filter is selected
in the Multibeam Filters view on page 324, then the IHO order 1 will be
shown.
Show Both TPE and IHO Errors
Show the TPE and the IHO error in the same graph.
Show Error As Bar
Show the values of the TPE or the IHO error as bars. Can show only
one type of error, it is not possible to show both at the same time.

13.15.8 Multibeam QC – Properties
Some items in the properties of the Multibeam QC views are only
accessible through the properties. The relevant items will be explained
below.
Multibeam Source
There are two modes available to show the multibeam data, one to
show the raw multibeam data (Device Data) and one to show
corrected multibeam data (Multibeam xyz computation).
When the view is in the mode Multibeam xyz computation the
multibeam filters are accessible (see below).
Automatic Cell Colors
Disable this option when a color table is used to show the depth colors
(not in the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view).
Color Table Name
A color table can be selected (not in the Multibeam QC – Raw Profile
view and in the Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Profile
view). The color of the color table will be used to display the multibeam
data, only in one of the Depth modes.
X Axis Range / Y Axis Range
The minimum, the maximum and/or the span width can be set for the
X axis and Y axis.
Ping Annotation Mode
Only for the Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall view a ping annotation
is displayed on the left side in the view. There are two options to show
the ping annotation, Ping Numbers and Track Distance.
Ping Annotation Interval
The interval between two ping annotations can be selected.
Beam Interval between TPE Ellipses
This is the number of beams between two TPE ellipses in the
Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view.

13.15.9 Multibeam Filters View
Figure 13-59 Multibeam Filters view
The Multibeam Filters view can only be opened through the context menu
of the Multibeam QC views when in the properties the Multibeam Source
is set to Multibeam xyz computation (see above).
The filters are active when the filters are displayed in the window and the
checkmark ( ) is set. With , a not displayed filter can be added to
the list. Uncheck a displayed filter and it will be not active anymore.
Click on to see if the filter settings work accordingly. Click on
to accept the filter settings and to close the window. When the
window is closed the unchecked filters will be removed from the list of
active filters. When the Multibeam Filters view is opened again the
unchecked filters will not be displayed anymore and can be added again
with . When a filter is added again it will remember the last used
settings.
All the available filters for the Multibeam Filters view are:
 Beam reject filter
The selected beams will be rejected.
The beam numbers are separated with commas.

 Beam quality filter
Reject the beams that don’t meet the quality.
The quality settings are the same for all the RESON multibeam
systems.
Quality 1 = Poor colinearity and Good brightness.
Quality 2 = Good colinearity and Poor brightness.
Quality 3 = Good colinearity and Good brightness.
 Range filter
Reject the beams outside the given range limits.

The minimum and maximum range relative to multibeam head. See
Figure 13-60 on page 327.
 Depth filter
Reject the beams outside the given depth limits.
The minimum and maximum depth relative to sea level. See Figure
13-60 on page 327.
 Angle Nadir filter
Reject the beams outside the nadir angles.
The port and starboard angle from the nadir. See Figure 13-63 on
page 328.
The angle can be defined as the angle to the detection point or as the
angle as received at the transducer (see Figure 13-64 and Figure
13-65 on page 329).
 Distance Nadir filter
Reject the beams where the distance from the nadir exceeds the given
distance limits.
The port and starboard distance from the nadir. See Figure 13-66 on
page 329.
 Slope filter
Reject the beams where the slope angle exceeds the given slope
angle.
The maximum acceptable slope angle. See Figure 13-61 on page 327.
 Intersect filter
Reject the beams where the intersection angle is smaller then the
given intersection angle.
The minimum acceptable intersection angle. See Figure 13-61 on

page 327.
 Statistic filter
Reject the beams where the statistic computation exceeds the given
settings.
The window size options are 3x3, 5x5 and 7x7 beams. See Figure
13-67 on page 330.
The strictness is from 1 (low) to 9 (high), where a setting of 1 has less
influence then a strictness of 9.
 Smart filter
Reject the beams that are outside the filter band created with the
smart filter settings. It only available when an interferometry device is
used.

A combination of the different parameters gives a band where the data
should be in. See Smart Filter on page 331 for a detailed explanation.
 Flying object filter
Reject the beams that are too high in relation to the sea bottom.
The size + border are the number of beams that will be used for the
filter. See Figure 13-62 on page 328.
 IHO error filter
Reject the beams with higher IHO errors then the selected IHO error
filter.
The IHO orders are the special order, the order 1 to 3 and NL Norm A.
See for an explanation on page 330.
 Custom error filter
Reject the beams with a higher vertical TPE as specified.
The user can enter a maximum vertical total propagation error. See for
an explanation on page 316.
With the option Swath reject a full sway will be rejected when the
percentage of rejected beams is more than the given percentage.
There are three methods to use sound velocity information in the
multibeam computation; No SV Profile, SV Profile File and SVP Sensor.
The option No SV Profile means no sound velocity profile will be used.
When the option SV Profile File is selected, a sound velocity profile can
be selected. The profile will be used in the multibeam computation.
When the option SVP Sensor is selected, the data from the sound velocity
profile sensor that is selected in the Equipment will be used in the
multibeam computation.
When sound velocity profile data is used, the option Use surface speed of
sound as first entry in the table become available. If this option is
selected, a thin layer is inserted in the sound velocity profile at the depth
of the sonar head. The inserted value is the same value as is measured
 by the sound velocity probe at the sonar head. This option is useful when
the sound velocity profile is stable and it keeps the same type of shape.
‘Rejected’ means ‘marked as rejected’. The rejected beams are always
 logged in the raw data file and not in cleaned data files. Changing the
filter settings in the Editing (see page 456) can bring back some of the
rejected beams.

13.15.9.1 Depth and Range Filter
Range
Filters Nadir
Depth
Filters
Figure 13-60 Depth and Range filters
For the depth filter the points outside the depth limits will be rejected.
For the range filter the points outside the range limits will be rejected.
13.15.9.2 Intersection and Slope Filter
Intersection
Angle Nadir
Slope Angle
Figure 13-61 Intersection and Slope filters
The intersection filter checks the enclosed angle of 3 data points against
the given minimum angle. A smaller angle then the intersection angle will
reject the middle data point of the 3 data points.
The slope filter checks the angle between two adjacent points and the
plane against the given maximum angle. When the angle is larger than
the maximum angle, the beam will be rejected.

13.15.9.3 Flying Object Filter
1 2 3 S 5 6 7 C
X
Figure 13-62 Flying Object Filter
The flying object filter will reject each beam that is too high in relation to
the sea bottom.
In the figure above the size is 4 and the border is 3. This means 4 beams
from point A to the center (point C) gives point S and then 3 beams to
both sides. This will give 7 beams to check against point A. The flying
object filter will reject point A if one of the 7 beams is further away in X
direction from the center beam (point C) then point A. In this example is
point 1 and 2 further away than point A, so point A will be rejected.
13.15.9.4 Nadir Filter
Port Starboard
Angle Nadir Angle
Figure 13-63 Port and Starboard Angle Nadir filter
The angle nadir filter checks if each beam is inside the port or starboard
angle and the nadir. Points outside the angle will be rejected.

Incidence Angle
Figure 13-64 Incidence angle
Angle to
detection point
Figure 13-65 Angle to the detection point
The incidence angle is the angle between the nadir and the received
angle at the transducer head. This is the angle on which the data is
received in the transducer head.
The angle to detection point is the angle between the nadir and the line
between the detection point on the seafloor and the transducer head. The
detection point is the point where the beam with ray-bending will hit the
seafloor.
Nadir
Port Starboard
Distance Distance
Figure 13-66 Port and Starboard Distance Nadir filter
The distance nadir filter checks if each beam is inside the port or
starboard distance and the nadir. Points further away from the nadir then
the limits will be rejected.

13.15.9.5 Statistic Filter
3x3 statistic window
sway n+1
sway n
sway n-1
point under test
depth
9 sorted depth values

quartile 0.75
median value
quartile 0.25
Figure 13-67 Statistic filter with 3x3 beams
A statistic filter checks each data point in a multibeam sway against its
surrounding data points.
Each point is surrounded by a window of points, depending on the
selection either 3x3, 5x5 or 7x7 points. The window will give 9, 25 or 49
observed depths. These values will be sorted and from the sorted points
the median value is taken. This median is used as a robust estimate for
the point under test. In case the point under test differs more than 3%
from the median value than the point is rejected immediately.
The point that passed the first test will be tested further. From the sorted
depths two quartile values are taken, at .25 and .75 from the number of
observations. The difference of those two points will be used in an
integration routine together with 9 previous (approved) differences. (10%
of each depth is taken). The result of this routine is a variation value.
The difference of the found median value and the absolute value of the
point under test are compared with a value set by the variation value and
a user definable ‘Strictness’. A strictness of 1 takes the variation value
times 10, and a strictness of 9 takes the variation value times 2. This
means that a strictness of 1 (low) has less influence than a strictness of 9
(high).
A point will be rejected when the difference between median value and
the absolute value is more than (variation value x [11 – strictness]).
The statistic filter is an acceptation filter that adjusts itself to the
 roughness of the seafloor, because of the fluctuations in the variation
values.
13.15.9.6 IHO Error Filter

Since 1957, the International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) issued the
standards of hydrographic surveys. The main issue in the standard is the
survey measurement error which should be based on the understanding
of 95% confidence levels specified for position and depth accuracies. The
new S-44 standards proposed a classification scheme for hydrographic
surveys based on the area’s importance for the safety of surface

navigation. This classification is called ‘Orders’. The orders for the IHO
error filter in PDS2000 are:
Special Order
This order is for a hydrographic survey that covers areas where ships
may need to navigate with minimum under keel clearance and where the
bottom characteristics are potentially hazardous to vessels such as
boulders or rock outcropping.
Order 1
This order is intended for surveys for harbors and general intercoastal
inland navigation channels including those approaching harbors where
vessel drafts have a greater clearance above the seafloor or where the
bottom characteristics are less hazardous (e.g silt or sand) then for a
Special Order survey area.
Order 2
This order is applicable for surveys with water depths less than 200
meters which are not covered by the criteria for the Special Order or
Order 1.
Order 3
This order is applicable for surveys with water depths greater than 200
meters.
NL Norm A
Special order made by RWS for in The Netherlands.
This order is for a hydrographic survey of harbors and fairways where
ships may need to navigate with minimum under keel clearance and
where the bottom characteristics are potentially hazardous to vessels
such as boulders or rock outcropping.
13.15.9.7 Smart Filter

The smart filter is only available as multibeam filter when an
 interferometry device is used. When a multibeam system is used the
smart filter will not be available.
 It is advisable to use next to the smart filter a statistic filter (see page 330)
to remove the major spikes.
Figure 13-68 Parameters for the smart filter
The most common settings for the smart filter parameters are:
 Reliable sector - between 8° and 40° from the nadir.
 Depth to width ratio – between 4 and 6.
 Number of averaging clips – between 10 and 50.
For specific types of seabed different values are advised.
For a sandy-flat area between 10 and 15.
For a seabed with a slope between 15 and 35.
For a seabed with ripples between 20 and 50.
 Nadir area – use the default value of 10%.
 Vertical tolerance inside reliable – between 0.03 and 0.10m.
 Vertical tolerance outside reliable – between 0.05 and 0.15m.

Figure 13-69 Multibeam QC – Raw Profile view with interferometry data
 The item Reliable sector is the reliable angle sector which is the sector
between the nadir and the reliable angle. All beams inside this sector
should be used to determine the average sway depth (ASD). In the
example above with a reliable angle sector of 30° ASD is about
10.25m.
 With the ASD and the item depth to width ratio the maximum sway
width (MSW) can be calculated. In the example the maximum sway
width will be ‘depth to width ratio’ x ASD = 4 x 10.25 = 41m.
 Starting from the nadir beam, all the beams farther away than the
MSW should be excluded from the computation. So all the beams in
the Outer area will be excluded.
 The area that is left (this is the MSW) can be divided in three other
areas; Nadir area, Reliable area and Unreliable area. A very common
distribution for the MSW is 10% for the Nadir area, 60% for the
Reliable area and 30% for the Unreliable area. The Nadir area is a
parameter of the smart filter. At the moment the distribution as
mentioned above will be used in the smart filter.
Figure 13-70 Interferometry data with the four areas
The four areas can be explained as:

 Nadir area
This area is very nasty and quite often leads to a sort of ‘railway’ effect
when combined/interpolated with data from the other transducer.
 Reliable area
All beams in this area are quite consistent and give a good result.

 Unreliable area
All beams in this area are affected by a sort of cloud effect.
 Outer area
All beams in this area are totally unreliable and mostly due to bad
reflections on the seabed. These beams should be rejected totally.
After the areas are defined, with the item Number of averaging clips (N)
the maximum sway width (MSW) can be divided in small sections
(averaging clip) with MSW / N. In the example the number of averaging
clips is set on 10, so this will give 10 averaging clips of 4.1m.
For each averaging clip an average depth will be calculated. This value
should be placed in the midpoint of each averaging clip. For the Nadir
area and the edge with the Outer area a different depth will be used.
For the averaging clips in the Nadir area the average depth can be
affected by typical interferometer nadir problems. It is then preferable to
use the average depth from the first averaging clip in the Reliable area.
For the nadir point the same average depth as for the first averaging clip
of the Reliable area will be used. For the end of the Unreliable area (the
edge with the Outer area) the depth of the last averaging clip can be
used.
Figure 13-71 Interferometry data with the averaging clips and the average
depths
Around the average depths a vertical tolerance can be defined. For the
Reliable area the tolerance can be set with the item Vertical tolerance
inside reliable and for the Unreliable area with the item Vertical tolerance
outside reliable.
With these two tolerances an offset from the average depths can be set.
The area between the two tolerances (above and below the average
depth) is the valid area. All the beams outside the tolerance areas will be
rejected by the smart filter.

Figure 13-72 Interferometry data with the tolerance areas
13.16 Multibeam Video View

The Multibeam Video view is a view that presents the multibeam data as
an image from the monitor of the RESON SeaBat system. In the view the
depth and/or range filters, which are set with the Output Control view (see
page 340), can be displayed.
Figure 13-73 Multibeam Video view of the RESON SeaBat 8125 with a depth
filter
A special frame grabber video card has to be installed in the PDS2000

computer to get the image in the view. At the moment the only card that is
supported in PDS2000 is the ‘ImageSource DFG/SV1’. The video card
will work with the DirectX version 9 or higher. The drivers for the card and
the DirectX version 9 are available on the distribution CD-Rom in the
directories ‘DFGSV1 Framegrabber Driver’ and ‘DirectX 9’.

13.16.1 Multibeam Video – Toolbar and Context
Menu
Show Toolbar
If checked, the toolbar will be shown in the view.
Layer Control ( )
In the video layer the quality of the video picture can be modified.
For the other two layers, the range filter and the depth filter, only the
color can be modified.
Properties ( )
With the option SeaBat Source the right multibeam system can be
selected if more than one RESON SeaBat is connected.
Also video overlay settings can be adjust to get a better video picture.
13.17 Numerics View

In the Acquisition two different numeric views are available:
 Numerics – Standard View (see below)
 Numerics – Sonar Targets View (see page 337)
13.17.1 Numerics – Standard View
Figure 13-74 Example of a Numerics – Standard view
A Numerics – Standard view can be filled with the information that the
user wants to see. Each view can have several pages and each page can
have a descriptive name. On the left hand side of the view are the names
of the pages and on the right hand side the items belonging to the
selected page. Both parts have their own context menu.
The first time this view is opened the user has to create a Numerics view.
Select the option New from the context menu of the left pane and create a
name for the view. In the new view, pages can be added by using the
option Add New Page from the context menu.
Each page can have several items on the right hand side. Select in the
context menu of the right pane the option Edit Page to add items to this
page. It will open a separate window where the page configuration can be
defined.
 The page can also be filled by using the ‘Drag & Drop’ method from the
Raw Data view (see page 374).

Figure 13-75 Configuration window for the Numerics – Standard view shown
above
Select a device or a computation in the tree and click on

to add this device or computation to the page layout. With
the selected device or computation can be inserted above the selected
item in the page layout.
With a separation can be inserted above the selected item
in the page layout, while with a separation can be added
below the last item in the page layout.
Select a separation and click on to add text to the separation.
With this option headers can be made between the selected items.
With an item or separation can be removed.
With the buttons and the selected element can be moved up or
down in the list.
In the Numerics – Standard view the font, the background, etc. can be
changed by selecting the option Properties in the context menu. Double
clicking on an item in the page gives also the possibility to change the
color and the font of that item.
13.17.1.1 Numerics Alarm

Through the context menu of the Numerics view an alarm can be defined
on the item in the view. Right click in the field of the item that needs an
alarm to open the context menu with the options for the alarm specific for
that item. When for the item in the Numerics view never an alarm is set
the option Define alarm can be used to set the alarm.

Figure 13-76 Alarm Definition dialog for an item in the Numerics view
Set the alarm and select which actions should be taken when an alarm
occurs. The action Blink Numerics item will start flickering the field of the
item in the Numerics view.
When the alarm is set it can be disabled again with the context menu
option Edit alarm. The same dialog as above will open and just uncheck
the option Enable Alarm.
After the alarm is disabled it can be removed with the context menu
option Remove alarm. It is also possible to leave the alarm linked to the
item and with Edit alarm the alarm can be edited and enabled again.
When this alarm is set it and the same item is set in the Numerics Layer
of the plan view, the item in the plan view will start flickering when the
alarm occurs.
13.17.2 Numerics – Sonar Targets View
Figure 13-77 Numerics – Sonar Targets view
The Numerics – Sonar Targets view is a view with a table where the
information about the created sonar targets is displayed.
The displayed sonar targets are stored in the sonar targets file as created
or selected in the Project Configuration (see page 63). The sonar targets
file name is displayed in the caption of the view; ‘Sonar Targets 4’ in the
example above.
Double click on a sonar target will open the Sonar Targets View with the
GeoTIFF image and the information which can be modified (see page
376).
The user can select in the Properties which columns have to be displayed
in the view. The Properties can be opened through the context menu.
In the context menu next to the Properties two other options are available;
delete the selected sonar target or delete all sonar targets. The delete
implement that the sonar target(s) will be deleted in the views and from
the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar target(s) the
corresponding GeoTIFF file(s) of the image of the sonar target(s) will be
deleted.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets view
on page 376.

13.18 Obstacle Avoidance
Figure 13-78 Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking view
This view is only available when as application type “Obstacle Avoidance’

and in the Equipment list the right sonar image device is selected.
The view is available for the forward looking RESON SeaBat 7K systems.
Press the left mouse button when the cursor is inside the view and the
 cursor will change to a small hand. When the left mouse button is still
pressed it is possible to pan through the view.
When a second Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking view is opened
and the user zooms in on the data then the outlines of this view will be
visible in the first Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking view.
The Act ping rate in the info layer on the left side in the view is showing
an average over at least 10 pings and 3 seconds.
13.18.1 Obstacle Avoidance – Toolbar and

Context Menu
The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Obstacle
Avoidance view are:
numerics keyboard and the With this options it is possible to zoom in and zoom out in the view.
used for the Zoom In and Zoom Extents ( )
Zoom Out. With zoom extents the complete sonar wedge will be displayed in the
view. When the Range is changed, automatically the view will be
adjusted so the complete wedge is displayed.
The option can be switched off by using the zoom in or zoom out
option.
Increase / Decrease Point Size ( , )
When the detected bottom is displayed as points, the size of the points
can be increased or decreased. The color of the points can be
modified in the Layer Control (see below).

Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view.
When the option is selected the start is always at the sonar location
and the cursor will change into four small arrows. Move the mouse
around in the view and the distance will be displayed next to the
cursor. Click on a point in the wedge and that will become the new
start point for the measurement.
Click on the option again or use the right mouse button the stop this
option.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking view can be
saved as a JPG or a BMP file.
Beam Selection ( )
Click in the wedge and the beam number with the beam coverage will
be displayed.
Grid Enable ( )
The vertical axis in the wedge and the line around the edge of the
wedge can be switched on/off.
The parameters on the left

Layer Control ( )
side are only available This will open the Layer Control of the Obstacle Avoidance – Forward
when the right Device Looking view. In the Layer Control is only one layer available.
Configuration device is In the Sonar Info Layer the color and font for the parameters displayed
added in the Equipment. on the left side in the view can be defined.
Properties ( )
This will open the Properties of the Obstacle Avoidance – Forward
Looking view.
The most important options in the Properties are:
Sonar Palette; the palette for the sonar data in the view can be
modified.
Grid Color; the color for the vertical axis and the line around the edge
of the wedge can be modified.

13.19 Output Control View
Figure 13-79 Output Control view for the RESON SeaBat 8125
An Output Control view is not a standard view which can be added

menu of the Acquisition. With this type of views the settings of a RESON
SeaBat can be controlled.
For the RESON SeaBat 8101, 8111er, 8125, 8160 and 6012 an Output
Control view is available.
 Before one of these views can be selected, the output control has to be
added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page 96).
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the right output control
add the view to the Acquisition. After the Output Control view is added the
window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays
window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
Every change of one of the slides is send directly to the control unit of the
multibeam system. Use for the range and depth filter to send the
filter settings to the control unit. With all the
settings will be send to the control unit to setup the multibeam system.
A context menu and a properties window are not available for an Output
Control view.
13.20 Pipe Lay Views

These views are only available with a dedicated dongle and in
combination with one of the applications Pipe Position Monitor or Pipe
Position Monitor J-Lay.
There are three different types of Pipe Lay views available in the
Acquisition.
 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view (see below)
 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view (see page 342)

 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view (see page 343)
13.20.1 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View

The Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view is only useful for the application Pipe
Position Monitor J-Lay. It will show the J-Lay tower with the pipe and the
criteria and the view is always perpendicular to the pipe.
Figure 13-80 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle view with the J-Lay tower, the criteria and
the pipe.

13.20.2 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View
The Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view for the application ‘Pipe Position
Monitor’ shows graphically the stinger, the rollers, the used beams and
the computed pipe.
Figure 13-81 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and
the detected pipe for the Pipe Position Monitor application
The view for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’ is completely
different. The view shows a plan view of the vessel with the J-Lay tower,
the overbend and sagbend criteria, the used beams and the computed
pipe.
Figure 13-82 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and
the detected pipe for the Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay application

13.20.3 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View
The Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view is a view where the screen of one of the
RESON SeaBat system is shown with the computed pipe position as an
overlay.
Figure 13-83 Pipe Lay – Sonar Video view with the pipe position for the Pipe
Position Monitor application
The view will be different for both application types, for the application
‘Pipe Position Monitor’ the display is from a RESON SeaBat 6012, while
for the application ‘Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay’ the display is from the
RESON SeaBat 8125.
13.21 Plan Views

A plan view is the most used view in the Acquisition. In this view a variety
of items can be shown:
 Vessel contour (in scale).
 Track of the vessel.
 Routes, runlines and waypoints.
 Coverage generated during the survey, e.g. a multibeam coverage.
 Grid model with a color table showing the depth data.
 Projection and/or geographical grid.
In the Acquisition a maximum of seven different plan views are available
and they will be explained in alphabetical order. It will depend on the
application type and dongle which plan views are available for the user.
 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars (see below)
 Plan View – Dredge Instruction (see page 345)
 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning (see page 346)
 Plan View – General Dredge Operation (see page 347)
 Plan View – Navigation (see page 348)
 Plan View – Production (see page 349)
 Plan View – Survey Coverage (see page 350)

13.21.1 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars
Figure 13-84 Plan View – Construction with 3 Bars
In this view a plan view with 3 panes (bars) are displayed. The panes can
be used to display values that are useful for the survey, like the distance
to a waypoint or the offtrack.
Use the context menu in the panes to open the Layer Control to select in
the Up Down Indicator Layer the Source Item that have to be displayed.
In the pane any value available can be monitored. Default only one item is
 displayed. It is possible to have more than one item displayed, just add for
each extra item an extra up-down indicator layer to the pane.

13.21.2 Plan View – Dredge Instruction
Figure 13-85 Plan View – Dredge Instruction with a dredge instruction
In this view the grid model, the 3D model, the dredge polygon, the
At the moment the dredge
disposal area and the historical tracks from the dredge instruction will be
instruction as a guidance is displayed.
only available for Boraciet, The Plan View – Dredge Instruction shows the location where the dredge
so also this Plan View can activity has to take place. In this view nothing has to be added, because
only be used for Boraciet.
all the relevant information is already loaded and displayed through the
dredge instruction.
When the vessel received a dredge instruction it can be selected in the
guidance as the new dredge instruction. Select from the menu bar in the
Acquisition the option Guidance > Guidance Settings or select from
the toolbar to open the Guidance window to select a new dredge
instruction.
A quick way to select a new dredge instruction is with the option
Guidance > Select Dredge Instruction… from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the Acquisition. A preview window will be opened
where all the available dredge instructions can be viewed and the new
dredge instruction can be selected.

13.21.3 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning
Figure 13-86 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning with a bull’s eye and a waypoint
The Plan View – Dynamic Positioning can be used to navigate to a

specific location that is specified as a waypoint. The bull’s eye rings are
automatically drawn around the waypoint.
At the bottom of the view useful information for the navigation will be
shown. The colors and the font size can be modified through the Dynamic
Positioning Information Layer in the Layer Control.

13.21.4 Plan View – General Dredge Operation
Figure 13-87 Plan View – General Dredge Operation with an updated grid
model
The Plan View – General Dredge Operation can be used for general
dredge operations where the active grid model will be updated
immediately after the bottom is dredged.
This view can be used in the Acquisition in conjunction with one or two
Profile – Realtime Design views (see page 366) to get a complete
monitoring of the dredge activity.

13.21.5 Plan View – Navigation
Figure 13-88 Plan View – Navigation with a C-Map layer
The Plan View – Navigation can be used for the navigation of the vessel.
For the background several options like C-Map or a DXF chart can be
used. All the options to navigate the vessel, like the different guidance
options, are available in this plan view. It is not possible to show any
survey data in this plan view.
With the view can be used as a Plan View – Dynamic Positioning (see
page 346).
The information from the C-Map background is available with the two
extra buttons ( and ). This option makes this plan view very useful
for a buoy laying vessel.
In the Plan View – Navigation an image layer of the wedge of a forward
looking sonar can be added. In this wedge sonar targets can be selected.

13.21.6 Plan View – Production
Figure 13-89 Plan View – Production with a production grid model
The Plan View - Production can be used to show the production with a
production grid model. This production grid model is the grid model that is
selected in the Logging page of the vessel configuration with the file
format ‘Production Format’ (see page 116).
The display and the options of the view are similar to the Plan View –
Survey Coverage (see below).

13.21.7 Plan View – Survey Coverage
Figure 13-90 Plan View – Survey Coverage with an active grid model
The Plan View – Survey Coverage can be used to show the update of the
grid model. This grid model is the grid model that is selected in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration for the file format ‘PDS2000 Grid
Model’ (see page 116).
In this plan view the coverage of the survey can be shown, not only for a
multibeam survey but also for a single beam survey.
 The Plan View – Survey Coverage can be used to display the sonar
targets as created in this view or in the Sonar Views.
13.21.8 Plan View – Toolbar and Context Menu

Most of the buttons in the toolbars are for all the plan views identical.
Some are only for one or two views available. The context menus of the
plan views have similarity, but some options are only available in one or
two views.
Below all the options that appear in one of the context menus or toolbars
will be discussed.
The + and – key of the Zoom Functions ( , , , )
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents. The zoom
mouse wheel can also be window option works only when Follow Vessel is off. The Zoom
used for the Zoom In and
Zoom Out.
Extents is only available in the Plan View – Dredge Instruction.

Pan ( )
button.
Redraw
Redraw the plan view.
Measure ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing in the plan view. On the first use
the measure starts at the vessel’s tracking point. With a mouse click
the start of the measurement can be at any location in the view. The
measure window shows start and end coordinates as well as distance
and bearing between the two locations.
Figure 13-91 Measure window in the plan views
Click on to change the presentation from grid to latitude and

longitude coordinates in a selectable format. Select in the project
configuration for local or satellite coordinates (see page 62).
Click on to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Measure Relative Vessel ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing from the vessel to a selected
point in the plan view.
Figure 13-92 Measure Relative Vessel window

Measure Line Relative
To measure a distance to the start and end of a line and the offtrack to
that line. Draw a line by selecting a start and end point of the line with
the left mouse button. The measure window shows start and end
coordinates and the coordinates of the current location of the cursor.
Also the distance from the cursor to the start and end point of the line
and the offtrack is given.
Figure 13-93 Measure Relative window

Click on or to change the distance unit.

Save Snapshot
The picture of the plan view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Save as GeoTiff
The picture of the plan view will be saved as a GeoTIFF file (geo-
referenced TIFF file). The file is compressed with the compression
LZW.
Draw a box around an area in the active grid model and the area will
be saved as a sonar target.
selected.
becomes available for that sonar target. A right mouse click on or in
the symbol gives some extra options. For more information see page
355.
This option is available in the Plan View – Survey Coverage and Plan
View – Navigation. In the Plan View – Survey Coverage the active grid
model is used to detect the sonar targets.
Delete All Sonar Targets
All the sonar targets from the active sonar targets file will be deleted in
the views and from the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar
targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images of the sonar
targets will be deleted.
This option is only available in the Plan View – Survey Coverage and
Plan View – Navigation.
Add Icon Image
This option is only The cursor will change to a cross and the user has to select a position
available in the Plan View in the Plan View where an icon will be placed. When the position is
– Survey Coverage and selected the user has to select an image (BMP or JPG) that will be
Plan View – Navigation. linked to that position. The icon image will be stored in the active icon
image file that is selected in the Project Configuration (see page 64).
Add Waypoint
Click with the mouse on the location where a waypoint has to be
added, give a name for the waypoint and automatically a wayline is
drawn from the vessel to the new waypoint.
Add Waypoint Line Relative
Click with the mouse on the location where the waypoint has to be
added, give a name for the waypoint and automatically a wayline is
drawn from the vessel to the new waypoint.
Add Runline
Draw a new runline in the plan view and the new runline becomes the
active runline.
Add Symbol
A C-Map object can be added to the plan view, only possible when a
C-Map layer is added in the Layer Control.
Select an object and its attributes from the list. Select with the cross-
shaped cursor the location for the new object.
A right mouse click stops the select location option.
Find Symbol
Search for a C-Map object in the plan view.

Figure 13-94 Find C-Map object in the plan view
If the C-Map object is found, an information window will be opened.

Draw Route
Draw with the mouse a route in the plan view. A right mouse click will
stop the drawing of the route.
Draw Polygon
Draw with the mouse a polygon in the plan view. A right mouse click
will close the polygon.
Draw Profile
Draw with the mouse a route in the plan view. A right mouse click will
stop the drawing the route and a Profile – Grid Model view will be
opened with a profile over the drawn route (see page 364).
Follow Vessel ( )
If checked, the vessel will be always in the center of the plan view (in
‘Follow Vessel’ mode). If unchecked, the vessel can be anywhere in
the plan view, even outside the plan view.
The type of ‘Follow Vessel’ mode can be set in the properties of the
plan view (see page 359).
Select Symbol ( )
The cursor is changes in the question mark. Select a C-Map object
and the C-MAP Object Information window will be opened. In this
window information about the selected object is available.
Figure 13-95 C-MAP Object Information window with a radio calling point
Set Waypoint on Symbol ( )

The cursor will change in a cross with a small circle in the middle.
Select a C-Map symbol with the circle of the cross. The symbol
becomes the active waypoint and a wayline from the vessel location to
the symbol is drawn.

DP Mode ( )
The DP mode is available in the Plan View – Navigation and in the
Plan View – Dredge Instruction. With this option the view will be
changed to the Plan View – Dynamic Positioning.
The option becomes available when a waypoint is selected as
guidance.
Auto Ranging ( )
If active, the view is in ‘True Motion’ with the waypoint in the center. It
will depend on the ‘Minimum Auto Ranging Distance’ in the properties
of the Plan View – Dynamic Positioning how far the view will zoom in.
This option is also available in the DP mode of the Plan View –
Navigation and Plan View – Dredge Instruction nog(see above).
The option becomes available when a waypoint is selected as
guidance.
Orientation Mode ( )
The orientation mode of the plan view. Three options are available:
North Up, Heading Up and Fixed Skew.
With North Up the plan view is always north up and the vessel will
rotate in the plan view.
With Heading Up the heading of the vessel is always up, is pointing to
the top of the view. All the data will rotate accept the vessel.
With Fixed Skew the plan view has a fixed orientation. The fixed skew
value can be set so that the vessel is always looking up with a
fluctuation to the left and right. The orientation of the data in the plan
view is steady and the vessel will rotate.
Set Fixed Skew From Heading ( )
Click on this item in the context menu or on the button in the toolbar
and the actual heading of the vessel will become the orientation of the
plan view. To activate this orientation select as orientation mode Fixed
Skew and the just selected orientation is fixed.
Interactive Selection ( )
If checked, it is possible to select items in the plan view with the
mouse.
Edit Mode ( )
If checked, it is possible to modify the routes and clipping polygons
and to add or edit the user maps objects. See below for a detailed
explanation of the user maps and the edit option.
Undo ( )
Will reverse the last action done in the edit mode.
Redo ( )
Only active after an Undo and will reverse the last undo action of the
edit mode.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
on/off.
Grid Model Color Mode ( )
In the view different grid model color modes can be displayed:
if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
The settings of the grid model in the plan view (see page 361).
Edit Alarm ( )
For the items as set in the Numerics Layer of the Plan View an alarm

can be defined or edit. First a Numerics Layer has to be created with
the item selected.
This option will open a dialog in which an alarm can be added, edited
or removed.
See for information about the alarms also the Numerics view on page
336.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the used background and foreground layers in the
plan view (see page 358).
Properties ( )
The properties of the plan view with some extra settings for the ‘Follow
Vessel’ option (see page 359).
13.21.8.1 Sonar Target Options in Plan Views

When a sonar target is created the symbol gets a context menu with
several options specific for that sonar target. With a right mouse click in or
on the symbol the options becomes available.
Classification
The classification list can The type of sonar target can be defined, select one of the options that
be modified in the Project are available. If no option match with the sonar target enter a
Configuration (see page classification in the table of the Sonar Targets view (see page 376).
63). Symbol
Select a symbol that will be placed on the location of the sonar target.
Delete Sonar Target
The selected sonar target will be deleted from the sonar target file and
the GeoTIFF file of the sonar target will also be deleted.
Edit Sonar Target
The Sonar Targets view of the selected sonar target will pop up and
the information can be edited in the table of the Sonar Targets view
(see page 376).
Set New Sonar Target Position
Select this option when the location of the sonar target in the Sonar
View has to be modified.
Draw a new box around the right location of the sonar target and the
symbol will be moved to the new location. The new location will be
updated in the table of the Sonar Targets view.
13.21.8.2 User Maps

In all the plan views the user maps objects, routes and clipping polygons
can be edited. Select the Edit Mode ( ) and the routes and clipping
polygons can be edit.
Figure 13-96 Context menu in the Edit Mode and without user maps
Click on the active route or clipping polygon and the route or clipping
polygon can be edited. The way of editing the route or clipping polygon
will be identical as editing an object of the user maps (see below).
Before the user maps object can be viewed, added and/or edited, the
User Map Layer has to be added in the Layers window. If a file with user
maps objects exists, it can be selected in the properties of the layer.

Figure 13-97 Context menu in the Edit Mode with the user maps options
After one of the user maps options is selected the cursor will change in a
cross. With the cross the location(s) for the user map object can be set in
the view. The way the different objects can be drawn will be explained
below.
Line
Click with the left mouse button on the locations for the line. Click on
the right mouse button to accept and finish the drawing of the line.
Rectangle
A rectangle can be drawn by selecting two opposite corners of the
rectangle with the left mouse button.
Polygon
Click with the left mouse button on the locations for the polygon. Click
on the right mouse button to accept and finish the drawing of the
polygon.
Circle
The circle can be drawn by selecting the center point and a point on
the circle with the left mouse button.
Text
Click with the left mouse button on the location where the text has to
be located and enter in the Name dialog the text.
Symbol
Click with the left mouse button on the location where the symbol has
to be placed and select a symbol from the list in the Select User
Symbol window.
For each selected symbol a symbol text can be entered. For the
symbol ‘Obstruction’ also the least depth can be entered. The text will
be displayed next to the symbol and the least depth in the symbol.
Figure 13-98 Select a symbol from the list in the Select User Symbol
window

The user maps objects, the routes or the clipping polygons can be edited
by double clicking with the left mouse button on the object. The object
becomes active and the cursor change in .
The active object can be moved by selecting the object and keep the left
mouse button down. Move the object to the new location and release the
left mouse button.
This option is not possible The other option with the edit mode is modifying the objects by moving
for the user maps objects one or more points. Select one of the points of the object and keep the left
Text and Symbol. mouse button down. Move the point to the new location and release the
left mouse button. After editing the object the context menu gives the
following options.
Figure 13-99 Context menu after editing or selecting an object
Redo
Only available after an Undo and this option will reverse the last undo
action.
Undo
Reverse the last action.
Insert Point
Insert on the cursor location a point to the object. This is only available
for the Line and Polygon and also for the active route and the active
clipping polygon.
Delete Point
The point that is selected with the cursor will be deleted from the
object. This is only available for the Line and Polygon and also for the
active route and the active clipping polygon.
Delete
The edit mode for the active user map object will be closed and the
active user map object will be deleted. This is not possible for the
active route and the active clipping polygon.
Save
The edit mode for the active object will be closed and the changes
made in the object will be saved.
Cancel
The edit mode for the active object will be closed and the changes
made in the object will not be saved.

13.21.9 Plan View – Layer Control
In the Layers Control of the plan views all the necessary information can
be added to the view. In the Layers window are two groups of layers,
background and foreground layers. Only the layers that are used in the
plan view are shown in the Layers window.
Figure 13-100 Layers window for one of the plan views
With new layers from the Add Layer window can be added to the
list of used layers in the plan view.
The layers are the items that are shown in the plan view, e.g. Run Lines,
Grid Model and Color Table. In the window the layers can be switched on
or off by checking or unchecking the specific entry of the layer.
Click on or double click on the selected entry to open the
properties of the selected entry. The properties are different for each layer
and the attributes in the properties can be for example file selections, line
styles, colors and computation selection.
The layer order can be changed by using and . The layer on top of
the layer window will be drawn first. The layers lower in the list will be
drawn on top of the layers that are above it in the list. If some information
in a layer is important and have to be shown in the plan view, move that
layer as far down as possible with the down arrow.
The entries in the ‘Active’ layers cannot be removed by the user. Most of
these active layers are linked to the selection in the Logging page (see
page 116) or the Guidance page (see page 131) of the vessel
configuration. For example, the layer Active Route Layer gives the route
that is selected in the Guidance page.
A special layer in the Layer Control is the AIS Layer. This layer will only
be available when in the Equipment a device driver from the group
Automatic Identification System is added to the equipment list. The
Automatic Identification System (AIS) is a short range coastal tracking
system used on ships and by Vessel Traffic Services (VTS) for identifying
and locating vessels by electronically exchanging data with other nearby
ships and VTS stations. Information such as unique identification,
position, course, and speed can be displayed in the plan view.

13.21.10 Plan View – Properties
Figure 13-101 Properties window for most of the plan views
In the Properties window the ‘Follow Vessel’ mode and the Off-Center
option can be defined. These options are not available in the Plan View –
Dynamic Positioning view.
It is also possible to enter manually a fixed skew value for the orientation
of the plan view.
Below the relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Follow Vessel
The ‘Follow Vessel’ mode can be switched on and off.
Position Source
Any position source or position computation can be selected as
‘tracking point’ on the vessel for the follow vessel mode.
Follow Mode
The follow mode is by default Relative Motion; the vessel is always
displayed in the center of the view. Another option for the follow
mode is True Motion; the vessel will not stay in the center but the
view will update when the vessel is nearly leaving the view.
Vessel Radius
Vessel radius is the minimum distance from the vessel to the
edge of the view.
When the vessel comes in the minimum distance from the edge
of the view and with the follow mode on True Motion, the view
will be updated and the vessel will be placed in the center of the
view.
The vessel radius can also be used in combination with the off-
center (see below).
Off-Center
When the follow mode is set on Relative Motion the vessel can be
displayed out of the center of the view.
This option can be used when the user wants to look forwards for

more than a half view. Enter a negative percentage and the vessel
will be moved backwards in the view (the data moves with the
vessel).
When for instance the user wants to see more multibeam data
behind the vessel enter then a positive percentage.
With the vessel radius the distance from the edge of the view can
be defined. With a vessel radius of 0 and -100% or +100% for the
off-center the vessel is placed on the edge of the view.
Figure 13-102 Plan View with an off-center of -100% (left) and +100%
(right) with a vessel radius of 10
Orientation Mode
One of the three modes can be selected; North Up, Heading Up or
Fixed Skew (see page 354).
Fixed Skew value
A skew for the plan view can be entered. This is only valid when
the orientation mode is set on Fixed Skew.

13.21.11 Coverage Settings
Click on in the toolbar or select Coverage Settings in the context
menu of most of the plan views to open the Coverage Settings window.
Figure 13-103 Coverage Settings window for the plan views
In the Coverage Settings window the color table for only the Z values (Z
Average, Z Minimum and Z Maximum) of the active grid model can be
selected. Also for the active grid model difference the color table can be
selected. Through this window it is easy to switch between the two grid
models and also easy to change a color table. The settings in the relevant
layers will be updated automatically.
The color tables for the other data types are automatically generated by
PDS2000 when the data type is selected through the grid model color
mode ( ).
If the active grid model has to be shown in the plan view, check the option
Grid Model at the top of the window.
Next to the color table, the sun illumination can be set. This will work only
for the active grid model and not for the grid model difference.
The sun illumination for a 2D grid model works similar as the spotlight
option in the 3D views. Move the yellow dot in the circle to set the azimuth
and the elevation. With the contrast bar the contrast can be set. It is also
possible to set all three the items manually. Check the option Enabled to
make the sun illumination active.
The sun illumination will not work directly when the yellow dot is moved.
 Click on or to start the calculation of the sun illumination.

It can take some seconds before the sun illumination is updated. This will
depend on the size of the grid model and the computer speed.

The logging of the data in the grid model is always relative to Chart
Datum, but when the option Relative Sea Level is selected the data of the
 grid model shown in the Plan View is then relative to sea level. It is pure a
visualization, it will not be logged. The information for relative sea level
will be extracted from the tidal information or, when RTK is used, from the
 computed tide. When computed tide is used the sea level offset has to be
defined in the Geometry page (see page 93).
If an active grid model difference is available in the plan view and instead
of the active grid model an active grid model difference has to be shown,
check the option Difference. Select the right color table to present the
differences.
 The grid model difference is computed with the data type that is selected
for the grid model.
Check the option Show color table if the color table has to be displayed at
the right side in the plan view. Can also be switch on/off with the option
Show Color Table ( ).
If multibeam data is available, check the option Show multibeam profiles
to show the data of the multibeam system. This is only valid for the Plan
View – Survey Coverage view and the Plan View – Production view.
13.22 Positioning System XY – Manual Input View

A Positioning System XY – Manual Input view is not a standard view
which can be added through the Displays window or the Add Display
option in the context menu of the Acquisition. With this view a manual
input for the position in Easting and Northing can be given.
This view is different from the standard manual input. In this view the
primary data source for the position can be selected and an average of
the primary position can be used as position. When the vessel or crane is
not moving while the position in PDS2000 is moving due to an unstable
positioning system then the vessel or crane can be fixed in the view by
using the manual position or an average of the primary position.
When the position height is unstable next to the height of the position
source, a depth sensor or the height of the grid model can be used.
For the position of the tool a position can be entered or selected with the
mouse or as a waypoint.
Before the view can be selected, a manual input device for the positioning
 system (XY) has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page
(see page 96).
Select in Acquisition the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu
bar to add the Positioning System XY – Manual Input view. Select the
right device control in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and
click on to add the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added
the window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the
Displays window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
Figure 13-104 Positioning System XY – Manual Input view

Position Selection
Next to the manual input a standard positioning system should be
selected in the Equipment list. The standard positioning system should
be the primary positioning system and the manual input the secondary.
Positioning system Geogs(1)
As positioning system the primary positioning system will be used.
Average Positioning system
To make the unstable primary position more stable an average of
the primary position can be used.
Enter the period over which the average has to be calculated.
Manual Position
As positioning system the manual position as given in this view will
be used. Before the manual input can be used, a manual position
has to be set.
Height Selection
Next to the height from the position system a depth sensor on the tool
or the height of the grid model can be used.
Manual Position Reference Point
There are two different ways to set a manual position.
The first method is that for the Easting, Northing and Height manually
a value can be entered.
For the second method the position selection should be set on
Positioning system Geogs(1). Click on the button Set from Position to
set the actual primary position as manual position.
Manual Position From Tool
Select which position on the tool should be used by selecting one of
the location on the tool.
The position can be set entered manually with the button Enter
Position or can be selected.
Click on and select in a Plan View or 3D View a location
that will be used as the position of the tool.
Click on and select one of the existing waypoints as the
new position of the tool.
Click on and the position will be saved as a waypoint.
13.23 Profile Views

In the Acquisition ten different profile views are available and they will be
explained in alphabetical order.
 Profile – Grid Model view (see below)
 Profile – Multibeam view (see page 364)
 Profile – Projected Runline view (see page 365)
 Profile – Realtime Design view (see page 366)
 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view (see page 367)
 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen view (see page 367)
 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view (see page 368)
 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view (see page 369)
 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view (see page 369)
 Profile – Sound Velocity view (see page 370)

13.23.1 Profile – Grid Model View
Figure 13-105 Profile – Grid Model view derived from the ‘Draw Profile’ option in
the plan view
The Profile – Grid Model view shows a profile over a route or runline. The
profile can be from a grid model or from a design model.
The profile view is not an active view; the data will not be updated.
Therefore it will only be used in combination with the option Draw Profile
from the context menu of the Plan View – Survey Coverage, the Plan
View – Production or the Plan View – General Dredge Operation (see
page 353).
If the view is closed it will disappear from the list in the Displays window.
If the Profile – Grid Model view is added to the Acquisition through the
 Displays window or with Add Display in the context menu, it will stay
empty.
13.23.2 Profile – Multibeam View
Figure 13-106 Profile – Multibeam view with an active grid model profile
The Profile – Multibeam view can be used to compare the multibeam data
or the scanning profiler data online with a (active) 3D design model profile
or a (active) grid model profile.
When this profile view is created the active grid model profile layer and
active design model profile layer are already set. The active grid model
profile can be compared with the (active) design model profile if the
quality of the multibeam data is not so good.

13.23.3 Profile – Projected Runline View
Figure 13-107 Profile – Projected Runline view with a profile
The Profile – Projected Runline view gives information on the currently

measured depth from a multibeam or a single beam echo sounder over a
runline. As reference a profile from a grid model and/or a design model
can be added to the view.
If a single beam echo sounder is selected in the profile view an extra
 option, Singlebeam Filter Settings, is added to the context menu. This
option allows changing the settings of the echo sounder filters.
Select the option Singlebeam Filter Settings in the context menu, select
as data the ‘Reduced depths’ of the echo sounder and a dialog window
will be opened to set the filters.
Figure 13-108 Single beam echo sounder filters
The depths rejected by the filters will have a different color in the profile
view. The rejected depths are always logged in the raw data files, but not
in the cleaned data files.

13.23.4 Profile – Realtime Design View
Figure 13-109 Profile – Realtime Design view with a right view of a suction
hopper and the design difference as up/down indicator
The Profile – Realtime Design view can be used for a dredge application
to show the vessel with a drag head and the grid model and/or design
model. The view can be from the left, the right, the front or the back side
of the vessel.
The profile view can also be used in the (rope) excavator application to
show the (rope) excavator with grab or bucket and the grid model and/or
design model.
In the up/down indicator pane any value available can be monitored.
 Default only one item is displayed. It is possible to have more than one
item displayed, just add for each extra item an extra up-down indicator
layer to the up/down indicator pane.
Figure 13-110 Profile – Realtime Design view with a left and a back view for an
excavator

13.23.5 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View
Figure 13-111 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view with a design model
The Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars view can be used if more than one
indicator is needed in the profile view. In this example the left and right
indicator display the height of the left and right side of the structure above
the design model. The bottom indicator displays the difference between
the two other indicators.
If in a Profile – Realtime Design view two indicators are necessary, for
instance the absolute depth and the height above the design model, then
this profile view can be used. The bottom indicator can be slide away from
the view if necessary.
13.23.6 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen

View
Figure 13-112 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen with an active grid model, an
active design model, dredge limits and level contacts

The Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen view is almost identical with the
Profile – Realtime Design view (see page 366). The toolbar, the
properties and the layers in this profile view are identical; the only
difference is that this profile view has an option to show the two level
contacts from the engine control.
By default the level contacts will be displayed with a default color. In the
The level contacts and the properties of the Active Design Model Profile Layer the level contacts can
tab Control are special be switched on/off and the color can be changed. The values for the level
made and therefore only
available for one specific
contacts have to be set in the Tools Settings. Select Tools > Tools
client. Settings in the menu bar of the Acquisition and add in the tab Control
values for the level contact 1 and 2.
13.23.7 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View
Figure 13-113 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view with a grid model and a
design model
The Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view is a specialized version of the

Profile – Realtime Design view (see page 366) and can be used for the
cutter dredger. The line of the profile is in this view an arc with the spud
position as center and the horizontal distance from spud to cutter head as
a radius.

13.23.8 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View
Figure 13-114 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view with a top and side view of
the trailing suction hopper with a drag head
The Profile – Realtime Design Pipe view can be used for a trailing suction
hopper application to show the vessel with a drag head in a top and in a
side view.
The top view is a basic plan view where the relation between the heading
of the drag head and the suction hopper can be displayed.
The side view is identical with the Profile – Realtime Design view (see
page 366).
13.23.9 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical

View
Figure 13-115 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view with a top and side
view of the trailing suction hopper with a drag head
The Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view can be used for a trailing
suction hopper application to show the vessel with a drag head in a top
and in a side view and is identical with the Profile – Realtime Design Pipe
view (see above).
The top view is a basic plan view where the relation between the heading
of the drag head and the suction hopper can be displayed.
The side view is identical with the Profile – Realtime Design view (see
page 366).

13.23.10 Profile – Sound Velocity View
Figure 13-116 Profile – Sound Velocity view of the active sound velocity profile
The Profile – Sound Velocity view is not an active view; it will not update
the sound velocity profile in the Acquisition. It shows the selected sound
velocity profile that is used to correct the depth readings of the multibeam.
13.23.11 Profile – Toolbar and Context Menu

Most of the buttons in the toolbars are identical for all of the profile views,
except the projected runline. Some buttons are only available in one or
two profile views.
The context menus of the profile views are nearly identical. Below all the
options in the context menus will be discussed.
numerics keyboard can Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents. The zoom
also be used for the Zoom window will only work when Follow Vessel is off.
In and Zoom Out.
Horizontal Zoom In, Horizontal Zoom Out ( , )
The display can be zoomed in and out only in the horizontal direction
of the view. These two options are only available when in the
properties of the profile view the option Scale Mode is set on Fixed
Vertically or on Scale Freely (see page 372).
Vertical Zoom In, Vertical Zoom Out ( , )
The display can be zoomed in and out only in the vertical direction of
the view. These two options are only available when in the properties
of the profile view the option Scale Mode is set on Fixed Horizontally
or on Scale Freely (see page 372).

Pan ( )
button.
Redraw
Redraw the profile view.
Vertical Auto Ranging ( )
If checked, a vertical zoom extents is active. This option is only
available in the Realtime Design Profile views.
Follow vessel ( )
If checked, the attach point selected in the properties of the Realtime
Design Profile views will always be located in the center of the view.
In the Profile – Multibeam view the nadir depth will be displayed in the
center of the view if the option is checked.
Save Snapshot ( )
The picture of the Profile – Multibeam view can be saved as a JPG or
BMP file.
Print Snapshot ( )
The picture of the Profile – Multibeam view can be printed.
Singlebeam Filter Settings
This option is only available in the Profile – Projected Runline view
when a single beam data channel is selected.
Through this option three filter settings can be set (see Figure 13-108
on page 365).
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the used background and foreground layers in the
profile view. New layers can be added to the used list.
Properties ( )
The properties of the profile view. In most Properties windows the
‘Scale Mode’ can be set (see below).

13.23.12 Profile – Properties
Figure 13-117 Properties for the Profile – Realtime Design view
The three of the four Profile – Realtime Design views have the same
Properties window, only the Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view has
less items. Some of the items are available for the Profile – Grid Model
view, Profile – Multibeam view and Profile – Sound Velocity view. The
Profile – Projected Runline view has different properties to define the
graph display.
The most relevant items in the Properties window of the profile views will
be explained below.
Follow Vessel
If Enabled, the selected attach point will always be in the center of the
view. For the Profile – Multibeam view the center beam will be in the
center.
Position Source
Any position source or position computation can be selected as
‘tracking point’ on the vessel for the follow vessel mode.
For the Profile – Realtime Design view, the Profile – Realtime Design 3
 Bars view and the Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen view the
position source has to be Drag-head Absolute Position.
For the Profile – Realtime Design Cutter view the position source has
to be Cutter Absolute Position Computation.
For the Profile – Multibeam view the position source has to be
Multibeam xyz computation.
Attach To
The position source can be attached to the Dredge Point or the Sensor
Reference Point.
Vertical Auto Ranging
If Enabled, a vertical zoom extents will be active.
Scale Mode
The display of the profile view has different scaling options; Fixed
Aspect Ratio, Fixed Vertically, Fixed Horizontally and Scale Freely.

Aspect Ratio
The ratio between the horizontal and vertical scale used in the profile
view.
13.24 Raw Data View
Figure 13-118 Raw Data view of the Multibeam xyz computation
The Raw Data view has in the left pane the tree with all the sensors, the
computations and the data sources. In the right pane the data of the
selected item as it is received from the sensor or is calculated in the
computation.
If there are no problems with the data all the items have the sign . If the
connection is lost the last data will still be shown in the view, but the sign
before ‘Data Buffer’ will change to . Also the Alerts view (see page 278)
will appear on the screen with the alarm messages. If the received data is
corrupted the sign for the ‘Data Buffer’ becomes and for all the items
the sign becomes . If some of the data items have the sign then that
data is not received or cannot be calculated.
The right hand side has a context menu with the options Properties and
Statistics. With the option Statistics the user can collect data over a self
defined period and it will calculate the mean, the standard deviation, the
minimum and the maximum of that collected data.
Only possible when the Double click on a data item on the left hand side will open the Properties
logging is switched off window of that data item. This Properties window is the same window as
in the Equipment page or Computation page of the vessel configuration.

13.24.1 Drag & Drop
The data items from a Raw Data view can be moved with the ‘Drag &
Drop’ method to a Numerics – Standard view (see page 335) or to a Time
Series view (see page 387). Select a data item and if the font of the text
becomes italic it is possible to drag this data item to the Numerics view or
to the Time Series view.
Figure 13-119 Data item ‘GPS mode’ can be moved with the ‘Drag & Drop’
method
13.25 Scatterplot View
Figure 13-120 Scatterplot view
The Scatterplot view can be used for position comparison between a

reference position and a computed position, which can be a position
device or a position computation. On the right top of the Scatterplot view a
bull’s eye display presents the x and y values and on the right bottom the
z value is displayed on the vertical axis.
Click on to open the Reference Point window to enter or select the
reference position.

Figure 13-121 Reference Point window to enter or select the reference position
There will be three ways to enter a reference point for the Scatterplot
view:
1. The reference point can be entered manually in the fields ‘Ref. x’, ‘Ref.
y’ and ‘Ref. z’.
2. Click on to select the current position as the reference point.
3. With a double click on one of the available waypoints in the list the
selected waypoint becomes the reference point.
With ‘Tolerance 1’ and Tolerance 2’ tolerance circles will be drawn around
the reference point. They become visible as red circles in the bull’s eye
display.
The left side of the Scatterplot view has the following fields:
Reference x, y, z
The entered reference position.
Current x, y, z
The currently computed position.
Diff x, y
The difference between the reference position and the current position.
Average x, y, z
The average of the computed position.
DRMS
The Distance Root Mean Square value of the computed position. This
value is the radius of a circle into which the position will fall with a 68%
probability. Only useful for a stationary position.
Average diff x, y, z
The average of the difference between the reference position and the
computed position.
Sample no.
The number of current samples. If the option Limit is checked and a
value is entered the number of samples will stop when this limit value
is reached.
Bull’s eye
If checked, the bull’s eye circle will be displayed in the right top
display. The interval and number of circles depends on the scale in the
display.
Tolerance circles
If checked, the tolerance circles in red will be displayed in the right top
display.
DRMS circle
If checked, the DRMS circle as a dashed line will be displayed in the
right top display.

One item in the properties ( ) can be useful for the display of the
computed position, Track Buffer Length. The computed positions are
shown as crosses in the display and the option Track Buffer Length sets
the number of crosses that will be displayed in both displays.
13.26 Sonar Targets View

The Sonar Targets view is a view that will be created for each sonar
target that is created. The view is a type of plan view with as extra a sonar
target info table.
In the caption of the Sonar Targets view is visible in which view (Sonar
View – Snippets, Sonar View – Sidescan or Plan View – Survey
Coverage) the sonar target is created.
Figure 13-122 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three
different views
When in the Sonar View – Snippets or Sonar View – Sidescan a box is

drawn around a target (see page 380), a picture of that target will be
created as a GeoTIFF. Because this GeoTIFF is geo-referenced the
picture will have a different shape and orientation than the original box
drawn in the view.
When in the Plan View – Survey Coverage a box a drawn (see page 352),
a part of the grid model around the drawn box will be used to generate the
GeoTIFF of the grid model. This picture is always north up filled with grid
model data.
The Sonar target info displayed below the view can be modified by the
user. The items Name, Classification, Length, Width, Height and
Description can be set, the other items are fixed or are calculated when
the target is created.

Click on the field right of one of these items and enter the text or value.
For the Length, Width and Height the button ( ) in the toolbar of the
view can be used to do an exact measurement (see below). The
Classification can also be defined in the context menu of the sonar target;
see for more information the sonar targets option in the Sonar Views (see
page 381).
When the Acquisition is After items are modified click on to save the modifications to the
closed, a dialog pops up to sonar target file as mentioned as first item in the table. The name of the
ask to save the changes sonar target file can be set in the Project Configuration (see page 63).
when this is not done yet.
Click on to delete the sonar target from the sonar target file. A
sonar target can also be deleted with the option in the context menu of
the sonar target. All the sonar targets can be deleted in the context menu.
 All collected sonar targets will be saved in the selected sonar targets file,
which is available in the Sonar Targets Database of the Explorer (see
page 248). The corresponding GeoTIFF files are also stored in the Sonar
 Targets Database of the Explorer.
At the moment a set of sonar targets consist of one or more sonar targets
 files and all the corresponding GeoTIFF files. Don’t forget to copy the
GeoTIFF files when a copy is made of the sonar targets. When no
GeoTIFF files are available no picture is available anymore.
13.26.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and

Context Menu
The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Sonar Targets
view are:
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
used for the Zoom In and Pan ( )
Zoom Out. Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button.
Measure ( )
Figure 13-123 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view


Measure Object LWH ( )
This option is to measure the Length, Width and Height of the object in
the sonar target GeoTIFF as displayed in the view.
By default the option is set on Disabled, so no measurement can be
done. Select one of the options Length, Width or Height and the cursor
will change to a cross. With a mouse click the measurement can be
started, click again to stop the measurement. The measured distance
is entered in the table below the view. With a right mouse click the
options can be stopped (or use the option Disabled).
Layer Control ( )
The raster layer and grid layer are available in the Layer Control.
Properties ( )
In the Properties the background color can be modified.
13.27 Sonar Views

In the Acquisition are three different Sonar views available:
 Sonar – Sidescan view (see below)
 Sonar – Snippets view (see page 379)
 Sonar – Bathy view (see page 381)
13.27.1 Sonar – Sidescan View
Figure 13-124 Sonar – Sidescan view with for color palette rust and gray
For information about the toolbar and context menu of the Sonar –
Sidescan view see Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu on page 379.

13.27.2 Sonar – Snippets View
Figure 13-125 Sonar – Snippets view with for color palette rust and gray
For information about the toolbar and context menu of the Sonar –
Snippets view see below Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu.
13.27.3 Sonar – Toolbar and Context Menu

These are the items in the toolbars and in the context menus of the Sonar
– Sidescan view and the Sonar – Snippets view:
numerics keyboard can Zoom in and out in the view.
also be used for the Zoom
In and Zoom Out. Brightness ( , )
Increase (lighter) and Decrease (darker) the Threshold.
Contrast ( , )
Increase and Decrease the Gain.
TVG ( , )
Increase and Decrease the TVG (see page 380).
Auto Scaling ( )
Toggles between Auto Scaling Off (Out) and On (In) (see page 380).
Lambert’s Law Corrected ( )
Toggles between a Lambert’s Law correction Off (Out) and On (In)
(see page 381).
Ping Selection ( )
Select one of the four pings or all the pings to be displayed in the view.
Lines/Dots ( )
Toggles between Dot view (Out) and Line view (In).
Speed Correction ( )
Toggles between Speed Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see page
380).

Invert Colors ( )
Toggles between a black background (Out) and a white background
(In).
Slant Range Correction ( )
Toggles between Slant Range Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see
page 381).
Save Snapshot ( )
Save the display as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw a box around an area in the view that has to be saved as a sonar
target.
selected.
becomes available for that sonar target. With a right mouse click on or
in the symbol gives some extra options. See ‘Sonar Targets Options in
Sonar Views’ on page 381.
See the Sonar Targets view on page 376 for more information.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the foreground layers in the sonar views. By default
the Active Sonar Targets Layer is present and at the moment the only
layer(s) that can be added are the Sonar Targets Layer.
Properties ( )
The above-mentioned settings in the view.
The color palette can be set to rust or gray.
 If the colors are inverted with

and are also inverted.
, the functions of the buttons ,
13.27.3.1 TVG
The Time Varied Gain applies a variable gain to the sonar data. The TVG
can make the color difference smaller or bigger between the data near to
the sonar and the data further away.
For example: If is out, increasing the TVG makes the data further
away lighter than the data near the sonar.
13.27.3.2 Auto Scaling

The auto scaling calculates the best settings for the contrast, the
brightness and the TVG for displaying the sonar data. The auto scaling
refresh rate is the period after which a new calculation of the settings take
place. This auto scaling refresh rate can be set in the properties.
13.27.3.3 Speed Correction

A speed correction to the display is necessary to compensate for changes
in the vessel speed over the bottom. This results in a display with a
constant scale of the bottom. The faster the vessel goes the bigger the
gaps are between two sweeps of the sonar.

13.27.3.4 Slant Range Correction
The fact that the side scan sonar is above the bottom and is viewing the
seabed at an angle gives a slant range distortion. This distortion has to be
corrected, the slant range correction. This means that equal increments of
time correspond to equal increments of slant range, and not to equal
increments of distance along the sea floor. For a flat bottom this slant
range is always greater than the true horizontal range.
13.27.3.5 Lambert’s Law Correction

The intensity of the reflection will decrease further away from the centre
because of the smaller angle with the surface, the reflection will be
diffused. With the Lambert’s Law correction the intensity of the reflection
will be corrected. The correction is a multiplication factor which is related
to the angle with the surface. How smaller the angle how bigger the
multiplication factor.
13.27.3.6 Sonar Target Options in Sonar Views

When a sonar target is created the symbol gets a context menu with
several options specific for that sonar target. With a right mouse click in or
on the symbol the options becomes available.
The classification list can Classification
be modified in the Project The type of sonar target can be defined, select one of the options that
Configuration (see page are available. If no option match with the sonar target enter a
63). classification in the table of the Sonar Targets view (see page 376).
Delete Sonar Target
The selected sonar target will be deleted from the sonar target file and
the GeoTIFF file of the sonar target will also be deleted.
Edit Sonar Target
The Sonar Targets view of the selected sonar target will pop up and
the information can be edited in the table of the Sonar Targets view
(see page 376).
Set New Sonar Target Position
Select this option when the location of the sonar target in the Sonar
View has to be modified.
Draw a new box around the right location of the sonar target and the
symbol will be moved to the new location. The new location will be
updated in the table of the Sonar Targets view.
13.27.4 Sonar – Bathy View

The Sonar – Bathy view can be displayed in the Acquisition by selecting
the Sonar – Bathy as display. The view can only be selected when in the
Equipment list the right sonar image device is selected.
This view is available for the RESON HydroBat and for the RESON
SeaBat 7K systems.

Figure 13-126 Sonar – Bathy view of the 7125 in simulation mode
When zoomed in, press the left mouse button when the cursor is inside
 the view and the cursor will change to a small hand. With the left mouse
button still pressed it is possible to pan through the view.
When a second Sonar – Bathy view is opened and the user zooms in on
the data then the outlines of this view will be visible in the first Sonar –
Wedge view.
The Act ping rate in the info layer on the left side in the view is showing
an average over at least 10 pings and 3 seconds.
13.27.4.1 Sonar Bathy – Toolbar and Context Menu

The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Sonar – Bathy
view are:
numerics keyboard and the With this options it is possible to zoom in and zoom out in the view.
used for the Zoom In and Zoom Extents ( )
Zoom Out. With zoom extents the complete sonar wedge will be displayed in the
view. When the Range is changed, automatically the view will be
adjusted so the complete wedge is displayed.
The option can be switched off by using the zoom in or zoom out
option.
Connect Beams With Lines ( )
The detected bottom will be displayed as a line. Color of the line can
be modified in the Layer Control (see below).
Increase / Decrease Point Size ( , )
When the detected bottom is displayed as points, the size of the points
can be increased or decreased. The color of the points can be
modified in the Layer Control (see below).
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view.
When the option is selected the start is always at the sonar location

and the cursor will change into four small arrows. Move the mouse
around in the view and the distance will be displayed next to the
cursor. Click on a point in the wedge and that will become the new
start point for the measurement.
Click on the option again or use the right mouse button the stop this
option.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the Sonar – Bathy view can be saved as a JPG or a
BMP file.
Beam Selection ( )
Click in the wedge and the beam number with the beam coverage will
be displayed.
Grid Enable ( )
The vertical axis in the wedge and the line around the edge of the
wedge can be switched on/off.
Layer Control ( )
This will open the Layer Control of the Sonar – Bathy view. In the
The parameters on the left
Layer Control are two layers available.
side are only available In the Sonar Info Layer the color and font for the parameters displayed
when the right Device on the left side in the view can be defined.
Configuration device is In the Sonar Data Layer the color for the bottom detection can be
added in the Equipment. defined.
Properties ( )
This will open the Properties of the Sonar – Bathy view.
The most important options in the Properties are:
Sonar Palette; the palette for the sonar data in the view can be
modified.
Grid Color; the color for the vertical axis and the line around the edge
of the wedge can be modified.
13.28 Status Views

In the Acquisition are four different Status views available.
 Status – Alarms view (see below)
 Status – Computations view (see page 384)
 Status – Equipment view (see page 385)
 Status – Logging view (see page 385)
 Status – Remote connections view (see page 386)

13.28.1 Status – Alarms View
Figure 13-127 Status – Alarms view
The Status – Alarms view will show the alarms which are set by the user
in the configuration (see page 69) and/or in the vessel configuration (see
page 129). All the conditions in the alarm files are shown and the alarm
can be on ( / ), off ( ) or disabled ( ).
The Alarms dialog can be opened with Edit > Alarms from the menu bar
or with from the toolbar. Through this way only the existing alarms in
the configuration can be changed or new ones can be added to the
configuration.
With a double click on one of the alarms in the view directly the
Conditions window can be opened. Through this way also the alarms in
the vessel configuration are accessible.
The Alarms dialog and the Condition window are identical with the dialog
and window as explained in the Vessel Alarms on page 129.
13.28.2 Status – Computations View
Figure 13-128 Status – Computations view with not working computations
The Status – Computations view displays the status of all computations.

The view will be red when at least one of the computations has no data
input ( or ). The reason will be displayed in the ‘Status’ column,
‘Timeout’ or ‘---’ (no data). If all the computations receive data and have
in front of the computations, the view will be green.
By default the use of the status colors is switched off in the context menu.
The reason for this is that it is possible that there are computations
available in the project that are is not relevant for the survey. It is up to the
user if he wants the status colors or not.

13.28.3 Status – Equipment View
Figure 13-129 Status – Equipment view with no data for some equipment
The Status – Equipment view displays the status of all sensors or outputs
created in the Equipment page of the vessel configuration. The view will
be red when at least one of the sensors has no data input ( or ). The
reason will be displayed in the ‘Input’ or ‘Output’ column, ‘Timeout’ or ‘---’
(no data). If all the sensors are working properly, all the data is received in
the system and have in front of the sensors, the view will be green.
This is only when the user has set the status color in the context menu.
13.28.4 Status – Logging View
Figure 13-130 Status – Logging view with the logging on
The Status – Logging view displays the information about the data logging
such as file name, file size and logging rate. The view will be green when
logging is on and it will be red when the logging is switch off. If logging is
on and conditions are checked in the Logging page (see page 126) the
view becomes yellow if the condition is not true and the logging will be
suspended. This is only when the user has set the status color in the
context menu.
If the view is green it is obvious which file is logged and in which directory.

13.28.5 Status – Remote Connections View
Figure 13-131 Status – Remote Connections view
The Status – Remote Connections view displays the remote

connection(s) with the remote PC(’s). The user can now see with
computer are connected to the PDS2000 computer.
13.29 Tide Manual Input View
Figure 13-132 Tide Manual Input view
A Tide Manual Input view is not a standard view which can be added
menu of the Acquisition. With this view a manual input for the tidal
information can be given.
Before the view can be selected, a manual input device for the tide gauge
96).
Select in Acquisition the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu
bar to add the Tide Manual Input view. Select the right device control in
the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on to add
the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be
closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it
has to same functionality as all other views.
If the option Force Manual Tide is checked the manual input becomes the
primary data group in the data sources for the tide computation (see page
103). A modified tide value in the view will be directly used in the tide
computation.
A context menu and a properties window are not available for the Tide
Manual Input view.

13.30 Time Series View
The Time Series view contains one or more graphs where sensor data or
computed data will be shown in time. This makes it easier to compare
data from different sensors at the same time.
Figure 13-133 Time Series view with two graphs stacked
On the right side in the view the actual value of the data channel is
displayed with below the value the text ‘1/div’. This means that the
distance between two horizontal lines in the graph is 1 unit of the data
item. On the bottom the total length of the X-axis is displayed in hours,
minutes and seconds.
When this view is selected for the first time in the Acquisition by default
one channel is already added to the view.
If more than one graph is displayed as in the example above, the graph
where the text is underlined is the active graph. To make a graph active
just click with the mouse in that graph.
13.30.1 Time Series – Toolbar and Context Menu

Add Channel ( )
With this option it is possible to add a data channel with its default
settings.
Vertical Zoom In, Vertical Zoom Out ( , )
The + and – key of the
numerics keyboard can Zoom In and Out on the Y-axis of the active graph.
also be used for the Horizontal Zoom In, Horizontal Zoom Out ( , )
standard Zoom In and
Zoom Out.
Zoom In and Out on the X-axis. This is for all the graphs displayed in
the view.
Layer Control ( )
In the Layers window data channels can be added to the view and all
the settings for that data channel can be set.

Properties ( )
Settings for the view can be modified. It is also possible to show all the
data in one graph (overlayed) or in separate graphs (stacked).
 A data channel can also be added by using the ‘Drag & Drop’ method
from the Raw Data view( see page 374).

14 Replay
14.1 Introduction
Data recorded in the PDS2000 logging format can be replayed in this
module. By changing the vessel configuration before a replay is started,
the data will be recomputed with the new vessel configuration settings.
Replayed data can be recorded again into new log data files. To
distinguish replayed log data from the original files, the replayed file gets
an ‘R’ and the date and time of the replay in the file name.
The three options to start the replay from the Control Center are:
 Click on in the acquisition bar.

 Select Acquisition > Start Replay from the menu bar.
14.1.1 Controlling the Replayer

When the Replayer is opened it will be empty. Click on to open the
File Set Editor (see also page 397) to select or create a file set for the
Replayer. It is also possible to select in the file set selection ( )
one of the existing file sets.
Figure 14–1 Replayer toolbar with a file set bar
If the Replayer is open it is also possible to change the file set selection.
For a project with more vessels, instead of a file set bar, a vessel bar can
be displayed. Select from the menu bar the option View > Vessel Bar to
get the vessel bar in the toolbar. With the option View > File Set Bar the
above displayed toolbar comes back.
 When a logdata files are loaded in the Replayer, automatically the layout
used in the first logdata file will be opened.
PDS2000 - User Manual Replay  389

Figure 14–2 Replayer toolbar with a vessel bar
Select Prev/Next File ( , )

Select the previous ( ) or next ( ) file from the file set.
Stop ( )
Stops the current replay and clears the client area.
One Step ( )
Each time this button is pressed the next record is read.
Play ( )
Starts the replay.
Pause ( )
Temporarily stops the current replay.
Slow/Fast Play ( )
Slow play is the normal survey speed and when the bar moved to the
right the replay speed goes faster and faster.
14.1.2 External Replay Settings

The Replayer uses the vessel configuration and the layout as stored in
the log data files from the selected file set. That means that the layout can
change during the replay. To avoid these changes during the replay it is
possible to select an external vessel configuration and an external layout
before the replay of the file set is started.
Select from the menu bar the option Replay > Options… to select the
external vessel configuration and the external layout.
Figure 14–3 Select the external files for the replay
When no external layout is used, the option Keep same layout when
playing files should be checked to use only one layout during the replay of
the log data files.
390  Replay PDS2000 - User Manual

14.1.3 Saving Layout and Vessel Configuration
Because it is possible to replay the log data files on a different computer,
it can be useful to save the used vessel configuration and the used layout
from the survey on the computer. It is possible to extract both from the
selected log data file.
Be sure that there are no views open in the Replayer and that the
Replayer is not running. Click on to stop the replay and all the views
will disappear.
Select then from the menu bar the option Tools > Save Logged Layout
As… or Tools > Save Logged Vessel As… to save the layout or the
vessel configuration from the selected log data file.
14.1.4 Recomputation and Saving Results

To do a recomputation in the Replayer, the configuration has to be
changed by modifying the existing vessel configuration or by using an
external vessel configuration (see page 390).
Select the file that needs to be modified, click one time on and the
vessel configuration of the file will be read. Use the buttons in the toolbar
or the options in the Edit menu to modify the vessel configuration.
Equipment ( )
Modify the properties of the computations in the Equipment page. See
page 96.
Computations ( )
Modify the computations. See page 101.
Data Sources ( )
Modify the data sources, this is only possible when the logging is off.
See page 103.
Logging ( )
Modify the logging formats or logging settings in the logging page, this
is only possible when the logging is off. See page 116.
After the configuration is modified, click first on to start the logging and
click then on to start the replay. If the replay is finished a new log file
is created.
PDS2000 - User Manual Replay  391

15 Processing
15.1 Introduction
The goal of a survey usually is a presentation of the results in the form of
tables, charts and files. Before the presentation is finalized the data is
normally checked for anomalies, outliers and measuring faults.
Sometimes it is also necessary to correct a survey for influences that
could not be measured in real time, e.g. tides.
15.2 Validating and Presenting Survey Results

PDS2000 has dedicated modules for all the tasks as mentioned above.
Editing ( )
All PDS2000 recorded data can be checked and edited (see page
395).
Calibration
Start the new multibeam calibration application of PDS2000.
See for a detailed explanation of the multibeam calibration the manual
Multibeam Calibration (the file Multibeam Calibration.pdf in the folder
‘manuals).
USBL Calibration
The misalignment of the USBL transceiver and the USBL transponder
position can be calculated. See for a detailed explanation of the USBL
calibration in the USBL manual (the file USBL.pdf in the folder
‘manuals’).
Create Model ( )
Use various data files to make a grid or a TIN model (see page 499).
Backscatter Processing ( )
A backscatter mosaic and/or a bottom classification can be created
from the snippets data. See for a detailed explanation the Backscatter
Processing manual (the file Bottom Classification.pdf in the folder
‘manuals’).
Grid Model Editor ( )

Control grid models, apply calculations and export a model (see page
508).
TIN Model Viewer
Shows and manipulates TIN models (see page 539).
Plot ( )
Make geo-related charts and profiles with an easy to use layout (see
page 547).
PDS2000 - User Manual Processing  393

End Area Volumes ( )
Compute line based volumes using the modified area method. Make
reports from the results (see page 603).
Export ( )
Export PDS2000 data to various foreign formats (see page 613).
394  Processing PDS2000 - User Manual

16 Editing
16.1 Introduction
In the Editing, the user can check the data for outliers, anomalies and
measuring faults. If necessary, it is possible to remove or correct the data.
Each view is an editor and each editor takes its data from the PDS2000
data files. The data can be edited in the data files (see page 416 for an
explanation) and the corrected data is directly available after editing.
In contrast with other programs, a separate processed data file or
database is not been made. Indexing and caching takes place in the
PDS2000 data files. That means that the file size increases significantly.
The advantage lies primarily in having both original (raw) and processed
data in one file. This allows the user to revert to original data when
needed.
Please note that only the data from PDS2000 data files can be edited with
these editors.
Select Processing > Editing from the menu bar or click on in the
toolbar of the Control Center to start the Editing.
16.1.1 Available Editors

At this moment, the following different types of editors/viewers are
available:
1. 3D Box (see page 417)
2. 3D View (see page 421)
3. Data Source Switching (see page 428)
4. Dekdienst (see page 432)
5. Line-Based Editing (see page 433)
6. Messages (see page 438)
7. Multibeam Area Editing (see page 438)
8. Numerics (see page 476)
9. Ping (see page 476)
10. Position Editing (see page 481)
11. Profile (see page 484)
12. Sonar (see page 488)
13. Sonar Targets (see page 491)
14. Tide Station (see page 493)
PDS2000 - User Manual Editing  395

15. Time-Based Editing (see page 494)
It depends on the The editors can be used simultaneously and multiple times. Each editor
application type and the uses the same data file, but only one editor is active, that is the one
permissions in the dongle currently used for editing. The cursor location in each editor is the location
which editors are available. of the record in the current data file. This is called ‘Synchronous
Processing’. Stepping through the file will update all open editors.
Open all the editors necessary to give a good ‘view’ on the data. For
example, a multibeam editor together with a position editor tells the
physical location of the multibeam soundings.
It is not necessary to save the data files after editing because all the data
files are saved automatically.
16.2 Open Editing

When the Editing is opened for the first time after an installation, it will
show only the menu bar, the toolbar and an empty client area. If the
editing is used before, the last used layout appears in the client area.
Figure 16-1 Editing with two editors
396  Editing PDS2000 - User Manual

16.2.1 Selecting a File Set
Before the user can start editing the data, a file set has to be selected or
created. When the Editing is opened, automatically the File Set Editor will
be opened. If a different file set has to be loaded click on the to open
the File Set Editor again or use next to the button to select
an existing file set.
Figure 16-2 File Set Editor to select or create a file set.
Click on to make a new file set and click on to modify an

existing file set. In both cases, the same dialog with all available
PDS2000 log data files (in the current project) will be opened.
Figure 16-3 Selected files for a file set
Check the files to edit and click on . If the files are opened for the
first time, an index and cache will be created. This may take some time;
progress will be shown in the Progress dialog.

16.2.2 Select the Editors
In the Displays window the necessary editors or viewers can be added to
the layout. There are two ways to open this window:
 Select View > Displays from the menu bar.
 Select Displays in the context menu.
Figure 16-4 Context menu in the Editing
Figure 16-5 Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views in the
Editing
Click on and the Add Display window will be opened to select a

new editor (or viewer). PDS2000 gives a default name for the editor, but
the user can give the editor any name he wants.
Figure 16-6 Add Display window to add an editor
In the Displays window, the editors can be checked on or off. This means
that only the checked editors will be displayed on the screen. The editors
that are checked off are not removed; it only means that these editors are
not shown on the screen. An editor can be removed by using in
the Displays window.

There are also fast methods to add editors to the layout in the Editing.
 Select View > Add Display… from the menu bar and the Add Display
window will be opened (see above).
 Select Add Display in the context menu.
Figure 16-7 Add Display in the context menu of the Editing
After all the wanted editors are selected and moved to the right location in
the Editing the layout can be stored. Select File > Save Layout As… from
the menu bar to save the new layout. To open another layout use File >
Open Layout… from the menu bar and select one of the created layouts.
16.2.2.1 Active Editor

Only one of the visible editors is active, all the others will follow, and only
in the active editor editing of the data can take place. The user can make
an editor active by selecting the editor in Window from the menu bar or by
just clicking on the editor window in the client area.
When there is data selected in the active editor the data bar will show the
related records in the file set as blue stripes; when they are close
together, it looks like the entire data bar is blue.
Place the indicator in the data bar on a record and the cursor in the active
editor will move to the corresponding position.
16.2.3 Selecting Points

Click on a data point to select a single point. To select multiple points
drag the mouse over the data points.
In the Position Editing, the Time-Based Editing and the Line-Based
Editing multiple points can be selected in combination with the Shift or Ctrl
key. After one point is selected the last point of the multiple points can be
selected in combination with the Shift key and all intermediate points are
also selected. In combination with the Ctrl key more single points can be
selected.
16.2.4 Editing Toolbar

Besides that most of the editors have their own toolbar, the Editing has a
toolbar that is available for all the editors.
16.2.4.1 Jumping
Click on or and the red indicator (red stripe) in the data bar will
jump to the previous or next file in the file set. A click in the data bar
brings the red indicator to a specific record in the file. Cursors or locators
in all open editors will go exactly to that point.

16.2.4.2 Play Options
With the play options ( ) it is possible to go through the
selected file set step by step. Click on or to start the forwards or
backwards playing of the data. Click on or again to stop the
playing. Also the space bar of the keyboard can be used to start and stop
playing forwards and the keys shift + space bar to start and stop playing
backwards.
The step size of the forwards or backwards playing can be set with
. All open editors follow the playing. To go one step
(record) forwards or backwards click on or respectively. Also the
keys F10 and F9 can be used for one step forwards and backwards.
16.2.4.3 Undo – Redo

The undo-redo buttons ( ) do not work in all the editors. In the
editors where the buttons work the buttons become active (black)
depending if there are editing steps done (for the undo) or undone (for the
redo). This is only valid in one editor at the time. When switching for the
first time to another editor the buttons become inactive because there are
no editing steps (un)done in that editor.
16.2.4.4 Edit Mode

In most of the editors, one or more points can be selected. It will depend
on the edit mode what the action will be. The pressed button tells which
Also at the right bottom in
the Editing is the edit mode edit mode is active and the default edit mode is ‘Normal’ .
displayed; , or
After a point or points are selected in the ‘Normal’ mode, a right mouse
.
click on the selection gives a context menu with edit options. The edit
options are Delete, Undelete, Interpolate, Smooth, Move…, Edit and
Info…. When the ‘Delete’ mode is active, selecting one or more points
in the editor will directly remove the point(s). Select the deleted point(s) in
the ‘Undelete’ mode and the deleted point(s) will come back in the
editor.
16.2.4.5 Auto Recache

Auto Recache ( ) generates automatically a recache when it is
necessary. When the data is edited and PDS2000 do a recache after
each step then it is advisable to switch the Auto Recache off. A warning
sign ( ) will appear next to the Auto Recache button when the data is
modified and a recache is necessary. It is then up to the user when he
decides to do a recache. The recache can be done by switching the Auto
Recache on again.
The Auto Recache will do a recache on all the data that is modified, while
the Force Recache (see page 413) only recache the data for the active
view in the Editing.

16.2.4.6 Find Exceptional Data
Figure 16-8 Find window
The Find window can also The Find window ( ) has, depending on the active editor, a maximum of
be opened with Edit > Find three find detectors; high value, low value and spike. In the Position
from the menu bar.
Editing and in the Line-Based Editing the spike detector checks the angle
and the amplitude. In the Time-Based Editing, the spike detector checks
the deviation and the deviation per second.
Click on to add the values for the selected detector. The detector
can be activated by checking the checkbox before the detector. All the
detectors will be active in the current data file or in the entire file set. Click
on or to search for the exceptional data points.
When an anomaly is found, one of the two actions, Delete or Interpolate,
is possible. Click on to activate the selected action.
16.2.5 Tools Options

Next to the standard editing options extra options are available under the
menu item Tools.
 Edit Vessel Configuration (see below)
 Select Vessel Configuration (see page 402)
 Compare Vessel Configurations For Fileset (see page 403)
 Transponder Position Update (see page 404)
 Print File Status (see page 404)
 Apply Tide (see page 404)
 Edit Tide Station Data (see page 404)
 Data Source Switching (see page 405)
 Cable Route Generation (see page 407)
 Multibeam Statistics Report (see page 409)
 Import POSPac (see page 409)
 Import TerraPos (see page 410)
 Quick Calibration (see page 410)
 Generate TPE results file (see page 411)
 Validate All Caches (see page 413)
 Force Recache Selected Item (see page 413)
 Revert To Original (see page 414)
 Repair File (see page 414)
 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps (see page 415)
 Force Recache GPS Positions (see page 415)

16.2.5.1 Modify Vessel Configuration
To make the editing of the data possible, the vessel configuration is
recorded in each PDS2000 data file. As the vessel configuration is
available, it is also possible to modify it and thereafter automatically
recache the file. Modifying a configuration is the same as doing a
recomputation with all sensor data.
Not all items of a configuration can be modified. It is limited to vessel
geometry, sensor settings and linked, standard and advanced
computations.
Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Edit Vessel to modify the
vessel configuration. This option is only possible when a file set is
selected.
When the modifications in the vessel configuration are finished then
automatically a dialog will be opened.
Figure 16-9 Apply the modified vessel configuration
Click on if the modifications have to be applied to all the files of

the file set. Click on if the modifications have to be applied only
to the active logdata file. The recache can take some time and the
progress is shown in the Progress dialog.
16.2.5.2 Select Vessel Configuration

Each time when the vessel configuration of a logdata file is changed by
for instance changing an offset or applying tide, a new vessel
configuration is stored in the logdata file.
Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Select Vessel to select a
vessel configuration. This option is only possible when a file set is
selected and is working on the active logdata file.
The user can go back to a specific setting by selecting a different vessel
configuration in the Vessel Selection Dialog.
Figure 16-10 Vessel Selection Dialog to select a different vessel configuration
The last Vessel in the list is the active vessel configuration. Select a
different vessel configuration and click on to accept. Then this

selected vessel configuration becomes the last one in the list. The data of
the logdata file will be recached to match the setting as in the selected
vessel configuration.
When the Vessel Selection Dialog is opened there is a possibility that the
active vessel configuration is invalid.
Figure 16-11 Vessel Selection Dialog with an invalid active vessel configuration
The method to fix this problem is to use the Repair File option (see page
414).
16.2.5.3 Compare Vessel Configurations

When a File Set is manipulate quite often the user can lose track of
whether the changes have been applied to all files.
With this option the vessel configuration of all files in the File Set are
compared and it is possible when there is a difference to synchronize all
files in the File Set with the vessel configuration of the active file.
Figure 16-12 Dialog when active vessel configuration is different from the other
vessel configurations
In the list above it is possible that not all files from the File Set are
displayed. The settings of the missing files are identical with the leading
(active) vessel configuration.
Click on to apply the settings of the leading (active) vessel
configuration to the listed vessel configurations in the File Set.

When all the vessel are equal the following message will appear.
Figure 16-13 Dialog when there is no difference in the vessel configurations
16.2.5.4 Transponder Position Update

With this option, the USBL transponder position of the slave vessel can
be updated from the logdata files of the master vessel. The master vessel
is the vessel with the USBL transceiver and the logdata files should be
selected as file set.
Select Tools > Transponder Position Update for the menu bar to open a
dialog where the slave vessel can be selected.
Figure 16-14 Transponder position update for the slave vessel
16.2.5.5 Print File Status

In each logdata file the most important modifications like changing offsets
or changing multibeam filters are logged in the file.
With this option the modifications of the active logdata file will be
displayed in the Messages – System Messages view in the Editing (see
page 438).
Select Tools > Print File Status from the menu bar and the information will
be displayed in the Messages – System Messages view.
16.2.5.6 Apply Tide Data

Before the tide data is applied to the file or file set the tide data can be
edited or checked with Tools > Edit Tide Station Data from the menu bar.
The Tide Station – Viewer will be opened (see page 493).
Select Tools > Apply Tide… from the menu bar to apply the tide data to
the logdata files. This is only possible when a file set is selected.

Figure 16-15 Apply tide
Select a computation mode and one or more tide stations. For multiple
tide stations along a route select at ‘Selected route’ the appropriate route.
Click on and the tide data is applied to the logdata files in the file
set. If there are problems with applying the tide data, a data error window
appears. This window shows the cause of the data error(s) and to which
data files no tide data is applied.
There are several methods to check if the tide data is applied correctly to
the file set.
 Check the height method used in the reference point computation.
Select Tools > Edit Vessel from the editing menu. On the tab
Equipment select under the positioning system the computation ‘
Reference Point Computation’ and click on to open this
computation. The item ‘Height Source’ should show Tide and the item
‘Tidal Data Source’ should point to the tide computation.
 Open in the Time-Based Editing – Standard view (see page 495) from
‘ Reduced depths’ the data channels ‘Depth ref. Sealevel’ and
‘Depth ref. Chart Datum’. Overlay the two graphs in the editor and the
difference between the two data channels should be the applied tide.
It is also possible to view the applied tide data in the editor. Select
from the ‘ Reference Point Computation’ the data channel ‘Applied
Tide’.
 Open the Tide Station – Viewer (see page 493). This viewer shows the
applied tide data for the selected file set.
16.2.5.7 Data Source Switch

If for a data source more than one device is selected it is possible to
change the order of the data source in the Editing.
Select Tools > Data Source Switching… from the menu bar to open the
welcome page of the Data Source Switch Wizard. Click on to
continue with the wizard.

Figure 16-16 Data source selection page of the Data Source Switch Wizard
Select in the data source selection page the data source that have to be
switched. Below the list of data sources one of the two options have to be
selected.
Select option Set for whole file when the data source switch has to be
applied to the active logdata file. Click on to select the order in the
data groups.
Figure 16-17 Data groups page of the Data Source Switch Wizard
Select in the data groups page the order of the computations. Click on
to apply the first computation from the list as the primary data
source to the active logdata file.
When in the data source selection page the option Advanced editing is
selected, it is possible for the user to set his own data source switches on

any location in the active logdata file. When this option is selected and the
user clicks on the data elements page will be opened.
Figure 16-18 Data elements page of the Data Source Switch Wizard
Select in the data elements page the item that has to be opened in the
Data Source Switching view. In the view a channel is created for each
data group of the selected data source. Next to these channels, also an
extra channel is created with the data source switch. At the bottom of the
view the primary data is displayed; this is the data from the primary parts
of the different data groups. See for an explanation of the Data Source
Switching view on page 428.
16.2.5.8 Cable Route Generation

If a plough buried a cable, the positions of the knife are logged in the
PDS2000 logdata files. From these positions, a cable route can be
generated.
Select Tools > Cable Route Generation from the menu bar to open the
Cable Route Dialog where the settings for the cable route generation can
be set.

Figure 16-19 Cable Route Dialog to generate a cable route
As-Planned cable route

Select the cable route that is used as guidance for trenching the cable.
As Laid cable route
Select the cable route that becomes the cable after the trenching. A
new cable route name can be generated with the option below.
Click on this button to create a new empty cable route; the as laid
cable route. This file will be automatically selected as the as laid cable
route in the above option.
Cable diameter
The cable diameter will be used to calculate the depth of the cable.
Sample interval
The interval along the cable route where the cable will be generated.
Average length
Over the average length on the sample interval location one position
and depth will be calculated and added to the as laid cable route.
Cable burial method
This is the method that is used or will be used to detect the burial
depth of the cable. In the ‘ Dredge Absolute Plough Knife’ of the
Dredge Positioning System the depth can be calculated from the
Position or from a Model.
Realtime selected is the method (Position or Model) that is selected
during the Acquisition.
Reject detection exceeding offtrack to a planned route
Check this option when the detection has to be rejected if the offtrack
to the planned route is more than the entered Maximum offtrack.
Click on this button if only from the selected file the cable has to be
generated.
Click on this button if from all the files in the selected file set the cable
has to be generated.

16.2.5.9 Multibeam Statistics Report
This option will generate a statistics report from the multibeam data in the
logdata files in the file set.
Select Tools > Multibeam Statistics Report from the menu bar to open the
start dialog for the multibeam statistics report.
Figure 16-20 Dialog for the multibeam statistics report
Report Style
At the moment only one report style for the statistics report is
available.
Show Report
If this option is checked then the report will be displayed in the
PDS2000 Reporter.
The multibeam statistics report is generated and opened in the

When the report is opened in PDS2000 Reporter if the option ‘Show report’ is checked. If not
the PDS2000 Reporter the file checked then the report will be saved as PDF file in the ‘Reports’
can be saved with File > Save folder of the project. The default filename will be:
as….
MB Statistics report <file set name> yyyymmdd-hhmm[Editing].pdf
Where <file set name> is the name of the active file set in the Editing.
One report is generated with a list of the statistics for the file set and for
each logdata file in the file set.
16.2.5.10 Import POSPac

A POS MV can be used together with PDS2000 to acquire position,
heading, roll, pitch, and heave data. This device can also log its own raw
output data, which contains more information like velocity, acceleration,
and angular rate.
The POSPac software can process the raw data to improve the POS MV
data. The output files are called SBET (Smoothed Best Estimate of
Trajectory) files. It will be possible to import the POSPac SBET files in
PDS2000, and replace the position, attitude and/or heading device data in
the PDS2000 logdata files with the improved data.
The SBET file is generally used with an associated post-processed
solution accuracy file (SMRMSG file). This file contains error RMS values
for all solution components.
 It is very important that the SBET files contain UTC time (not GPS time).
The SBET and SMRMSG files have to be named in a special way. The
file name must contain the start date of the data in the following format:
sbet_YYYYMMDDxxx.out
smrmsg_YYYMMDDxxx.out
Select Tools > Import Post-Processed GPS Data > POSPac… from the
menu bar to open the Open dialog to select the SBET file(s) for the
import. This dialog will only open when PDS2000 logdata files are loaded
in the Editing. It is possible to select one or more SBET files in the dialog.

After the POSPac file(s) are opened, the user has to select which POS
MV data will be used to replace the device data in the PDS2000 logdata
files.
Figure 16-21 POSPac selection dialog
The position is the latitude, longitude and the altitude of the position
device. The attitude is the roll, pitch and heave of the VRU device. The
heading is the heading of the compass device.
Before the import is started, PDS2000 will check if for the position in the
PDS2000 logdata files a POS MV device driver is used. If this is not the
case, the import will not be done.
All dependent computations will be recached when necessary. It is always
possible to revert to the original data by using the Revert to Original
option ( ).
16.2.5.11 Import TerraPos

TerraPos data is high precision processed position data, which is
processed outside PDS2000.
It is possible to import the TerraPos PTS files in PDS2000, and replace
the position device data in the PDS2000 logdata files with the processed
position data.
From the following data string the underscored items will be used by
PDS2000 to replace the original GPS observation:
Year, Month, Day, Sec, lat, lon, height, Slat, Slon, Sh, Rlatlon, Rlath,
Rlonh, NSVs, HDOP, VDOP, RelHor, RelVert, Qh, Qv, Flag
 It is very important that the PTS files contain UTC time (not GPS time).
Select Tools > Import Post-Processed GPS Data > TerraPos… from the
menu bar to open the Open dialog to select the PTS file(s) for the import.
This dialog will only open when PDS2000 logdata files are loaded in the
Editing. It is possible to select one or more PTS files in the dialog.
All dependent computations will be recached when necessary. It is always
possible to revert to the original data by using the Revert to Original
option ( ).
16.2.5.12 Quick Calibration

This option will start the dialog to do a quick multibeam calibration. This
tool can be used to check very quickly if the values for the multibeam
calibration are still valid. It is possible to do a quick calibration but it is
advisable to use the multibeam calibration in the Multibeam Area Editing
– Standard view (see page 459).

Figure 16-22 Quick Calibration
To see the impact of the changes in the dialog it is advisable to have the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view open.
Device
Select for which multibeam or laser scan device the calibration values
have to be displayed.
Click on this button to get for the roll, pitch and yaw the original values,
as stored in the files.
Roll, Pitch and Yaw
Move the sliders to change the values. The changes will be directly
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view.
With these changes, the user can see if the actual values are valid for
the data set.
Calibration setting
When the values for the roll, pitch and yaw are set then it is possible to
apply these to a data set; to log data files, to a file set or to the vessel
configuration. For each option, a dialog will be opened to select the
right data set or vessel configuration.
Click on to close the quick calibration dialog.
16.2.5.13 Generate TPE Results File

This option gives a detailed analysis of the TPE computation for the
selected ping. The results can be exported to a ASCII text file which
contains the standard deviations used for the TPE computation and the
Horizontal and Vertical errors split out to the individual error contributions.
PDS2000 provides an Excel sheet that is capable to load the TPE text file
and to visualize the TPE results as tables and graphs.
Select a ping in one of the views in the Editing and select the option. A
dialog will be opened.

Figure 16-23 Generate TPE Results File
If more than one multibeam is available in the view select the multibeam
for which the TPE results has to be computed.
For the error model two options are available:
 CUBE implementation; horizontal error without the fore-aft
beamwidth error
 CHS implementation; horizontal error with the fore-aft beamwidth
error
Check the option Use Multibeam Uncertainty when the real-time
uncertainty values have to be used. Uncheck the option when the range
error has to be computed.
Click on to generate the TPE text file. The text file is saved
in the project folder and can be found as text (TXT) file in the Explorer. In
the filename is composed from the ping number, date and time of
generation.
The text file can be opened with the special created Excel sheet that is
available in the PDS2000 folder and is called ‘TPEview.xslm’. When the
sheet is opened click on the button, select the right text file and the table
and graph are automatically generated. Below an example of a table and
graph.
Figure 16-24 Part of the depth errors table

Figure 16-25 Example of a depth error graph
16.2.5.14 Validate All Caches

Validate all caches means that all the data in a file or file set will be re-
computed. This will not only recache the data related to the active view
(see Force Recache Selected Item below), but all the data will be
recached.
After editing in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view most of the
time a ‘Validate all caches’ don’t recache the data. The reason for this is
that before showing the data in the view the data have to be recached, so
each modification in this view is already recomputed.
Figure 16-26 Dialog for Validate ALL Caches
Click on to recache all the data files of the file set or click on
to recache only the selected data file. Click on if it is
not necessary to recache the data file(s).
16.2.5.15 Force Recache Selected Item

Recache is re-computing the data that is related to the active view. If the
Auto Recache is on (see page 400) it still has to be done manually if one
of the following data items is modified:
 Sound velocity.

 Tide data (only necessary if the tide data was already applied in the
editing).
 Coordinate system.
It is only necessary if there is a relation between the data in the active
editor and one of the data items mentioned above. For example, if the tide
data is modified and the echo sounder data is loaded in the active view
then recaching is necessary to update the data in the active view.
Select the menu option Tools > Force Recache… to recache the data file
and a dialog will be opened.
Figure 16-27 Dialog for recaching
Click on to recache only the selected data file or click on

to recache all the data files in the file set for the given data
item. Click on if it is not necessary to recache the data file(s).
16.2.5.16 Revert To Original

The menu option Tools > Revert To Original will bring the data of the
active editor back to the status as in the original logged data files. This
means that all the editing on the data in the active editor will be undone,
except modifications made in the Multibeam Filter (see page 456).
Figure 16-28 Dialog for revert to original data
Click on to revert to the original data only for the selected data
file or click on to revert to original data for all the data files in the
file set. Click on if it is not necessary to revert to the original
data.
16.2.5.17 Repair File

It is possible that the logdata file that is opened in the Editing shows that
the data is corrupt or that data is missing. Replacement data was not
properly written to the file or the data blocks where flagged wrong.
The Repair File method does:
 Re-indexes the file and checks the index and data blocks.
 When a data block was replaced by an edit and the edit block is not
found the method will revert to the original data.

 Due to a side effect of the check of the data block table the repair
always reverts to the first vessel configuration in the file.
 All the re-caches are recached and will be removed from the file.
Select the option Tools > Repair File(s) from the menu bar and a dialog
will be opened where can be chosen to repair all the logdata files in the
file set or only the selected logdata file.
Figure 16-29 Repair the logdata file(s)
Click on if the repair has to be done only for the active logdata
file or click on if the repair has to be done for all the files of the
file set. Click on if no repair has to be done.
16.2.5.18 Fix Time In Message Time Stamps

When there are problems with the timing in the log data files due to an
incorrect clock synchronization (for instance time in the future) then this
option can be used to repair the timing.
The restriction is that all relevant devices have set the Timestamp Mode
on ‘Time in Message’. PDS2000 will use the time set in the data blocks to
repair the ‘Time in Message’.
Figure 16-30 Dialog to fix the time stamp ‘Time in Message’
16.2.5.19 Force Recache GPS Positions

In case the user is not sure anymore if all the GPS positions are up to
date, he can run a quick recache of only the position data in the active file
or all files in the File Set.
Figure 16-31 Dialog to do a force recache of the GPS positions

16.3 Editing Data
In the Editing the data can be edit, deleted, moved, etc. The method to
modify these data points is different for the 3D views and the other views
in which data can be edited.
16.3.1 Editing Multibeam Data in a 3D View

In all the 3D Views in the Editing, except the 3D View – Standard, the
multibeam data can be edited. The editing works in conjunction with the
editing system of the Editing. From the Editing the following buttons can
There is no limit to the
number of undo and redo be used for editing the multibeam data: undo ( ) / redo ( ), normal
steps in the editing. mode ( ), delete mode ( ) and undelete mode ( ).
The editing of the data works as follows:
 Only the high-resolution data can be edited. Set the radius of the ‘Edit
Circle’ ( or ), so that there will be enough multibeam data to edit.
 Use ‘Only Show Valid Beams’ ( ) to show only the valid beams or
also the deleted and rejected beams.
 Set the Editing in delete mode ( ) and the deleting of the multibeam
data can be started. The cursor in the multibeam editor will change to
.
 There are several ways to delete one or more points in the multibeam
editor.
Delete one point by clicking on the beam with the cursor in
combination with the Ctrl key.
Delete more points by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
the left mouse button pressed in combination with the Ctrl key and
move the cursor over the multibeam data. It looks like erasing the
data.
A different method to delete more points is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is visible in
the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a polygon with line
segments or it can be a free drawn polygon.
 With the undelete mode ( ) the data that should not be deleted can
be undeleted. Draw a polygon around the area where the points have
to be undeleted.
A different option is to use the undo ( ) when too much or the wrong
points are deleted.
In the 3D View the standard 3D view navigation can be used (see page
50).
16.3.2 Editing Data Points

In the Line-Based Editor (see page 433), Time-Based Editor (see page
494) and Position Editor (see page 481) the editing of the data points is
possible.
There is no difference in selecting a single point or a block of points.
Selected points are indicated with a square. The points can be selected
by clicking on one point or by dragging the mouse over multiple points.
Keep the Ctrl-key pressed when multiple points have to be selected at
separate locations.

In the Position Editor the selection of data points is done by drawing a
 lasso around the points that need to be edited. In both other editors the
selection of the points is done by drawing a rectangle around the points.
When the edit mode is ‘Normal’ ( ) then a right click on the selected
When the edit mode is point(s) gives a context menu with edit possibilities:
‘Delete’ ( ), selected
Delete: Delete the selected points.
points are deleted Undelete: Undelete the deleted points in the selected area.
immediately. If the mode is Interpolate Cubic: Between the start and end point of the selection an
interpolation with a curve is done.
‘Undelete’ ( ) the
selected deleted points Interpolate Linear: Between the start and end point of the selection a
come back. linear interpolation is done, so a straight line will be result.
Fill Gap: When there is a gap in the position data (for instance surveyed
under a bridge), the gap will be linear interpolated using a constant
heading and speed.
Smooth: The selected points will be smoothed.
Move: The selected points can be shifted; a dialog gives the possibility to
enter a shift in X and Y direction.
Edit: The selected points will have a new position; a dialog gives the
possibility to enter a new position for the first point in the selection, the
other points will be relocated with the difference as before.
Info: Give the data block info view. Double clicking on a single point will
immediately give the data block info.
The points can be moved by dragging them. Points once edit get a
different shape, a dot instead of a small cross. This is to indicate that edit
actions have taken place on that point.
The data points from the inactive layers, which are related to the data of
 the active layer, are automatically updated when the data points are
edited.
16.4 3D Box View

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view a profile with a width (a
box) can be drawn over the data with Create Box View in the option
Create Detail View… ( ). When this box is drawn, a 3D Box view
opens with the profile in 3D. The different types of data (multibeam, grid
model and/or CUBE model) that are displayed in the Multibeam Area
Editing view will also be displayed in the 3D Box view.
It possible to have several 3D Box views opened at the same time. The
 drawn box from the active 3D Box view will be the only drawn box that is
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see page 466).

Figure 16-32 3D Box view with a grid model and multibeam data
The editing of the multibeam data in the 3D Box view is similar as the
editing in the other 3D views (see page 416).
 The data in the 3D Box view will not be updated when in the Multibeam
Area Editing – Standard view a new grid model or CUBE model is added.
When the 3D Box view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
anymore as a view in the Displays window (see page 398).
16.4.1 3D Box Toolbar and Context Menu

Most of the items from the toolbar are also available in the context menu
of the 3D Box view.
Define Profile ( )
A new profile box can be drawn in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view. The existing profile box will be deleted.
2D View ( )
Toggles between the 3D Box view (Out) and the Profile view (In).See
for a detail explanation of the profile view on page 484.
Zoom Functions ( , , )
The + and – key of the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Auto Zoom Extents.
numerics keyboard can The Auto Zoom Extents is a switch on/off button. When on and the
also be used for the Zoom profile is changed/moved in the Multibeam Area Editing all the data will
In and Zoom Out. be shown in the 3D Box view. Will automatically switch off when zoom
in or zoom out (also with mouse wheel) is used.

The scale factor can also Vertical Zoom Functions ( , )
be changed with the Ctrl Increase and Decrease the scale factor of the Z-axis of the data.
key + mouse wheel or Ctrl
+ ‘numerical + or -‘ keys. Pan ( )
Keep the left mouse button pressed to pan through the data in the
view.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
the key ‘o’.
The light intension does
not work on the multibeam
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
data. in the viewer can be modified.
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Measure ( )
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option or use the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off.
Profile Box Layer ( )
Toggles the box around the data on/off.
on/on/off. It will toggle between both color tables present in the view
and no color table. The two color tables are CUBE color mode / Grid
model color mode (depends on the active mode) and Multibeam color
mode.
Grid Model Layer ( )
The selected grid model in the grid model layer can be switched on/off.
In the view different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
CUBE Layer ( )
The CUBE layer can be switched on/off. That means if the button is
‘in’, the CUBE layer is on and the CUBE model will be displayed in the
view.
CUBE Color Mode ( )
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed. See page
467 for more information about the different CUBE color modes.

CUBE Surface ( )
Different CUBE surfaces can be selected to display in the view. See
page 469 for more information about the different CUBE surfaces.
Previous/Next CUBE Surface ( )
The previous/next available hypothesis will be displayed. These
options are only available when as CUBE surface ( ) the option
Hypothesis is selected.
Show Combined with Main Surface ( )
The main surface can be displayed in combination with one of the
hypotheses. This option is only available when as CUBE surface ( )
the option Hypothesis is selected.
Multibeam Layer ( )
The multibeam data can be switched on/off in the view. If the button is
active, extra buttons will be added to the toolbar.
Beam Color Mode ( )
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes: File Set,
Depth, Filter, Statistics and Multiping sequence. The different color
modes help to analyze the multibeam data. See page 425 for more
information about the beam color mode.
Laserscan Color Mode ( )
The laser scan data can be shown in different color modes. See the
chapter Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu on page
471 for pictures of the different color modes.
Toggles between only beams and beams connected with lines.
Increase/Decrease Point Size ( , )
The size of the beam points can be increased and decreased.
Toggles between showing only the valid data and showing all the data.
Show Filtered Data ( )
The multibeam data that is rejected by one or more of the checked
This option is only active
multibeam filters in the list will be displayed in the view. Therefore, it
when the option Only
will be possible to see what the impact is of one or more multibeam
Show Valid Beams ( ) is
filters on the data.
off.
It is also possible with the item Show Filtered Data in the Properties (
) of the view to (un)check more filters at one time.
Ignore Filters ( )
Multibeam data that is filtered out by one of the filters can be validated

again without unfiltering the data.
This option will make all selected data valid again, except the manual
rejected data. Draw a polygon around the data that have to be valid
again and all the data becomes valid. The data can be recognized by
its own filter color (Ignore Filters).
Clear Ignore Filters ( )
The ignore filters setting will be undone. Select the data by drawing a
polygon, which have to be bigger than the ignore filters area, and all
the selected data gets their own filter setting back.
Multibeam – Export Multibeam Points To ASCII…
The XYZ of the multibeam data as displayed in the view will be
exported to a file with extension ASC.

Layer Control ( )
Opens the Layers window where layers can be added, edited or
removed. Only the used layers will be shown in the Layers window.
Properties ( )
Opens the Properties window of the view where next to for instance
the color table and the scale factor several option from the toolbar
and/or context menu are accessible.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of
the Layer Control are available.
16.5 3D View
The 3D View – Standard is only a viewer, it is not an editor. Next to the
multibeam data from the file set, it can show a grid model or a 3D design
model in 3D with some extra information.
 The 3D View – Standard will by default always display multibeam(1) when

it is opened for the first time. This is the first multibeam system in the
Equipment list. When multiple multibeam systems are selected in the
 equipment list and the first multibeam is uncheck then no multibeam data
will be displayed in the view. Open with the Layers window, add a
Multibeam Layer and select in the properties of the layer for the
‘Multibeam Data and Position Source’ the ‘Multibeam xyz computation’ of
the active multibeam system.
If no color table is available or selected, PDS2000 automatically
generates a color table based on the depth values in the data.
The multibeam areas that are covered by the edit circle will be displayed
in high-resolution, all other data is shown in low-resolution with the right
colors.

Figure 16-33 3D View – Standard with the cross and high-resolution data
16.5.1 3D View – Standard Toolbar and Context

Menu
of the 3D View – Standard. Also extra items are available in the context
menu.
The + and – key of the Zoom Functions ( , , )
numerics keyboard can Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
In and Zoom Out. Follow Vessel ( )
Toggles the follow vessel mode on/off.
Show Spotlight ( )
The light intension does Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
not work on the multibeam the key ‘o’.
data. With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Figure 16-34 Spotlight window

Measure ( )
Esc-key.
Figure 16-35 3D View – Standard with a measure window with a distance,

bearing and a elevation between two points
Save Snapshot
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on/off.
Multibeam Layer ( )
Beam Color Mode ( )
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes to help to
analyze the data. See page 425 for more information about the beam
color mode.

Show Color Table for Color Mode
This gives the user the possibility to view (and modify) the generated
color table.
This option is only available when the beam color mode is set on
Depth or Statistics.
Generate Color Table for Color Mode
The user can (re)generate a color table for this color mode Depth or
Statistic. The color table files that are generated are called respectively
default or statistics - x, where x is the type of statistics that is shown.
This option is only available when the beam color mode is set on
Depth or Statistics.
Show Edit Circle
Toggles the edit circle on/off.
Only Show Edit Circle Beams ( )
Toggles between showing only the multibeam areas that are covered
by the edit circle or showing all the data.
Increase/Decrease Edit Circle Size ( , )
The radius of the edit circle can be increased and decreased.
off.
Layer Control ( )
removed (see page 427). Only the used layers will be shown in the
Layers window. It is also possible to open the Layers window with key
‘2’.
Properties ( )
and/or context menu are accessible (see page 426).
It is also possible to open the Properties window with key ‘a’.

16.5.1.1 Beam Color Mode
The data in the 3D View – Standard and in other 3D views can be shown
in several color modes. Click on the arrow in and select one of the
color modes.
File Set
This mode will use a different color for each data file in the file set. The
areas (whether shown low or high-resolution) will have the color of
their data file. The same color is used for the data files in the toolbar of
the Editing.
This mode can be helpful for identifying or finding data.
Depth
This mode will show the multibeam data in the colors of the selected
color table.
Filter
This mode will show the high-resolution multibeam data in the colors
which are used by the multibeam filters (see page 456). So the
multibeam data shows which filter affects which data. Low-resolution
data is always shown in the color of non-filtered data (normally white).
Statistics
This mode will show the data in colors which represent a level of a
 statistic value. The statistic values are valid for an area, not separate
sways or soundings. Therefore, both low and high-resolution areas are
colored as a whole. Possible values are:
 Standard deviation.
 Minimum value.
 Maximum value.
 The percentage of the beams that is affected by the selected
multibeam filter.
 The percentage of the beams that is affected by all the
multibeam filters.
The different type of statistic modes can be selected in the properties
of the Multibeam Layer.
When the color mode is set to Depth or Statistics, the context menu of
the view is extended with two options; Generate Color Table for Color
Mode and Show Color Table for Color Mode (see page 424).
Multiping Sequence
This mode will show the single ping or the multipings in different
colors.
Sonar Head
This mode will show the multibeam data for each sonar head in a
different color.
Detection
This mode will show the multibeam data in the detection colors;
amplitude, phase or both.
When the color mode is set to File Set, the view will generate a temporary
color table that will disappear when the view is closed.

16.5.2 3D View – Standard Properties
The Properties window of the view can be opened with , with key ‘a’ on
the keyboard or through the context menu.
Figure 16-36 Properties of the 3D View – Standard
Background Color
The background color of the view.
Color Table Name
Select a color table and all the relevant layers in the view will use it.
Follow Vessel
If the follow vessel mode is Enabled the view will follow the others
editors in the Editing.
Scale Factor
The scale factor of the Z-axis. Scale factor > 1 will enlarge the data in
the Z direction.
All other options in the Properties are similar with the options in the
toolbar and in the context menu (see page 422).
After the properties, the selected layers in the Layer Control are available
in the Properties window. It is not necessary to open the Layer Control to
modify something in one of the layers.

16.5.3 3D View – Standard Layers
The Layers window of the view can be opened with , with key ‘2’ on the
keyboard or through the context menu.
Figure 16-37 Layers of the 3D View – Standard
Color Table Layer

This layer is always there to show the color table in the view. The
name of the color table can be changed in the Properties window (see
above).
Grid Layer
The grid layer will show a cross in the center of the view. The cross is
displayed with a distance annotation, which can be used to measure
distances in the data. In addition, a compass rose with north, south,
east and west positions can be added to the cross, which can be used
as an orientation.
Multibeam Layer
 This layer has to be added to the Layers window before the multibeam
data can be shown in the view. Before any data can be displayed, the
‘Multibeam Data and Position Source’ has to be selected.
In the Layers window only the used layers will be shown, any new layer
has to be added to the list in the window. The layers that can be added to
the layer control are:
Figure 16-38 Layers which can be added to the 3D View – Standard
3D Design Model Layer

There are three different ways to display the 3D design model in the
view, Solid, Wireframe or Vertex. The color(s) for the model can be the
same as in the color table for the view or the 3D design model can be
shown with one solid color.

It is also possible to make the 3D design model transparent. The
higher the value the more transparent the model will be.
Draping Layer
A GeoTIFF file can be displayed in the view. Select in the properties of
the layer a grid model that will be used as base to drape the GeoTIFF
file over it.
The grid model is drawn in Grid Model Layer
such a way that objects In addition, the grid model can be made transparent. The higher the
further away are with less value for the transparency the more transparent the grid model will be.
resolution (detail) then The grid model can be drawn with different levels of detail (resolution).
objects close by. The level can be set in five steps from very low to very high.
Route, Runline and Waypoint Layer
In the view routes, runlines and/or waypoints can be shown.
Sea Level Layer
This layer will show a sea at the correct sea level.
The sea level has to be transparent to show the model below the sea
level. The higher the value for the transparency the more transparent
the sea level will be. It is also possible to show the sea level as a plane
with a solid color or as a ‘sea like’ texture.
16.6 Data Source Switching

The Data Source Switching editor is an editor in which the primary data
source for a selected data source can be changed.
 This editor cannot be created through the standard editor selection in the
Editing (see page 398). This editor can only be opened with the option
Tools > Data Source Switching… from the menu bar of the Editing. After it
is created, it will be available in the Displays of the Editing. See the
chapter Data Source Switch on page 405 how to setup the Data Source
Switching editor.

Figure 16-39 Data Source Switching editor
When the Data Source Switching editor is opened automatically the

channels for the different data groups, the channel for the data source
switching and a channel for the primary data source are added to the
editor. In the editor, the data source switches can be edited only for the
active logdata file.
16.6.1 Edit Data Source Switches

In the editor the edit mode as explained on page 400 applies to all the
channels in the editor except for the data source switching channel. For
this channel, a separate edit mode is created to add or delete data source
switches.
16.6.1.1 Insert a Data Source Switch

To switch from data source a data source switch has to be inserted in the
data source switching channel. Select a point in the channel and click on
the right mouse button. The only option will be Insert…. Select the option
and when there are more than two devices available in the Data Source
then the Data Source Switch Editor will be opened.
If there are only two devices available in the Data Source then the switch
will be made by the editor.

Figure 16-40 Data Source Switch Editor
Select the data group that has to become the primary data source and
use to move the selected data group to the top. Click on and
the data source switch will be inserted on the selected location. If the data
of the different data groups is different than in the lowest channel the data
will be changed from the selected location onwards.
On the location where a data source switch is inserted a cross will be
visible in the data. The size of the cross can be modified in the channel
properties of the data source switching channels by changing the value
for the dot size.
16.6.1.2 Modify a Data Source Switch

When one or more data source switches are inserted and the user is not
happy with the switches, it is possible to delete or modify the switch. Click
with the right mouse button on the start of a data source switch (this is the
cross). The two options that become available are Delete and Switch….
With Delete the data source switch will be deleted. The data source that is
active before the selected location will be active until the next data source
switch in the logdata file.
With Switch… the data source switch can be switched to one of the other
available data source switches. When this option is selected, the Data
Source Switch Editor will be opened (see above) and a different data
group can be selected as primary. When for the selected item only two
data groups are available, the switch will be done automatically.
In the data source switching channel it is also possible to move a data
source switch. Select with the left mouse button the start of a data source
switch (this is the cross) and a square is drawn around that point. Keep
the left mouse pressed and move the start point to the left or right.
16.6.2 Data Source Switching Toolbar and

Context Menu
The + and – key of the Zoom In / Out Horizontally ( )
numerics keyboard can Horizontal zoom in and out in all the channels of the editor.
also be used for the
standard Zoom In and Zoom In / Out Vertically ( )
Zoom Out. Vertical zoom in and out only in the active channel of the editor.

Zoom Window ( )
With dragging a window in the active channel a part of the channel can
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Show all the data for all the channels.
Selector ( )
Channel Partition ( )
If more than one line with data is displayed it is possible to display all
the data in one view (Overlayed) or each data line in a separate view
(Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For the view in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Scale dialog the high and low values for the y-axis.
Channel Y Scaling Mode
For the y-axis of the view three different scaling modes are possible.
Free; all the channel data have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the channel data have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the channel
data.
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on the right side of the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager window to add, remove or edit one of the
channels.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select a new channel with default
settings.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel which can be edited if the
data is editable.
Channel Properties
The properties of the active channel.
The size of the crosses can be modified by changing the dot size.
Properties
The properties of the editor.

16.7 Dekdienst
This view displays the dredge production information from one or two
suction tubes on a hopper. It is special made for one of our clients and is
therefore only with special dongles available in the Editing.
Figure 16-41 Dekdienst view
The data shown in this view is limited to the items that are defined in the
Dekdienst Channel Manager ( ). With the user can decide to
show the selected data item only in the graph (grafiek), only in the text
(tekst) at the bottom or in both.
Figure 16-42 Dekdienst Channel Manager with the items for the Dekdienst view

16.8 Line-Based Editing
The Line-Based Editing view shows channel data in relation with a
runline. Therefore the uppermost editor window shows always the survey
vessel position relative to a runline, called the off track position. The
added channel data should have a relation with that runline, for example
depth measurements from a single beam echo sounder.
There are two different Line-Based Editing views available:
 Line-Based Editing – Standard view (see page 434)
 Line-Based Editing – Multiline view (see page 436)
The multiline editor can edit data of multiple data files from the same file
set. The only restriction is that these data files have to be surveyed over
the same runline. The standard editor can edit only the data of one data
file.
16.8.1 Select Data for the Line-Based Editing

When the Line-Based Editing view is started for the first time, there will be
no channel data in the view.
In the Line-Based Editing – Standard view are two methods to add data to
the view. A quick way is to click on (Add Channel), where the
available channel data can be selected with default settings. Another way
to select data is with (Channel Manager). It opens the Channel
Manager with the options to add, edit and/or remove channel data. The
properties of a channel are accessible during adding new channel data or
by selecting . Click on ‘Graph Y Item’ in the properties to select
the channel data for the editor.
In the Line-Based Editing – Multiline is only one method available to add
the data channel to the view. With (Select Data) only one data
channel can be added or replaced with default settings.
It is possible to add an unlimited number of channel data to the Line-
Based Editing – Standard, but only one channel is active. A channel
becomes active by clicking on the data or in the channel control of the
editor. The red frame around the value in the channel control visualizes
the active channel.
Editing is only possible in the active channel, but not all channel data is
editable. If the channel data is based on other channel data, like the nadir
depth in the corrected profile computation, it cannot be edited and ‘Not
editable’ is written on the right side in the data. See the Position Editor for
more information about the editing (see page 416).

16.8.2 Line-Based Editing – Standard View
Figure 16-43 Line-Based Editing – Standard, with two stacked data channels
The Line-Based Editing – Standard view can also show data from a
second file set with the restriction that the data was surveyed over the
same runline. This data is only for comparison and cannot be edited.
Select the ‘Properties’ in the context menu and give a name for the
second file set.
To show this data select the ‘Channel Properties’ in the context menu and
enabled the option Enable under the name ‘BkgndLineDL’. This has to be
done for the each view (= channel) in the editor.
Figure 16-44 Properties (left) and Channel Properties (right) to select and
enable a second file set
In the Line-Based Editing – Standard, a profile can be shown in the

channel data. Off course, this is only relevant if the channel data is of the
same data type as the profile. To show a profile select the ‘Channel
Properties’ of the data channel, select a design model type (Profile
Design Model, 3D Design Model or Grid Model), enter the name of the
model and enabled the option Enable.

Figure 16-45 Channel Properties of the channel data to select a design model
type
Figure 16-46 Line-Based Editing – Standard; with second file set and a profile
of a grid model

16.8.3 Line-Based Editing – Multiline View
The multiline editor supports editing of only one channel. The selection of
the channel is therefore different. With ‘Select Data’ in the context menu
or with in the toolbar the channel data can be selected. The new
channel data will replace the existing channel data in the view.
Figure 16-47 Line-Based Editing – Multiline, with three surveys over the same
runline
In the Line-Based Editing – Multiline view, like in the Line-Base Editing –

Standard view, a second file set and a profile can be added to the data
(see above).
16.8.4 Line-Based Editing Toolbar and Context

Menu
of both the Line-Based Editing views. Sometimes extra items are
available in the context menu.
Zoom Window ( )
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Selector ( )
Channel Partition
If more then one line with offtrack data or selected data is displayed it

is possible to display all the related data lines in one view (Overlayed)
or each data line in a separate view (Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For both views in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Free; all the data lines have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the data lines have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the data lines.
Distance in Line Origin
The x-axis in both views is related to the runline that is used in the
editor. The origin of the x-axis can be defined on three places on the
runline.
Centerline; the origin is in the middle of the runline.
Start of Line; the origin is at the start of the runline.
End of Line; the origin is at the end of the runline, which will result in
negative values for the x-axis.
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on the right side in the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens Channel Manager to add, remove or edit one of the channels;
only in the Line-Based Editor – Standard.
Add Channel ( )
Opens Select Data to select a new channel with default settings; only
in the Line-Based Editing – Standard view.
Select Data ( )
Opens Select Data to select the channel for the Line-Based Editing –
Multiline view.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel. The data can be edited
by selecting one of the values in the list.
Channel Properties
The properties of the data that is selected in the view. Each view in the
editor has its own channel properties.
Properties
The properties of the selected view. Each view in the editor has its
own properties.

16.9 Messages
There is only one Messages view in the Editing, a Messages – System
Messages view. This view is similar to the one in the Acquisition and the
Presentation (see page 307).
Figure 16-48 Messages – System Messages view with information for the
Editing
16.10 Multibeam Area Editing

In the Multibeam Area Editing, the following views can be opened.
 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see below)
 Multibeam Area Editing – Ping view
The Multibeam Area Editing – Ping view is identical with the Ping view
(see page 476) which can be selected in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view with . The only difference is the default color table.
When the Ping view is created, it will use the same color table as the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view and when the Multibeam Area
Editing – Ping view is created the color table will be the default color
table.
16.10.1 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View

The Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view is a 3D view in which it is
possible to edit the multibeam data, create and modify a CUBE model
and grid model, modify the multibeam filters or to do a multibeam
calibration. Both the grid model and the CUBE model can be used to filter
the multibeam data in the view.
 The Multiple Area Editing – Standard view will by default always display
multibeam(1) when it is opened for the first time. This is the first
multibeam system in the Equipment list. When multiple multibeam
 systems are selected in the equipment list and the first multibeam is
unchecked then no multibeam data will be displayed in the view. For the
CUBE and Grid Model control open with the Layers window, add a
Multibeam Layer and select in the properties of the layer for the
‘Multibeam Data and Position Source’ the ‘Multibeam xyz computation’ of
the active multibeam system. For the Multibeam Filter and Multibeam
Calibration a different multibeam system can be selected.
In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view are the following modes
available:
 CUBE Model mode (see below)
 Grid Model mode (see page 446)
 Multibeam Filter mode (see page 456)
 Multibeam Calibration mode (see page 459)
 Pipe Detection mode (see page 460)

 Sound Velocity mode (see page 463)
16.10.2 CUBE Model Mode

Click on the CUBE Model Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
select the CUBE mode for the view. In the CUBE mode a CUBE model
can be generated and modified. The CUBE model can be used to filter
the multibeam data.
Select a file set before a CUBE model can be generated from the
multibeam data. If a CUBE model already exists in the project and no file
set is selected, the last used model will be displayed in the Multibeam
Area Editing – Standard view.
The CUBE model name is always the name of the selected file set. When
a new Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view is opened by default no
 CUBE model will be opened. When the file set is identical with a CUBE
model that is generated before no new CUBE model has to be generated.
Just click on in the toolbar of the view and the existing CUBE model
will be displayed.
Figure 16-49 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a CUBE model and
multibeam data both in depth color mode
16.10.2.1 CUBE
In the traditional multibeam echo sounders processing method all
measured data points are treated with the same accuracy. However, in
reality each data point has a different accuracy. The question is then how
can the different accuracies of the data points be determined, how can
the possible errors be measured, what is the impact of the errors on the

measured depths and what is then the true depth of the measured data
points.
CUBE (© 2003 University The CUBE technology (© 2003 University of New Hampshire) will give an
of New Hampshire) stands answer to these questions. The CUBE method use statistical redundancy
for Combined Uncertainty to compute the most likely measured depths (a hypothesis) from the
and Bathymetry Estimator. multibeam data with the use of all the information that is available.
The first step in the CUBE algorithm is to compute the vertical and
horizontal errors of all the soundings in the measurement by the forward
error propagation method. These errors are already calculated during the
survey and can be displayed in the Multibeam QC – Total Propagation
Errors view in the Acquisition (see page 316).
The second step is to estimate the best surface. Each sounding has a
depth estimation and the CUBE algorithm will keep all previous depth
estimations. If for a new sounding the depth estimation is within the
limitation, the previous depth of the node (cell) is not going to be changed.
The previous depth will be kept as one of the depth hypotheses and the
new depth will be treated as a new hypothesis. At the end, some nodes
will have several estimated depths (hypotheses). The algorithm will
choose the best hypothesis as the selected hypothesis and the other
hypotheses are called the alternative hypotheses. The estimate surface
will be constructed with the selected hypotheses.
The CUBE algorithm will produce two products, the CUBE surface and
the CUBE node hypotheses. For each node, the CUBE surface contains
the following data elements:
Selected hypothesis
The best-estimated surface from the CUBE algorithm.
Number of hypotheses
The total number of hypotheses on the node.
Uncertainty of the hypothesis
The posterior variance of the estimation for the selected hypothesis.
The value of uncertainty reflects the estimation confidence. Large
values means less certainty in the hypothesis.
Strength of the hypothesis
Indicates the confidence of the algorithm that the best hypothesis is
chosen as selected hypothesis, when multi hypotheses are available
for the node.
Number of soundings
The number of soundings that is used for the calculation of the
selected hypothesis for the node.
The CUBE node hypotheses will record for each node all alternatives
hypotheses with the hypothesis uncertainty and the number of soundings.

16.10.2.2 Create a CUBE Model
Figure 16-50 Create page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Create page for the CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view the cell size for the CUBE model can be defined and areas
likes wrecks or along a route can be excluded from the creation of the
model.
Cell size
Default an automatic setting of 10% of the depth of the multibeam data
is used as the cell size. It is also possible to enter a cell size, where
the user has to realize that the smaller the cell size the longer it will
take to generate the CUBE model.

If the density of the multibeam data is high, a small cell size can be
entered. However if the cell size is too small, gaps in the CUBE model
will appear.

If the cell size is too big, it is possible that the CUBE model is not
presenting the right model. This is due to the relation between the IHO
order and the cell size to determine what the best surface is for the
CUBE model.
IHO Order
The IHO order will be used to filter the data that is used for the
creation of the CUBE model. If the vertical and horizontal total
propagation error of a beam is bigger than the IHO error then the
beam will not be used for the CUBE model. See for an explanation of
the IHO order on page 330, for the vertical TPE on page 316 and for
the horizontal TPE on page 317.

Excluded areas
Areas can be excluded from the CUBE model. A file with the excluded
areas has to be selected before the CUBE model is created.
Select a file or create a new file with .
Click on to add an existing clipping polygon to the list of
It is also possible to create excluded areas. If the polygon does not exist yet, click on to
or modify an excluded area draw a new clipping polygon. This new created polygon will be added
file in the Explorer (see to the list automatically.
page 234). Click on to add an existing route to the list. To make the route
an excluded area, enter a route width and click on to add the
route width to the route.
If an area has to be removed from the list, select the polygon or route
from the list and click on to remove it from the excluded area
file.
Click on to create a new CUBE model with the settings of this
page.
16.10.2.3 Information of the CUBE Model
Figure 16-51 Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view the information of the CUBE model and one selected cell
of the model are presented.
Model
The cell size and the number of hypotheses of the CUBE model is
given.
Current surface
The current surface as presented in the view will be displayed, in the

example above the surface of most hits of the CUBE model is
displayed.
Cell
With a double click on a cell in the CUBE model the information in the
main surface of that cell will be displayed.
Strength
The strength is an indication about the quality of the depth in that
cell. Strength of 0 means that the cell contains good data. How
higher the strength (with a maximum of 5) the worse the quality of
that cell. If the cell is edited the strength becomes ‘Manual’ (=-1).
Estimated Z
The Z-value of the selected cell as from the main surface, this is
best hypothesis for this cell.
Standard deviation
The standard deviation of the selected cell.
The table will display all the hypotheses that are available for the
selected cell. The selected hypothesis for that cell is highlighted, in
the example above hypothesis 2. A combination of the hitcount and
the uncertainty will give the best estimation for the selected cell.
The best estimation does not have to be the hypothesis with the
highest hitcount and the smallest uncertainty. Here the hitcount is
not only the number of pings in the cell but also the hitcount from
the surrounding pings are used to come to the specific hypothesis.
16.10.2.4 Editing the CUBE Model
Figure 16-52 Edit page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view with one of the edit modes selected
In the Edit page cells can be removed from the main surface or data from
It is always possible to other hypotheses can be select for the main surface.
rotate and shift the view
The cells can be selected by drawing a polygon around the cells or by
using the mouse wheel as
a button. selecting one cell with the Ctrl key and a mouse click.
When one of the edit modes is selected, the Edit tab will have a red box
to indicate that one of the edit options is active (as shown in the example
above). Even when the user switches to a different page in the editor it is
still clear that one of the edit modes is active.

None
No edit mode is active.
Remove
The cursor will change to . Draw a polygon around cells or select
one cell that has to be deleted. Directly the selected data is removed
from the view.
Override
The cursor will change to . Select the hypothesis from which the
cells have to be selected by using or . The cells become green,
red or grey (see Figure 16-78 on page 469), so it is easy to see which
cells per hypothesis are not in the main surface. Draw a polygon
around the cells or select one cell that has to be moved to the main
surface. Directly the selected data will be moved to the main surface.
Golden sounding
The cursor will change to and the multibeam data will become
visible if it is not switch on. Select a beam or the line that connects the
beam and the depth value will be moved the value in the main surface.

The edit mode can be switched off by selecting the edit mode None or
click with the right mouse button in the view.
16.10.2.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with a CUBE Model
Figure 16-53 Filter page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view

In the Filter page the settings can be set to filter the multibeam data with
 the CUBE model. The filters only work on the CUBE model that is
displayed in the view. The main criterion is the vertical distance between
the multibeam data and the CUBE model.
Filter
Select one or more of the following options to reject points.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds the standard deviation
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the standard
deviation of the CUBE model cell multiplied with 1.0, 2.0 or 3.0.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds uncertainty
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the uncertainty of
the CUBE model cell multiplied with the factor as is entered here.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the value as is
entered here.
Don’t filter problem areas
The beams which are related to a CUBE model cell with a strength
> 0 will not be filtered.
Click on to start the filtering of the multibeam data.
Unfilter
Click on to add all the beams, which were rejected by the
CUBE/grid model filter, back to the multibeam data.
Instead of unfiltering all the beams, it is possible to select manually
the beams that have to be unfiltered. Check the option Enable
selection mode and select with the mouse the beams that have to
be unfiltered.
16.10.2.6 Export the CUBE Model
Figure 16-54 Export page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The displayed surface of the CUBE model can be exported to a grid

model. Check the option Show in Grid Model Editor to display the grid
model in the grid model editor after the export of the CUBE model. Click
on to start the export.
The mean beam Z deviation of all the beams relative to the main surface
can be exported to a CSV file. For each beam the mean beam Z deviation
for the four multipings (if available), the single ping and the beam angle
will be exported. Click on to start the export.

16.10.2.7 Sync the CUBE Model
Figure 16-55 Sync page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The CUBE synchronization will update the CUBE model after deleting or
undeleting multibeam data in the view.
When the option Auto sync CUBE model is checked, the CUBE model is
 automatically updated only after each delete or undelete operation in the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view.
When multibeam data is deleted with the delete mode ( ) or undeleted
with the undelete mode ( ) and the option is unchecked then the button
becomes active. Also in the tab of the Sync page, a red box
will appear to show that the multibeam data is modified (see above). Now
the CUBE model can be synchronized with the multibeam data by clicking
on . The red box stays in the Sync tab until the CUBE model is
synchronized, even when the user switch over to a different page.
If the option Auto sync CUBE model is unchecked and the Multibeam
 Area Editing – Standard view or the Editing is closed or a different file set
is opened, then a prompt will be shown to ask the user if he wants to
update (synchronize) the CUBE model with the modified multibeam data.
16.10.3 Grid Model Mode

Click on the Grid Model Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
select the Grid Model mode for the view. In the Grid Model mode a grid
model can be generated and modified. The grid model can be used to
filter the multibeam data.
Select a file set before a grid model can be generated from the multibeam
data. If a grid model already exists in the project, select the grid model
above the tabs in the left pane. This selected grid model is then the
editable grid model.

Figure 16-56 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with a grid model in
depth color mode
16.10.3.1 Create a Grid Model

Click on to create a new grid model and the Create tab will be
opened. The Create tab can only be opened with the button.
Figure 16-57 Create page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view

In the Create page, a grid model can be created from the multibeam data
that is loaded with the file set.
Create
Cell size
The cell size of the grid model. When the option 10% of depth is
checked the cell size will be calculated and will be around 10% of
the average depth of the multibeam data.
Cell data
Select which data/information from the multibeam data has to be
stored in the grid model. The Hit Count is always stored in the grid
model.
When the cell size is set and the cell data is selected click on
to create the grid model from the multibeam data as loaded
in the view.
When the grid model is created, the name of the grid model will be
displayed above the tabs in the left pane.

16.10.3.2 Information of the Grid Model
Figure 16-58 Info page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the info page the information of the grid model and of the selected cell
is displayed. Also a report of the grid model can be generated.
Grid model
The cell size and the available statistical information of the grid model
will be displayed.
Cell size
The size of the cells in the grid model.
Used cells
The total number of cells used in the grid model.
Used area
The total used area, i.e. the number of used cells multiplied by the
cell size.

Empty area
The area of cells without data, i.e. the number empty cells
multiplied by the cell size. This are the empty cells in a grid model
rectangular that is drawn around the grid model data.
Z min (deepest)
The deepest found value of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z max (highest)
The highest value found of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z average
The sum of all the values of the data types ‘Z Average’ divided by
the number of filled cells. The empty cells are not part of the
computation.
Z standard dev
The standard deviation of all the data points used to create the grid
model. With the information in each cell (Hit count, Z Average and
Standard Deviation) all the data points can be retrieved.
The standard deviation can only be computed when ‘Z Average’
exists as data type in the grid model.
Cells z std dev
The standard deviation of the standard deviations of each cell.
The formula: Cells z std dev = √ (∑(all cells std²) /number of cells).
Total hit count
Sum of all the values of the data type ‘Hit count’. This is the number
of multibeam data points used for the grid model.
Latest time
The last observed time of the data type ‘Time’. This is only when
the data type ‘Time’ exists in the grid model.
Cell info
Select a clipping polygon and click on to get in a separate
window the cell information for the selected area. If no clipping polygon
is selected the cell information is of the complete grid model.
Figure 16-59 Cell info window for the selected area
Edit cell
The cell information of a selected grid model cell. The cell can be
selected by double clicking on the cell. When the cell is selected it is
possible to edit the values.
Click on to clear all the values in the selected cell.
Select a data type and the value can be modified, click on to
set the new value.

Grid model report
Two different report styles are available; GridModelReport and
SurveyLine.
GridModelReport generates a report that gives all the information
about the selected grid model.
SurveyLine generates a report that only gives the survey lines that are
used with the grid model.
Click on to view the report in the PDS2000 Reporter. With File
> Save as… in the PDS2000 Reporter the report can be saved as a
PDF file.
16.10.3.3 Editing the Grid Model
Figure 16-60 Edit page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Edit page the data of the grid model can be edited. Cells can be
deleted and interpolated if necessary.
None
The Edit mode is switched off.
Delete
The selected cells of the grid model will be deleted.
There are three methods to delete one or more cells:
1. Delete one point by clicking on the cell with the cursor in
2. Delete more cells by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
move the cursor over the grid model data. It looks like erasing the
data.
3. A different method to delete more cells is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is
present inside the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a
polygon with line segments or it can be a free drawn polygon
(lasso).
Interpolate circular
Interpolate the gaps in the grid model with the circular interpolation. In
this interpolation all the Z data types (the Z Average, the Z Maximum
and Z Minimum, if available in the grid model) will be interpolated.

Draw with the mouse a lasso / clipping polygon and the gaps in the
lasso / polygon will be interpolated immediately.
Max gap
The maximum gap in the grid model for which the interpolation is
valid. If the gap is bigger than the max. gap then no interpolation
will be done.
Click on this button when the complete grid model has to be

interpolated with the circular interpolation.
Delete and Interpolation
Delete one or more cells and immediately the deleted cells will be
interpolated.
Draw a lasso / polygon and all the cells inside the lasso / polygon will
be deleted and immediately all the deleted cells will be interpolated.
16.10.3.4 Remove Spikes in the Grid Model
Figure 16-61 Filter page to remove spikes in the grid model in the mUltibeam
Area Editing – Standard view
In the Filter page the settings can be set to find and remove spikes in the
grid model and the removed cells will be interpolated with a circular
interpolation.
Ignore Area Options
Select clipping polygons which cover areas of the gird model that
ignored when PDS2000 is searching for spikes. This can be used to
ignore wrecks from the spike detection.

Preview Options
Check the option Show Preview when the found spikes will be shown
in the grid model. If unchecked the found spikes will immediately be
removed so no visual check can be done.
There are two options to show the detected spikes in the grid model;
Red on Green and User color.
Red on Green shows the spikes in red and the rest of the grid model in
green.
User color shows the spikes in the color as defined in the Properties
(Show Preview Color in the Grid Model Edit Layer) and the rest of the
grid model in the colors of the active color table.
Figure 16-62 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color
Filter Options
Evaluation area size
Select an evaluation area size; for each type of area a different size
for the despiking is needed. For each area a mean is calculated
and with the threshold a spike can be detected in the area.
Threshold
The threshold is a kind of standard deviation for each area.
For an irregular area a small threshold (f.i.0.5) will give more spikes
than a threshold of 5. How bigger the threshold the more
irregularity is accepted as no spike.
Selection area
The despiking can be done for the complete grid model with the
options Entire Model’. The spikes are found after on
is clicked.
With Select area select an area of the grid model by drawing a
lasso around the area with spikes. The spikes are found when the
lasso is drawn.
or
The ‘Find Spikes’ button is only active when as selection area the
entire model is selected.
Click on the button to find the spikes in the grid model.
The ‘Find & Remove Spikes’ button is only available when the option
Show Preview is unchecked; the detected spikes will be removed
immediately after they are detected.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible. It is

possible that an area in the grid model shows spikes that are not really
spikes, f.i. a wreck.
Click on the button and draw a lasso around that area and it will be
ignored in the spike detection and it gets it original grid model colors
back or becomes green.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible in the view.
Click on the button to remove the spikes. The spikes will be replaced
by interpolated data from the cells around the spike(s).
16.10.3.5 Filter the Multibeam Data with Grid Model
Figure 16-63 Beam Filter page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
In the Beam Filter page the settings can be set to filter the multibeam data
with a grid model. The main criterion is the vertical distance between the
multibeam data and the grid model.
Filter
Distance from grid model exceeds standard deviation
the beam and the grid model is larger than the standard deviation
of the grid model cell multiplied with the factor as is entered here.
Separate values can be entered for above and below the grid
model.
Distance from grid surface exceeds
the beam and the grid model surface is larger than the value as is
entered here.
Separate values can be entered for above and below the grid
model.

Both conditions are met
A beam will be rejected when it is rejected in both the above-
mentioned filters, ‘Distance from grid model exceeds standard
deviation’ and ‘Distance from grid surface exceeds’.
Reject when no grid surface
When checked, the multibeam data outside the selected grid model
will be rejected.
Click on to start the filtering of the multibeam data.
 The filtered data will be visible in the view with the color of the
CUBE/grid model filter, if the Beam Color Mode is set on Filter.
Unfilter
Click on to add all the beams, which are rejected by the
CUBE/grid model filter, back to the multibeam data.
Instead of unfiltering all the beams, it is possible to select manually
the beams that have to be unfiltered. Check the option Enable
selection mode and select with the mouse the beams that have to
be unfiltered.
16.10.3.6 Export the Grid Model
Figure 16-64 Export page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The mean beam Z deviation of all the beams relative to the grid model
can be exported to a CSV file. For each beam the mean beam Z deviation
for the four multipings (if available), the single ping and the beam angle
will be exported. Click on to start the export.
16.10.3.7 Sync the Grid Model
Figure 16-65 Sync page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view
The grid model synchronization will update the grid model after deleting or
undeleting multibeam data in the view.

When the option Auto sync grid model is checked, the grid model is
 automatically updated only after each delete or undelete operation in the
When multibeam data is deleted with the delete mode ( ) or undeleted
with the undelete mode ( ) and the option Auto sync grid model is
unchecked then the button becomes active. Also in the tab of
the Sync page, a red box will appear to show that the multibeam data is
modified (see above). Now the grid model can be synchronized with the
multibeam data by clicking on . The red box stays in the Sync
tab until the grid model is synchronized, even when the user switch over
to a different page.
If the option Auto sync grid model is unchecked and the Multibeam Area
 Editing – Standard view or the Editing is closed or a different file set is

opened, then a prompt will be shown to ask the user if he wants to update
(synchronize) the grid model with the modified multibeam data.
16.10.4 Multibeam Filter Mode

Click on the Multibeam Filter Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
select the filters mode for the view. In this mode the multibeam filters for
each file of the file set can be set or modified.
The filters used or modified in the Acquisition will be shown in the data
bar of the Editing as small triangles. Each triangle shows a location in the
data file where a filter was added or modified.
At the moment the filter mode contains only one page, called Filter. The
Filter page shows the filter settings for the current location of the data file.
See page 324 for the working and actions of the multibeam filters.

Figure 16-66 Filter page for the multibeam filters in the Multibeam Area Editing
– Standard view
Multibeam
Before the multibeam filters can be added or modified, select the right
multibeam at the top of the page. If more than one multibeam is
available in the Equipment list then one of these multibeam systems
can be selected. By default always the first system in the Equipment
list is selected.

Filter Positions
This are location of the filter(s) as set in the file(s) of the selected file
set. The location is also visible as small triangles in the data bar of the
Editing.
It is possible to select A filter position can be added in any location in the data file. Ensure
multiple filter positions the data locator is on the location the user wants a new multibeam
before modifying the filters. filter and click on to insert a new filter position. Set the
Use the Ctrl key or Shift different filter values to the requirements and click on to
key to select multiple filter
activate the new filter position. If the filter position is activated, a
positions. Then it is
possible to add/remove recache takes place to update the data from the current (new) filter
filters for all the selected position to the next filter position or to the end of the data file.
filter positions at the same To modify a filter select the right filter position from the list of filter
time. positions and changes the required filter settings. Click on
to update the location in the other views to the filter position location.
Click on to activate the modifications.
In case a filter position should be removed from the file, select it in the
list of filter positions and click on in the editor.
Filters
For the selected filter location in the Filter positions the active filters
will be displayed.
With a different filter can be added to the list. The new added
filter will be placed in the order as defined in the selection list, this
means that most of the time the new filters is not added at the end of
the display list. Modify the setting for the new filter and click on
to add the new filter to the selected filter position.
When a filter is not necessary anymore, it can be removed from the
display list. Uncheck the filter and click on to update the list.
The removed filter can be added again and the last filter settings for
that filter will be used.
Attributes
A complete swath will be rejected when the percentage of rejected
beams is more than the given percentage.
There are three methods to use sound velocity information in the
multibeam computation.
- no sound velocity profile will be used.
- a sound velocity profile can be selected; select the sound
velocity profile that has to be used in the multibeam computation.
- data from the sound velocity profile sensor that is selected
in the Equipment will be used in the multibeam computation.
When a sound velocity profile is used, it is possible to use the surface
sound velocity, detected by the multibeam system, as extra entry in
the sound velocity profile. Check the option Use surface SV as first
entry in table to do so.
Filter changes
When a filter position is added or deleted, or when a filter is added or
unchecked or when the attributes settings are modified then both
buttons becomes active. Click on to apply the modification(s)
or click on to set the settings back to the settings before the
modification(s).

16.10.5 Multibeam Calibration Mode
Click on the Multibeam Calibration Mode ( ) above the left pane of the
view to select the calibration mode for the view. In this mode a multibeam
calibration with a file set can be done.
Figure 16-67 Calibration mode with a Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view
and the three Profile views
See for a detailed explanation of the multibeam calibration the manual

Multibeam Calibration (the file Multibeam Calibration.pdf in the folder
‘manuals).

16.10.6 Pipe Detection Mode
Click on the Pipe Detection Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
open the pipe detection mode for the view. In this mode, an as-laid pipe
route can be generated from the multibeam data.
Figure 16-68 Pipe Detection mode in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard
view with a detected pipe

16.10.6.1 Create Pipe Route
Figure 16-69 Create page to create a pipe route in the pipe mode of the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view
Pipe route
Select an existing track guidance pipe route that represents the as laid
pipe route; this pipe route will be overwritten with new pipe route data.
Or create a new pipe route with . This new file will
be automatically selected as the as laid pipe route.
As Planned pipe route
Select a track guidance pipe route that represents the planned pipe
route.
Pipe detect diameter
The pipe diameter, which will be used in the correlation filter. With the
pipe diameter, also the depth of the pipe can be calculated.
Use Correlation Filter
If checked, the correlation filter will be used. The correlation filter is
looking for a shape in the multibeam data like shown below.
The correlation filter works Pipe diameter

only when the pipe is on
the seafloor. If the pipe is
spanning or a part is in the
seafloor this filter is not Pipe diameter
working.
Figure 16-70 Correlation filter with a pipe diameter
Correlation factor
In general, the correlation factor will be between 20% and 80%.

The value will depend on the how the pipe is detected in the
multibeam data (2 or more hits).
Use Anomaly Filter
This filter uses the irregularity in the multibeam data to detect the pipe.
Mean surface length
Over a width of the surface length, a smoothed profile will be
generated and a top in the smoothed profile has to be detected.
This top should be lower than the top in the original multibeam
profile over the same width. If the difference in Z-value between the
two tops is bigger than the detection threshold this top point will be
detected as the top of the pipe.
Detection threshold
The maximum allowed distance between the smoothed and the
original multibeam profile.
Reject detection exceeding offtrack to a planned route
The detected pipe locations are rejected which are further away than
the maximum offtrack.
Maximum offtrack
The maximum offtrack which will be used to reject pipe detected
locations (see above).
Detection interval
The interval along the pipe route where the pipe will be detected.
Average length
Over the average length along the pipe route a mean offtrack and Z is
calculated to show that position as a circle in the editor.
Click on this button if only in the selected file the pipe has to be
detected.
Click on this button if in all the files from the selected file set the pipe
has to be detected.
Show pipe detection
The detected pipe will be shown in the view.
16.10.6.2 Pipe Edit Mode

Next to the standard functionality of this editor, an extra pipe edit option is
available. After the pipe is detected, the user can modify the pipe
detection by clicking on a solid circle in the view (in the example the solid
circles are in red). From the locations of the solid circles, the as-laid pipe
route is generated.
If the detected pipe location is wrong and has to be deleted, click with the
right mouse button on the solid circle and select the option ‘Delete’. When
the gap between two solid circles becomes is too big to define the pipe
route, extra circles can be inserted. Click with the right mouse button on
the location in the pipe where a solid circle has to be inserted and select
the option ‘Insert’.
It is not necessary to delete a solid circle when it is out of position. Click
with the left mouse button on that solid circle and the editor will look like
the figure below. Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the circle
in the editor in the grey plane. It can be difficult to move the solid circle to
the right location. It is easier to move the circle only along the horizontal
or vertical axis (the black lines) and repeat this until the right location is

found. Move around in the view to check if the solid circle is on the right
position.
Figure 16-71 Edit pipe option in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view
16.10.7 Sound Velocity Editor Mode

Click on the Sound Velocity Mode ( ) above the left pane of the view to
open the sound velocity editor. The editor is part of the Svp Edit Profile
view which shows the current sound velocity profile with a profile of a
selected area. Modify the sound velocity profile and the impact of the
modification is visible in the profile view next to the sound velocity profile.
To know where the profile is drawn the 3D view from the Multibeam Area
Editing is still open.

Figure 16-72 Svp Edit Profile view with a sound velocity profile view on the left
and a profile view on the right with above the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard
view
When the view is opened, in the data of the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view a profile is drawn on the current record location. In the
Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view the profile can be modified if
needed. A new profile can be drawn with from the toolbar of the Svp
Edit Profile view.
Next to the current sound velocity profile, a second sound velocity profile
can be selected with the option that it can be edited. Both sound velocity
profiles will be displayed on the left side in the view. In the sound velocity
profile view on the left side, the small boxes can be selected and dragged
around in the view to modify the sound velocity profile.
In the left pane in the view some actions/options can be selected.
Edit file name
Select a sound velocity profile that has to be edited. This can be the
same sound velocity profile as the current sound velocity profile or it
can be a different sound velocity profile.
The selected sound velocity profile is displayed in red with small boxes
which can be moved.
The selected sound velocity profile will be directly assigned to the data
shown in the profile. The user can see immediately what the influence
is of the sound velocity profile on the multibeam data.
Use Surface Sv
Select this option when the surface sound velocity has to be used in
the editable sound velocity profile.
The location of the surface sound velocity is displayed as a white dot
in the sound velocity profile.
Preview Mode
Each modification of the sound velocity profile will update the

multibeam profile in the right view.
Single File; select this option when a modification has to update only
the data of the active log data file.
Multi File; select this option when a modification has to update the data
of all log data files. Even the log data files that use a different sound
velocity profile get then (only as preview) the modified sound velocity
profile.
The Multi File option can be used to modify the sound velocity profile
for a file set that use the same sound velocity profile. If the data of the
file set is not matching due to the sound velocity profile then with some
small modifications of the sound velocity profile the data can be
adjusted.
Filter Update
In the Multibeam Filter Mode of the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard
view the sound velocity profile can be selected as attribute (see page
458). When a different sound velocity profile is selected a new filter
position will be added at the location of the current record (see page
458).
The editable sound velocity profile can be saved and a new filter
position will be added with the new sound velocity profile.
The editable sound velocity profile can be saved and the current
filter position will be updated with the new sound velocity profile.
16.10.8 Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and

Context Menu
of the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view. Also extra items are
available in the context menu.
Hide Pane ( )
Toggles the left pane of the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view
The + and – key of the on/off.
numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom Zoom Functions ( , , )
In and Zoom Out. Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
The scale factor can also Vertical Zoom Functions ( , )
be changed with the Ctrl Increase and Decrease the scale factor of the Z-axis of the data.
key + mouse wheel or Ctrl
+ ‘numerical + or -‘ keys. Follow Vessel ( )
Toggles the follow vessel mode on/off.
Show Spotlight ( )
the key ‘o’.
Pan ( )
view.
Measure ( )

Esc-key.
Save Snapshot
Draw Polygon
Draw a clipping polygon in the view.
Create Detail View… ( )
Click on the arrow to select the type of view that has to be created;
Box view, Profile view or Ping view.
Create Box View
Click on a location in the view and draw a line to create a box. The
Moved the cursor in the
box width can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
Multibeam Area Editing
over the box, the box will grippers. A 3D Box view will be opened with a profile of the
be highlighted and the selected area (see page 417).
cursor will change to a Create Profile View
hand. Keep the left mouse Click on a location in the view and draw a line. The width of the
button pressed and the box
profile box can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
can be moved.
grippers. A Profile view will be opened with the profile of the
selected area (see page 484).
Create Ping View
Click on a location in the view and a Ping view will be opened with
the ping from the selected location (see page 476).
 If a Box or Profile view already exists and a Box or Profile view is

selected again, the new data will be opened in a new view.
The drawn box of the active Box or Profile view will be displayed in the
 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view. Click on the box and the box
is highlighted and the (side) grippers can be used to resize/move the
box.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
mode.
CUBE Layer ( )

view.
CUBE Color Mode ( )
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed.
Number of Hypotheses
The CUBE model is displayed with colors, which will present the
number of hypotheses, with green for 1 hypothesis to red for the
maximum number of hypotheses available in the CUBE model.
Figure 16-73 CUBE model with the number of hypotheses as color

mode
Main Surface Strength

The CUBE model is displayed with colors which will present the
strength of each cell in the CUBE model, with green for a strength =
0 to red for a strength = 5 and grey for manually edit with a strength
of -1. Strength of 0 is good and a strength of 5 is bad.
Figure 16-74 CUBE model with the main surface strength as color mode

Depth
The main surface of the CUBE model will be displayed in the colors
of the active color table.
Figure 16-75 CUBE model with the depth as color mode
Hit Count
The CUBE model is displayed with the colors that will present the
number of hit counts per cell, with green for a hit count of 1 to red
for the maximum number of hit counts in the CUBE model.
Figure 16-76 CUBE model with the hit count as color mode

Uncertainty
The CUBE model is displayed with the colors which will present the
uncertainty (= a kind of standard deviation) per cell, with green for
the smallest uncertainty to red for the biggest uncertainty in the
CUBE model.
Figure 16-77 CUBE model with the uncertainty as color mode
Selected in Main Surface

The main surface of the CUBE model will be displayed in grey
colors. In a hypothesis surface, the data will be displayed in green
when it is selected in the main surface and in red when it is not
selected.
Figure 16-78 Hypothesis 1 surface of the CUBE model with the selected
data in main surface as color mode
CUBE Surface ( )
Different surfaces can be selected:
Main
The best surface as calculated in the CUBE model.

Hypothesis
The surface with one of the hypotheses of the CUBE model. Use
and to go through all the available hypotheses.
Lowest
The surface with the lowest values from all the hypotheses in the
CUBE model.
Highest
The surface with the highest values from all the hypotheses in the
CUBE model.
Most Hits
The surface with the for each cell the hypothesis with the most hits
in the CUBE model.
Closest to Average
The surface with the for each cell the hypothesis that is closest to
the average of all the hypotheses in the CUBE model.
Multibeam Layer ( )
Beam Color Mode ( )
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes: File Set,
Depth, Filter, Statistics, Multiping sequence, Sonar head and
Detection. The different color modes help to analyze the multibeam
data. See page 425 for more information about the beam color mode.

The laser scan data can be shown in different color modes:
Laser Color
The laser scan data is shown with a brown/grey color.
Figure 16-79 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color
Laser Intensity
In the laser scan data the intensity of the laser scan data is logged.
This intensity can be used as color mode to display the laser scan
data in a grey scale.
With the items Start Brightness Ramp (SBR) and Brightness Ramp
Range (BRR) in the Properties of the view the brightness of the
intensity can be defined.
 From 0 – SBR:
The data is displayed with the intensity as received from the
laser scan.
 From SBR – (BRR+SBR):
laser scan plus an extra intensity value started at SBR with 0
and ends at BRR+SBR with 1. Between SBR and BRR+SBR it
will be linear interpolated. This means that the data further away
gets an extra intensity to make that data more clear in the view.

 From BRR onwards:
laser scan plus the extra intensity value 1.
Below two picture with different brightness settings are displayed.
The first has SBR=50 and BRR=50, while the second has 20 and
80. This means that in the second the extra brightness starts at
20m so more laser scan data get extra intensity what can be seen
that the data in the front is brighter.
Figure 16-80 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with
BSR=50 and BRR=50

Figure 16-81 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with
BSR=20 and BRR=80
Laser Color + Intensity
Figure 16-82 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Color +
Intensity

Beam Color Mode
The laser scan data is shown with the color mode as selected in
the beam color mode.
Figure 16-83 Laser scan data with the Beam Color Mode Depth
Show Edit Circle ( )

Toggles the edit circle on/off.
Only Show Edit Circle Beams ( )
Toggles between showing only the multibeam areas that are covered
by the edit circle or showing all the data.
Increase/Decrease Edit Circle Size ( , )
The radius of the edit circle can be increased and decreased.
The areas covered by the edit circle will be displayed in high
resolution.
When the Editing runs out of memory it tries to reduce the size of the
edit circle. When the edit circle reaches the minimal size it starts
rendering all areas in low resolution.
To increase the memory to solve this problem see the chapter Memory
Improvement on page 12.
This option is only active The multibeam data that is rejected by one or more of the checked
when the option Only multibeam filters in the list will be displayed in the view. Therefore, it
Show Valid Beams ( ) is will be possible to see what the impact is of one or more multibeam
off. filters on the data.

It is possible that a data point is rejected by several filters. The data
 point gets the color of the first filter in the list that rejects the point.
When this filter is unchecked the data point gets the color of the next
filter that rejects the point.
Ignore Filters ( )

polygon, which have to be bigger then the ignore filters area, and all
When there are sonar targets Draw a box around an area in the sonar view that has to be saved as a
available, they will be sonar target.
displayed in the editor. To add The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
sonar targets a grid model has Targets Layer, which will be created when the first sonar target is
to be added to the view. selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the editor, a context menu
Plan Views’ on page 355.
the editor, in other views and from the active sonar targets file. Along
with the sonar targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images
of the sonar targets will be deleted.
Layer Control ( )
Properties ( )

16.11 Numerics View
At the moment only one Numerics view is available in the Editing.
16.11.1 Numerics – Sonar Targets View
Figure 16-84 Numerics – Sonar Targets view
The Numerics – Sonar Targets view is the same view as is available in

the Acquisition. It is a view with a table where the information about the
created sonar targets is displayed.
The displayed sonar targets are stored in the sonar targets file as created
or selected in the Project Configuration (see page 63). The sonar targets
file name is displayed in the caption of the view; ‘Sonar Targets 4’ in the
example above.
Double click on a sonar target will open the Sonar Targets View with the
GeoTIFF image and the information which can be modified (see page
491).
The user can select in the Properties which columns have to be displayed
in the view. The Properties can be opened through the context menu.
In the context menu next to the Properties two other options are available;
delete the selected sonar target or delete all sonar targets. The delete
implement that the sonar target(s) will be deleted in the views and from
the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar target(s) the
corresponding GeoTIFF file(s) of the image of the sonar target(s) will be
deleted.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets View
on page 491.
16.12 Ping View

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view a ping profile can be
drawn with Create Ping View in the option Create Detail View… ( ).
The ping will be drawn in a separate Ping view.
 The ping as displayed in the Ping view is only motion compensated and
not geo-referenced.

Figure 16-85 Ping view with one ping
The ping that is displayed in the Ping view will be highlighted in the
Figure 16-86 Ping view with 5 pings
With the option 2D Side Front ( ) the standard 2D Ping view (Front
view) as shown above can be changed to a 2D Side view.

Figure 16-87 Side Ping view with 100 pings
When more pings are selected in the Ping view, then also more pings will
be highlighted in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see below).
Figure 16-88 Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view with 250 highlighted
pings which are displayed in the Ping view
The editing in the Ping view is similar as the editing in the other 3D views
(see page 416).

When the Ping view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
16.12.1 Ping Toolbar and Context Menu

of the Ping view.
2D View ( )
Toggles between a 3D view (Out) and the Ping view (In).
2D Side Front ( )
Toggles between a front view (Out) and a side view (In). This option is
only available in the 2D Ping view.
Zoom Functions ( , , , )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Auto Zoom Extents.
The mouse wheel or the + and – key of the numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom In and Zoom Out.
Zoom Horizontal Functions ( , )
Zoom In or Zoom Out in the horizontal direction.
Use the Shift-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the horizontal direction.
Zoom Vertical Functions ( , )
Zoom In and Zoom Out in the vertical direction.
Use the Ctrl-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the vertical direction.
Pan ( ).
view.
Measure ( )
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
on/off.
Beam Color Mode ( )
color mode.

Number of Pings ( )
The number of pings in the view can be selected. The extra added
pings are the next pings in time from the selected ping.
off.
Ignore Filters ( )

Export Multibeam Points To ASCII…
exported to a file with extension ASC .
Layer Control ( )
Properties ( )

16.13 Position Editing
The Position Editing – Standard view can show the selected position
computation graphically.
Figure 16-89 Position Editing – Standard
In the Position Editor by default the grid model as selected in the

Multibeam Area Editing view will be displayed in the grid model layer.
16.13.1 Position Editing – Standard Toolbar and

Context Menu
numerics keyboard can Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
In and Zoom Out. Pan ( )
button.
Select All
Select all the data points of the active data layer.
Draw Route
A track guidance route can be drawn in the position editor.

Redraw
Redraw the data in the editor.
Measure ( )
Measure the distance between two selected points in the editor.
Save Snapshot
Save the data of the Position Editing – Standard view as a JPG or
BMP file.
When there are sonar Draw a box around an area in the sonar view that has to be saved as a
targets available they will sonar target.
be displayed in the editor. The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
To add or delete sonar Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
targets a grid model can be selected.
added to the Layer Control When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the editor a context menu
to make the area visible. becomes available for that sonar target. With a right mouse click on or
Plan Views’ on page 355.
the editor, in other views and from the active sonar targets file. Along
with the sonar targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images
of the sonar targets will be deleted.
Data Layer Control ( )
Opens the Data Layer Control window where only position data can be
added or modified.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window where very quickly position data can
be added with default settings.
Track Color Mode ( )
The tracks in the position editor can be presented in different colors:
By Layer
The tracks are colored as defined in the position data layers. See
Figure 16-89 above.
Gps Status
The tracks are colored with the color of their GPS status as is
displayed in the editor.

Figure 16-90 Position Editing – Standard with the tracks colored with
their GPS status
File Color
The tracks are colored with the color as is given in the databar.
on/on/off.
The settings of the grid model in the editor (see page 361).
Layer Control ( )
Overview of all used background and foreground layers. Also new
layers can be added to the list.
Properties ( )
The properties of the editor.

16.13.2 Selecting Position Data for Editing
When the Position Editing – Standard view is selected for the first time,
the primary position data source is already selected. A quick way to add
data is to click on , where a different position computation can be
selected with default settings.
Another way to select data is with . It opens the Data Layer Control
window with the options to add, edit and/or remove position data layers.
The properties of a data layer are accessible during adding a new data
layer or by selecting .
Multiple position data layers can be added to the editor, but only one layer
is active. A data layer becomes active by clicking on the data layer in the
info panel at the bottom of the editor. The red frame around the colored
square visualizes that the layer is active.
16.13.3 Dead Reckoning

During a survey it is possible that the position is lost due to bridges or
other obstacles. In the Acquisition in the position system the kalman
filtering can be used to predict the positions when the position is lost.
 A better method to fill the gaps in the position is by using the edit option
Fill Gap from the context menu in the Position Editor as is explained on
page 416.
16.14 Profile View

In the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view a profile can be drawn with
Create Profile View in the option Create Detail View… ( ). This profile
will be drawn in a separate Profile view. The different types of data
(multibeam, grid model and/or CUBE model) that are displayed in the
Multibeam Area Editing view will also be displayed in the Profile view.
It possible to have several Profile views opened at the same time. The
 drawn box from the active Profile view will be the only drawn box that is
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing – Standard view (see page 466).

Figure 16-91 Profile view with multibeam data and a grid model
The editing in the Profile view is similar as the editing in the other 3D
views (see page 416).
 The data in the Profile view will not be updated when in the Multibeam
Area Editing – Standard view a new grid model or CUBE model is added.
When the Profile view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
16.14.1 Profile Toolbar and Context Menu

of the Profile view.
Define Profile ( )
A new profile box can be drawn in the Multibeam Area Editing –
Standard view. The existing profile box will be deleted.
2D View ( )
Toggles between the 3D Box view (Out) and the Profile view (In). See
for a detailed explanation of the 3D Box view on page 417.
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Auto Zoom Extents.
The mouse wheel or the + and – key of the numerics keyboard can
also be used for the Zoom In and Zoom Out.
The Auto Zoom Extents is a switch on/off button. When on and the
profile is changed/moved in the Multibeam Area Editing all the data will
be shown in the 3D Box view. Will automatically switch off when zoom
in or zoom out (also with mouse wheel) is used.
Zoom Horizontal Functions ( , )
Zoom In or Zoom Out in the horizontal direction.
Use the Shift-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the horizontal direction.
Zoom Vertical Functions ( , )
Zoom In and Zoom Out in the vertical direction.

Use the Ctrl-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the vertical direction.
Pan ( ).
view.
Show Spotlight ( )
the key ‘o’. Only available in the 3D mode.
Measure ( )
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
Profile Box Layer ( )
Toggles the box around the data on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
mode.
CUBE Layer ( )
view.
CUBE Color Mode ( )
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed. See page
467 for more information about the different CUBE color modes.

CUBE Surface ( )
Different CUBE surfaces can be selected to display in the view. See
page 469 for more information about the different CUBE surfaces.
Multibeam Layer ( )
Beam Color Mode ( )
color mode.
Increase/Decrease Point Size
off.
Ignore Filters ( )

Export Multibeam Points To ASCII…
exported to a file with extension ASC.

Layer Control ( )
Properties ( )
16.15 Sonar
At the moment the Sonar is not an editor it is only a viewer for side scan
sonar data or for snippets data. For both types of data, a separate viewer
is available; the Sonar – Sidescan view and the Sonar – Snippets view.
Figure 16-92 Sonar – Sidescan view

Figure 16-93 Sonar – Snippets view
In both viewers, the data can be moved to the left or right with the left or
right arrow key on the keyboard. Next to the zoom buttons ( and )
the keys ‘+’ and ‘-’ on the numerics keyboard can be used to zoom in and
out in the view.
16.15.1 Sonar View Toolbar and Context Menu

of the Sonar views.
Auto-Recache ( )
Toggles the Automatic Recache on/off.
Automatic recaching of the snippets or side scan sonar data will be
done on attribute changes and on editing dependent data (like
 positioning data). There will be no re-caching when the multibeam data
is edited.
Pending Updates ( )
This button becomes active when the Auto-Recache is off and an
attribute change or editing of the data took place. Now the user can
 decide when the recache of the side scan sonar or snippets data is
started. Click on to start the recache.
numerics keyboard can Zoom in and out in the view.
In and Zoom Out. Brightness ( , )
Increase (lighter) and Decrease (darker) the Threshold.
Contrast ( , )
Increase and Decrease the Gain.

TVG ( , )
Increase and Decrease the TVG (see page 380).
Auto Scaling ( )
Toggles between Auto Scaling Off (Out) and On (In) (see page 380).
Click on to activate the Lambert’s Law Corrected ( )
changes caused by the Toggles between a Lambert’s Law correction Off (Out) and On (In)
Lambert’s Law correction (see page 381).
on/off.
Ping Selection ( )
Select one of the four pings or all the pings to be displayed in the view.
Lines/Dots ( )
Toggles between Dot view (Out) and Line view (In).
Speed Correction ( )
Toggles between Speed Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see page
380).
Invert Colors ( )
Toggles between a black background (Out) and a white background
(In).
Click on to activate the Slant Range Correction ( )
changes caused by the Toggles between Slant Range Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see
slant range correction page 381).
on/off.
Save Snapshot ( )
Save the display as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw a box around an area in the sonar view that has to be saved as a
sonar target.
selected.
Sonar Views’ on page 381.
See the Sonar Targets view below for more information.
Layer Control ( )
removed. At the moment only the Active Sonar Targets Layer is
available in the Layers window.
Properties ( )
The above-mentioned settings in the view.
The color palette can be set on rust or gray.
 If the colors are inverted with

and are also inverted.
, the functions of the buttons ,

16.16 Sonar Targets View
The Sonar Targets view is a view that will be created for each sonar
target that is created or selected. The view is a type of plan view with as
extra a sonar target info table.
In the caption of the Sonar Targets view is visible in which view (Sonar –
Snippets view, Sonar – Sidescan view or Position Editor) the sonar target
is created or selected.
Figure 16-94 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three
different views
When in the Sonar – Snippets view or Sonar – Sidescan view a box is

drawn around a target (see page 490), a picture of that target will be
created as a GeoTIFF. Because this GeoTIFF is geo-referenced the
picture will have a different shape and orientation than the original box
drawn in the view.
When in the Position Editor a box a drawn (see page 482), a part of the
grid model around the drawn box will be used to generate the GeoTIFF of
the grid model. This picture is always north up filled with grid model data.
The Sonar target info displayed below the view can be modified by the
user. The items Name, Classification, Length, Width, Height and
Description can be set, the other items are fixed or are calculated when
the target is created.
Click on the field right of one of these items and enter the text or value.
For the Length, Width and Height the button ( ) in the toolbar of the
view can be used to do an exact measurement (see above). The
Classification can also be defined in the context menu of the sonar target;
see for more information the sonar targets options on page 381.

When the Editing is closed, After items are modified click on to save the modifications to the
a dialog pops up to ask to sonar target file as mentioned as first item in the table. The name of the
save the changes when sonar target file can be set in the Project Configuration (see page 63).
this is not done yet.
Click on to delete the sonar target from the sonar target file. A
sonar target can also be deleted with the option in the context menu of
the sonar target.
All collected sonar targets will be saved in the selected sonar targets file,
 which is available in the Sonar Targets Database of the Explorer (see

page 248). The corresponding GeoTIFF files are also stored in the Sonar
Targets Database of the Explorer.
At the moment a set of sonar targets consist of one or more sonar targets
 files and all the corresponding GeoTIFF files. Don’t forget to copy the
GeoTIFF files when a copy is made of the sonar targets. When no
GeoTIFF files are available no picture is available anymore.
16.16.1 Sonar Targets View – Toolbar and

Context Menu
The items in the toolbar and in the context menu of the Sonar Targets
view are:
numerics keyboard or the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
used for the Zoom In and Pan ( )
Zoom Out. Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button.
Measure ( )
Figure 16-95 Measure window in the Sonar Targets view

Measure Object LWH ( )
This option is to measure the Length, Width and Height of the object in
the sonar target GeoTIFF as displayed in the view.
By default the option is set on Disabled, so no measurement can be
done. Select one of the options Length, Width or Height and the cursor
will change to a cross. With a mouse click the measurement can be
started, click again to stop the measurement. The measured distance

is entered in the table below the view. With a right mouse click the
options can be stopped (or use the option Disabled).
Layer Control ( )
The raster layer and grid layer are available in the Layer Control.
Properties ( )
In the Properties the background color can be modified.
16.17 Tide Station

In the Editing a Tide Station – Viewer and a Tide Station – Editor are
available. The editor is the same editor as discussed in the chapter
‘Explorer’ on page 240. This editor has no relation with the selected file
set and no buttons in the Editing are valid for this editor.
16.17.1 Tide Station – Viewer
Figure 16-96 Tide Station – Viewer with two tide stations
The Tide Station – Viewer shows only the tide data that is used for the
data in the selected file set. If there is no tide data applied to the data in
the Editing this viewer will be empty.
It is possible to modify the tide data in the viewer, but the tide data will not
 be treated as PDS2000 log data like all the other data in the Editing. Any
modification made in the viewer will modify the tide values files in the
Explorer (see page 223), but not the data in the other editors. If tide data
 is modified in the viewer or in the editor, use the option Tools > Apply Tide
to update the other data in the Editing.

16.18 Time-Based Editing
The Time-Based Editing can show any data from the data files against a
time scale.
In the Editing are three Time-Based Editing views available, the Time-
Based Editing – Standard view, the Time-Based Editing – Echogram view
and the Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph view.
16.18.1 Select Data for the Time-Based Editing

When the Time-Based Editing is started for the first time, there will be no
channel data in the editor.
A quick way to add data is to click on (Add Channel), where the
available channel data can be selected with default settings. Another way
to select data is with (Channel Manager). It opens the Channel
Manager with the options to add, edit and/or remove channel data. The
properties of a channel are accessible during adding new channel data or
by selecting . Click on item ‘Graph Y Item’ in the properties to
select the channel data for the editor.
The properties of the editor are accessible through the context menu. The
option Channel Partition allows the user to choose between overlaid or
stacked channels.
It is possible to add an unlimited number of channel data to the Time-
Based Editing, but only one channel is active. A channel becomes active
by clicking on the data or in the channel control of the editor. The red
frame around the value in the channel control visualizes the active
channel.
Editing is only possible in the active channel, but not all channel data is
editable. In case channel data is based on other channel data, then it
cannot be edited and ‘Not editable’ is written on the right side in the data.
See the Position Editor for more information about the editing (see page
416).

16.18.2 Time-Based Editing – Standard View
Figure 16-97 Time-Based Editing – Standard
Various sensor values are relevant against a time scale. For example,
data from a VRU shown in time shows where the VRU went wrong. When
at the same time a Position Editing – Standard view is viewed, it can be
shown where the wrong VRU data is located. This may help analyzing
data from the viewed sensors.
All data is logged in a time sequence. However, it is not always useful to
show logged data in time; for example, a shallow depth recording when
viewed in time indicates there was a shallow depth at some time during
the survey but not where the shoal is located.

16.18.3 Time-Based Editing – Echogram View
Figure 16-98 Time-Based Editing – Echogram view with 2 echo sounder

channels with graphical trace information
In this view, the echo sounder channel data with its graphical trace
information can be displayed.
When no color table is available for the graphical trace a default color
table will be generated when the channel data is loaded in the view. In the
Channel Properties in the context menu of the view a different color table
can be selected if necessary.
With the Add Echogram ( ) option only the echo sounder channels can
be selected and added to the Time-Based Editing.
The echo sounder data can be edited with a special option in the toolbar,
called digitizing ( ). See page 498 for an explanation of the digitizing.

16.18.4 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph
View
This Time-Based Editing view is specially made for one client. It will show,
next to the selected data (for this client the load information),
automatically the dredge statuses and the delays. These dredge statuses
and delays are selected in the Acquisition in the Manual Input – Dredge
Status view (see page 304).
Figure 16-99 Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph
16.18.5 Time-Based Editing Toolbar and Context

Menu
Zoom Window ( )
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Selector ( )
Channel Partition ( )
If more than one line with data is displayed it is possible to display all
the data in one view (Overlayed) or each data line in a separate view
(Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For the view in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y

Free; all the channel data have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the channel data have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the channel
data.
Toggles the ‘Channel Control’ on the right side of the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager window to add, remove or edit one of the
channels.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select a new channel with default
settings.
Add Echogram ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select one of the echo sounder
channels with default settings for the view. This is only available in the
Time-Based Editing – Echogram view.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel which can be edited if the
data is editable.
Digitizing ( )
The cursor is changed to a cross to edit the echo sounder data. Next
to the standard edit mode (see page 400), two new methods are
available to move the data in the view when this option is active.
A line can be drawn by keeping the left mouse button in. When the left
The graphical trace data
cannot be moved in the
mouse button is released, the echo sounder data will be moved to the
echogram. drawn line.
A different method is drawing a line by clicking with the left mouse
button on locations where the new data points should be. With the
right mouse button, the drawing will be stopped and the echo sounder
data will be moved.
This is only available in the Time-Based Editing – Echogram view.
Save Snapshot ( )
The view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file. This is only available in
the Time-Based Editing – Echogram view.
Generate Report ( )
A report with file information and the graph is generated. This is only in
the Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph view. When the option View
report is checked, the report is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. If not
checked the report is saved as PDF file in the Reports folder of the
project.

17 Create Model
17.1 Introduction
Create Model can be used to make a grid model or a TIN model from
different types of data files.
Figure 17-1 Create Model with a preview of a model
The Create Model can be started with Processing > Create Model from
the menu bar or with from the toolbar of the Control Center.
After reading the data files with an optional preview function the data can
be shown in a view. All the data or data inside a clipping polygon can be
converted into a grid model or a TIN model.
PDS2000 - User Manual Create Model  499

17.1.1 Create Model Toolbar and Context Menu
Most of the functions in the context menu are the same as in the toolbar.
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Measure ( )
Measure a distance between a selected point and the cursor.
Save Snapshot
An image of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw Polygon
Click with the left mouse button to draw a clipping polygon in the view.
Click with the right mouse button to close the polygon.
Save as Defaults
The settings of the Create Model window can be saved so the next
time this window is opened it will use the same settings.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window with the used background and foreground layers.
New layers can be added, existing layers can be removed or modified.
The Coverage Settings window will be opened where for the average
or hit count a color table can be selected which can be shown in the
view.
Also the sun illumination can be set for the model in plan view.
It is the same window as explained in the Plan Views (see page 361).
Properties ( )
The properties of the view; at the moment only the background color of
the view can be modified.
500  Create Model PDS2000 - User Manual

17.1.2 Model Preview Layer Properties
The model preview layer is one of the layers in the Layers window that is
always present. In the Model Preview Layer Properties window the
properties of the preview model shown in the view can be changed. The
properties can be opened with in the Layers Control window.
After changes are made and the user wants to use these properties
settings for all the preview models, select Save as Defaults from the
context menu in the Create Model to save the settings.
Figure 17-2 Model Preview Layer Properties window
Color Table Name

Select a color table for the data in the view.
Use Sun Illumination
When enabled it will use a sun illumination on the selected grid model
data. With Sun Azimuth and the Sun Elevation the location of the ‘sun’
can be defined and with Contrast the contrast in the grid model data
can be modified.
It is easier to use the option in the Coverage Settings ( ) to set the
sun illumination (see page 361).
Annotation Data Type
Select the data type that has to be annotated. With Font Name, Font
Size, Font Italic and Font Bold the font for the annotation can be
defined.
Show Data Boundaries
When Enabled, it will show a grid around all available data blocks.
PDS2000 uses blocks of cells to build up a grid model.

17.2 Importing Data
Through the wizard different types of data files can be imported in the
Create Model. Click on to start the selection and the import of
the data files.
17.2.1 Selecting Data Files
Figure 17-3 Select the types of data files
Any combination of the supported data files is possible. Click on

and all the selected data files will be loaded, starting at the top of the list.
The following data files are supported:
ASCII Data
ASCII text files that contains XYZ data. The data items in the file
should be separated by a comma, a space or a tab. It is not allowed to
have a header or in between lines.
Binary Data
The supported binary files are ’64 bits double’ formatted files according
IEEE 754 or ‘IBM little Andian’ and should contain only XYZ data.
Caris HDCS Data
If the Caris HDCS program is installed on the local computer,
PDS2000 will find automatically all the usable files. It is not possible to
import data without the Caris HDCS program installed, a Caris HDCS
license should be running on the local computer.
Grid Model
The PDS2000 Grid Models.
TIN Model
The PDS2000 TIN Models.
USGS Dem Data
The USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM) data files which are digital
representations of cartographic information in a raster form. DEMs
consist of a sampled array of elevations for a number of ground
positions at regularly spaced intervals. These digital data files are
produced by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) as part of the
National Mapping Program.

PDS2000 Log Data
Data from the PDS2000 log data files.
For most of the data files the selection is in a standard file selection
window. Only for the PDS2000 log data files and the Caris HDCS data
files a different window is used. The PDS2000 log data files use the
standard PDS2000 File Set Editor as import dialog (see page 397).
For selection of the Caris HDCS data a special window is opened to
select the lines to import. First select a project, from the project select a
vessel, a day and one or more (run)lines.
Figure 17-4 Select Caris HDCS data
17.2.2 Data File Parameters

If the data files are loaded, the next page in the Import XYZ Data window
is opened. On the left side are all the selected data files and the right side
can be different for each selected data file. Some additional parameters
or information can be or have to be defined. Click on each data file and
see if additional parameters have to be defined.
Figure 17-5 Additional information for data files
Additional parameters
If necessary a scale factor for the Z-value can be entered.
Coordinate type
Select the coordinate type used in the ASCII file.
Coordinate transformation
If the coordinate type is ‘Geographic’ a coordinate datum
transformation has to be selected. Only the datum transformation
which are compatible with the project coordinate system will be
displayed. This means that the local ellipsoid should be the same as in
the project coordinate system.

The geographical coordinates will be recalculated with the selected
datum transformation to grid coordinates.
The additional parameters dialog for the Grid Model and PDS2000 log
data are different from the other data files (see below).
17.2.2.1 Grid Model
Figure 17-6 Grid model data type selection for the Grid Model
Select one of the available data types in the selected Grid Model for the
import of the grid model data.
17.2.2.2 PDS2000 Log Data
Figure 17-7 Computation selection for PDS2000 log files
Only from the first valid Select the sensor computation of the sensor that has to be imported.
logfile in the file set the Multiple selections can be made with the Ctrl-key.
computations will be
extracted and displayed as If the multibeam xyz computation of a RESON SeaBat 7K is selected two
option!! extra options will appears at the bottom of the data selection. From the
bathymetry data the Bathymetric data or the Backscatter data can be
used to create the model.
17.2.3 Preview
When all the data files are selected and the additional information for
each data file is entered the wizard can be closed by clicking on .
All the selected data will be loaded into the computer memory.
When Show preview is checked the loaded data will be shown in the
view. A coarse grid model is used as default to show the data.
17.3 Create Grid or TIN Model

Before the user creates a grid model or a TIN model a clipping polygon
can be selected to convert only the data inside the polygon. If the right
clipping polygon does not exist, it can be drawn in the view with the option
Draw Polygon from the context menu.
Select as type Grid model or TIN model and click on to start the
creation of the model. This may take some time, depending on the size of
the model.

17.3.1 Grid Model
For USGS Dem data the When a grid model is selected, PDS2000 asks for a filename and the data
cell size will be calculated. types and the cell size for the grid model have to be set. When the
The cell size will depend conversion is finished the user has the option to view the grid model in the
on the density of the USGS grid model editor. For more detail about the grid model editor see chapter
Dem data. ‘Grid Model’ on page 507.
17.3.2 TIN Model

When a TIN model is selected, PDS2000 asks for a filename and a Data
Reduction window is opened. This data reduction is called Dynamic
Gridding.
With dynamic gridding first a grid model is made with variable cell sizes.
The selected criteria are checked for the contents of each cell. For each
cell a mean XYZ is computed and these XYZ points will be used to build
the TIN model. This method gives a great reduction on the number of
triangles in a TIN model.
Figure 17-8 Data Reduction - dynamic gridding for a TIN model
Maximum depth difference per cell

Each dynamically made grid cell gets a maximum value for the
difference in highest/lowest values. When the different values are
above the given parameter, more cells are made.
Maximum cell area
The maximum size of each single cell. When the distances between
data points are larger than this area size, more cells are made.
Maximum standard deviation for the depth per cell
A check is done on the standard deviation of all depths in a cell. Is the
standard deviation larger than given, more cells are made.
More then one option can be selected. When no options are selected
dynamic gridding is not applied.
When the conversion is finished the user has the option to view the TIN
model in the TIN model viewer. For more information about the TIN model
viewer see chapter ‘TIN Model Viewer’ on page 539.

18 Grid Model
18.1 Introduction
A grid model is a digital representation of the earth’s surface. These kinds
of models are also called DTM’s or Digital Terrain Models. These models
are usually created with survey data; however other 3D data can also be
used. A model consists of a number of cells where each cell can contain
one or more data types. The cells of a grid model are always a square
with the sides parallel to the projection grid.
PDS2000 uses grid models on various locations. In the Acquisition a
covered area is shown through a grid model. Off-line a number of
operations with a grid model are possible. Some of these possibilities are
listed below.
 In the Acquisition and Presentation, coverage charts for various
sensors.
 Quality control for sensor values.
 Interpolation of measured values over non reachable areas.
 Volume computations.
 Expand or update existing models with new survey data.
 Import and export of ASCII files.
 Correcting measurements.
 Visualization of measurements, in colors.
 Comparing grid models and creating differential models.
 Extracting profiles.
In the grid model editor next to the standard grid model a geoid model
grid model can be generated. This geoid model can be used in the
coordinate system to correct the satellite ellipsoid heights to the correct
 local heights (see page 79). Two different geoid model grid models can
be generated, one with the satellite ellipsoid coordinates and one with the
grid projection coordinates. See the Import page on page 524 to create a
geoid model grid model.
PDS2000 - User Manual Grid Model  507

 From PDS2000 version 3.6.0.7 onwards the grid model contains also an
X and Y offset for the Z Minimum and Z Maximum. This offset is from the
center of the cell. From now on it is possible to plot the Z Minimum and Z
 Maximum on the right location and not in the center of the cell. When
contours are generated with the Z Minimum or Z Maximum also the right
location is used and not the center of the cell. These locations are not
 visible for the user and are only used internally in the grid model.
Grid models from PDS2000 version 3.6.0.6 or earlier can still be used but
the Z Minimum and Z Maximum will have no offset.
 The new grid models can be used in earlier versions but the offset for the
Z Minimum and Z maximum will not work.
18.2 Grid Model Editor
Figure 18-1 3D grid model in the Grid Model Editor
The grid model editor can be started with Processing > Grid Model Editor
from the menu bar or with from the toolbar of the Control Center.
With the grid model editor grid models can be created and edited. A
number of actions are available for model computations and editing.
Multiple models can be open in the editor simultaneously, but only one
model is active and editable. The models are managed in a Displays
window which can be opened with View > Displays. Close a model by
closing the window or with File > Close. It will only remove it from the
display, but the model is still available in the Displays window with its own
508  Grid Model PDS2000 - User Manual

settings. Is a model removed permanently from the Displays window, and
called back via File > Open, then all settings are back to the defaults.
It is advisable to make the list of grid models in the Displays window not
 too big. Each time when with from the toolbar in the Control Center
the grid model editor is opened all the grid models in the Displays window
will be opened. This can result in the fact that the grid model editor cannot
When the grid model editor
is opened from the
open or opens very slow. So remove the not used grid models from the
Explorer only the selected list in the Displays window. Better is to use the combo box in the top left
grid model will be opened. of the grid model editor to open one of the other available grid models.
With (2D) and (3D) in the toolbar of the grid model editor the view
of the active model can be set in 2D or 3D. In the 3D View the standard
3D view navigation can be used (see page 50).
There are different ways to create a grid model; during on-line logging,
with the option ‘Create Model’ (see chapter ‘Create Model’ on page 499
for more information) or with the create or import option in the grid model
editor.
18.2.1 Grid Model View Toolbar and Context

Menu
This is list with the options in the toolbar of the 2D or 3D view. Most of the
functions in the context menu are the same as shown in the toolbar.
Hide Pane ( )
The left pane of the grid model editor can be switched on\off.
Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
Zoom In or Zoom Out in the 2D or 3D view.
Zoom Window ( )
Zoom Window in the 2D view; draw a rectangle to zoom in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Show all the data in the 2D or 3D view.
Zoom Previous ( )
Show the data from the previous zoom situation in the 2D view.
Show Spotlight ( )
The light intension does Toggles the spotlight window on/off in the 3D view. It is also possible
not work on the multibeam to toggle with the keys ‘Shift O’.
data. With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Figure 18-2 Spotlight window
Pan ( )
Measure ( )
Measure a distance between a selected point and the cursor.

Save Snapshot ( )
An image of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Save as GeoTIFF
An image of the view can be saved as a geo-referenced TIFF file, only
in the 2D view. The file is compressed with the LZW compression. The
sun illumination setting will be used to generate the GeoTIFF.
Interactive Selection ( )
If checked, it is possible to select items in the 2D view with the mouse.
Edit Mode ( )
In the 2D view a route or clipping polygon can be edited. See for an
explanation of the edit mode the chapter about the user maps on page
355.
Draw Profile
Draw a track guidance route in the 2D view. From this route a profile
will be extracted and shown in a separate view.
Draw Route
A track guidance route can be drawn in the 2D view.
Draw Polygon
A clipping polygon can be drawn in the 2D or 3D view.
It is possible to draw more clipping polygons. If an existing name is
used the existing polygon will be removed by the new one.
Save as Defaults
Save the settings of the 2D view. The next time the grid model editor is
opened the same settings will be used.
Create Detail View ( )
Select in the 3D view the type of view that has to be created; a Box
view or a Profile view.
Create Box View
Click on a location in the view and draw a line to create a box. The
Click in the view and move
box width can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
the cursor in the view over
the box, the box will be grippers. A 3D Box view will be opened with a 3D view of the
highlighted and the cursor selected area (see 417).
will change to a hand. Create Profile View
Keep the left mouse button Click on a location in the view and draw a line. The width of the
pressed and the box can
profile box can be adjusted with the mouse wheel and with the side
be moved.
grippers. A Profile view will be opened with the profile of the
selected area (see 484).
Grid Axis Layer ( )
The color table for the Hit Show Color Table ( )
Count and Z Standard Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
Deviation will always be a on/off.
default color table
generated by PDS2000. Grid Model Color Mode ( )
For the Z values the color In the view the different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
table can be selected in if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
the Coverage Settings. Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
In the 2D view the Coverage Settings window will be opened where a
color table can be selected for the Z values as shown in the view.
There is an option to show the grid model or the difference with
another grid model.
Also the sun illumination can be set for the grid model, not for the

difference model.
It is the same window as explained in the Plan View (see page 361),
except there is no Color Z Values options. For a grid model the Z value
can only be relative to Chart Datum.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window with all the background and foreground layers that
are selected for the grid model editor. New layers can be added,
existing layers can be removed or modified.
Properties ( )
The properties of the view.
18.3 Actions
The different actions on the grid model data are grouped and located
under one of the tabs in the left pane.
 Create (see below)
 Info (see page 514)
 Edit (see page 516)
 Filter (see page 517)
 Update (see page 519)
 Export (see page 520)
 Import (see page 523)
 Operations (see page 525)
 Interpolate (see page 534)
18.3.1 Create Page

Click on above the tabs in the left pane of the grid model editor to
open the Create tab. Also with the menu option File > New in the grid
model editor the Create tab can be opened to create a new grid model.
 By selecting an existing grid model in the combo box above the Create
tab the other tabs become available again.

Figure 18-3 Create page to create a grid model
In the Create page data can be selected to create a grid model.

Data selection
To create a grid model as formats PDS2000 log data or other formats
can be used.
PDS2000 log data
Select this option when a grid model has to be created from only
PDS2000 log data.
PDS file set
Select a file set with PDS2000 log data file(s).
Click on to open the File Set Editor (see page 397) to select
or create a file set or open the combo box next to it to select one
of the existing file sets.
PDS data type
PDS2000 will check in the selected file set which data types are
available to create a grid model.
Click on the combo box and select one of the available data
types for the creation of the grid model.

Computation selection
In a tree the computation(s) of the selected data type is/are
displayed.
When only one computation is available in the file set then
PDS2000 will automatically select this computation and the tree
will be grayed out.
When more than one computation is available then the tree is
accessible and the user has to select which computation has to
be used for the grid model. With the Ctrl-key more than one
computation can be selected.
Other data formats
Click on and an identical dialog appears as
described in the chapter ‘Create Model’ on page 502. Run through
this dialog and the data will be selected for the grid model.
Clipping polygon
If only a part of the selected data has to be used for the grid model
select a clipping polygon or draw a new polygon with the option in the
context menu. Only the selected data inside the clipping polygon will
be used to create a grid model. When no clipping polygon is selected
all the selected data in the files or from the data selection will be used.
Model definition
Before the grid model can be created the grid model has to be defined.
Grid model type
In the combo box the available grid model types will be available. If
it is only one type then the box is grayed out.
The types that are available depend on the selected data; f.i.
Multibeam data gives as grid model type <Generic> and
Backscatter Grid Model while Sidescan data gives only Backscatter
Grid Model.
Cell size
Specify the cell size used for the new grid model.
Check the option 10% of depth for PDS2000 to calculate the cell
size. This cell size will depend on the average water depth in the
data.
Cell data
Check which cell data types have to be created in the grid model.
The cell data types that are grayed out are the minimum
requirement for creating a grid model.
Click on to create the grid model, give a new name for the grid
model and the data will be imported.

18.3.2 Info Page
In the Info page the general information of the grid model is available.
After a double click on a cell in the grid model the information about that
selected cell is available.
A report can be generated with all the available information of the grid
model.
Figure 18-4 Info page with information of the grid model
Grid model
It shows the cell size and the statistical information of the grid model.
Cell size
The cell size of the grid model.
Used cells
Total number of cells in use.

Used area
Number of used cells multiplies by the surface of a cell gives the
total used area.
Empty area
Area of cells without data. This are the empty cells in the grid
model rectangular around the data.
Z min (deepest)
Deepest found value of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z max (highest)
Highest found value of the data type ‘Z Average’.
Z average
It is ∑ (Hit count x Z average) / Total hit count.
Hit count and Z average are per cell. This means that for each data
point in a cell the Z average of that cell is added to the total.
Z standard dev
The standard deviation of all the data points used to create the grid
model. With the information in each cell (Hit count, Z Average and
Standard Deviation) all the data points can be retrieved.
The standard deviation can only be computed when ‘Z Average’
exists as data type in the grid model.
Cells z std dev
The standard deviation of the standard deviations of each cell.
The formula: Cells z std dev = √ (∑(all cells std²) / Number of used
cells).
Total hit count
Sum of all values of the data type ‘Hit count’. This is the number of
data points used in the grid model.
Latest time
The last observed time of the data type ‘Time’. Only when the data
type ‘Time’ exist in the grid model.
Cell info
Select a clipping polygon and click to get the cell info only for
the data inside the clipping polygon.
Edit cell
The available information of the selected cell in the grid model. Only
the data types that are present in the grid model will be displayed.
Double click on a cell in the view to get the cell information.
Click on to clear/delete the data in the cell.
It is possible to edit the information of the selected cell. Click on the
value field of the data type that has to be edited. When it is selected
type in the new value and click on to set the new value.
Grid model report
Two different types of reports of the grid model are available. Select
one of the reports and click to generate and view the report
in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select in the PDS2000 Reporter the File >
Save as… to save the report as a PDF file.
GridModelReport(dom)
A grid model report that gives all the information about the grid
model in the grid model editor.
SurveyLine(dom)
A grid model – survey lines relationship report that gives only the
survey lines used with the grid model in the grid model editor.

18.3.3 Edit Page
 In the Edit page, options are available to delete and interpolate one or
more cells in the grid model.
In Edit mode in the 3D mode for editing the left mouse button has to be
 used and for moving around in the view the mouse wheel can be used.
See also the navigation in 3D views on page 50.
Figure 18-5 Edit page to edit the grid model data
None
The Edit mode is switched off.
Delete
The selected cells of the grid model will be deleted.
There are three methods to delete one or more cells:
4. Delete one point by clicking on the cell with the cursor in
5. Delete more cells by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
move the cursor over the grid model data. It looks like erasing the
data.
6. A different method to delete more cells is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is
present inside the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a
polygon with line segments or it can be a free drawn polygon
(lasso).
Interpolate circular
Interpolate the gaps in the grid model with the circular interpolation. In
this interpolation all the Z data types (the Z Average, the Z Maximum
and Z Minimum, if available in the grid model) will be interpolated.
Draw with the mouse a lasso / clipping polygon and the gaps in the
lasso / polygon will be interpolated immediately.
Max gap
The maximum gap in the grid model for which the interpolation is
valid. If the gap is bigger than the max. gap then no interpolation
will be done.

Click on this button when the complete grid model has to be
interpolated with the circular interpolation.
Delete and Interpolation
Delete one or more cells and immediately the deleted cells will be
interpolated with a circular interpolation.
Draw a lasso / polygon and all the cells inside the lasso / polygon will
be deleted and immediately all the deleted cells will be interpolated.
With the undo and redo functions ( and ) above the left pane of the
grid model editor the deleted data can be undone and redone if
necessary.
When one of the edit options is selected the Edit tab gets a red box as
identification that the editor is in edit mode. When switch over to a
 different tab the edit mode is not active anymore, but the edit status is
stored. Switch back to the edit tab the red box is displayed again and the
edit status is recovered.
Switch the edit mode off by clicking with the right mouse button in the
view, the cursor will change back to an arrow. Off course the edit mode
can also be switched off in the 3D Edit page by selecting None.
18.3.4 Filter Page

In the Filter page spikes can be removed from the grid model and the
removed cells will be interpolated using the cells around the spikes.
Figure 18-6 Filter page to remove spikes

Ignore Area Options
Select clipping polygons which cover areas of the gird model that
ignored when PDS2000 is searching for spikes. This can be used to
ignore wrecks from the spike detection.
Preview Options
Check the option Show Preview when the found spikes will be shown
in the grid model. If unchecked the found spikes will immediately be
removed so no visual check can be done.
There are two options to show the detected spikes in the grid model;
Red on Green and User color.
Red on Green shows the spikes in red and the rest of the grid model in
green.
User color shows the spikes in the color as defined in the Properties
(Show Preview Color in the Grid Model Edit Layer) and the rest of the
grid model in the colors of the active color table.
Figure 18-7 Spikes previews in Red on Green (left) and in User color
Filter Options
Evaluation area size
Select an evaluation area size; for each type of area a different size
for the despiking is needed. For each area a mean is calculated
and with the threshold a spike can be detected in the area.
Threshold
The threshold is a kind of standard deviation for each area.
For an irregular area a small threshold (f.i.0.5) will give more spikes
than a threshold of 5. How bigger the threshold the more
irregularity is accepted as no spike.
Selection area
The despiking can be done for the complete grid model with the
options Entire Model’. The spikes are found after on
is clicked.
With Select area select an area of the grid model by drawing a
lasso around the area with spikes. The spikes are found when the
lasso is drawn.
or
The ‘Find Spikes’ button is only active when as selection area the
entire model is selected.
Click on the button to find the spikes in the grid model.
The ‘Find & Remove Spikes’ button is only available when the option

Show Preview is unchecked; the detected spikes will be removed
immediately after they are detected.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible. It is

possible that an area in the grid model shows spikes that are not really
spikes, f.i. a wreck.
Click on the button and draw a lasso around that area and it will be
ignored in the spike detection and it gets it original grid model colors
back or becomes green.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible in the view.
Click on the button to remove the spikes. The spikes will be replaced
by interpolated data from the cells around the spike(s).
18.3.5 Update Page

In the Update page different actions are possible to update the grid
model.
The different update actions in this page are:
 Update with Grid Model (see below)
 Update with 3D Model (see page 520)
Both actions are presented in one page with on top of the page the
clipping polygon selection.
Figure 18-8 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation
Clipping polygon
A clipping polygon is not required. If a clipping polygon is not available
it should be made first, this can be done with the option Draw Polygon
in the context menu.
18.3.5.1 Update with Grid Model
Figure 18-9 Update with a different grid model

The grid model will be updated with new data from a different grid model.
If a clipping polygon is selected the update will take place inside the
polygon. The result of the update depends on the method:
Replace
The old data will be replaced with new data. This is only in the cells
where new data is available.
Combine
The values of the data types are combined. A new ‘Z Average’ is
computed with the updated ‘Hit Count’, which is the sum of the old and
new hit count. The data type ‘Time’ will be the latest time.
Minimum Z average
The existing ‘Z Average’ is replaced with the deepest ‘Z Average’ of
the two grid models.
Maximum Z average
The existing ‘Z Average’ is replaced with the highest ‘Z Average’ of the
two grid models.
Add Z
The ‘Z Average’ is added to the existing ‘Z Average’.
Subtract Z
The ‘Z Average’ is subtracted from the existing ‘Z Average’.
Click on to start the update of the grid model.
18.3.5.2 Update with 3D Model
Figure 18-10 Update with a 3D model
The data in the grid model will be replaced with the data from the 3D
model. This update is only in the cells where data from the 3D model is
available. If a clipping polygon is selected the update will take place only
inside the polygon.
18.3.6 Export Page

In the Export page different actions are available to export the grid model
data.
The different export actions in this page are:
 Export to ASCII (see below)
 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid (see page 521)
 Export to OpenGIS (see page 522)
 Export to GeoTIFF (see page 522)
 Generate Update Package (see page 522)
All these actions are presented in one page with on top of the page the
data type and the clipping polygon selection.

Figure 18-11 Data type and clipping polygon selection in the Export page
Data type
Select one of the available data types for the export.
Clipping polygon
18.3.6.1 Export to ASCII
Figure 18-12 Export to ASCII
For a bottom classification This function exports the grid model data to an ASCII text file. Each cell
model next to the phi also with the selected data type will give an X, Y and Z, where X and Y are the
phi+text can be exported. center of the cell and Z the selected data type. A comma will be used as
The text is the label in the separator. If a clipping polygon is selected the export is only from data
color table.
inside the polygon.
Check the option Export as depth when the Z value(s) have to be treated
as depths instead of heights. For the Z Average, Z Minimum and Z
Maximum the values will be multiplied with ‘-1’.
Click on to start the export of the grid model data.
18.3.6.2 Export to ASCII ESRI Grid
Figure 18-13 Export to ASCII ESRI grid
This function exports the grid model data to an ESRI text file. The ESRI
format needs a rectangle parallel to the X and Y grid. If no clipping
polygon is selected PDS2000 will generate a rectangle around the data. If
a clipping polygon is selected PDS2000 will generate a rectangle around
the polygon.
Each cell in the rectangle will give a Z-value, where for the filled cells the
selected data type will be used and for the empty cells a ‘No data value’
can be specified. The cells outside a selected clipping polygon will be
treated as empty cells. The number of decimals for every Z-value can be
specified.

18.3.6.3 Export to OpenGIS
Figure 18-14 Export to OpenGIS
This function exports the grid model data to a KML or a KMZ file. Both
these files can be opened in an OpenGIS system, i.e Google Earth (see
also page 221 in the Project DataBase in the Explorer).
The KML file contains the X and Y which are converted to WGS’84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS’84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The Z
value is the value of the selected data type. The KML file gives a point
cloud with Z values.
The KMZ file contains a compressed GeoTIFF file of the grid model.
If a clipping polygon is selected the export is only from the data inside the
polygon.
Click on to export the X,Y and Z to a KML file and click on
to export the image of the grid model to a KMZ file.
18.3.6.4 Export to GeoTIFF
Figure 18-15 Export to GeoTIFF
The data from a standard grid model, a side scan model or a snippets
model can be exported to a compressed GeoTIFF file. The GeoTIFF file
is compressed with the LZW compression. The sun illumination setting
will be used to generate the GeoTIFF.
This file can be draped over a grid model in the 3D views of PDS2000 by
adding a 3D Draping Layer to that view.
Check the option View in 3D, select a grid model that will be used for the
draping and after the grid model is exported the 3D grid model editor will
open with the selected grid model and the GeoTIFF file draped over it.
Select one of the available data types from the grid model. This data type
will be displayed in the GeoTIFF file.
18.3.6.5 Generate Update Package
Figure 18-16 Update package

An ASCII file will be generated containing the cells of the grid model
which are different from the cells of the selected original grid model. If
only a part of the grid model has to be generated a clipping polygon can
be used.
The ASCII file will contain XYZ data of the following cells.
 Cells with data that is not present in the original grid model.
 Cells with a different value than the value in the original grid model.
 Empty cells which have a value in the original grid model. Instead of a
Z value a code is generated.
This update package can be imported in the Acquisition to update the
active grid model. This can be done with Tools > Import Grid Model
Update… (see 259).
18.3.7 Import Page
Figure 18-17 Import page to import data in a grid model
In the import page data can be selected to import in an existing grid

model.
Data selection
The formats to import data in a grid model are PDS2000 log data or
other formats.
PDS2000 log data
Select this option when PDS2000 log data has to be imported.
PDS file set
Select a file set with PDS2000 log data file(s).
Click on to open the File Set Editor (see page 397) to select
or create a file set or open the combo box next to it to select one
of the existing file sets.

PDS data type
PDS2000 will check in the selected file set which data types are
available and compare this with the data types in the grid model.
If one of the available data types are present in the grid model
then this will be entered in the combo box. When only one data
type is present then PDS2000 will automatically select this data
type. When more data types are possible then the user has to
select the right one in the combo box.
Computation selection
In a tree the computation(s) from the selected data type is/are
displayed.
When only one computation of the selected data type is
available in the file set then PDS2000 will automatically select
this computation and the tree will be grayed out.
When more than one computation is available then the tree is
accessible and the user has to select which computation has to
be used for the grid model. With the Ctrl-key more than one
computation can be selected.
Other data formats
Click on and an identical dialog appears as
described in the chapter ‘Create Model’ on page 502. Run through
this dialog and the data will be selected for import.
If the grid model in the editor is a geoid model grid model, geoidal
data can be imported through an ASCII file. The import data in the
geoid model grid model should be an ASCII file with longitude,
latitude and geoidal separation (satellite coordinates) or with
easting, northing and geoidal separation (grid coordinates).
For the geoid model grid model (satellite coordinates) the ASCII file
If the geoid model grid should contain for the X and Y the longitude and latitude in WGS’84
model (satellite coordinates) coordinates and for the Z the geoidal separation. The format for the
is created, the cell size ASCII file should be:
should be defined in 003.751823 052.451954 41.59
degrees (for example 0.01 where the longitude and latitude are in degrees and decimal
or 0.001). degrees. So the X and Y in the grid model are in degrees and not in
meters.
For the geoid model grid model (grid coordinates) the ASCII file
should contain for the X and Y the easting and northing in
projection coordinates and for the Z the geoidal separation. The
format for the ASCII file should be:
128945.32 445876.45 41.59
where the easting and northing are in meters.
The geoid model grid model should be completely filled between all
 the imported points. So between the points the empty cells has to
be interpolated.
Clipping polygon
If only a part of the selected data has to be used for the grid model
select a clipping polygon or draw a new polygon with the option in the
context menu. Only the selected data inside the clipping polygon will
be used to create a grid model. When no clipping polygon is selected
all the selected data in the files or from the data selection will be used.
Click on to add the selected data to the grid model.

18.3.8 Operations Page
In the Operations page all miscellaneous actions that cannot be placed in
one of the other pages are available.
The different actions in this page are:
 Generate Color Table (see below)
 Apply Z Corrections (see page 526)
 Set/Clear Value (see page 526)
 Make Empty (see page 527)
 Create Resampled Model (see page 528)
 Create Difference Model (see page 528)
 Compute Volumes (see page 530)
 Extract Profiles (see page 533)
Click on to select one of the actions.
18.3.8.1 Generate Color Table
Figure 18-18 Generate a color table for the grid model
 This method regenerates an existing color table where the maximum and
minimum values are taken from the grid model.
Generate color table

Select an existing color table that has to be regenerated.
With the selected color table can be edited in the standard

color table generator. See page 226 for more information on the
color table generator.
Data Type
Select one of the existing data types in the grid model. The maximum
and minimum values of the selected data type will be used as
maximum and minimum in the color table.

Clipping polygon
Select a clipping polygon if the color table has to be regenerated from
the maximum and minimum value inside the clipping polygon.
Colors
Enter the number of colors that have to be used in the color table.
Selecting a larger number of colors makes the color transition
smoother.
Range
The table can be made in colors with Hues or in shades of grey with
Greys.
Reversed order
The color for the maximum value is always red and for the minimum
blue. Check Reversed order to interchange the colors of the maximum
and minimum values.
Click on to regenerate the color table.
18.3.8.2 Apply Z Corrections
Figure 18-19 Apply Z corrections to the grid model
Apply a correction to a grid model means that the existing data types (‘Z
Average’, ‘Z Minimum’ and ‘Z Maximum’) are corrected following the
equation:
New value data type = (Old value data type) x (Factor) + (Offset)
Change the depths to heights or vice versa by setting the factor to ‘-1’ and
the offset to ‘0’.
Click on to apply the Z correction to the grid model.
18.3.8.3 Set/Clear Value
Figure 18-20 Set/Clear values of the grid model

For all the cells inside the clipping polygon the values of the selected
data type will be set to the value as entered.
For all the cells inside the clipping polygon the values of the selected
data type will be deleted.
18.3.8.4 Make Empty
Figure 18-21 Make empty
By selecting a grid model filter all data types in a cell can be made empty.
Display
Check this option to see which grid model cells will be made empty
with the selected grid model filter.
With a new grid model filter can be made. The grid model filter
editor will be opened (see below). With the selected grid model
filter can be modified in the grid model filter editor.
In the grid model filter editor two criteria can be defined for the grid
model filter. Both criteria must be valid to clear a cell. Select None
for a criterion to make it ‘not used’.
Figure 18-22 Grid model filter criteria
Clipping polygon
Select a clipping polygon, and set the condition to either Inside
or Outside.
The criterion that a grid cell is inside or outside the clipping
 polygon is when the center point of the grid cell is inside or
outside.
Data type
Select the data type, a condition operand and a comparing
value. The operand can be > (bigger) or <= (smaller or equal).
After the filter is defined check the option Display to see which cells
meets the criteria of the filter. In the 2D view a red diagonal line is

drawn in each cell that meets the criteria and in the 3D view the
cells that meets the criteria are red and all the other cells are green.
 Click on to make the cells empty which match with the criteria in
the filter. When the user confirm the process, it is not reversible!!
18.3.8.5 Create Resampled Model
Figure 18-23 Create a resampled model
This option is to create a grid model with a difference cell size from the
active grid model by resampling the data in the grid model.
The resampling will be done for all the data types available in the active
grid model. Select a clipping polygon if only from a part of the grid model
a new grid model with a different cell size has to be created.
Click on , select an existing grid model or give a new name for
the resampled grid model and the model will be created.
18.3.8.6 Create Difference Model
Figure 18-24 Create a difference model

This option is to create a difference model from the active model and a
reference model by the following equation:
Difference model= (Active model) – (Fixed level)
or
Difference model= (Active model) – [(Reference model) + (Offset)]
Select the data type for which a difference model has to be calculated and
select a clipping polygon if only from a part of the grid model a difference
model has to be created.
Reference
As the reference level two options are possible.
Fixed level
This option generates a temporary grid model with a depth/height
as is entered. The grid model will be generated around the active
model.
Model
With this option two different model types can be selected, a grid
model and a 3D model. If necessary an offset to the reference
model can be entered.
For a good comparison the Report type
reference model needs to Select the option IHO PDF Report when a report has to be generated
be a reliable grid model of in which both the grid models are compared according the IHO orders.
the seabed and not a fixed In this report for each IHO order the numbers of points above and
level or 3D design model. below the IHO error limits are calculated and displayed.
The report will be opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select in the
PDS2000 Reporter the File > Save as… to save the report as a PDF
file in the ‘Reports’ folder.
Select the option None if no report has to be generated.
Click on , select an existing grid model or give a new name for

the difference model and the difference model will be created.

18.3.8.7 Compute Volumes
The following equation is used to compute a volume:

Volume of one cell = (cell size)² x [(data type value) – (reference value)]
Multiple clipping polygons can be selected and for each polygon the
volumes will be computed. If a clipping polygon goes through a cell only
the area of the cell inside the polygon will be used to calculate the
volume. If no clipping polygon is selected a volume for the complete grid
model will be computed.
Keep the Ctrl key pressed to select multiple lines or use the Shift key to
select a block of lines. Select for this multiple selections the name of the
polygon and at the end of the selection check one of the checkboxes to
select all the selected polygons.
Check the checkbox on top of the tree to select all clipping polygons.
Reference
As the first reference level two options are possible.
Fixed level
This option generates a temporary grid model with a depth/height
as is entered. The grid model will be generated around the active
model.

Model
With this option two different model types can be selected, a grid
model and a 3D model. If necessary an offset can be entered to the
reference model.
Second reference
Next to the first reference level a second one can be selected. Select
one of the options how to combine both reference levels or not.
None
No second reference level is used.
Highest
For each grid model cell the highest of the two reference levels is
used for the volume computation.
Lowest
For each grid model cell the lowest of the two reference levels is
used for the volume computation.
When Highest or Lowest is selected, select the model type and the
filename for the grid model or 3D model.
Report type
After the volume computation a report can be generated.
None
No report will be generated, only a volume computation results window
will be opened (see below).
PDF report
One report will be generated with for each selected clipping polygon a
separate result. The report will be opened in the PDS2000 Reporter.
Select in the PDS2000 Reporter the File > Save as… to save the
report as a PDF file.
CSV report
A CSV file will be generated with for each selected clipping polygon
the computed volumes.
Click on to start the computation. If a PDF or CSV report is
selected first the Create Report dialog will be opened.
Figure 18-25 Create Report dialog (left for the PDF report and right for the CSV
report)
Report
Enter a name that will be used in the header of the report.

View report
If checked, the PDF report opens in the PDS2000 Reporter after
The report will be saved as the volume computation is finished. With File > Save as… in the
a PDF file in the folder
PDS2000 Reporter the report can be saved.
‘Reports’ in the Projects
folder. If checked, the CSV report will be opened in for instance Microsoft
Excel.
If Unchecked, the report will be saved with a default filename.
Images
For the PDF report images of the result and the model can be added
to the report.
Create images
Check the option if in the PDF report images of the result and the
model has to be displayed.
The width and height of the images can be defined in number of
pixels.
Difference color table
Select a color table to display an image of the difference model with
the selected color table.
Click on to start the computation. After the computation is
finished the volume computation results window will be opened. It will only
be opened when no report is created. If a report is created and the option
View report is checked the report will be opened.
Figure 18-26 Volume Computation Results
The parameters in the volume computation results are:

Clipping polygon
The clipping polygon used for the volume computation; only displayed
when a clipping polygon is selected.
Clipping polygon area
The area covered by the selected clipping polygon, only displayed
when a clipping polygon is selected.
Volume above
The total volume above the reference level(s).
Volume below
The total volume below the reference level(s).
Volume difference
The volume above minus the volume below.
Area above
The area above the reference level(s).

Area below
The area below the reference level(s).
Area without data
The area where reference data is available but in the grid model no
data of the selected data type is present.
Area without ref
The area where no reference data is available.
Average layer thickness
The thickness of the volume difference over the area above and area
below together.
18.3.8.8 Extract Profiles
Figure 18-27 Extract profiles
Profiles will be extracted from the grid model over the selected runlines.
Data type
Select the data type of the grid model that will be used for the for the
profiles.
Keep Ctrl pressed to select Runlines
multiple lines or use Shift Select the runline file for the profile calculations. Select the lines of the
to select a block of lines. runline over which the profiles have to be extracted.
Use section
Check this option when a profile have to be extracted over a part of
the runline. Enter the start and end point on the runline between
where the profile has to be extracted.

Average profile
If the option Adjacent lines is checked then for each point in the profile
an average is calculated using the points with the same distance on
the adjacent line(s). The user has to specify how much adjacent lines
on both sides are used to calculate the average value for a point in the
profile. This only works if the runline has adjacent lines.
Step size
If the option User defined is not checked then the profiles are
calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the runline. If
the option is checked then the user has to specify a step size and for
each point on the line a weighted mean is calculated using the four
nearby grid cells.
Click on and a window will be opened where the destination has
to be specified.
Figure 18-28 Destination for the extracted profiles
Multiple displays
Each selected runline gets its own profile view with in the title bar the
name of the runline.
Single display
All the profiles of the selected runlines appear in one profile view, each
one with a different color.
PDS2000 Log Data file
For each runline a PDS2000 log data file will be create in the log data
directory.
ASCII file
All the profiles of the selected runlines are saved in one text file. For
each profile the first line has the name of the runline followed by XYZ
data and the distance along the runline.
At the bottom some extra information can be added to the file; the
Mean, the Minimum, the Maximum and/or Standard deviation of the Z-
value.
Another way to extract a profile from a grid model is with the option Draw
Profile in the context menu of the 2D view or the toolbar option Create
Detail View > Create Profile View ( ) in the 3D view.
18.3.9 Interpolate Page

In the Interpolate page the different types of interpolation, which are
possible with the grid model data, are available.
The different interpolation actions in this page are:
 Clean Interpolated (see below)

 Interpolate Circular (see page 535)
 Interpolate Triangular (see page 536)
 Interpolate Directional (see page 535)
 Interpolate Singlebeam (see page 537)
All these actions are presented in one page with on top of the page the
data type and the clipping polygon selection.
Figure 18-29 Data type and clipping polygon selection for the interpolation
Data type
Select one of the available data types for the interpolation.
Clipping polygon
18.3.9.1 Clean Interpolated

All the interpolated data will be removed from the grid model. This will be
done for the selected data type and inside a clipping polygon (clipping
polygon is not required).
The value of the hit count in an interpolated cell is zero. So by searching
for hit count is zero, the interpolated cells can be distinguished from
original cells. This way it is possible to clean (= make empty) interpolated
cells and revert to the original data.
Click on to start the cleaning of the interpolated cells.
18.3.9.2 Interpolate Circular
Figure 18-30 Interpolate circular
The circular interpolation is usually used for small gaps in the data. These
small gaps can be caused for example by the outer beams of a multibeam
survey.
Max. gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid.
The interpolation routine search for every empty cell in the clipping
polygon area or in the complete grid model. It will check if original data is
available within a ‘Max gap’ distance, and if so, it fills the empty cell with a
weighted mean of the original data.
Depending on the size of the interpolation area and the power of the
 computer, this method can take considerable time. The best way to use
this option is when the gaps are small and there are lots of filled cells, like
multibeam data.
Click on to start the circular interpolation.

18.3.9.3 Interpolate Triangular
Figure 18-31 Interpolate triangular
The triangular interpolation is usually used for medium gaps in the data.
Max.gap
The interpolation routine takes three steps:
1. Find the extents of the data.
2. Create a TIN model.
3. Interpolate in the triangles of the TIN model.
Click on to start the triangular interpolation.
18.3.9.4 Interpolate Directional
Figure 18-32 Interpolate directional
The directional interpolation is usually used for big gaps in the data.
These big gaps can be caused for example by sailing along runlines with
a single beam echo sounder.
Max.gap
Route
A route has to be selected or made. A quick way to make a route is
with the option Draw Route in the context menu of the 2D view.
Interpolation takes place in the direction of the route. Bends in the
route are allowed.
Perpendicular
Check this option to set the interpolation direction to across the
route.
Click on to start the directional interpolation.

18.3.9.5 Interpolate Singlebeam
Figure 18-33 Interpolate singlebeam
The singlebeam interpolation is special made for the interpolation of the

single beam data. It will interpolate in the along and across direction of
the runlines both with a different maximum gap interval.
Max.gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid. The
along gap is along the selected route and across is across the
selected route.
Route
A route has to be selected or made. A quick way to make a route is
with the option Draw Route in the context menu of the 2D view. For the
best result the route must be longitudinal with the runlines. Bends in
the route are allowed.
Click on to start the singlebeam interpolation.

19 TIN Model Viewer
19.1 General
With the TIN model viewer TIN models can be created and visualized.
The viewer allows data to be presented in a 3D view. This 3D view is
intended to be only for visualization of the data. There are no functions to
modify the data in the TIN model viewer.
The TIN model viewer can be started with Processing > TIN Model Viewer
from the menu bar of the Control Center.
Figure 19–1 TIN Model Viewer with a TIN model
19.1.1 Drag & Drop

The drag & drop functionality is supported by the TIN model viewer. From
the explorer, files can be dragged and dropped in the client area of the
viewer or directly in a blank view.
The file formats that can be dropped in the client area are:
 TIN (*.TIN) files only from the project folder.
PDS2000 - User Manual TIN Model Viewer  539

 ASCII (*.ASC) and XYZ (*.XYZ) files from any folder.
The file formats that can be dropped directly in a (blank) view are:
 TIN (*.TIN) files only from the project folder. If the TIN file is dropped in
a view with a TIN model the existing model is replaced.
 Color table (*.COL) files only from the project folder.
19.2 TIN Model Viewer Menu Bar

In the menu bar the most functions are standard windows functions. Only
the not standard functions in the menus will be discussed below.
19.2.1 File
The menu File has the functions to create, open, save, export and print
views and show the properties of the view. Most of these functions are
standard functions, except the export and the properties.
File > New
Under this option a number of sources are available to create a new
TIN model or to create a new color table.
Blank Model
A blank model will be generated, which can be used in combination
with the drag & drop function to add data.
From ASCII File
All the existing ASCII files in the project folder are available. From
this ASCII file a TIN model can be created.
From XYZ Point File
All the existing XYZ files in the project folder are available. These
XYZ files are the ‘Cleaned XYZ Log Data’ files, which is one of the
available logging formats. See page 119 for more information about
cleaned XYZ log data.
Color Table
Create a new color table with the standard PDS2000 color table
generator (see page 226).
File > Export to ASCII File
The current file will be saved in ASCII format, with the extension ASC.
The format is X, Y, Z.
File > Properties
The properties of the current TIN model will be shown.
Figure 19–2 TIN model properties
540  TIN Model Viewer PDS2000 - User Manual

General
The number of triangles and the number of XYZ points in the
model.
Bounding Box
The coordinates (in projection grid) of the lower left hand corner
and the upper right hand corner of the box that surrounds the
model.
19.2.2 Edit
The menu Edit has only the function Empty Cache. In case the operation
seems to become slow or the computer is running low in memory, the
data cache can be deleted. No data will be lost, all the data can be
reloaded from the database.
Figure 19–3 Empty cache
19.2.3 Tools
The Tools menu has the following functions:
19.2.3.1 Decimate Model

Decimating a model is a method to reduce the number of data points. The
structure of the model will not be changed by decimating. To decimate a
TIN model select Tools > Decimate Model from the menu bar.
For a valid reduction the next steps should be considered.
 The decimated model must be a good geometric approximation of the
source model.
 The topology must be maintained. After decimating, the model is still a
TIN model and does not contain polygons of more than three points.
Figure 19–4 Decimation parameters
Maximum Feature angle

To classify a data point in the model, also called vertex, the feature
angle has to be determined. The feature angle is the angle between
the lines which are perpendicular to the plane of two adjacent
triangles.

Feature Angle
Figure 19–5 Feature angle
When the feature angle is greater than the maximum feature angle,
the shared edge (the thick red line) is called a feature edge. This
feature edge is used to classify the vertex.
Maximum error
A simple vertex is a data point that is completely surrounded by
triangles.
Simple Vertex
Figure 19–6 Simple vertex
From the surrounded data points a mean Z-value is calculated. The

simple vertex is removed if the difference between the Z-value of the
simple vertex and the mean Z-value is smaller than the maximum
error.
An interior edge vertex is a simple vertex where from the shared edges
two edges are feature edges, the thick red lines.

3D Distance
Interior Edge Vertex
Figure 19–7 Interior edge vertex
The 3D distance is the distance from the interior edge vertex to the 3D
line formed by the endpoints of the two feature edges. The interior
edge vertex is removed if the 3D distance is smaller than the
maximum error.
If the option Remove boundary points is checked then also the
boundary vertex go through the decimation. A boundary vertex is a
vertex that is not completely surrounded by triangles.
3D Distance
Boundary Vertex
Figure 19–8 Boundary vertex
The 3D distance is the distance from the boundary vertex to the 3D

line formed by the endpoints of the two boundary neighbors. The
boundary vertex is removed if the 3D distance is smaller than the
maximum error.
By removing data points in the decimation of the TIN model, ‘holes’
appear in the model. These ‘holes’ are triangulated again.
When the decimation algorithm is started a progress indicator appears on
the screen. The process of the decimation can take a long time for
models with many points. At the end of the process a decimation status is
given.
19.2.3.2 Filter Triangles

A maximum edge length has to be specified to filter the triangles.
Triangles with a side longer than the maximum edge length are removed.
This filter usually removes the triangles on the boundaries of the model.
To start the filter triangles option select Tools > Filter Triangles from the
menu bar.

This filter is reversible because no data points are removed from the
model. Give a high value for the maximum edge length and the model
shown in the viewer is reverted to the situation before the filtering.
19.2.3.3 Generate Contours

Contours can be generated for viewing and printing purposes. When the
dialogue window is opened for the first time the depth extensions of the
model are placed in the fields. Start the option with Tools > Generate
Contours form the menu bar.
Figure 19–9 Contour interval parameters
The start and end depth and a contour interval have to be set to start the
generation of the contours.
19.3 TIN Model Viewer Toolbar

With the options in the toolbar the model can be moved and rotated in the
view. For the zoom, move and rotation buttons shortcuts with the mouse
and the click location are available.
Function Shortcut Click Location
Zoom In F5 or Top side of the view
Ctrl + Left mouse button
Zoom Out Ctrl + Left mouse button Bottom side of the view
Move Left Shift + Left mouse button Left side of the view
Move Right Shift + Left mouse button Right side of the view
Move Up Shift + Left mouse button Top side of the view
Move Down Shift + Left mouse button Bottom side of the view
Rotate Left Left mouse button Left side of the view
Rotate Right Left mouse button Right side of the view
Rotate Up Left mouse button Top side of the view
Rotate Down Left mouse button Bottom side of the view
As long as the mouse button is kept down the mouse operation is a
continuous operation while a button operation performs only one step.
The place of the mouse pointer in the view is not relative to the model.
The model can be moved or rotated to any place in the view and the
mouse actions are still related to the position of the mouse pointer in the
view.
19.4 TIN Model Viewer Context Menu

The context menu can be opened by right clicking in the view. The
standard function will be discussed below.
Model Type
In the viewer the model can be shown as a TIN Model or as a Grid
Model.

When the TIN model is rotated the TIN model viewer automatically
switches to Grid model and return to the TIN model when the rotation
stops.
Model Display Mode
There are three display modes available:
Solid; the normal view mode.
Wireframe; shows the outline of the triangles of the TIN or Grid model.
Vertex; shows only the vertex points, the points that build the TIN
model.
Show Contours
Toggle between showing and hiding the contours (when available) in
the view.
Show Clip
Toggle between showing and hiding a clip in the view. A clip is a small
overall top view placed in the lower left corner of the view.
Show Coordinate Axis
Toggle between showing and hiding the coordinate axis in the view.
The origin can be set with the next function.
Coordinate Axis Origin
Select one of the places for the origin of the coordinate axis: Center,
Front Center, Front Left, Front Right, After Center, After Left and After
Right.
Rotate Light Source
Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the mouse around. The
new location of the light source becomes the location when the button
is released.
Save Snapshot
The current view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Edit Color Table
This function opens the standard PDS2000 color table generator (see
page 226).
Properties
Shows the properties and attributes of the current view.
The only item that is not discussed before is the Vertical
exaggeration. This is a multiplication factor for the vertical or Z-axis of
the model.

20 Plot
20.1 Getting Started

Charts can be created in PDS2000 with the use of the PDS2000 data
files, images and DXF drawings. These charts can contain plan views,
profiles, legends, images, etc. and can be printed or exported to DXF.
Plot can be started with Processing > Plot from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar of the Control Center.
The following steps are necessary to make a plot for the first time:
1. Create a plot project.
2. Add data files to the overview.
3. Place a plan view in the overview.
4. Create a plot.
5. Place panels in the plot.
6. Add layers to the panel.
7. Print or export the plot.
20.1.1 Create a Plot Project

When a plot project is created, a folder for this project will be created.
Each plot project can contain several plots (charts).
The first step after starting the plot module is to create a new project with
File > New > Project… from the menu bar. A wizard is started and on the
first page a name for the project and a location to create the project folder
has to be selected or created. By default the folder of the current
PDS2000 project is used for the location.
PDS2000 - User Manual Plot  547

Figure 20-1 Plot project wizard
On the next page in the wizard the main project has to be selected. If
other PDS2000 projects are available with the same geodetic settings, the
data can be selected from those projects as well. Data from projects with
different geodetic settings cannot be combined.
Click on and PDS2000 will create the plot project and close the
wizard.
Figure 20-2 Plot overview window
The project tree contains everything that is part of the project. Next to the
project tree is the overview window, which consists of two sections. The
left section shows the overview tree, while the overview plot is shown in
the right section. The overview plot also has a toolbar.
548  Plot PDS2000 - User Manual

20.1.2 Add Data Files
With the context menu from either the overview tree or the overview plot,
data files can be added to the overview. Use the right mouse button to
open the context menu, and select from the option Add Data one of the
data types.
Figure 20-3 Context menu of the overview tree and overview plot
Any data that is added will show up in the tree and in the plot of the
overview window.
Figure 20-4 Data added to the overview
20.1.3 Place a Plan View

After adding one or more data files to the overview window it is possible
to create a plan view. A plan view defines a rectangular area in the world,
 and is used to position plan panels in a plot. It is not necessary to define a
plan view when only profiles have to be plotted.

Select Place Plan View from the context menu and the shape of the
cursor changes to a cross. Draw a rectangle in the overview plot to create
a plan view. Click and hold the left mouse button to start drawing the
rectangle, and release the mouse button to finalize the rectangle. The
plan view properties will appear and the exact properties can be modified.
Figure 20-5 Plan View Properties in the overview
The new plan view is added to the project tree and displayed in the
overview plot. It is usually a good idea to give the plan view a more
descriptive name than the default one. The name can be changed in the
properties of the context menu of the plan view.
Figure 20-6 Overview with a plan view
Cancel any visual Move a plan view by selecting it with the mouse, and then dragging it
operation by pressing the around the plot. Change the size of the plan view by selecting one of the
‘Esc’ key on the keyboard. handles and dragging it with the mouse.
Click on from the toolbar or select View > Rotate from the menu bar to
rotate a plan view. The handles of the selected plan view will change. By
dragging one of the handles with the mouse the plan view can be rotated
around its center point. Click on or select View > Rotate again to
finish the rotation of the plan view.

Edit the plan view properties by double-clicking the plan view in either the
project tree or in the overview plot. The properties can also be displayed
through the context menu of a plan view.
Plan views can also be added directly to the project from the project tree,
without using the overview window. With a right mouse click on ‘Plan
Views’ in the project tree a plan view can be added. In that case the
position, size and rotation must be entered manually.
20.1.4 Create a Plot

To create a new plot, choose File > New > Plot… from the menu bar. It is
also possible to use the context menu of the Plots item in the project tree
to add a plot.
Figure 20-7 Create a new plot
In case a plot is already available in the current project, the choice is

given to copy an existing plot. This plot will then be used as a starting
point, or template, for the new project.
When creating a blank plot, click on to change the properties of
the new plot. Otherwise the defaults will be used.
Figure 20-8 Plot Properties window
The Plot Properties window contains several tab pages:

Size
The size of the plot. Before printing, please make sure that the plot fits
on the printer paper. If the plot does not fit, it will be tiled into several
sheets of paper. For example, to print an A0 sized plot an oversized
A0 paper is necessary.
Grid
The grid is a raster of vertical and horizontal guide lines. It can be
helpful for placing panels on the plot.
Show grid; to show the guide lines with the entered grid interval.

Snap to grid; the panels will snap to the grid lines when positioning or
resizing them.
Printer Output
How the plot will be printed.
Print to fill page; will scale the plot so that it fits on the printer paper.
Print exact; will print the plot to the exact scale.
DXF Export
Select the type of DXF export, with 256 colors or with true colors.
The true colors are only supported from AutoCAD 2004 onwards.
Options
Display Z coordinates as depths; change the sign of the height values
in the survey data to depth values.
Optimum text angle; the preferred viewing angle for text. It prevents
text annotations from being upside down when looking at the plot in
the preferred direction.
Keywords
A keyword is a piece of text between ‘%’ characters that gets replaced
by user-defined text. Add or remove any keyword label and its user
text here. Keywords that are common to all plots in a project can be
entered in the project options. See also Keywords on page 557.
When finished with the properties click on to create the new plot
and add it to the project.
Figure 20-9 New blank plot

20.1.5 Place Panels
Panels can be placed in the plot by using the context menu. Use the right
mouse button to click on the plot tree or on the plot itself.
Figure 20-10 Context menu of the plot tree and the plot view
From the context menu select Place Panel and then select the type of
panel to add. For example select Plan to place a plan panel. See on page
557 for an explanation of the available panels.
The cursor will change to a cross and a rectangle can be drawn in the plot
where the panel should come. After releasing the mouse button the new
panel will be added to the plot. A window will appear with the panel’s
properties.
Figure 20-11 Plan panel properties
The panels are displayed in the plot and in the plot tree. The properties of
a panel can be opened with a double click on the panel in the plot, in the
plot tree or through the context menu of the panel.
Select the panel with the mouse and by dragging the mouse the panel
Hold the Shift key down to
can be moved around in the plot. Resize a panel by first selecting it, and
disable ‘snap to grid’.
then grabbing one of the handles.

20.1.6 Add Layers
In some panels, such as plan panels and profile panels, layers can be
added to the panel. A layer always covers the whole panel and uses the
coordinate mapping set from the panel.
Select Add Layer from the context menu of the panel and select the
desired layer type. After a layer is added to the panel, its properties will be
displayed in a dialog.
To change the properties of an existing layer, double-click on the layer in
the plot tree. It is also possible to select Properties in the context menu of
the layer.
Layers can be added for five different panels; Plan Panel, Profile Panel,
Profile Series Panel, Profile Cross Series Panel and Key Map Panel.
See for more information about the different layers the chapter Available
Layers on page 570.
After some panels and some layers are added to the plot, it can look like
this:
Figure 20-12 Plot with panels and layers
Layers that are not visible are indicated in the plot tree by a dark light
bulb. Panels that are locked against accidental movement are indicated
with a small pad lock.
20.1.7 Print or Export a Plot

When finished with the plot it is possible to print the result on paper or to
export it to a DXF file and continue working on it in an external CAD
application.
Use from the menu bar the option File > Print Setup to setup the printer,
the option File > Print Preview to view the plot before it is printed and the
option File > Print… to print the plot.

There are two possibilities to export a plot to DXF:
1. The whole plot can be exported to a DXF file by selecting File > Export
Plot to DXF… from the menu bar. The coordinates will be in mm (=
paper space).
2. A plan panel can be exported to a DXF file by selecting Export to
World DXF… from the context menu of the plan panel. The
coordinates will be the Easting’s and Northing’s as used in the panel.
20.2 How Plotting Works

20.2.1 Regeneration
Plots are generated from PDS2000 data files such as routes and grid
models. The data is rendered to the plot and will be presented as points,
lines, arcs, and text. When something is changed, the plot needs to be
regenerated. Regeneration will occur when:
 The properties of a panel or layer are changed.
 A data file is modified externally since it was last rendered.
 The user will force the regeneration. Select the option Force
Regenerate from the context menu of one of the panels.
 When the Toggle Auto Regenerate ( ) is on, the plot will automatically
be regenerated if necessary. When the Toggle Auto Regenerate is off and
the plot needs a regeneration the button Regenerate ( ) becomes
 active and the text ‘Plot needs to be regenerated!’ will appear above the
plot.
Figure 20-13 Regenerating a plot
Click on to cancel the regeneration process. It may take a while

before regeneration actually stops. When cancelled, the plot may be in a
partly generated state. For example, only half of a grid model may have
been rendered.
Any errors that occurred during regeneration will be displayed afterwards.
Figure 20-14 Regeneration errors

Display the regeneration The window displays the errors of all plots in the current project. Errors
errors at any time with the will automatically disappear when the problems are solved. If the user
option View > does not want to see the errors, clear one or all the errors. If the errors
Regeneration Errors from are not solved and the window is closed the text ‘Plot needs to be
the menu bar. generated!’ will stay above the plot.
20.2.2 Panel and Layer Order

All panels and layers of a plot are drawn in a specific order. Normally this
is the order in which they were added. This order is visible in the plot tree.
Panels or layers that are listed first are also drawn first.
To change the order, use the context menu of a panel or a layer and
select Bring to Front or Send to Back.
Selecting Send to Back will make a panel the first panel of a plot, or a
layer the first layer of a panel. Selecting Bring to Front will make it the last
one.
The order of the layers within a panel can also be changed by selecting
the option Layer Order from the context menu of a panel. Select a layer
and click on one of the arrow buttons to move up or down the layer in the
order.
20.2.3 Overwrite Suppression

Overwrite suppression is a feature that prevents text from overwriting
other text in the plot and it works on a panel-by-panel basis.
The option can be found in the Properties of the panels and layers.
Figure 20-15 Overwrite suppression in action; behind the easting text are no
depth values plotted
When overwrite suppression is enabled for just one layer then no text of
that layer will overwrite other text of the layer. When enabled for several
layers, the text of those layers will not overwrite each other as well.

If text cannot be placed because it would overwrite other text, then:
1. The text is simply left out.
2. The text will be moved to somewhere where there is no text yet.
Overwrite suppression of
one layer may influence What happens exactly depends on the implementation of the specific
other layers of the same layer.
panel. Because of this, all
layers that uses overwrite
The layer order has an effect on the overwrite suppression. Layers are
suppression have to be regenerated in reversed order to the drawing order. A layer at the front
regenerated when one of won't be affected by any suppression, while layers at the back will be
the layers is changed. This affected the most. If a layer is missing some text because of overwrite
may take a while. suppression, bring it to the front.
20.2.4 Templates
Plot templates are the same as regular plots. They are only separated
from normal plots by their file name extension, which is ‘.[tpl].plt’ instead
of just ‘.plt’. The project tree displays the templates separate.
Templates can be used when creating a new plot. Check the option Copy
existing plot, and then choose the desired plot template from the file
dialog. To show only template files in the file dialog, set the ‘Files of type’
field to ‘Template Files’.
20.2.5 Keywords
Keywords are special tokens that get replaced by user-defined text. A
keyword is a piece of text between ‘%’ characters that can be present in
text boxes or in the text of DXF files.
Select Edit > Project Options from the menu bar to add or modify the 'user
text’ for the keywords. The keywords set in the ‘Project Options’ are
project wide keywords. Several keywords are already added to the
keywords list and cannot be modified. These keywords are: project
number, project name, coordinate system, current time, current date and
plot project.
Plot specific keywords can be added or modified in the ‘Plot Properties’ of
the plot. By default the plot name is added and cannot be modified.
20.3 Available Panels

The available panels in Plot are:
 Plan Panel (see below)
 North Arrow Panel (see page 559)
 Profile Panel (see page 560)
 Profile Volume (see page 561)
 Profile Series Panel (see page 564)
 Profile Cross Series Panel (see page 565)
 Profile Info Panel (see page 566)
 Text Block Panel and Text Box (see page 566)
 DXF Panel (see page 567)
 Color Mapping Panel (see page 568)
 Image Panel (see page 568)

 Key Map Panel (see page 569)
 Scale Bar Panel (see page 569)
20.3.1 Plan Panel
Figure 20-16 Example of a plan panel
A plan panel displays a top view of a rectangle in the world. It needs a

plan view to define how the coordinates are mapped. All the layers that
display data in the plan panel use this coordinate mapping.
Figure 20-17 Mapping page of the plan panel properties
The Mapping page of the plan panel properties requires a plan view.
When the option Auto fit to log data is checked a plan view will be
generated that fits the log data that is added as layer.
If plan views are generated in the overview (see page 549) then instead
off the auto fit option an existing plan view can be selected. The center
point and rotation of the plan view will be used directly, and are displayed
on the page.

The scale may be entered manually, for example 1:1000. An indication is
given whether the selected plan view fits inside the panel or not. If the
scale factor is larger than is necessary for the panel, it will show a larger
area than defined by the plan view, but based on the center point and
rotation.
Click on to calculate a suitable scale factor that will result
in the whole plan view fitting inside the panel.
Click on will resize the panel to fit exactly in the selected
plan view with the entered scale. The new size for the panel is shown
next to the button. It is possible that the panel will become too large to fit
on the paper. In that case PDS2000 will ask if the plot size should be
enlarged to fit the panel.
Labels can be plotted from data in grid models, TIN models or logdata
files. The labels are plotted on their own location as specified in the data
files. For instance in the grid model the Z Average is plotted in the center
 of the cell, while the Z Minimum and Z Maximum are plotted at the actual
location per cell. Also for the contouring the actual position of the data is
used. The labels can be defined in the Label Mode page and Label Font
page of the plan panel properties.
In the Color Table page the color table can be selected that will be used
to plot depth data in color.
20.3.2 North Arrow Panel
Figure 20-18 Sample of a north arrow
A north arrow is a separate panel that is based on a plan panel. It can be

drawn anywhere in the plot, but it is usually placed inside a plan panel.
Figure 20-19 North Arrow page of the north arrow panel properties
With the North Arrow page of the properties it is possible to select the
type of north arrow. The direction of the arrow is taken from the selected
plan panel. When a north arrow is attached to the panel, its position will
be relative to the bottom left hand corner of the plan panel.
It is possible to design your own north arrow with a CAD application.
Export the arrow to a DXF file, and place it in the ‘NorthArrows’ folder of
the ‘General’ folder of the PDS2000 installation (see page 16).

20.3.3 Profile Panel
Figure 20-20 Sample of a profile panel
A profile panel displays a cross section along a predefined line. The

layers that are added to this panel will show their data along this line.
Figure 20-21 Horizontal and Vertical pages of the profile panel properties
The profile panel properties have separate mapping pages for the
horizontal and vertical axis. The horizontal and vertical options that are
available depend on the selection made in the Mode option.
Scale to Fit
Everything is calculated automatically to fit the extents of the profile.
Fixed Start and End Value
Enter a start and end value. The scale is calculated automatically.
Fixed Scale
Enter a scale and a start value. The end value is calculated
automatically.
Projected
This option is only available for horizontal mapping. The horizontal axis
will be mapped to a specified plan panel.
On the Horizontal page the option Coordinate origin defines where zero
 on the X-axis starts. Note that ‘Route intersection’ only works with
runlines of the type ‘Route Crosslines’.

20.3.4 Profile Volume
Figure 20-22 Sample of a profile volume panel
The profile volume panel displays multiple profile boxes in a single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is placed into a
separate profile box.
Figure 20-23 A box with one profile volume

Figure 20-24 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile volume
panel properties
The mapping of the profile boxes is controlled by the Distance Scale and
Depth Scale pages of the profile volume panel properties. The pages
work slightly different than the Horizontal and Vertical pages in the profile
panel (see above).
There are four parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value, end
In all the profile boxes the value, box width and scale and four for the Depth Scale: minimum,
same vertical axis maximum, box height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the
definition will be used. four parameters is automatically calculated, the other three can be
changed by the user.
In the profile volume properties are 3 different pages available to define
the design model and the design line with its colors and select the survey
data.
Figure 20-25 Design model page of the profile volume properties

The profile volume is In the design model page the first and second reference level for the
nearly identical with the volume computation can be selected. As type of reference a profile
End Area Volumes (see design model, grid model and 3D model can be selected. Also a under-
pagexxx). and overdredge limit (tolerances in the End Area Volumes) can be
entered.
Figure 20-26 Design line and colors page of the profile volume properties
In this page the design line with its under- and overdredge line can be
defined. For the 4 areas the colors can be selected, by default the colors
are identical with the colors in the End Area Volumes.
Figure 20-27 Survey data and colors page of the profile volume properties
In this page as data a grid model or a file set with log data files can be
selected.

20.3.5 Profile Series Panel
Figure 20-28 Sample of a profile series panel
The profile series panel displays multiple profile boxes in a single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is placed into a
separate profile box.
Figure 20-29 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel
properties
Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel properties. The pages work
slightly different than the Horizontal and Vertical pages in the profile panel
(see above).
There are four parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value, end
In all the profile boxes the value, box width and scale and four for the Depth Scale: minimum,
same vertical axis maximum, box height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the
definition will be used. four parameters is automatically calculated, the other three can be

20.3.6 Profile Cross Series Panel
Figure 20-30 Sample of profile cross series panel
The profile cross series panel displays multiple cross profile boxes in a
single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is put into a
separate cross profile box.
Figure 20-31 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series
panel properties
Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series panel properties. The pages
work the same as the Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages in the
profile series panel (see above).
Only here are three parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value,
end value and scale. The box width in the Distance Scale page is defined
In all the cross profile by the height of the panel as defined in the Position page. Four
boxes the same vertical parameters are to set for the Depth scale: minimum, maximum, box
axis definition will be used. height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the three or four
parameters is automatically calculated, the other two or three can be

20.3.7 Profile Info Panel
Figure 20-32 Sample of a profile info panel
The profile info panel displays the information of a profile panel, profile
series panel or a profile cross series panel.
The information consists of the X and Y scaling mode used, and a legend
of all profile layers used in the panel. Each layer is listed with its line color
and data file name.
Figure 20-33 Profile Info page of the profile info panel properties
Select in the Profile Info page for which profile panel the profile info panel
has to be generated.
20.3.8 Text Block Panel and Text Box
Figure 20-34 Sample of a text block panel with two text boxes
A Text Block is the parent panel for one or more Text Boxes. It is used to
group several Text Boxes together so that they can be moved
simultaneously.
To add some text to the plot, first place a Text Block. Inside this panel,
place one or more Text Boxes that will contain the actual text.
In the Text Block panel with the context menu item Place Text Box a Text
Box is placed in the Text Block. The Text Box can only be placed
somewhere inside the parent Text Block.

Figure 20-35 Text page of the text box properties
In the Text page of the text box properties replace the default text ‘Enter
label’ with the desired text.
The position of a text box is always relative to the lower left hand corner
of its parent text block.
20.3.9 DXF Panel

A DXF panel displays a drawing in DXF format in a separate panel
without any coordinate mapping. For example a logo can be placed in the
plot.
Figure 20-36 DXF page of the DXF panel properties
Select in the DXF page the DXF file that has to be plotted. Use the
offsets, rotation and/or scale to place the data on the right location in the
panel.

20.3.10 Color Mapping Panel
Figure 20-37 Sample of a color mapping panel
The color mapping panel displays the color table of a plan panel. When
attached, the panel will automatically be placed next to the plan panel and
receive the same height. The order of the table can be reversed.
Figure 20-38 Color Table page of the color mapping panel properties
20.3.11 Image Panel

An image panel can display an image and is usually used to plot logos.
Figure 20-39 Image page of the image panel properties
Select in the Image page the image file. The plot support several image
file formats, like BMP, JPG, TIFF, etc.

20.3.12 Key Map Panel
Figure 20-40 Sample of a key map panel with the current plot highlighted
The key map is a panel that can display an overview of the defined plan
view rectangles of the current plot project. A plan panel of the current plot
is highlighted in the key map.
A key map panel uses the same mapping method as a plan panel. Define
an extra plan view to cover all other plan views just for the mapping of the
key map.
After creating the panel, the first thing to do is to add the Plan Views
layer. This layer will display the available plan views. Add other layers if
needed.
20.3.13 Scale Bar Panel
Figure 20-41 Sample of a scale bar panel
The scale bar is a panel that displays the scale of a plan panel in the form
of a bar.
Figure 20-42 Scale Bar page of the scale bar panel properties
Select in the Scale Bar page the type of the scale bar and which plan
panel will be used as reference.

20.4 Available Layers
For each layer available in the different panels a short explanation will be
given in this chapter.
The available layers are:
Profile Volume
Profile Series
Profile Cross
Key Map
Profile
Series
Plan
x x Clipping Polygon (see below)

x x CMap (see page 571)
x Dredge Track (see page 572)
x x DXF (see page 572)
x Events (see page 573)
x x x x Event Markers (see page 573)
x x Geographic Grid (see page 573)
x x x x GLW Grid (see page 574)
x x Grid Model (see page 575)
x x Grid Model Contour (see page 576)
x x Grid Model Difference (see page 577)
x x x x Grid Model Profile (see page 578)
x x x x Grid Model Profile Statistics (see page 579)
x x x KP Grid (see page 580)
x Log Data (see page 580)
x x x x Log Data Profile (see page 581)
x x PDS1000 Electronic Chart (see page 581)
x x x x Pipe Profile (see page 582)
x Plan Views (see page 582)
x Raster (see page 583)
x x Route (see page 583)
x x Runlines (see page 583)
x x Satellite Geographic Grid (see page 584)
x Sonar Targets (see page 584)
x x x x Streak Lines (see page 585)
x x x x x x Text (see page 586)
x x x x Theoretical Model (see page 586)
x TIN Model (see page 587)
x TIN Model Contour (see page 587)
x User Maps (see page 588)
x Waypoints (see page 589)
x x Work Areas (see page 590)
x x x x x x XY Grid (see page 590)

20.4.1 Clipping Polygon Layer
This layer plots the clipping polygon that is selected in the Polygon page
of the clipping polygon properties.
Figure 20-43 Polygon page of the clipping polygon properties
The clipping polygon can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
20.4.2 CMap Layer

This layer plots C-Map charts according the settings as set in the CMap
settings page of the CMap properties.
Figure 20-44 CMap settings page of the CMap properties
The C-map charts can only be plotted in the plan panel.

When S-57 charts are converted to C-Map charts it is possible that the
scale in the plot don’t match the scale of the S-57 charts. When this
 happened no charts are plotted. Check the option Show chart boundary
when no data for selected scale level to see the boundaries of the charts
to be sure that the charts covers the plan panel.

20.4.3 Dredge Track Layer
This layer plots one or all the dredge statuses as selected in the Data
page of the dredge track properties.
Figure 20-45 Data page of the dredge track properties
When the option Use only dredge status is checked, then select in the
combo box which dredge status has to be plotted.
When all the dredge statuses are plotted a dredge state color table can
be selected to show each dredge status in a different color. Check the
option Use color table to make this option active.
The dredge status information can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.4 DXF Layer

This layer plots the data from a DXF file as selected in the DXF page of
the DXF properties.
Figure 20-46 Text Size page of the DXF properties
The text size of the text from the DXF file will varies with the scale as
selected in Plot. To disable this feature select in the Text Size page the
option Use fixed text size and enter a scale. The text is then plotted with
the entered scale.

Figure 20-47 Line Style page of the DXF properties
In the Line Style page the line width can be defined. The color to plot the
data can be selected; use the colors as in the DXF file or select a user
defined color.
The DXF file can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map panel.
20.4.5 Events Layer

This layer plots data from the PDS2000 log data on the location where an
event is logged. The data can be selected in the Log Data page of the
events properties.
The data from the event location can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.6 Event Markers Layer

This layer plots a marker on the location where an event is logged. The
data can be selected in the Log Data page of the event markers
properties.
The event markers can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
panel and in the profile cross series panel.
20.4.7 Geographic Grid Layer

This layer plots a grid with latitude and longitude coordinates as defined in
the Grid page of the geographic grid properties.
Figure 20-48 Grid page of the geographic grid properties

Annotation
Format
Select as format Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds.
Decimals
Number of decimals used for the minutes when as format Degrees
Minutes is selected and for the seconds when Degrees Minutes
Seconds is selected. The format Degrees Minutes plots as
minimum 3 decimals even when less decimals is selected.
Hemisphere indicator
The location of the hemisphere indicator (N, S, W or E) in the label.
Leading means that the indicator is placed for the coordinate and
Trailing behind the coordinate.
Add degrees (°) minutes (‘) and seconds (“) symbols
Check this option to plot the symbols behind the degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Interval D MM SS.S or D MM.MMM
Select for the latitude and longitude the interval between two grid lines.
Color and Style
Color and style for the grid lines. The color of the labels can be defined
in the Labels page.
The geographic grid information can be plotted in the plan panel and in
the key map panel.
20.4.8 GLW Grid Layer

This layer plots a GLW grid based on the data in the selected 3D Model in
the GLW 3D Model page of the GLW grid properties.
Figure 20-49 GLW 3D Model page of the GLW grid properties
The GLW grid can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series

20.4.9 Grid Model Layer
This layer plots the grid model data with the data type as selected in the
Grid Model and Data Type page of the grid model properties.
Figure 20-50 Cells page of the grid model properties
In the Cells page is defined how the grid model data is presented in the
plot.
Use limits
If checked, only the grid model cells with a depth between the
minimum and maximum depth will be plotted.
If not checked, all the cells will be plotted.
Show cells
If checked, then the cells will be plotted with the colors of the selected
color table of the plan panel (see page 558), the key map panel has no
color table. The option Points will plot a colored point in the center of
each cell and the option Solid will fill the cell with one color.
Use sun illumination
If checked, the sun illumination settings will be used to change the look
of the grid model. This is only working when for Show Cells the option
Solid is selected.
Show labels
If checked, the depth values will be plotted on top of the grid model
with the label spacing as specified. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel or key map
panel.
In the Depth Biasing page the biasing can be set. With No biasing the
label will be plotted according the label spacing as specified in the Cells
page.
With Shoal biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the shallowest value will be plotted,
starting with the shallowest value of all virtual grid cells.
With Valley biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the deepest value will be plotted,
starting with the deepest value of all virtual grid cells.
The grid model data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.

20.4.10 Grid Model Contour Layer
This layer plots the contours based on grid model data type and the
contour definition file as specified in the Grid Model and Data Type page
and Contour Levels page of the grid model contour properties.
Figure 20-51 Contouring page of the grid model contour properties
In the Contour page defines the contours and the location and orientation
of the contour labels.
Suppress contours shorter
Defines that plot contour lines shorter than the specified value will not
be plotted.
Contour label spacing
Defines the spacing between two labels on the same contour line. The
label spacing is related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of
the plan panel or key map panel.
Label orientation
Defines how the labels in the contours will be plotted. The option Use
Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the orientation of the
plan panel or key map panel to plot the labels. The options Slope
Upwards and Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the
slope, upwards up or downwards up.
Smoothing window
This option can be used to smooth the generated contours, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The labels of the contours are plotted only when in the contour
 definition file for the each contour the option Show labels is
checked.
Figure 20-52 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with
the option Show labels checked

In the Contour Levels page, when the contour definition file is selected,
click on to open the Contour window in which for each contour
the contour properties can be edited.
The grid model contour data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the
key map panel.
20.4.11 Grid Model Difference Layer

This layer plots the differences between a grid model and a design model
as selected in the Grid Model and Data Type page and in the Design
Model page.
Figure 20-53 Design Model page of the grid model difference properties
In the Design Model page 2 different model types can be selected; Grid
Models and 3D Models.
The Grid Model and Data Type page, the Cells page and the Depth
Biasing page are identical with the pages for the grid model layer (see
page 575).
The Contouring page and Contour Levels page are identical with the
pages for the grid model contour layer (see above).
The grid model difference data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the
key map panel.

20.4.12 Grid Model Profile Layer
This layer plots grid model data as a profile over the active runline from
the profile panel. The grid model and data type can be selected in the
Grid Model and Data Type page of the grid model profile properties.
Figure 20-54 Options page of the grid model profile properties
In the Options page the settings for the profile can be defined.
Smoothing
This option can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
Average profile
The profile is generated over the active runline. Check the option Use
adjacent lines to take also profiles over the adjacent runlines on each
side. From these profiles an average is calculated and that average
profile is plotted. Enter how much adjacent lines have to be used to
calculate an average profile.
Step size
When the option User defined is not checked the points of the profile
are calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the
runline.
When the option is checked the points of the profile are generated for
each step on the line. Each point is a weighted mean of the four
nearby grid cells. Enter the distance (step size) between two points of
the profile.
The grid model profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile
series panel and in the profile cross series panel.

20.4.13 Grid Model Profile Statistics Layer
This layer in combination with a text layer and a text box plots the mean,
minimum, maximum and standard deviation of the grid model profile over
a selected runline. The settings for this information are defined in the
Options page of the grid model profile statistics properties.
Figure 20-55 Options page of the grid model profile statistics properties
In the Options page the settings for the profile can be defined.
Smoothing
This option can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
Average profile
The profile is generated over the active runline. Check the option Use
adjacent lines to take also profiles over the adjacent runlines on each
side. From these profiles an average is calculated and that average
profile is plotted. Enter how much adjacent lines have to be used to
calculate an average profile.
Step size
When the option User defined is not checked the points of the profile
are calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the
runline.
When the option is checked the points of the profile are generated for
each step on the line. Each point is a weighted mean of the four
nearby grid cells. Enter the distance (step size) between two points of
the profile.
Statistics
Define with how much decimals the mean, minimum, maximum and
standard deviation is plotted in the text box. Check the option Draw
Profile when the profile has to be plotted in the panel.
Next to this layer a text layer (see page 586) has to be added to the
The four keywords have to profile panel. After the text layer is added a text box can be added. In the
be added before as Text page of the text box the keywords ‘mean’, ‘min’, ‘max’ and ‘std’ can
keywords (see page 551) be added. The values of the keywords will be plotted in the text box.
The grid model profile statistics can be plotted in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel and in the profile cross series panel.

20.4.14 KP Grid Layer
This layer plots the KP grid with the KP value of a route as horizontal axis.
The grid settings can be defined in the Grid page of the KP grid
properties. The route can be selected in the Route page.
Figure 20-56 Grid page of the KP grid properties
Set for the X and Y grid the interval and the style. The X grid will present
the KP along the selected route. The value of the KP will be plotted and
with the prefix and/or postfix extra text can be added to the label.
The KP grid data can be plotted in the profile panel and in the profile
series panel.
20.4.15 Log Data Layer

This layer plots the selected data from the PDS2000 log data file. The
data can be selected in the Log Data page of the log data properties.
Figure 20-57 Options page of the log data properties
In the Options page the method how the data is presented can be
defined.
Show lines
The data is presented as a line, where a line a drawn between the
data points.
Show line labels
When the option Show lines is checked this option becomes available.
The name of the line will be plotted next to the line.
Show soundings
The data is presented as dots. It is not necessary that the data is a
sounding; all types of data from the log data can be plotted.
Show soundings labels
Next to each data point a label is plotted. With Label spacing the

distance between two labels can be defined. The label spacing is
related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel.
The log data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.16 Log Data Profile Layer

This layer plots the selected data from the PDS2000 log data file as a
profile over a runline, route or log data track. The data can be selected in
the Log Data page of the log data profile properties.
Figure 20-58 Options page of the log data profile properties
In the Options page the smoothing of the profile can be defined. This
smoothing can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
The log data profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
20.4.17 PDS1000 Electronic Chart Layer

This layer plots the PDS1000 electronic chart in the plan panel or in the
key map panel. The file can be selected in the Chart page of the
PDS1000 electronic chart properties.

20.4.18 Pipe Profile Layer
This layer plots the pipe route z as a profile. The pipe route can be
selected in the Pipe Route page of the pipe profile properties.
Figure 20-59 Options page of the pipe route properties
The pipe profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
20.4.19 Plan Views Layer

This layer plots the plan view as defined in the overview (see page 549).
The plan view can be selected in the Plan Views page of the plan views
properties.
Figure 20-60 Plan Views page of the plan views properties
Show plan view names

Check this option when the name of the plan view (plan panel) has to
be plotted next to the plan view.
Highlight plan panel
Select the plan view (plan panel) that has to be plotted.
Highlight mode
Select how the plan view has to be plotted; Hatched, Double Line or
Thick Line. For Thick Line the thickness of the line can be defined.
The plan view can only be plotted in the key map panel.

20.4.20 Raster Layer
This layer plots the GeoTIFF file as selected in the GeoTIFF Image file
page of the raster properties.
The GeoTIFF file can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.21 Route Layer

This layer plots the route as selected in the Route page of the route
properties.
Figure 20-61 Labels page of the route properties
In the Labels page can be set if the KP labels and route label can be
plotted.
Show KP labels
Check the option when KP labels (KP flags) has to be plotted along
the route. Set the Interval between the KP labels and the Offset for the
length of the KP flag.
Show route label
Check the option when the name of the route has to be plotted next to
the line.
The route data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map panel.
20.4.22 Runlines Layer

This layer plots the runlines as selected in the Runlines page of the
runlines properties.
Figure 20-62 Runlines page of the runlines properties

Select in the Runlines page which runlines from the runlines file have to
be plotted.
The runlines data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
20.4.23 Satellite Geographic Grid Layer

This layer plots a grid with the satellite latitude and longitude coordinates
as defined in the Grid page of the satellite geographic grid properties.
Figure 20-63 Grid page of the satellite geographic grid properties
Annotation
Format
Select as format Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds.
Decimals
Number of decimals used for the minutes when as format Degrees
Minutes is selected and for the seconds when Degrees Minutes
Seconds is selected. The format Degrees Minutes plots as
minimum 3 decimals even when less decimals is selected.
Hemisphere indicator
The location of the hemisphere indicator (N, S, W or E) in the label.
Leading means that the indicator is placed for the coordinate and
Trailing behind the coordinate.
Add degrees (°) minutes (‘) and seconds (“) symbols
Check this option to plot the symbols behind the degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Interval D MM SS.S or D MM.MMM
Select for the latitude and longitude the interval between two grid lines.
Color and Style
Color and style for the grid lines. The color of the labels can be defined
in the Labels page.
The satellite geographic grid information can be plotted in the plan panel
and in the key map panel.
20.4.24 Sonar Targets

This layer plots the sonar targets from the selected sonar targets file in
the Sonar Targets page of the sonar targets properties.

Figure 20-64 Options page of the sonar targets properties
In the Options page the presentation of the sonar targets can be defined.
Select as symbol for the sonar targets a Circle or a Cross. With the Size
the size of the symbol can be defined. The line style and color for the
circles can be defined in the Line Style page, the color of the cross is
always black.
The sonar targets can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.25 Streak Lines Layer

This layer plots the streak lines as defined with the runlines. The runlines
are selected in the Line page of the profile panel.
Figure 20-65 Marker options page of the streak lines properties
In the Markers options page is defined how the markers of the streak lines
and fairway lines are plotted.
Marker top offset
The offset from the top of the profile panel where the markers will start.
Marker bottom offset
The offset from the bottom of the profile panel where the markers will
stop.

Show offset value
Check this option to plot the offset of the streak or fairway line above
the marker.
Marker names
Check the option Show names when the names of each line has to be
plotted next to the markers. For each line a name can be specified in
the table, this name will be plotted next to the marker at the bottom of
the marker.
The streak lines can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
20.4.26 Text Layer

This layer is needed to add text boxes in the plan panel, in the profile
panel, in the profile series panel, in the profile cross series panel and in
the key map panel.
Before text can be added with a text box, the text layer has to be added to
define the font for the text boxes.
20.4.27 Theoretical Model Layer

This layer plots a profile of the selected profile design model, grid model
or 3D model over the line selected in one of the profile panels. The model
can be selected in the Model page of the theoretical model properties.
Figure 20-66 Options page of the theoretical model properties
The theoretical model profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel and in the profile cross series panel.

20.4.28 TIN Model Layer
This layer plots the data of a TIN model which can be selected in the TIN
Model page of the TIN model properties.
Figure 20-67 Cells page of the TIN model properties
In the Cells page is defined how the TIN model data is presented in the
plot. The options Use limits and Use sun illumination are not valid for a
TIN model.
Show cells
If checked, then the cells will be plotted with the colors of the selected
color table of the plan panel (see page 558). The option Points will plot
a colored point in the center of each cell and the option Solid will fill the
cell with one color.
Show labels
If checked, the depth values will be plotted on top of the TIN model
with the label spacing as specified. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel.
The TIN model data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.29 TIN Model Contour Layer

This layer plots the contours based on the TIN model and the contour
definition file as specified in the TIN Model page and Contour Levels page
of the TIN model contour properties.
Figure 20-68 Contouring page of the TIN model contour properties

In the Contour page defines the contours and the location and orientation
of the contour labels.
Suppress contours shorter
Defines that plot contour lines shorter than the specified value will not
be plotted.
Contour label spacing
Defines the spacing between two labels on the same contour line. The
label spacing is related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of
the plan panel.
Label orientation
Defines how the labels in the contours will be plotted. The option Use
Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the orientation of the
plan panel to plot the labels. The options Slope Upwards and Slope
Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the slope, upwards up or
downwards up.
Smoothing window
This option can be used to smooth the generated contours, from no
 The labels of the contours are plotted only when in the contour definition
file for the each contour the option Show labels is checked.
Figure 20-69 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with
the option Show labels checked
In the Contour Levels page, when the contour definition file is selected,
click on to open the Contour window in which for each contour
the contour properties can be edited.
The TIN model contour data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.30 User Map Layer

This layer plots the data from a user map file as selected in the User Map
page of the user map properties.
Figure 20-70 Text Size page of the user map properties

The text size of the text from the user map file (is a DXF file) will varies
with the scale as selected in Plot. To disable this feature select in the Text
Size page the option Use fixed text size and enter a scale. The text is
then plotted with the entered scale.
Figure 20-71 Line Style page of the user map properties
In the Line Style page the line width can be defined. The color to plot the
data can be selected; use the colors as in the user map file or select a
user defined color.
The user map file can only be plotted in the plan panel.
20.4.31 Waypoints Layer

This layer plots the waypoints from the waypoints file as selected in the
Waypoints page of the waypoints properties.
Figure 20-72 Options page of the waypoints properties
In the Options page the presentation of the waypoints can be defined.

Select as symbol for the waypoints a Circle or a Cross. With the Size the
size of the symbol can be defined. Check the option Show tolerance
circles when both tolerance circles has to be plotted. The line style and
color for the circles can be defined in the Line Style page, the color of the
cross is always black.
The waypoints can only be plotted in the plan panel.

20.4.32 Work Areas Layer
This layer plots the work areas as selected in the Work Areas page and in
the Options page of the work areas properties.
Figure 20-73 Options page of the work areas properties
In the Options page the work areas from the selected work areas file in
the Work Areas page can be selected.
Select the option Show all areas when all the work areas in the work
areas file have to be plotted in the panel. With the option Show selected
areas only the work areas selected in the list will be plotted. Check Show
work area labels when the name of the work area has to be plotted with
the work area.
The work areas data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
20.4.33 XY Grid Layer

This layer plots a XY grid in the panel. In the XY grid properties the Grid
page is depending on the panel; the page for plan panel and key map
panel is different from the page for the different profile panels.
Figure 20-74 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the plan panel and key
map panel

For the plan panel and the key map panel select an interval and a grid
style to plot the grid in the panel. When the grid style is Ticks the option
Use long north tick becomes available. This option makes the north
oriented part of the plus sign longer than the other three parts. Behind the
label a mark can be plotted to distinguish the Eastings from the Northings.
Figure 20-75 Grid page of the XY grid properties for the different profile panels
For the different profile panels the interval for the X and Y can be
different, both has their own interval and style.
The XY grid can be plotted in the plan panel, in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel, in the profile cross series panel and in the key map
panel.
20.5 DXF Export Wizard

The DXF Export Wizard is a quick way to generate a DXF file from a
created plot. The export is an export to world coordinates and is only valid
for data that is placed in a plan panel. The export is identical with the
option Export to World DXF (see page 554).
The DXF Export Wizard can be started from the Plan View in the
Overview window or when the DXF is already created with the Edit option
of the DXF Export in the Explorer (see page 221).
Before the DXF Export Wizard can be started, the plot module has to be
opened with Processing > Plot from the menu bar or with from the
toolbar of the Control Center. A plot project can be opened or a new one
can be created with the menu option File.
Double click on Overview in the project tree to open the Overview. First
data (for instance a grid model) or a DXF file (background chart) has to be
added to the overview to know where the data or the area for the DXF
export is located.

Figure 20-76 Overview with a grid model
In the overview a drawn plan view will define which area will be used in
the DXF Export Wizard to create the DXF file. Select Place Plan View
from the overview context menu and draw the plan view over the data that
 has to be exported. In the Plan View Properties the exact size for the plan
view can be set with Size X and Size Y. Give also a well-defined name for
the plan view, because the settings for the DXF export will be saved
under this name in the DXF Export Files in the Explorer (see page 221).
Figure 20-77 Plan View Properties with an exact size for the plan view
The area covered by the plan view will be the area that is used in the DXF
Export Wizard to generate the DXF file.
Select the option Export to DXF in the context menu of the plan view to
start the DXF Export Wizard.
Click in the welcome page of the wizard on to start with the DXF
Export Wizard.

20.5.1 Output DXF File Page
The first page is the Output DXF File page, where the DXF file name has
to be defined. By default the name is based on the name of the plan view
with the date; ‘Example_2008-02-20’.
Figure 20-78 Output DXF file page of the DXF Export Wizard
Click on to continue with the DXF Export Wizard.

20.5.2 Select Data Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Select Data page, where
the data types can be selected that will be used to generate the plot for
the DXF export.
Figure 20-79 The Select Data page of the DXF Export Wizard
It is not possible to select At the moment only these five data types are available for the DXF export.
two the same data types. If In the future more data types will follow.
the user wants this, then
he can use the standard  Log Data; select a data item and a position track of that data item with
plot features to generate a or without labels will be plotted.
DXF from a plan panel.  Grid Model; a grid model will be plotted with or without colors and
depth labels.
 Contours; contours based on the data from a selected grid model will
be generated and plotted.
 Runlines; the selected runlines file with or without labels will be plotted.
 Waypoints: the selected waypoints with or without labels and tolerance
circles will be plotted.
 The wizard will open only the pages that are related to the selected data
types.
Click on to continue with the DXF Export Wizard.
In all the pages of the wizard the button is available. This means
that at any time when the user goes through the wizard and he knows that
the selections and settings in all other pages are OK, he can click on
to go directly to the Options and Preview page where the preview
or the DXF Export can be started (see page 601).

20.5.3 Plan Panel Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Plan Panel page, where
the settings for the plot have to be defined.
Figure 20-80 The Plan Panel page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Plan Panel page several tabs are available to define the settings
for the plot.
 Mapping
The scale will be used to generate the right labels sizes and line
widths so that these items are plotted with the right scale when the
DXF export is generated.
 Color Table
Select the color table that will be used for coloring the depths in the
plot.
 Label Mode
The definition for plotting the labels in the plot.
The coloring can be set on Use Text Color or on Use Color Table.
When Use Color Table is selected all the labels will be colored
according the color table. When Use Text Color is selected then for
each data type the coloring has to be defined.
The rotation can be fixed by selecting Constant and define an angle for
the rotation.
 Label Font
Select for the label the font type, the font style, the font size and the
color. The color is only valid when for Label Mode Use Text Color is
selected.
20.5.4 Log Data Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Log Data page, where
from a file set a data item can be selected. From this data item a position
will be calculated and the position track will be plotted with or without the
labels of the data item.

20.5.4.1 Log Data Settings Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Log Data Settings page,
where the settings for the select data item of the Log Data can be defined.
Figure 20-81 The Log Data Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Log Data Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for the data item.
 Options
The user can select if the line of the track and the line labels are
plotted or not. If the data item is a sounding the user can select if the
soundings and labels are plotted or not.
The label spacing is the space between two plotted labels along the
track. This is specified in mm and is related to the selected scale in the
Plan Panel page (see page 595).
 Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the track.
 Depth Biasing
With No biasing the label will be plotted according the label spacing as
specified in the tab Options.
generated. For each grid cell the shallowest value will be plotted,
starting with the shallowest value of all grid cells.
generated. For each grid cell the deepest value will be plotted, starting
with the deepest value of all grid cells.

20.5.5 Grid Model Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Grid Model page, where
the grid model and the data type can be selected.
20.5.5.1 Grid Model Settings

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Grid Model Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the grid model can be defined.
Figure 20-82 The Grid Model Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Grid Model Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the grid model.
 Cells
If the option Use limits is checked, then only the grid model cells with a
depth between the minimum and maximum depth will be plotted.
If the option Show cells is checked, then the cells will be plotted with
the colors of the selected color table in the Plan Panel page (see page
With the option Points it 595). The option Points will plot a point in the center of each cell and
will take a long time before
the option Solid will fill the cell with one color.
the Preview or the DXF is
generated. If the option Use Sun Illumination is checked, then the sun illumination
settings will be used to change the look of the grid model. This is only
working when for Show Cells the option Solid is selected.
If the option Show labels is checked, then depth values will be plotted
on top of the grid model with the label spacing as specified. The label
spacing is related to the selected scale in the Plan Panel page.
 Depth Biasing
With No biasing the label will be plotted according the label spacing as
specified in the tab Options.
generated. For each virtual grid cell the shallowest value will be
plotted, starting with the shallowest value of all virtual grid cells.
generated. For each virtual grid cell the deepest value will be plotted,
starting with the deepest value of all virtual grid cells.

20.5.6 Contours Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Contours page, where the
grid model and data type can be selected that will be used to generate the
contours.
20.5.6.1 Contours Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Contours Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the contours of the grid model can be
defined.
Figure 20-83 The Contours Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Contours Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the contours of the grid model.
 Contouring
Define the criteria for plotting the contours lines and the labels.
The option Suppress contours shorter defines that plot contour lines
shorter than the specified value will not be plotted.
The option Contour label spacing defines the spacing between two
labels on the same contour line. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Plan Panel page (see page 595).
The option Label orientation defines how the labels in the contours will
be plotted. Use Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the
orientation of the plan view to plot the labels. Slope Upwards and
Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the slope, upwards
up or downwards up.
The option Smoothing window can be used to smooth the generated
contours, from no smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in
between.
 Contour Levels
A contour definition file has to be selected. This file has to be
generated before the DXF Export Wizard is started. See page 231 for
information about the contour definition file.

20.5.7 Runlines Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Runlines page, where the
runlines file can be selected.
20.5.7.1 Runlines Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Runlines Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the runlines can be defined.
Figure 20-84 The Runlines Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Runlines Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the runlines file.
 Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the runlines.
 Labels
If the option Show runline labels is checked then the names of the
runlines will be displayed with the offset as specified.
 Label Font
Select the font type, the font style, the font size and the color for the
labels. These settings will overrule the settings made for the Label
Font in the Plan Panel page (see page 595).

20.5.8 Waypoints Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Waypoints page, where
the waypoints file can be selected.
20.5.8.1 Waypoints Settings Page

The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Waypoints Settings page,
where the settings for plotting the waypoints can be defined.
Figure 20-85 The Waypoints Settings page of the DXF Export Wizard
In this Waypoints Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the waypoints.
 Options
Select a symbol for the waypoints, Circle or Cross. Specify the size for
the symbol in mm.
If the option Show tolerance circles is checked, the tolerance circles
will be plotted around the waypoint.
 Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the tolerance circles.
 Label Font
Select the font type, the font style, the font size and the color for the
labels. These settings will overrule the settings made for the Label
Font in the Plan Panel page (see page 595).

20.5.9 Options and Preview Page
The next page of the DXF Export Wizard is the Options and Preview
page, where the user can decide to preview the created plot before the
DXF file is created and in which DXF version has to be created.
Figure 20-86 The Options and Preview page of the DXF Export Wizard
Select under Options which DXF version has to be exported.

Click on to start the preview. It can take some time before the
preview is displayed, it will depend on which layers are selected in the
wizard.
The preview window can be closed and the user comes back in the
Preview page. If the plot is not OK click on to go back to the right
page to make the modifications. If the plot is OK click on to start
the DXF export.

21 End Area Volumes
21.1 Introduction
In PDS2000 two methods for volume computation are available.
1. In the grid model editor with the operations ‘Compute Volumes’. See
for more details the chapter ‘Grid Model’ on page 530.
2. In End Area Volumes. This option will be described below.
21.1.1 Operation Method

The ‘End Area’ method uses runlines as base for the computations. Each
logged data point (XYZ point) is projected on the runline. For each point a
computation is made to the previous- and next runline and to the next
point to obtain a horizontal area.
line n+1
c
line n
a b
line n-1
Runline
Vessel Track
Half line distance
Data point
Projected data point
a+b
Horizontal area = c
2 *
Figure 21-1 Horizontal area
Next, between two adjacent points, the data is checked against a

reference profile or level. This gives a ‘Delta Z’. Multiplying the horizontal
area with the ‘Delta Z’ gives a volume.
PDS2000 - User Manual End Area Volumes  603

e
f
e+f
Delta Z =
2
Reference profile
Figure 21-2 Delta Z
21.2 Volume Computation

The End Area Volumes can be started with Processing > End Area
Volumes from the menu bar or with from the toolbar in the Control
Center.
If the option is used before, the last used volume computation will appear
on the screen. If it is the first time the window will be empty. A new
volume computation can be created with File > New… from the menu bar
and automatically a volume computation wizard is started (see below).
An existing volume computation can be opened with File > Open… from
the menu bar.
The Displays window can be opened with View > Displays from the menu
bar or with Displays form the context menu in the End Area Volumes
window. It can be used to open, close or remove volume computations.
21.2.1 Volume Computation Wizard

The wizard is started automatically when a new volume computation is
created. To make changes in an existing volume computation, the wizard
can be started on the page Setup (see page 607).
Figure 21-3 Volume Computation Wizard – Runlines
On the first page of the wizard the runlines, which have to be used for the
volume computation, can be selected. If only a part of the area, that is
604  End Area Volumes PDS2000 - User Manual

covered by the runlines, has to be used for the volume computation select
an existing clipping polygon.
In the next page a reference level has to be selected.
Figure 21-4 Volume Computation Wizard – Reference
Choose reference
Choose the reference level from the following file types and select the
file name. Some of the file types have extra options that have to be
set.
Profile Design Model
No extra options to set.
3D Model
No extra options to set.
Grid Model
Select which data type of the grid model has to be used as the
reference level; the Average, Minimum or Maximum of the Z-value.
Log Data File Set
Select a data item from the log data file set as reference level. For
this item the maximum gap and maximum offtrack can be set.
The maximum gap is the maximum distance between two adjacent
data points on the same runline. In case the distance exceeds the
maximum gap, no volume computation will be done on that
location.
The maximum offtrack is the maximum distance between a data
point and the runline. In case the distance exceeds the maximum
offtrack, no volume computation will be done. A practical value is a
half line spacing.
Tolerances
The tolerances are two extra reference levels, one above and one
below the main reference level. If the tolerances are set, four different
volumes will be calculated; above the above tolerance, between the
above tolerance and the main reference level, between the main
reference level and the below tolerance and below the below
tolerance.
The tolerances are a vertical shift from the main reference level.

The next page of the wizard gives a possibility to combine two reference
types.
Figure 21-5 Volume Computation Wizard – Combine
It is possible to combine two reference types to one main reference level.

None
No combination of two reference types, the already selected reference
type becomes the main reference level.
Follow highest
At each data point the highest of the two reference types is always
selected as the main reference level.
Follow lowest
At each data point the lowest of the two reference types is always
selected as the main reference level.
If Follow highest or Follow lowest is selected, the next page will give a
selection for the second reference level, which is identical with the
selection of the first reference level (see Figure 21-4).
On the last page of the wizard the data have to be selected. Also this
page is identical with the selection of the reference level.
Click on to close the last page of the wizard and the volume
computation will start automatically. The plan view and the profile view will
be updated with the results of the volume computation.

21.2.2 Setup
On the page Setup the volume computation wizard can be started and the
colors for the four areas in the volume computation can be defined.
Figure 21-6 End Area Volumes with the Setup page
21.2.2.1 Views in the End Area Volumes

There are two views that show the volume computation results
graphically: a plan view and a profile view. The different volumes / areas
above and below the main reference level are displayed in different
colors. Both windows have the usual options with the toolbar and the
context menu.
Click with the mouse on one of the runlines in the plan view and this line
becomes the active runline. The profile view will be updated and will show
the profile of the selected runline.

21.2.3 Volumes
On the Volumes page the volumes as displayed in the plan view of the
End Area Volumes are presented in a table.
Figure 21-7 End Area Volumes with the Volumes page
21.2.3.1 The Table of the Volumes

The presented table can be read as follows:
Total
The cumulative total of all volumes.
- river
The total volumes of the runline file ‘river’.
- parallel
The total volumes of the runline block ‘parallel’.
+ 1, etc
The volumes per runline. When a profile design model is
used as main reference level, the volumes are divided into
sections. Each section is the part between two offset points
on the template of the profile design model which are shown
as vertical white lines in the profile view.
The headers in the table are:
AT
The calculated volume above the above tolerance level.

AwT
The calculated volume between the above tolerance level and the
main reference level.
BwT
The calculated volume between the main reference level and the
below tolerance level.
BT
The calculated volume below the below tolerance level.
%
The percentage of data points that covers the main reference level on
the runline. The percentage should be 100% for a valid computation
over the selected area.
21.2.4 Vertical Areas

On the Vertical Areas page the areas as displayed in the profile view of
the End Area Volumes are presented in a table. The table is similar to the
table for the Volumes as explained above, only the volumes are now the
vertical areas.
Figure 21-8 End Area Volumes with the Vertical Areas page

21.2.5 Report
On the Report page a report with the results of the volume computation
can be generated.
Figure 21-9 End Area Volumes with the Report page
In the Report page two different report can be generated, a comma

separated report and a standard report. Whereby for the standard report
several combinations are possible.
21.2.5.1 Comma Separated Report

The report is in the form of an ASCII file with commas as separators
(*.CSV file). The information presented in the file is:
 The name of the runline file.
 The name of runline block.
 The sections of the template (if profile design model is used as main
reference level).
 For each section the four volumes from the Volumes page.
 For each section the four areas from the Vertical Areas page.
If the option Show sections is checked for each section the information as
mentioned above will be presented. Is the option unchecked then only the
information of the blocks will be presented in the file.
If the option View report is checked then the report will be opened in
Microsoft Excel after it is created. Click on and specify a
filename to save the report.

21.2.5.2 Standard Report
Two different standard reports can be generated. The report can or will be
saved as a PDF file in the ‘Reports’ folder of the Projects folder.
Report style
Two different layouts (report styles) are available to create the report.
LineImages[vol]
The report generates for each line a table as in the Volumes and
Vertical Areas pages with optional the related profile view.
ResultsTable[vol]
The report generate one table with the values from the tables in the
Volumes and Vertical Areas pages.
Show coverage
If checked, the coverage column will be added to the tables in the
report.
Show sections
If checked, for each line the sections from the profile design model will
be added to the table.
If not checked, only the total volumes / areas for each line are
displayed in the table.
Line Images
For the report style LineImages[vol] images of the profile views for
each line can be added to the report. Check the option Create images
when the profile views have to be added.
Because the size, horizontal and/or vertical, of each profile is different,
check the option Zoom to extents to show all the data of each profile.
Set the width and height of the image, the values are the number of
pixels.
User text
Extra information can be added to the header of the report.
If the option View report is checked then the report will be opened after it
is created. Click on to create the report. The ResultTable[vol]
report will automatically be saved as PDF file in the ‘Reports’ folder, the
LineImages[vol] report has to be saved with File > Save as… in the
PDS2000 Reporter to a PDF file.

22 Export
22.1 Introduction
The export utility in PDS2000 is made to export the PDS2000 log data
files to file formats which can be used with external programs.
The export can be started with Tools > Export from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the Control Center.
22.1.1 Export Configuration File

When the export utility is started the Export window is opened. In this
window a dialog is opened with the options to create a new export
configuration file or select one of the existing files.
Figure 22-1 Dialog in the Export window to select or create an export

configuration file
If an export configuration file is not created or selected in the dialog

shown above and the user clicks on , it is still possible through the
menu bar or the toolbar to create or select an export configuration file.
Select File > New from the menu bar or from the toolbar to create a
new export configuration file. Select File > Open… from the menu bar or
from the toolbar to open an existing export configuration file.
PDS2000 - User Manual Export  613

22.1.2 Export Type
After a new export configuration file name is created the export type has
to be selected.
Figure 22-2 Selecting export type
The different export types available in PDS2000 at the moment are:

Microsoft Excel has to be Excel
installed on the computer, One ‘Excel’ file is created with for each log data file, that is selected in
otherwise no Excel export the file set, a separate workbook page. See on page 615 for more
possible. details about this export type.
Simrad EM Datagram
‘Simrad EM3000’ format with a fixed filename and the extension .ALL.
This format is an industry accepted standard format for multibeam
data. Raw data files in this format can be processed with Caris HDCS
cleaning software. See on page 617 for more details about this export
type.
Comma Separated
One ASCII file with the extension .CSV is created with all the selected
data items. If this file is opened in ‘Excel’ there is only one workbook
page. See on page 615 for more details about this export type.
Multibeam XYZ (ASCII)
A space separated XYZ ASCII file with a fixed filename and the
extension .XYZ. Optional the time of the sway, the beam number and
the quality flag can be exported. The data is filtered according the
criteria of the sensor computation. A further data reduction is possible.
Next to the normal file format, a Sonar Swath file (with .IDA extension)
and a latitude, longitude and Z in WGS’84 are possible. See on page
618 for more details about this export type.
XTF
A XTF file with a fixed filename and the extension .XTF. This export
format can only be used with multibeam logging data. This data can
contain multibeam, side scan sonar and/or snippets data. See on page
S7K
A S7K file with a fixed filename and the extension .S7K. This export
format can only be used with multibeam logging data where a RESON
SeaBat 7K system is logged. The data can contain multibeam, side
scan sonar and/or snippets data. The same records as for the S7K
logging format (see page 122) will be exported. See on page 622 for
more details about this export type.
SDS
’Helical SDS’ (Self Defining Structure) file with a fixed filename and the
extension .SDS. This is a format to handle large amount of multibeam
data. Next to the SDS file, a CTL (Control) file will be exported. The
format of this CTL file will depend on the selected SDS settings. The
SDS file in combination with the CTL file can be read with the Helical
software. See on page 622 for more details about this export type.
SZ
An ASCII file with the extension SZ. This is a format for the
presentation and archiving of design information and echo sounder
614  Export PDS2000 - User Manual

measurements on the rivers and along the coast in Germany. See on
page 623 for more details about this export type.
Magnetometer DAT
A text file with the extension DAT. The file contains an order number
for the runlines, the distance over the runline and for each channel of
the magnetometer the X, Y and signal will be exported. See on page
FAU
A binary file with the extension FAU. The file contains multibeam data.
See on page 625 for more details about this export type.
GSF
A file with the extension GSF. The file contains multibeam data. See
on page 625 for more information about this export type.
22.2 Export Window

After the export type is selected the standard PDS2000 File Set Editor is
opened (see page 397). Select the file set or create a new file set for the
export.
After a file set is selected for the export the export setup will be opened.
Figure 22-3 Export setup with a selected file set
It will depend on the export type which tabs (pages) are available in the
export setup. The File Sets page is identical for all the export types. On
the File Sets page the file set can be selected, modified or created. With
in the export window, with from the toolbar or with Actions >
Select Data from the menu bar the File Set Editor is opened.
The other pages will be discussed below with the different export types.
22.2.1 Excel and Comma Separated

The export types ‘Excel’ and ‘Comma Separated’ have nearly the same
the export setup.
 For the Excel export it is necessary that Microsoft Excel is installed on the
computer. If not it is not possible to export to an Excel file.
The Options page for both export types are almost identical. In this page
the export format can be specified.

Figure 22-4 Options page for Excel and Comma Separated export
Correlated
In case two or more sensors are selected in the Data Selection page,
one of the sensors can be selected as reference and all the other
sensor data is recalculated for the time of the selected sensor.
Time
If checked, every sensor gets its own time column. When ‘Correlated’
is checked there will be only one time column, the time of the
correlated sensor. The column ‘Time’ can be exported in Excel format
st st
(days since 1 of January 1900) or in ANSI format (seconds since 1
of January 1970).
Header
A header line is written above the data with the file info.
Title row
Each column gets a title above the data with the name of the data.
Open output after export
For the Excel export is the This option is not available for the export type Comma Separated. The
option ‘Post export action’ export file will be opened in Microsoft Excel after the export is finished.
not necessary, because
the file can be opened Post export action
automatically with the If Enable is checked then the exported file will be opened with the
option ‘Open output after program that is specified behind ‘Execute’. If the file has to be opened
export’. in for instance Notepad, the command should be ‘Notepad %F’.
Timed Output
Instead of exporting all the selected data, a time interval can be
defined. If for instance the time interval is 10 sec then every 10 sec
one record of the data will be exported. When ‘Correlated’ is checked
then the time of the correlated sensor will be used as counter.
The Data Selection page is for both export types identical. With the data
selection a data item or a data block can be selected and placed in the
export list.

Figure 22-5 Data Selection page with an export list
22.2.2 Simrad EM Datagram

In the Options page for the export type ‘Simrad EM Datagram’ the depth
can be set.
Figure 22-6 Options page for Simrad EM Datagram export
Depth relative sea level

The depth values are computed relative to sea level.
Depth relative chart datum
The depth values are computed relative to the chart datum.

22.2.3 Multibeam XYZ
In the Options page for the export type ‘Multibeam XYZ’ the format type
and the data reduction can be specified.
Figure 22-7 Options page for Multibeam points (ASCII) export
Format type
Normal
A standard XYZ format is exported.
When the options Insert timestamp at start of swath and Insert
beam number and intensity are checked the time, the beam
number and the intensity will be inserted. At the start of each sway
the timestamp is added to the file, before the XYZ the beam
number is added and at the end the intensity of the beam.
The file contains per ping, if all the options are checked:
Date Time
Beam number Easting Northing Depth Intensity
Beam number Easting Northing Depth Intensity
...
Sonar swath (.IDA)
This a special format for the Sonar Swath utility.
Timed XYZ data with ping no. quality flag
This is a special format with for each XYZ the ping number, the
beam angle and a quality flag.
The beam angle is the launch angle.
The quality flag can be a number from 0 (zero) to 15. The number
is build up of 4 bits of 0’s (zero) and/or 1’s (one), with:
 Bit 0 – Brightness
1 = pass and 0 = fail.
 Bit 1 – Colinearity
1 = pass and 0 = fail.

 Bit 2 – Bottom Detect Process (Magnitude)
1 = used and 0 = not used.
 Bit 3 – Bottom Detect Process (Phase)
1 = used and 0 = not used.
A quality flag of 7 (= 1110) means brightness passed, colinearity
passed, magnitude used and phase not used.
The file contains per record:
Date Time Ping number Beam angle Northing
Easting Depth Quality flag
Timed XYZ data with Beam no. and quality flag
This is a special format with the time and ping number and for each
XYZ the beam number and the incident angle of the beam.
The quality flag can be a number from 0 (zero) to 15. The number
is buildup of 4 bits of 0’s (zero) and/or 1’s (one), see above.
The file contains per ping:
Ping number Date Time
Beam number Northing Easting Depth Incident angle
Beam number Northing Easting Depth Incident angle
…
Latitude, Longitude and Z (WGS 84)
This is a special format with for each beam the latitude, longitude
and depth. The latitude and longitude are in WGS’84 coordinates.
When the option Use project format settings is checked the latitude
and longitude will be exported in the format as defined in the
Formats of the Project Configuration(see page 59).
The file contains per record:
Latitude Longitude Depth
With the option Use project format settings not checked the format
is:
48.00216612 -7.07492140 -54.78
The format in the project configuration is geographicals in ‘Degrees
Minutes Seconds’ and the number of decimals for the
geographicals is 4.
Then with the option Use project format settings checked the
format is:
48°00’07.7980”N 07°04’29.7170”W -54.78
Data reduction settings
When the option Use data reduction is checked a data reduction can
be set.
Tolerance
Is the minimum difference of the Z-value with the previous Z-value
(in meters). If the difference is more than the tolerance (e.g. 0.1m)
the data point is added to the file.
Minimum distance
The total distance between the start and end point of a sway is
defined as 100%. By setting a minimum distance (e.g. 10%) a point
at every 10% is added to the file, even if the tolerance criteria is not
valid.
Post export actions
This option is only active when as format type Sonar swath (.IDA) is
selected. When the option Open output is checked then after the
export of the selected files the utility Sonar Swath will be opened.

22.2.4 XTF
In the Options page for the export type ‘XTF’ the XTF settings for the
export can be defined.
Figure 22-8 Options page for XTF export
Click on to open the XTF settings wizard. The wizard contains

three pages where the data can be selected for the export.
Figure 22-9 First page of the XTF Settings Wizard
On the first page the data types have to be selected. For the export at
least one of the three data sources, multibeam, side scan or snippets,
have to be selected. If at least one of them is selected the user can also
choose to export the attitude and/or position data.
If the option Automatic selection of devices is checked, the export utility
takes always the primary data sources or the data sources that is set as
primary through the automatic switch in the data sources page of the
vessel configuration (see page 103). If the option is not checked the user
can select which data source is used for the export. The automatic switch
will be ignored.
Click on to go to the second page of the XTF settings wizard.

Figure 22-10 Second page of the XTF Settings Wizard
If the Automatic selection of devices on the first page is not checked, the
user can select the which devices is used for the export.
Click on to select for the VRU, the compass or the position another
data source. For the multibeam, the side scan or the snippets the
selected device can be deleted or another one can be added to the list.
If the Automatic selection of devices on the first page is checked, there is
nothing to select on this page, this page is then pure for information to the
user.
Click on to go to the last page of the XTF settings wizard.
Figure 22-11 Last page of the XTF Settings Wizard

The third and the last page of the wizard is for the altitude estimation. If a
side scan sonar is selected on the first page of the wizard, the user can
select how the altitude estimation is calculated for the side scan sonar.
For ROV operations the XTF format needs the depth of the ROV relative
 to sea level. If in the ROV configuration no depth sensor is used, the
option Vessel configuration is for ROV has to be checked.
Click on to finish the XTF settings wizard.
22.2.5 S7K
Next to the File Sets page nothing has to be specified for the S7K export.
The S7K export file contains the same records, if available, as specified
for the S7K logging (see page 122).
22.2.6 SDS
In the Options page for the export type ‘SDS’ the SDS settings for the
export can be defined.
Figure 22-12 Options page for SDS export
Click on to open the SDS settings.
Figure 22-13 SDS settings
It depends on the selected settings which CTL file will be exported next to
the SDS file. The four CTL files are:
 Grid coordinates with all the data (GridCoordsFull.ctl).
 Geographical coordinates with all the data (GeoCoordsFull.ctl).
 Grid coordinates with position, time and depth (GridCoordsBasic.ctl).
 Geographical coordinates with position, time and depth
(GeoCoordsBasic.ctl).

In all four CTL files the data will be as the selection for the depth
reference.
22.2.7 SZ
In the Options page for the export type ‘SZ’ the export file name can be
defined, the channels and the data reduction can be set.
The user has to fill in a list with SZ records, which are not available in the
PDS2000 log data file.
Figure 22-14 Options page for SZ export
Channel
The user can select which channel or both channels has to be
exported from the PDS2000 log data file(s).
Data reduction settings
If the option Use data reduction is checked the data will be reduced
with the value as defined with Interval in m. This means that each
interval value data will be exported.
Aufnameart
Select the measure method that was used during logging the echo
sounder data.
3D model GLW
The echo sounder data will be corrected for the GLW value(s)
belonging to be exported runline(s). This will be done with the GLW
value(s) as specified in the selected 3D model.

22.2.8 Magnetometer DAT
In the Options page for the export type ‘Magnetometer’ the export file
format can be selected.
Figure 22-15 Options page for Magnetometer export
The user can choose between an export in Bartel ASCII DAT format or in
Standard UXO format. If the user choose for the standard UXO format
some extra settings can be defined.
File header include file
It is possible the add a header file to the UXO export file. Click on
and select an UXO file as header file. The path and file
name will be displayed in the text field.
Decimal symbol
There can be chosen between a Dot or a Comma as decimal sign in
the numbers in the UXO file.
Relative coordinate origin
In the UXO file the local grid coordinates X and Y are written. If these
numbers are to big to use in other programs an origin can be defined
so the grid coordinates in the UXO file getting smaller. The Northing
and Easting as entered will be subtracted from the local grid
coordinates.
Sensor height
The sensor height will be written in the UXO file as the Z value.

22.2.9 FAU
In the Options page for the FAU export one of the two FAU formats can
be selected.
Figure 22-16 Options page for the FAU export
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
The FAU file will be identical with a logged FAU file and is explained in
the logging (see page 123).
22.2.10 GSF
In the Options page for the export type ‘GSF’ can be selected if the
multibeam data in the GSF file is uncorrected or fully corrected. The
corrected multibeam data is computed according the multibeam xyz
computation in the multibeam device data.
Figure 22-17 Options page for the GSF export
The GSF file will be identical with a logged GSF file and is explained in
the logging (see page 124).
22.3 Exporting
If everything is set for the export, the selected data can be exported. Click
on from the toolbar or select Actions > Export from the menu bar to
start the export.
For the export types ‘Excel’, ‘Comma Separated’ and ‘SZ’ the standard
Save As dialog is opened and a default filename is given.

Figure 22-18 Save As dialog for the ‘Excel’ and the ‘Comma Separated’ export
Select the location and give a proper filename for the export file and click
on to start the export. For the other export types the files are
directly saved with a default filename in the LogData folder. A Progress
window will appear to show the progress of the export.

Anomaly Filter - 462
Application Type - 53, 54, 64, 66, 96, 101, 102,
104, 117, 120, 131, 188, 202, 215, 219, 254
ASCII - 119, 135, 175, 176, 177, 179, 181, 214,
238, 239, 502, 521, 523, 534, 540, 614
Index ASCII File - 136, 140, 143, 147, 199, 221, 223,
224, 225, 238, 239, 243, 420, 480, 487,
503, 507, 524, 540, 610, 614
ASCII Import - 136, 137, 140, 238
Auto Pilot - 284
Auto Recache - 400
Automatic Identification System - 358
AVI File - 209, 246, 254
─3─ ─B─
3D Box View - 417, 466, 510 Backscatter - 121, 312, 504
3D Design Model - 152, 192, 364, 421, 427, 434 Backscatter Processing - 393
3D Design Model Editor - 144, 146 Bartel ASCII DAT Format - 624
3D Model - 131, 144, 145, 152, 186, 219, 221, Basic Operator - 200
222, 224, 345, 520, 529, 531, 605, 623 Batch Plot - 163, 188
3D Object Manager - 219, 255 Beam Color Mode - 420, 423, 425, 470, 479,
3D Objects - 219 487
3D Studio Model - 214 Beam Quality Filter - 324
3D View - 50, 93, 255, 522 Beam Reject Filter - 324
3D View – Online - 272, 273, 277 BITE - 306
3D View – Online Dredge - 272, 274, 277 BMP File - 209, 216, 246, 248, 254, 276, 299,
3D View – Standard - 421, 422, 425 301, 339, 352, 371, 380, 383, 419, 423,
466, 479, 482, 486, 490, 498, 500, 510,
545, 568
─7─ BPP File - 190
7K Center - 283 BSB Chart - 219, 246
Bursa Wolf - 78
─A─
─C─
Absorption - 282, 285
Access Level - 202 Cassini-Soldner - 84
Acquisition - 24, 53, 68, 69, 91, 93, 97, 105, 107, Circular Interpolation - 186, 452, 517, 535
108, 112, 118, 131, 141, 147, 148, 149, Clipping Polygon - 126, 145, 147, 220, 224, 225,
155, 156, 160, 200, 201, 203, 215, 216, 234, 355, 442, 499, 500, 504, 510, 513,
223, 239, 240, 246, 251, 252, 254, 259, 519, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524, 526, 527,
261, 262, 264, 265, 270, 271, 272, 280, 530, 535, 571, 605
290, 291, 302, 307, 340, 343, 345, 362, Clipping Polygon Editor - 214, 225
363, 368, 370, 383, 386, 387, 440, 456, Clock Synchronization - 163, 165, 166, 167
497, 507, 523 C-Map - 11, 14, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 32, 34, 36,
Active Editor - 399, 401 37, 215, 216, 217, 348, 352, 353, 571
Active Vessel - 255, 256, 257, 288 C-Map Chart Manager - 30, 32, 33, 34
Administrator - 200 Color Mapping Panel - 557, 568
Advanced Computation - 101, 402 Color Maps - 216
AIS Layer - 358 Color Table - 220, 226, 227, 229, 233, 276, 278,
Alarm - 53, 69, 126, 129, 144, 148, 149, 153, 309, 310, 311, 323, 354, 361, 419, 421,
219, 254, 259, 278, 279, 373, 384 423, 426, 427, 466, 468, 479, 483, 486,
Alert Sounds - 62 500, 501, 510, 525, 532, 540, 545, 568,
Alerts - 259 572, 595
Alerts View - 255, 256, 278, 279 Color Table Generator - 226, 227, 229
ALL File - 187 Compass - 319
Anchor Definition - 106 Compass View - 280
Angle to Detection Point - 329 Computation - 101, 102, 131, 255, 384, 391
Anomalies - 260, 393, 395, 401 Condition - 103, 155, 156
PDS2000 - User Manual Index  627

Condition Check - 126, 138, 224 Dredge – Flow/Concentration Meter View - 286,
Configuration - 53, 54, 70, 91, 118, 220, 391 287, 288
Contour Definition - 221, 231, 232, 576, 587, Dredge – Load and Draught View - 286, 289
598 Dredge – SCADA View - 216, 286, 290
Control Center - 23, 47, 53, 54, 56, 66, 67, 70, Dredge Differential Color Table - 231
71, 91, 118, 155, 163, 165, 167, 168, 173, Dredge Instruction - 104, 131, 151, 221, 257,
200, 201, 203, 209, 216, 220, 222, 223, 345
389, 395, 499, 508, 539, 547, 591, 604, 613 Dredge Instruction Editor - 151
Convergence - 196 Dredge Status - 572
Coordinate System - 58, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, Dredge Status Configuration - 216
79, 86, 87, 88, 89, 194, 197, 216, 414 Dredge Status View - 290
Correlation Filter - 461 Dredge Track - 120
Coverage - 119, 507 DXF Export - 221, 591, 592, 601
Coverage Settings - 141, 146, 354, 361, 483, DXF File - 16, 93, 96, 120, 144, 145, 153, 190,
500, 510 194, 215, 220, 221, 222, 223, 225, 245,
CRP - 94, 96 348, 547, 554, 555, 557, 559, 567, 572,
CSV File - 200, 209, 248, 445, 455, 531, 610, 591, 601
614 DXF Panel - 557, 567
CTL File - 123, 614, 622 Dynamic Gridding - 505
CUBE Algorithm - 440
CUBE Model - 234, 439, 441, 442, 445, 467, ─E─
468, 469
CUBE Synchronization - 446 Echosounder Graphical Trace - 293
Cutter Dredge - 104, 131, 146 Echosounder Graphical Trace View - 291
Edgetech - 169, 173
Edit Alarm - 354
─D─
Electronic Chart - 135, 143, 150, 222, 225
DAT File - 615 Ellipsoid - 73, 75, 78, 79, 89, 194, 195, 197, 198,
Data Source - 103, 104, 160, 255, 386, 391, 258, 259
405, 406, 407, 620, 621 End Area Volumes - 394, 563, 603, 604
Data Source Switching - 428, 429 Equipment - 96, 97, 100, 160, 216, 255, 358,
Data Source Switching Editor - 429 385, 391
Database - 29, 31, 34, 209, 211, 214, 215, 219, ESRI - 221, 521
244, 245, 541 eToken Dongle - 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 32, 217
Datum Transformation - 76, 77, 78, 89, 194 ETRS89 - 194, 195, 197, 198, 199, 200
Dekdienst - 432 Event Definition - 155, 157, 160
Delimiter - 137, 180, 181, 182 Event Definition Editor - 157
Depth Filter - 325, 327, 335 Eventing - 155, 156, 257
Design Model - 104, 131, 144, 192, 364, 366 Events - 53, 68, 155, 214, 254, 261
Design Profile Template - 221, 233, 234, 235, Excluded Area - 221, 224, 234, 442
236 Explorer - 91, 105, 157, 160, 163, 206, 209, 210,
Design Profile Template Editor - 233, 236, 237 211, 213, 214, 215, 219, 224, 226, 231,
Device Configuration – RESON HydroBat View - 233, 234, 237, 244, 246, 248
284 Export - 135, 145, 393, 394, 507, 521, 522, 554,
Device Configuration – RESON-7K View - 281 613, 615, 625
Device Configuration View - 280 Export Configuration File - 214, 613, 614
Device Driver - 15, 96, 97, 120, 128
Directional Interpolation - 536 ─F─
Disk Space - 61
Display Mode - 163, 165, 308 FAU File - 123, 615, 625
Dock Area - 48, 49 Feature Angle - 541
Docking - 48, 252, 253 Feature Edge - 542
Dongle - 14, 17, 19, 20, 65, 106, 219, 252, 254, File Set Editor - 221, 397, 503, 615
396 F-Key - 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269
Drag & Drop - 335, 374, 388, 539, 540 Flying Object Filter - 326, 328
Draping - 522 Follow Vessel - 275, 278, 350, 353, 359, 370,
Dredge – Bars Horizontal View - 286 371, 372, 422, 426, 465
Dredge – Bars Vertical View - 286, 287 Frequency - 281
628  Index PDS2000 - User Manual

─G─ ─K─
Gain - 281, 282, 284, 379, 380, 489 KAP File - 219, 246
Geo Calculator - 87, 163, 194, 197, 214 Key Map Panel - 554, 558, 569, 571, 573, 574,
Geographic Grid - 573 575, 577, 581, 582, 583, 584, 586, 590, 591
Geoid Model - 79, 80, 89, 507 Keyword - 552, 557
Geoid Model Grid Model - 79, 507, 524 KML File - 221, 522
GeoTIFF File - 209, 220, 222, 246, 247, 248, KMZ File - 222, 522
337, 352, 355, 378, 381, 428, 476, 492, KP - 194, 195
510, 522, 583
GLW Grid - 574 ─L─
Grid Model - 119, 131, 144, 152, 186, 188, 192,
221, 273, 364, 366, 419, 421, 428, 434, Lambert One Parallel - 84
445, 446, 452, 454, 466, 486, 499, 502, Lambert Two Parallel - 84
504, 505, 507, 508, 515, 520, 521, 522, Lambert’s Law Correction - 379, 381, 490
523, 525, 526, 529, 531, 534, 544, 555, Language - 163
575, 577, 578, 594, 597, 598, 603, 605 Laser Scan - 420, 424, 471, 480, 487
Grid Model Editor - 144, 224, 246, 393, 505, Laser Scan – MDL View - 303
508, 510 Laser Scan – Riegl Z Series View - 303
Grid Model Filter - 527 Layer Control - 36, 44, 141, 146, 239, 276, 278,
Grid Properties - 135, 143, 150 286, 287, 321, 335, 339, 346, 352, 355,
GSF File - 124, 615, 625 358, 360, 371, 373, 378, 383, 387, 421,
Guidance - 104, 126, 131, 219, 222, 223, 224, 424, 426, 475, 480, 483, 488, 490, 493,
255, 256, 259, 345 500, 511
Layer Order - 358, 556, 557
Layout - 53, 67, 68, 251, 252, 253, 254, 271,
─H─
390, 391, 393, 396, 399
HDCS - 119, 502, 503, 614 Lead-in Line - 94, 138
Helmsman View - 299 Leap Seconds - 63, 166
Helpdesk View - 259 Level Contact - 368
Hotine Oblique Mercator - 84 Line-Based Editing – Multiline View - 433, 436,
HTML File - 16 437
Hypothesis - 440, 443, 467, 470 Line-Based Editing – Standard View - 433, 434,
437
─I─ Lite View - 163
Logdata File - 402, 512, 523
Icon Image - 64, 248, 301, 352 Logging - 60, 117, 118, 125, 126, 138, 251, 257,
Icon Image View - 301 260, 261, 270, 385, 391, 509
IHO Error Filter - 316, 322, 326, 331
IHO Order - 322, 331, 441, 529
─M─
Image Panel - 557, 568
Import - 135, 163, 173, 175, 176, 178, 181, 187, Main System - 96
188, 221, 243, 244, 507 Man Over Board - 256, 270
Import Configuration File - 136, 137, 214 Manual Input – Dredge Status View - 216, 304,
Import Wizard - 135, 136, 137, 140 305, 497
Incidence Angle - 329 Max. Ping Rate - 281
Interfacing - 97, 163, 168, 169 Measure - 141, 146, 351, 377, 482, 492, 500,
Interferometry - 325, 331 509
Intersection Angle - 325 Memory - 12
Intersection Filter - 325, 327 Mercator - 84
Interval Logging - 111, 123 Messages – HydroBat View - 305
Interval Logging View - 111, 112, 302 Messages – I/O Port View - 306
Messages – SeaBat 7K View - 305
─J─ Messages – System Messages View - 155, 156,
252, 254, 307, 404, 438
JPG File - 209, 246, 247, 249, 254, 276, 299, Minimization - 284
301, 339, 352, 371, 380, 383, 419, 423, MS Windows 7 - 11, 16, 17
466, 479, 482, 486, 490, 498, 500, 510, MS Windows Vista - 11, 16, 17
545, 568 MS Windows XP - 11, 16, 17
Multibeam Area Editing – Ping View - 438

Multibeam Area Editing – Standard View - 221, Ping View - 438, 476, 479
410, 417, 438, 439, 441, 442, 464, 476, 484 Pipe Detection - 460
Multibeam Calibration - 6, 221, 393, 410 Pipe Lay – Pipe Angle View - 340, 341
Multibeam Editor - 396 Pipe Lay – Pipe Position View - 340, 342
Multibeam Filter - 307, 308, 313, 420, 424, 425, Pipe Lay – Sonar Video View - 341, 343
456, 474, 480, 487 Pipe Route - 461, 582
Multibeam Filters View - 322, 324 Placement Point - 149, 150, 222, 257
Multibeam QC – 3D Seafloor View - 307, 322 Placement Points Editor - 150
Multibeam QC – Backscatter Signal Strength Plan Panel - 549, 553, 554, 555, 557, 558, 559,
Profile View - 312, 322 560, 568, 569, 571, 572, 573, 574, 575,
Multibeam QC – Raw Profile + Total Propagation 577, 581, 583, 584, 585, 586, 587, 588,
Errors View - 315, 322, 323 589, 590, 591, 595
Multibeam QC – Raw Profile View - 312, 315, Plan View - 36, 44, 140, 246, 260, 337, 343,
322 358, 547, 550, 558, 559, 569, 607
Multibeam QC – Total Propagation Errors View - Plan View – Dredge Instruction - 256, 345
315, 316, 440 Plan View – Dynamic Positioning - 256, 346,
Multibeam QC – Vertical Waterfall View - 320, 348, 354
322, 323 Plan View – General Dredge Operation - 153,
Multibeam QC Views - 307, 323, 324 347, 364
Multibeam Video View - 334 Plan View – Navigation - 221, 256, 348, 354
Multiping - 314, 321, 322, 420, 425, 445, 455, Plan View – Production - 349, 362, 364
470 Plan View – Survey Coverage - 349, 350, 362,
364
─N─ Plot Template - 188, 190, 191, 192, 193
Polygon - 126, 131, 148, 353
Nadir Filter - 122, 325, 328 Position Editing – Standard View - 481, 482,
Navisoft - 175 484, 495
NCC - 169, 173 Position Editor - 396
New Project Wizard - 55, 56 Positioning System XY – Manual Input View -
North Arrow - 16, 559 362
North Arrow Panel - 557, 559 POSPac - 409
Numerics – Sonar Targets View - 337, 476 Post Correction - 85
Numerics – Standard View - 335, 336, 374 Power - 281, 284
Numerics View - 289, 337 Power Level - 284
Power Management - 163, 204
─O─ Power Management Check - 206
PRD File - 175
Object Distance - 104, 131, 153 Presentation - 24, 53, 67, 68, 200, 201, 203,
Obstacle Avoidance – Forward Looking View - 215, 216, 252, 259, 261, 270, 271, 507
338, 339 Profile - 578
Offtrack - 194, 195 Profile – Grid Model View - 353, 364
OPC - 169, 172 Profile – Multibeam View - 364, 371, 372
Open GL - 19 Profile – Projected Runline View - 365, 371
OpenGIS - 221, 222, 522 Profile – Realtime Design 3 Bars View - 367
Output Control View - 334, 340 Profile – Realtime Design Antwerpen View - 368
Output Messages - 100 Profile – Realtime Design Cutter View - 368, 372
Overwrite Suppression - 556 Profile – Realtime Design Pipe Vertical View -
369
─P─ Profile – Realtime Design Pipe View - 369
Profile – Realtime Design View - 153, 347, 366,
PCI Card - 17 367, 368, 369, 372
PCMCIA Card - 17 Profile – Sound Velocity View - 370
PDF File - 13, 16, 195, 197, 209, 244, 248, 409, Profile Cross Series Panel - 554, 557, 565, 566,
451, 498, 515, 529, 531, 532, 611 573, 574, 578, 579, 581, 582, 586, 591
PDS2000 Reporter - 451, 515, 529, 531 Profile Design Model - 145, 192, 222, 233, 234,
PDS2000SettimeService - 167 434, 605, 608, 610, 611
Pdsgeodatabase - 71, 74, 216 Profile Design Model Editor - 234, 235
Pdsusergeobase - 71, 74, 88, 216 Profile Info Panel - 557, 566
Ping Rate - 282

Profile Panel - 554, 557, 560, 562, 564, 566, 433, 434, 533, 534, 536, 537, 560, 561,
573, 574, 578, 579, 580, 581, 582, 586, 591 564, 565, 578, 579, 581, 583, 594, 599,
Profile Series Panel - 554, 557, 564, 565, 566, 603, 604, 605, 607, 608, 609, 610, 615
573, 574, 578, 579, 580, 581, 582, 586, 591 Runlines Editor - 138, 139, 140, 141, 214
Profile View - 466, 484, 485, 510, 607
Profile Volume Panel - 561 ─S─
Project Configuration - 54, 57, 70, 71, 87, 194,
195, 216, 222, 238, 244 S-57 - 215, 217, 219, 571
Project Wizard - 54, 91 S-63 - 218
Projection - 81, 82, 83, 84, 89, 194, 195, 197, S7K File - 60, 122, 184, 283, 614, 622
198 S7K Import - 184, 188
Projects Common Files - 211 Satellite Geographic Grid - 584
Properties - 101, 141, 146, 241, 244, 277, 278, SBET File - 409
280, 288, 290, 300, 304, 306, 307, 312, Scale Bar Panel - 558, 569
320, 322, 323, 335, 336, 339, 355, 359, Scale Factor - 196
371, 372, 373, 378, 383, 388, 421, 424, Scatterplot View - 374, 375
426, 437, 475, 480, 483, 488, 493, 500, SDS File - 123, 614, 622
511, 540, 545, 550, 551, 552, 553, 554, Sea Level - 51, 94, 307, 325, 362, 405, 428, 617
555, 557, 558, 559, 560, 562, 564, 565, 567 Selector - 241, 431, 436, 497
PTS File - 410 Serial - 169
Pulse Length - 281, 282, 284, 285 Side Scan - 120, 121, 183, 184, 381, 488, 614,
Pulse Type - 281, 282 620, 621, 622
Simrad EM3000 - 119, 614, 617
Simrad EM3000 Import - 187, 188
─Q─
Simulator - 163
Quick Profile Plot - 163, 190, 191 Singlebeam Filter Settings - 365
Singlebeam Interpolation - 537
─R─ Slant Range Correction - 380, 381, 490
Slant Range Distortion - 381
R7K - 169, 172 Slope Angle - 325
R7KI - 169, 171 Slope Filter - 325, 327
Range - 281, 284, 338, 382 Smart Filter - 325, 331
Range Filter - 324, 327, 335 Snippets - 120, 121, 183, 184, 488, 614, 620,
Raster Editor - 246, 247, 248 621
Raw Data View - 112, 265, 335, 373, 374, 388 Socket - 169
Realtime - 251 Sonar – Bathy View - 381, 383
Recache - 400, 402, 413, 458 Sonar – Sidescan View - 378, 488, 491
Reference Level - 529, 530, 532, 533, 605, 606, Sonar – Snippets View - 379, 488, 491
609 Sonar Target - 63, 248, 276, 352, 355, 376, 377,
Remote Presentation - 22, 23, 24, 270 380, 381, 475, 476, 482, 490, 491, 584
Remote Vessel - 66, 67 Sonar Targets View - 376, 377, 491, 492
Replay - 118, 389, 390 Sonar View – Sidescan - 376
RESON HydroBat - 97, 280, 305, 306, 381 Sonar View – Snippets - 376
RESON SeaBat 7K - 97, 122, 124, 165, 171, SonarSwath - 618
172, 280, 305, 306, 314, 321, 338, 381, 614 Sound Velocity - 282, 285, 463
RESON SeaBat 8K - 124 Sound Velocity Editor - 463
Restricted Area - 104, 131, 148, 149, 222, 224 Sound Velocity Profile - 187, 223, 237, 238, 239,
RGL - 169, 171 326, 463, 464, 465
RijksDriehoek Meting - 84 Sound Velocity Profile Editor - 214
Route - 104, 131, 132, 140, 141, 146, 148, 156, Speed Correction - 379, 380, 490
194, 195, 234, 237, 260, 280, 299, 300, Spotlight - 275, 419, 422, 465, 486, 509
320, 353, 355, 364, 407, 428, 442, 510, Spreading - 282
536, 537, 555, 560, 581, 583 Standard Computation - 101, 402
Route Editor - 132, 133, 136, 146, 214 Standard Deviation - 373, 425, 505, 534
RTA - 169, 171 Statistic Filter - 325, 330, 331
Runline - 104, 127, 131, 138, 139, 140, 141, Status – Alarms View - 254, 384
156, 177, 178, 180, 183, 186, 188, 190, Status – Computations View - 384
191, 193, 194, 222, 234, 235, 256, 259, Status – Equipment View - 385
260, 270, 299, 300, 352, 364, 365, 428, Status – Logging View - 261, 385

Status – Remote Connections View - 386 USBL Transceiver - 393, 404
Stereographic - 84 USBL Transponder - 393, 404
Strength of the Hypothesis - 440, 443, 467 User Account - 163, 200, 203
Strictness - 325, 330 User Maps - 354, 355, 356
Sub System - 96, 98 USGS Dem - 502, 505
Sun Illumination - 361, 500, 501, 510, 522, 575, UXO Format - 624
597
Svp Edit Profile View - 463, 464 ─V─
System Unit - 81, 97
SZ File - 186, 614, 623 Vertex - 427, 541, 542, 543, 545
SZ Import - 186, 188 Vessel Configuration - 53, 66, 70, 91, 92, 105,
219, 224, 244, 255, 259, 385, 389, 390,
391, 402, 403, 620
─T─
Vessel Contour - 93, 94, 95, 214, 215
Tangent Point - 131, 132, 134 Vessel Coordinate System - 94
TCP/IP - 17, 170 Vessel Placement - 104, 131, 149
Team Viewer - 16 Volume Computation - 222, 224, 507, 603, 604,
Template - 56, 157, 158, 233, 551, 557, 608, 605, 606, 607, 610
610 VRU - 127, 316, 317, 319, 495, 621
TerraPos - 410
Text Block - 193, 567 ─W─
Text Block Panel - 557, 566
Text Box - 557, 566, 567, 586 WAV File - 62, 216
Threshold - 379, 453, 462, 489, 518 Wayline - 141, 156, 256, 280, 299, 300, 352,
Tide Data - 404, 405, 414, 493 353
Tide Manual Input View - 386 Waypoint - 104, 131, 141, 142, 143, 224, 256,
Tide Report - 244 270, 280, 352, 353, 375, 428, 589, 594, 600
Tide Station - 223, 239, 240 Waypoints - 248
Tide Station – Editor - 493 Waypoints Editor - 141, 142, 214
Tide Station – Viewer - 404, 405, 493 WGS’84 - 124, 194, 195, 197, 198, 199, 200,
TIFF File - 209, 246, 247, 568 222, 522
Time Series View - 374, 387 Winfrog - 119
Time Stamp Error - 279 Wireframe - 93, 215, 427, 545
Time-Based Editing – Activity Graph View - 494, Work Area - 104, 131, 147, 224, 257
498
Time-Based Editing – Echogram View - 494, 498 ─X─
Time-Based Editing – Standard View - 405, 494
TIN Model - 223, 393, 499, 502, 504, 505, 536, XSE - 169
539, 540, 541, 544, 587 XTF File - 120, 183, 614, 620, 621, 622
TIN Model Viewer - 393, 505, 539 XTF Import - 183, 188
Tolerance - 142, 234, 600, 605, 609 XYZ - 119, 175, 177, 178, 180, 181, 182, 183,
Total Propagation Error - 316, 317, 318, 321, 188, 502, 505, 523, 534, 541, 603, 618
322, 326, 441 XYZ File - 119, 189, 540, 614
Track Guidance Route - 186, 223, 236, 461, 510
Tracking Point - 255, 256, 257 ─Z─
Transverse Mercator - 84
Tresco - 11, 38, 41, 44, 45 ZIP File - 211, 213, 214
Triangle - 456, 505, 536, 541, 542, 543
Triangular Interpolation - 536
TVG - 379, 380, 490
TXT File - 223
─U─
UDP/IP - 170, 172
Uncertainty of the Hypothesis - 440, 443, 469
Units - 58, 81, 84, 94, 97, 127, 216, 238
Universal Transverse Mercator - 84
USBL Calibration - 393

PDS2000 User Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PDS2000 User Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

User Manual

Tel.: +31 (0)10 245 15 00

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  i

ii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  iii

iv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

10 Control Center 163

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  v

vi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  vii

viii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  ix

x  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xi

xii  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

17 Create Model 499

18 Grid Model 507

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xiii

xiv  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

21 End Area Volumes 603

PDS2000 - User Manual Contents  xv

xvi  Contents PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xvii

xviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xix

xx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxi

xxii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxiii

xxiv  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxv

xxvi  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxvii

xxviii  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxix

xxx  Figures PDS2000 - User Manual

PDS2000 - User Manual Figures  xxxi

PDS2000 - User Manual Introduction  1

2.2.1 Anchor Handling

2.2.2 Bar Sweep

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  3

2.2.3.1 Appendix Boeilog

2.2.4.1 Addendum Boraciet

2.2.5 Bottom Classification

4  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.7 Cable Lay

2.2.8 Cutter Dredge

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  5

2.2.11 Frequently Asked Questions

2.2.13 Interface Setup

2.2.15 Multibeam Calibration

6  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.16 PDS2000 LiteView

2.2.17 PDS2000 User Manual

2.2.18 Pipe Detection

2.2.19 Pipe Position Monitor

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  7

2.2.21 Rope Excavator

2.2.22 Slope Protection

2.2.23 Sonar Swath

8  PDS2000 Documentation PDS2000 - User Manual

2.2.25 Trailing Suction Hopper

PDS2000 - User Manual PDS2000 Documentation  9